1. Home
  2. Mercedes-Benz
  3. Mercedes-Benz 2019 AMG GLC 63 S Coupe User Manual

Mercedes-Benz 2019 AMG GLC 63 S Coupe

Product's Documents

Below are documents related to this product, you can read online or download:
Main documentSpecificationQuestions and answersRelateds Products
2019 AMG GLC 63 S Coupe photo

User Manual

This is the main product document for model 2019 AMG GLC 63 S Coupe.

The file format is pdf, 370 pages, you can download this manual here .

background
GLC
Coupe
Operator'sManual
Mercedes-Benz
YourOperator's Manual
Digital form inside the vehicle
Familiarize yourself with the contents of the Operator's Manual directly via your
vehicle's multimedia system(Menu item "Vehicle").
Bookletinside the vehicle
In additiontothe vehicle's Operator's Manual, youcan obtain the complete multi-
media systemSupplementfrom your authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.
Digitalformvia theInternet
You can find the Operator's Manual on the Mercedes-Benz homepage.
Digital formasanApp
TheMercedes-BenzGuidesApp is available for freeonthe Apple
®
App store or Google
Play.
Apple®iOS Android™
Order no. P253 073113Partno. 253 584 72 05 Edition A2019
É2535847205gËÍ
2535847205
GLC Coupe Operator'sManual
background
Publication details
Internet
Further information about Mercedes-Benzvehi-
cles and about Daimler AG can be found on the
following websites:
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)
Editorial office
©
Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or
otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with-
out written permission from Daimler AG.
Vehicle manufacturer
Daimler AG
Mercedesstraße 137
70327 Stuttgart
Germany
Symbols
Registered trademarks:
R
Bluetooth
®
is aregistered trademark of Blue-
tooth SIG Inc.
R
DTS™ is aregistered trademark of DTS, Inc.
R
Dolby
®
and MLP™ are registered trademarks
of DOLBYLaboratories.
R
BabySmart™, ESP
®
and PRE-SAFE
®
are reg-
istered trademarks of Daimler AG.
R
HomeLink
®
is aregistered trademark of John-
son Controls.
R
iPod
®
and iTunes
®
are registered trademarks
of Apple Inc.
R
Burmester
®
is aregistered trademark of
Burmester Audiosysteme GmbH.
R
Microsoft
®
and Windows media
®
are regis-
tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
R
SIRIUS
®
is aregistered trademark of Sirius
XM RadioInc.
R
HD Radio™ is aregistered trademark of iBiq-
uity Digital Corporation.
R
Gracenote
®
is aregistered trademark of
Gracenote, Inc.
R
ZAGAT Survey
®
and related brands are regis-
tered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC.
In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol-
lowing symbols:
G
WARNING
Warning notes make you aware of dangers
which could pose athreat to your health or
life, or to the health and life of others.
H
Environmental note
Environmental notes provide you with infor-
mation on environmentally aware actions or
disposal.
!
Notes on material damage alert you to dan-
gers that could lead to damage to your vehi-
cle.
i
Practical tips or further information that
could be helpful to you.
X
This symbol indicates an
instruction that must be fol-
lowed.
X
Several of these symbols in
succession indicate an
instruction with several
steps.
(Y
page)
This symbol tells you where
you can find more informa-
tion about atopic.
YY
This symbol indicates a
warning or an instruction
that is continued on the next
page.
Dis‐
Dis‐
playplay
This text indicates ames-
sage on the multifunction
display/multimedia display.
As at 02.11.2017
background
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
We urge you to read this Operator's Manual
carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehi-
cle before driving. For your own safety and a
longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and
warning notices in this Operator's Manual.
Ignoring them could result in damage to the
vehicle or personal injury to you or others.
Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow
instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-
Benz Limited Warranty.
The equipment or product designation of your
vehicle may vary depending on:
R
Model
R
Order
R
Country specification
R
Availability
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to
introduce changes in the following areas:
R
Design
R
Equipment
R
Technical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore
differ from that shown in the descriptions and
illustrations.
The following are integral components of the
vehicle:
R
Digital Operator's Manual
R
Printed Operator's Manual
R
Maintenance Booklet
R
Equipment-dependent supplements
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all
times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all
documents on to the new owner.
Please note that the Mercedes-Benz Guides app
may not yet be available in your country.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
A Daimler Company
2535847205
É2535847205gËÍ
background
Index ....................................................... 4
Digital Operator's Manual .................. 26
Introduction ...........................................26
Operation ............................................... 26
Introduction ......................................... 27
Protecting the environment ...................27
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ...............27
Operator's Manual ................................. 28
Service and vehicle operation ................28
Operating safety .................................... 30
QR code for rescue card ........................ 32
Data stored in the vehicle ......................32
Information on copyright ....................... 34
At a glance ........................................... 35
Cockpit .................................................. 35
Instrument cluster .................................36
Multifunction steering wheel ................. 37
Center console ...................................... 38
Overhead control panel .........................41
Door control panel ................................. 42
Safety ................................................... 43
Panic alarm ............................................ 43
Occupant safety .................................... 43
Children in the vehicle ........................... 59
Pets in the vehicle ................................. 64
Driving safety systems ........................... 65
Protection against theft .........................75
Opening and closing ........................... 77
SmartKey ............................................... 77
Doors ..................................................... 83
Cargo compartment ...............................84
Side windows ......................................... 89
Sliding sunroof ....................................... 93
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 96
Correct driver's seat position ................ 96
Seats ..................................................... 96
Steering wheel ..................................... 102
Mirrors ................................................. 104
Memory function ................................. 107
Lights and windshield wipers .......... 109
Exterior lighting ................................... 109
Interior lighting .................................... 113
Replacing bulbs ................................... 113
Windshield wipers ................................ 115
Climate control ................................. 119
Overview of climate control systems ... 119
Operating the climate control sys-
tems .................................................... 122
Air vents .............................................. 128
Driving and parking .......................... 130
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ..... 130
Driving ................................................. 130
DYNAMIC SELECT switch .................... 139
Automatic transmission ....................... 141
Refueling ............................................. 150
Parking ................................................ 152
Driving tips .......................................... 155
Driving systems ................................... 160
Towing a trailer .................................... 202
On-board computer and displays .... 208
Important safety notes ........................ 208
Displays and operation ........................ 208
Menus and submenus ......................... 212
Display messages ................................ 227
Warning and indicator lamps in the
instrument cluster ............................... 256
Multimedia system ........................... 268
General notes ...................................... 268
Important safety notes ........................ 268
Function restrictions ............................ 268
Operating system ................................ 269
Stowage and features ...................... 278
Stowage areas ..................................... 278
Features .............................................. 289
2
Contents
background
Maintenance and care ...................... 299
Engine compartment ........................... 299
ASSYST PLUS ...................................... 303
Care ..................................................... 305
Breakdown assistance ..................... 313
Where will I find...? .............................. 313
Flat tire ................................................ 315
Battery (vehicle) .................................. 319
Jump-starting ....................................... 322
Towing and tow-starting ...................... 324
Fuses ...................................................327
Wheels and tires ............................... 330
Important safety notes ........................ 330
Operation ............................................ 330
Winter operation .................................. 332
Tire pressure ....................................... 333
Loading the vehicle .............................. 340
All about wheels and tires ................... 343
Changing a wheel ................................ 350
Wheel/tire combination ......................354
Technical data ................................... 356
Information regarding technical data ... 356
Vehicle electronics .............................. 356
Identification plates .............................357
Service products and filling capaci-
ties ...................................................... 358
Vehicle data ......................................... 363
Trailer tow hitch ................................... 364
Contents
3
background
1, 2, 3 ...
4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac-
tion System)
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel
drive) .................................................. 175
12 V socket
see Socket (12 V)
115 V socket ...................................... 292
360° camera
Cleaning .........................................309
Display in the multimedia system .. 189
Function/notes .............................187
A
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Display message ............................ 228
Function/notes ................................ 65
Warning lamp ................................. 259
Acceleration
see Kickdown
Accident
Automatic measures after an acci-
dent ................................................. 58
Accident warning
see Driving safety system
Activating media mode
General notes ................................ 276
Activating/deactivating cooling
with air dehumidification ................. 122
Active Blind Spot Assist
Activating/deactivating (on-
board computer) ............................ 220
Display message ............................ 246
Function/notes .............................197
Active Brake Assist
Activating or deactivating .............. 220
Display message ............................ 234
Function/notes ................................ 66
Active Brake Assist with cross-
traffic function
Activating or deactivating .............. 220
Display message ............................ 234
Function/notes ................................ 72
Important safety notes .................... 72
Warning lamp ................................. 265
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Activating ....................................... 164
Activation conditions ..................... 164
Cruise control lever ....................... 163
Deactivating ................................... 167
Display message ............................ 247
displays on the instrument clus-
ter ..................................................166
Driving tips ....................................167
Driving with Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC .......................... 164
Function/notes .............................162
Important safety notes .................. 162
Setting a speed .............................. 165
Setting the specified minimum
distance ......................................... 166
Stopping ........................................ 165
With Active Steering Assist ............ 168
Active Lane Keeping Assist
Activating/deactivating (on-
board computer) ............................ 221
Display message ............................ 245
Function/information .................... 200
Active light function
Display message ............................ 239
Active Parking Assist
Canceling ....................................... 179
Detecting parking spaces .............. 176
Display message ............................ 246
Exiting a parking space .................. 178
Function/notes ............................. 175
Important safety notes .................. 175
Parking .......................................... 177
Active Steering Assist
Display message ............................ 249
With Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC .................................... 168
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 72
Adaptive Brake Assist
Function/notes ................................ 67
Adaptive Damping System
Function/notes ............................. 174
Adaptive Damping System with
continuous damping adjustment
(ADS PLUS) ........................................ 172
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Display message ............................ 240
Function/notes ............................. 111
4
Index
background
Switching on/off ........................... 112
Additional speedometer ................... 223
Additives (engine oil) ........................ 361
Address book
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 268
Adjusting the volume
Multimedia system ........................ 269
After-sales service center
see ASSYST PLUS
Air bags
Deployment ..................................... 55
Display message ............................ 237
Front air bag (driver, front
passenger) ....................................... 49
Important safety notes .................... 48
Introduction ..................................... 48
Knee bag .......................................... 50
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) ............................................... 51
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator
lamps ............................................... 44
Side impact air bag .......................... 50
Window curtain air bag .................... 50
AIR BODY CONTROL
Display message ............................ 244
Function/notes ............................. 172
Lowering the rear of the vehicle .... 174
Raising the rear of the vehicle ....... 174
Setting the normal vehicle level ..... 173
Setting the raised vehicle level ...... 173
Air suspension
see AIR BODY CONTROL
Air vents
Important safety notes .................. 128
Rear ............................................... 129
Setting ........................................... 128
Setting the center air vents ........... 129
Setting the side air vents ............... 129
Air-conditioning system
see Climate control
Airbag
Warning lamp ................................. 262
Alarm
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 75
Switching off (ATA) .......................... 75
Switching the function on/off
(ATA) ................................................ 75
Alarm system
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
All-wheel drive
see 4MATIC (permanent four-
wheel drive)
AMG
Performance Seat .......................... 100
Switchable performance exhaust
system ........................................... 137
AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 223
Anti-lock braking system
see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Anti-Theft Alarm system
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
AppCode
see QR code
Armrest
Stowage compartment .................. 279
Ashtray ............................................... 291
Assistance display (on-board com-
puter) .................................................. 219
Assistance menu (on-board com-
puter) .................................................. 220
ASSYST PLUS
Displaying a service message ........ 304
Driving abroad ............................... 305
Hiding a service message .............. 304
Resetting the service interval dis-
play ................................................ 304
Service message ............................ 303
Special service requirements ......... 304
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Activating/deactivating ................... 75
Function ........................................... 75
Switching off the alarm .................... 75
ATTENTION ASSIST
Activating/deactivating ................. 221
Display message ............................ 244
Displaying level .............................. 192
Function/notes ............................. 191
Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
see Qualified specialist workshop
Authorized workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop
AUTO lights
Display message ............................ 239
see Lights
Index
5
background
Automatic car wash (care) ...............305
Automatic engine start (ECO start/
stop function) ....................................136
Automatic engine switch-off (ECO
start/stop function) .......................... 136
Automatic headlamp mode .............. 109
Automatic transmission
Accelerator pedal position ............. 144
Changing gear ............................... 144
DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 141
Display message ............................ 252
Double-clutch function .................. 144
Drive program ................................ 145
Drive program display .................... 142
Driving tips .................................... 144
DYNAMIC SELECT switch .............. 139
Emergency running mode .............. 150
Engaging drive position .................. 142
Engaging neutral ............................ 142
Engaging park position automati-
cally ............................................... 141
Engaging reverse gear ................... 142
Engaging the park position ............ 141
Gearshift recommendation ............ 149
Gliding mode ................................. 144
Kickdown ....................................... 144
Manual shifting .............................. 147
Oil temperature (on-board com-
puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 223
Overview ........................................ 141
Permanent setting ......................... 147
Problem (malfunction) ................... 150
Pulling away ................................... 134
Starting the engine ........................ 133
Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 147
Trailer towing ................................. 145
Transmission position display
(DIRECT SELECT lever) ................... 142
Transmission positions .................. 143
Automatic transmission emer-
gency mode ....................................... 150
Axle load, permissible (trailer tow-
ing) ...................................................... 365
B
Back button ....................................... 269
Backup lamp
Display message ............................ 239
Bag hook ............................................ 283
Ball coupling
Installing ........................................ 204
Removing ....................................... 206
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 66
Battery (SmartKey)
Checking .......................................... 80
Important safety notes .................... 80
Replacing ......................................... 80
Battery (vehicle)
Charging ........................................ 321
Display message ............................ 241
Important safety notes .................. 319
Jump starting ................................. 322
Belt warning ......................................... 48
Blind Spot Assist
Activating/deactivating (on-
board computer) ............................ 220
Display message ............................ 246
Notes/function .............................. 193
see Active Blind Spot Assist
Blower
see Climate control
Bluetooth
®
Searching for a mobile phone ........ 275
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 268
Brake
Active Brake Assist with cross-
traffic function ................................. 72
Brake Assist
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Brake assistance
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Brake fluid
Display message ............................ 233
Notes ............................................. 361
Brake force distribution
see EBD (electronic brake force
distribution)
Brake linings
Display message ............................ 233
Brakes
ABS .................................................. 65
Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 67
6
Index
background
BAS .................................................. 66
Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 361
Display message ............................ 228
EBD .................................................. 72
Hill start assist ............................... 135
HOLD function ............................... 170
Important safety notes .................. 157
Maintenance .................................. 158
Parking brake ................................ 154
Riding tips ...................................... 157
Warning lamp ................................. 258
Breakdown assistance
Where will I find...? ........................ 313
see Flat tire
see Towing away
Brightness control (instrument
cluster lighting) ................................... 35
Buttons on the steering wheel ......... 209
C
California
Important notice for retail cus-
tomers and lessees .......................... 28
Calling up a malfunction
see Display messages
Calling up the climate control bar
Multimedia system ........................ 273
Calling up the climate control
menu
Multimedia system ........................ 273
Camera
see 360° camera
see Rear view camera
Car
see Vehicle
Car wash
see Care
Care
360° camera ................................. 309
Car wash ........................................ 305
Carpets .......................................... 312
Display ........................................... 310
Exhaust pipe .................................. 309
Exterior lights ................................ 308
General notes ................................ 305
Interior ........................................... 310
Matte finish ................................... 307
Paint .............................................. 307
Plastic trim .................................... 310
Power washer ................................ 306
Rear view camera .......................... 309
Roof lining ...................................... 312
Seat belt ........................................ 311
Seat cover ..................................... 311
Selector lever ................................ 311
Sensors ......................................... 309
Side running board ........................ 309
Steering wheel ............................... 311
Trim pieces .................................... 311
Washing by hand ........................... 306
Wheels ........................................... 308
Windows ........................................ 308
Wiper blades .................................. 308
Wooden trim .................................. 311
Cargo compartment
Opening/closing (from outside,
HANDS-FREE ACCESS) .................... 87
Plug-in module (telescopic rods) .... 286
Cargo compartment cover
Important safety notes .................. 284
Notes/how to use ......................... 284
Cargo compartment enlargement ... 281
Cargo compartment floor
Important safety notes .................. 287
Locking and unlocking ................... 288
Opening/closing ............................ 287
Stowage well (under) ..................... 287
Cargo compartment plug-in mod-
ule (telescope bars) .......................... 286
Cargo tie down rings ......................... 283
CD
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 268
CD player (on-board computer) ........ 217
Center console
Lower section (Mercedes-AMG
vehicles) .......................................... 40
Upper section .................................. 38
Central locking
Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 77
Change of address .............................. 29
Change of ownership .......................... 29
Changing the media source ............. 216
Index
7
background
Charge-air pressure (on-board
computer, Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles) .................................................... 223
Child
Restraint system .............................. 60
Child seat
Forward-facing restraint system ...... 63
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
anchors ............................................ 61
On the front-passenger seat ............ 62
Rearward-facing restraint system .... 63
Top Tether .......................................61
Child-proof locks
Important safety notes .................... 63
Rear doors .......................................64
Children
Special seat belt retractor ...............59
Children in the vehicle
Important safety notes .................... 59
Cigarette lighter ................................ 291
Cleaning
Mirror turn signal ...........................309
Trailer tow hitch .............................310
Climate control
Control panel for 3-zone auto-
matic climate control ..................... 120
Control panel for dual-zone auto-
matic climate control ..................... 119
Controlling automatically ...............123
Cooling with air dehumidification .. 122
Cooling with air dehumidification
(multimedia system) ......................273
Defrosting the windows ................. 125
Defrosting the windshield .............. 125
ECO start/stop function ................ 122
General notes ................................ 119
Indicator lamp ................................ 123
Ionization ....................................... 128
Ionization (multimedia system) ...... 273
Notes on using the automatic cli-
mate control .................................. 121
Overview ........................................ 272
Overview of systems ......................119
Perfume atomizer .......................... 127
Perfume atomizer (multimedia
system) .......................................... 273
Problem with the rear window
defroster ........................................ 126
Problems with cooling with air
dehumidification ............................ 123
Rear control panel ......................... 120
Refrigerant ..................................... 362
Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 363
Setting the air distribution ............. 124
Setting the air vents ......................128
Setting the airflow ......................... 124
Setting the climate mode ...............123
Setting the climate mode (multi-
media system) ............................... 273
Setting the temperature ................ 123
Switching air-recirculation mode
on/off ............................................ 126
Switching on/off ........................... 122
Switching residual heat on/off ...... 126
Switching the rear window
defroster on/off ............................ 125
Switching the synchronization
function on and off ........................ 124
Synchronization function (multi-
media system) ............................... 273
Climate control settings
Multimedia system ........................ 272
Climate control system
Climate control .............................. 122
Coat hooks ......................................... 286
Cockpit
Overview .......................................... 35
Code for Apps
see QR code
COMAND display
Cleaning ......................................... 310
Combination switch .......................... 110
Connecting a USB device
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual ..................................................268
Consumption statistics (on-board
computer) .......................................... 213
Controller ...........................................269
Controlling a speed
see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Convenience closing feature .............. 91
Convenience opening feature ............ 91
Coolant (engine)
Checking the level ......................... 303
Display message ............................ 240
8
Index
background
Filling capacity ............................... 362
Important safety notes .................. 361
Temperature display in the instru-
ment cluster .................................. 209
Warning lamp .................................263
Cooling
see Climate control
Copyright ............................................. 34
Cornering light function
Display message ............................ 239
Function/notes .............................111
Crosswind Assist ................................. 71
Cruise control
Cruise control lever ....................... 160
Deactivating ................................... 161
Display message ............................ 249
Driving system ............................... 160
Function/notes .............................160
General notes ................................ 160
Important safety notes .................. 160
Setting a speed .............................. 161
Storing and maintaining current
speed ............................................. 161
Storing the current speed or call-
ing up the last stored speed .......... 161
Cup holder
Center console .............................. 289
Important safety notes .................. 289
Rear compartment ......................... 289
Customer Assistance Center
(CAC) ..................................................... 31
Customer Relations Department ....... 31
D
Data
see Technical data
Data carrier
Selecting ........................................ 217
Daytime running lamps
Display message ............................ 239
Function/notes .............................109
Switching on/off (on-board com-
puter) ............................................. 222
Diagnostics connection ......................31
Digital Operator's Manual
Help .................................................26
Introduction .....................................26
Digital speedometer .........................213
DIRECT SELECT lever
Automatic transmission ................. 141
Display
see Display messages
see Warning and indicator lamps
Display messages
ASSYST PLUS ................................ 303
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 227
Driving systems .............................244
Engine ............................................ 240
General notes ................................ 227
Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 227
Introduction ................................... 227
Lights ............................................. 239
Safety systems .............................. 228
SmartKey ....................................... 255
Tires ............................................... 250
Vehicle ...........................................252
Distance recorder .............................212
Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 265
Distance warning function
Function/notes ................................ 67
Distance warning system
see Active Brake Assist
Doors
Automatic locking (switch) ...............84
Central locking/unlocking
(SmartKey) .......................................77
Control panel ...................................42
Display message ............................ 254
Emergency locking ........................... 84
Emergency unlocking ....................... 84
Important safety notes .................... 83
Opening (from inside) ...................... 83
Drinking and driving ......................... 156
Drive program
Automatic transmission ................. 145
SETUP (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 224
Drive programs
Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 142
DYNAMIC SELECT switch .............. 139
Driver's door
see Doors
Driving abroad
Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 305
Index
9
background
Driving Assistance PLUS package ...197
Driving on flooded roads .................. 159
Driving safety system
Active Brake Assist .......................... 66
Crosswind Assist .............................71
Driving safety systems
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) .......65
Active Brake Assist with cross-
traffic function ................................. 72
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 72
Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 67
BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 66
Distance warning function ............... 66
EBD (electronic brake force distri-
bution) ............................................. 72
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Pro-
gram) ............................................... 68
Important safety information ........... 65
Overview .......................................... 65
STEER CONTROL ............................. 75
Driving system
Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC .................................... 162
Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC with Active Steering
Assist ............................................. 168
AIR BODY CONTROL ...................... 172
AMG sports suspension based on
AIR BODY CONTROL ...................... 174
Parking assist PARKTRONIC .......... 179
RACE START (Mercedes-AMG
vehicles) ........................................ 171
Driving systems
360°camera .................................. 187
Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 197
Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 200
Active Parking Assist ..................... 175
ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 191
Blind Spot Assist ............................ 193
Cruise control ................................ 160
Display message ............................ 244
Driving Assistance Plus package ... 197
HOLD function ............................... 170
Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 195
Lane Tracking package .................. 193
Rear view camera .......................... 182
Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 193
Driving tips
Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC .................................... 167
Automatic transmission ................. 144
Brakes ........................................... 157
Break-in period .............................. 130
Downhill gradient ........................... 157
Drinking and driving ....................... 156
Driving in winter ............................. 159
Driving on flooded roads ................ 159
Driving on wet roads ...................... 159
Exhaust check ............................... 156
Fuel ................................................ 156
General .......................................... 155
Hydroplaning ................................. 159
Icy road surfaces ........................... 159
Important safety notes .................. 130
Limited braking efficiency on sal-
ted roads ....................................... 158
Snow chains .................................. 332
Subjecting brakes to a load ........... 158
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ..... 130
Towing a trailer .............................. 203
Wet road surface ........................... 158
DVD video
Operating (on-board computer) ..... 217
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 268
DYNAMIC SELECT switch
Automatic transmission ................. 139
Climate control (dual-zone auto-
matic climate control) .................... 122
E
EASY-ENTRY feature
Function/notes ............................. 103
EASY-EXIT feature
Function/notes ............................. 103
EBD (electronic brake force distri-
bution)
Display message ............................ 230
Function/notes ................................ 72
ECO display
Function/notes ............................. 156
On-board computer ....................... 213
ECO start/stop function
Automatic engine start .................. 136
10
Index
background
Automatic engine switch-off .......... 136
Deactivating/activating ................. 137
General information ....................... 136
Important safety notes .................. 135
Introduction ................................... 135
Electronic brake force distribution
see EBD (electronic brake force
distribution)
Electronic Stability Program
see ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program)
Electronic Traction System
see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac-
tion System)
Emergency
Automatic measures after an acci-
dent ................................................. 58
Emergency braking
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Emergency release
Driver's door .................................... 84
Vehicle ............................................. 84
Emergency Tensioning Devices
Activation ......................................... 55
Emergency unlocking
Tailgate ............................................ 89
Emissions control
Service and warranty information .... 28
Engine
Check Engine warning lamp ........... 262
Display message ............................ 240
ECO start/stop function ................ 135
Engine number ............................... 358
Irregular running ............................ 138
Jump-starting ................................. 322
Starting (important safety notes) ... 133
Starting problems .......................... 138
Starting the engine with the
SmartKey ....................................... 133
Starting via smartphone ................ 134
Starting with the Start/Stop but-
ton ................................................. 133
Switching off .................................. 153
Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 327
Engine electronics
Problem (malfunction) ................... 138
Engine oil
Adding ........................................... 301
Additives ........................................ 361
Checking the oil level ..................... 300
Checking the oil level using the
dipstick .......................................... 301
Checking the oil level using the
on-board computer ........................ 301
Display message ............................ 242
Filling capacity ............................... 361
General notes ................................ 360
Notes about oil grades ................... 360
Notes on oil level/consumption .... 300
Temperature (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 223
Engine oil additives
see Additives (engine oil)
Entering an address
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 268
ESC (Electronic Stability Control)
see ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program)
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Pro-
gram)
AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 224
Characteristics ................................. 69
Crosswind Assist ............................. 71
Deactivating/activating (button
in Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............. 70
Deactivating/activating (notes,
except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ...... 69
Display message ............................ 228
Function/notes ................................ 68
General notes .................................. 68
Important safety information ........... 68
Trailer stabilization ........................... 71
Warning lamp ................................. 259
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-
tem) ...................................................... 68
Exhaust
see Exhaust pipe
Exhaust check ................................... 156
Exhaust pipe
Cleaning ......................................... 309
Exterior lighting
Cleaning ......................................... 308
Setting options .............................. 109
see Lights
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting ....................................... 104
Index
11
background
Dipping (automatic) ....................... 105
Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 105
Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 105
Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 105
Setting ........................................... 105
Storing settings (memory func-
tion) ............................................... 107
Storing the parking position .......... 106
Eyeglasses compartment ................. 279
F
Favorites
Overview ........................................ 271
Features ............................................. 289
Filler cap
see Refueling
Flat tire
Changing a wheel/mounting the
spare wheel ................................... 350
MOExtended tires .......................... 315
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 315
TIREFIT kit ...................................... 316
Floormats ........................................... 298
Frequencies
Mobile phone ................................. 356
Two-way radio ................................ 356
Front wheel arch
Removing/installing the cover ....... 115
Front wheel arch cover
Installing/removing ....................... 115
Fuel
Additives ........................................ 360
Consumption statistics .................. 213
Displaying the current consump-
tion ................................................ 213
Displaying the range ...................... 213
Driving tips .................................... 156
E10 ................................................ 359
Fuel gauge ....................................... 36
Gasoline ......................................... 359
Grade (gasoline) ............................ 359
Important safety notes .................. 359
Problem (malfunction) ................... 152
Refueling ........................................ 150
Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 359
Fuel filler flap
Closing ........................................... 152
Opening ......................................... 151
Fuel level
Calling up the range (on-board
computer) ...................................... 213
Fuel tank
Capacity ........................................ 359
Problem (malfunction) ................... 152
Fuses
Allocation chart ............................. 328
Before changing ............................. 327
Dashboard fuse box ....................... 328
Fuse box in the cargo compart-
ment .............................................. 328
Fuse box in the engine compart-
ment .............................................. 328
Fuse box in the front-passenger
footwell .......................................... 328
Important safety notes .................. 327
G
G-Meter (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................. 224
Garage door opener
Clearing the memory ..................... 298
General notes ................................ 295
Important safety notes .................. 296
Opening/closing the garage door..298
Problems when programming ........297
Programming (button in the rear-
view mirror) ................................... 296
Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 296
Gasoline ............................................. 359
Gear indicator (on-board com-
puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 223
Genuine parts ...................................... 27
Glove box ...........................................279
Google™ Local Search
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual ..................................................268
H
Handling control system
see ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program)
HANDS-FREE ACCESS .......................... 87
12
Index
background
Handwriting recognition
Switching text reader function
on/off ............................................ 271
Touchpad ....................................... 270
Hazard warning lamps ...................... 111
Head restraints
Adjusting (electrically) .....................99
Adjusting (manually) ........................ 99
Adjusting (rear) ................................ 99
Adjusting the fore-and-aft posi-
tion manually ................................... 99
Important safety notes .................... 98
Head-up display
Adjusting the brightness ................ 222
Displays and operating .................. 211
Function/notes ............................. 211
Important safety notes .................. 211
Selecting displays .......................... 221
Setting the position ....................... 222
Storing settings (memory func-
tion) ............................................... 107
Switching on or off ......................... 211
Headlamps
Display message ............................ 239
Fogging up ..................................... 112
see Automatic headlamp mode
Heating
see Climate control
High beam flasher ............................. 110
High-beam headlamps
Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 111
Display message ............................ 239
Replacing bulbs ............................. 114
Switching on/off ........................... 110
Hill start assist .................................. 135
HOLD function
Activating ....................................... 170
Activation conditions ..................... 170
Deactivating ................................... 170
Display message ............................ 247
Function/notes ............................. 170
General notes ................................ 170
Home address
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 268
Hood
Closing ........................................... 300
Display message ............................ 254
Important safety notes .................. 299
Opening ......................................... 299
Horn ...................................................... 35
HUD
see Head-up display
Hydroplaning ..................................... 159
I
Ignition lock
see Key positions
Immobilizer .......................................... 75
Indicator lamps
see Warning and indicator lamps
Indicators
see Turn signals
Insect protection on the radiator .... 300
Inspection
see ASSYST PLUS
Instrument cluster
Overview .......................................... 36
Warning and indicator lamps ........... 36
Instrument cluster lighting .............. 208
Interior lighting
Automatic control .......................... 113
Control ........................................... 113
Overview ........................................ 113
Reading lamp ................................. 113
iPod
®
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 268
J
Jack
Using ............................................. 351
Jump starting (engine) ...................... 322
K
Key positions
SmartKey ....................................... 131
Start/Stop button .......................... 132
KEYLESS-GO
Activating ......................................... 78
Convenience closing feature ............ 91
Deactivation ..................................... 78
Locking ............................................ 78
Removing the Start/Stop button ... 132
Index
13
background
Start function ................................... 79
Unlocking ......................................... 78
Kickdown
Driving tips .................................... 144
Manual gearshifting ....................... 149
Knee bag .............................................. 50
L
Lamps
see Warning and indicator lamps
Lane Change Assist
see Active Blind Spot Assist
Lane detection (automatic)
see Lane Keeping Assist
Lane Keeping Assist
Activating/deactivating ................. 196
Activating/deactivating (on-
board computer) ............................ 221
Display message ............................ 245
Function/information .................... 195
see Active Lane Keeping Assist
Lane Tracking package ..................... 193
Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 225
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
anchors ................................................ 61
Level control
Display message ............................ 245
see AIR BODY CONTROL
License plate lamp (display mes-
sage) ................................................... 239
Light function, active
Display message ............................ 239
Light switch
Operation ....................................... 109
Lights
Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 111
Automatic headlamp mode ............ 109
Cornering light function ................. 111
Fogged up headlamps .................... 112
General notes ................................ 109
Hazard warning lamps ................... 111
High beam flasher .......................... 110
High-beam headlamps ................... 110
Light switch ................................... 109
Low-beam headlamps .................... 110
Parking lamps ................................ 110
Rear fog lamp ................................ 110
Setting exterior lighting ................. 109
Standing lamps .............................. 110
Switching the daytime running
lamps on/off (on-board com-
puter) ............................................. 222
Turn signals ................................... 110
see Interior lighting
Loading guidelines ............................ 278
Locking
see Central locking
Locking (doors)
Automatic ........................................ 84
Emergency locking ........................... 84
From inside (central locking but-
ton) .................................................. 83
Locking centrally
see Central locking
Low-beam headlamps
Display message ............................ 239
Replacing bulbs ............................. 114
Switching on/off ........................... 110
Lubricant additives
see Additives (engine oil)
Lumbar support
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-
port ................................................ 100
M
M+S tires ............................................ 332
Malfunction message
see Display messages
Matte finish (cleaning instruc-
tions) .................................................. 307
mbrace
Display message ............................ 233
Mechanical key
Function/notes ................................ 79
General notes .................................. 79
Inserting .......................................... 79
Locking vehicle ................................ 84
Removing ......................................... 79
Unlocking the driver's door .............. 84
Media Interface
see Digital Operator's Manual
Memory card (audio) ......................... 217
14
Index
background
Memory function
Seats, steering wheel, exterior
mirrors ........................................... 107
Mercedes me connect
General notes ................................ 294
Info call button .............................. 295
Roadside Assistance call button .... 295
Mercedes-Benz emergency call
system
Switch in the overhead control
panel ..............................................294
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive
360°camera .................................. 187
Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 197
Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC ....................................162
Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC with Active Steering
Assist ............................................. 168
Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 200
Active Parking Assist ..................... 175
ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 191
Blind Spot Assist ............................ 193
General notes ................................ 160
Lane Keeping Assist ......................195
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC .......... 179
PRE-SAFE
®
(anticipatory occu-
pant protection) ............................... 57
PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS (anticipatory
occupant protection PLUS) .............. 58
Rear view camera .......................... 182
Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 193
Message memory (on-board com-
puter) ..................................................227
Messages
see Display messages
see Warning and indicator lamps
Mirror turn signal
Cleaning ......................................... 309
Mirrors
see Exterior mirrors
see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)
Mobile phone
Connecting (device manager) ........275
Frequencies ................................... 356
Installation ..................................... 356
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 218
Transmission output (maximum) .... 356
Model type
see Vehicle identification plate
Modifying the programming
(SmartKey) ...........................................79
MOExtended tires .............................. 315
Mounting wheels
Lowering the vehicle ...................... 354
Mounting a new wheel ................... 353
Preparing the vehicle .....................351
Raising the vehicle ......................... 351
Removing a wheel .......................... 353
Securing the vehicle against roll-
ing away ........................................ 351
MP3
Operation ....................................... 217
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual ..................................................268
Multifunction display
Function/notes .............................210
Multifunction steering wheel
Operating the on-board computer .. 209
Overview .......................................... 37
Multimedia system
Switching on and off ......................269
Music files
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual ..................................................268
N
Navigation
Displaying (on-board computer) ..... 214
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 214
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual ..................................................268
Notes on breaking-in a new vehi-
cle ....................................................... 130
O
Occupant Classification System
(OCS)
Conditions ....................................... 51
Faults ............................................... 54
Operation ......................................... 51
System self-test ............................... 53
Index
15
background
Occupant safety
Air bags ...........................................48
Automatic measures after an acci-
dent ................................................. 58
Belt warning .....................................48
Children in the vehicle .....................59
Important safety notes .................... 43
Introduction to the restraint sys-
tem .................................................. 43
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) ............................................... 51
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator
lamps ............................................... 44
Pets in the vehicle ........................... 64
PRE-SAFE
®
(anticipatory occu-
pant protection) ............................... 57
PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS (anticipatory
occupant protection PLUS) .............. 58
Restraint system warning lamp ........ 44
Seat belt .......................................... 44
OCS
Conditions ....................................... 51
Faults ............................................... 54
Operation .........................................51
System self-test ............................... 53
Odometer ........................................... 212
Oil
see Engine oil
On-board computer
Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC .................................... 166
AMG menu ..................................... 223
Assistance graphic menu ............... 219
Assistance menu ........................... 220
Display messages .......................... 227
Displaying a service message ........ 304
Displays and operation .................. 208
Factory settings ............................. 223
G-Meter ......................................... 224
Head-up display ............................. 211
Important safety notes .................. 208
Instrument cluster menu ............... 222
Lights menu ................................... 222
Media menu ................................... 216
Menu overview .............................. 212
Message memory .......................... 227
Navigation menu ............................ 214
RACETIMER ................................... 225
Radio menu ................................... 216
Service menu ................................. 219
Settings menu ............................... 219
Standard display ............................ 212
Telephone menu ............................ 218
Trip menu ...................................... 212
Video DVD operation ..................... 217
Operating safety
Declaration of conformity ................ 30
Important safety notes .................... 30
Operating system
see On-board computer
Operation
Digital Operator's Manual ................ 26
Operator's Manual
Overview .......................................... 28
Vehicle equipment ........................... 28
Outside temperature display ........... 209
Overhead control panel ...................... 41
Override feature
Rear side windows ........................... 64
P
Paddle shifters
see Steering wheel paddle shifters
Paint code number ............................ 357
Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 307
Panic alarm .......................................... 43
Parcel net ........................................... 285
Parking
Important safety notes .................. 152
Parking brake ................................ 154
Parking position for the exterior
mirror on the front-passenger
side ................................................ 106
Rear view camera .......................... 182
Switching off the engine ................ 153
see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Parking aid
see 360° camera
see Active Parking Assist
see Exterior mirrors
see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
see Rear view camera
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Deactivating/activating ................. 181
16
Index
background
Driving system ............................... 179
Function/notes ............................. 179
Important safety notes .................. 179
Problems (malfunctions) ................ 182
Sensor range ................................. 180
Warning display ............................. 181
Parking assistance
see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Parking brake
Applying automatically ................... 154
Applying or releasing manually ...... 154
Display message ............................ 230
Electric parking brake .................... 154
Emergency braking ........................ 155
General notes ................................ 154
Releasing automatically ................. 155
Warning lamp ................................. 262
Parking lamps
Switching on/off ........................... 110
PASSENGER AIR BAG
Display message ............................ 237
Indicator lamps ................................ 44
Problems (malfunction) .................. 237
Perfume atomizer
Operating ....................................... 127
Problem (malfunction) ................... 128
Setting the perfume intensity
(multimedia system) ...................... 273
Vial ................................................ 127
Permanent all-wheel drive
see 4MATIC (permanent four-
wheel drive)
Pets in the vehicle ............................... 64
Phone book
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 268
Plastic trim (cleaning instruc-
tions) .................................................. 310
Power washers .................................. 306
Power windows
see Side windows
PRE-SAFE
®
(anticipatory occupant
protection)
Display message ............................ 234
Operation ......................................... 57
PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS (anticipatory
occupant protection PLUS)
Operation ......................................... 58
Program
see Drive programs
Protection against theft
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 75
Immobilizer ...................................... 75
Protection of the environment
General notes .................................. 27
Pulling away
Automatic transmission ................. 134
General notes ................................ 134
Hill start assist ............................... 135
Trailer ............................................ 135
Q
QR code
Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1
Rescue card ..................................... 32
Qualified specialist workshop ........... 31
Quick access for audio and tele-
phone
Changing the station/music
track .............................................. 271
R
RACE START (Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles) .................................................... 171
RACE TIMER (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................. 225
Radar sensor system
Display message ............................ 235
Radiator cover ................................... 300
Radio
Selecting a station ......................... 216
Radio mode
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 268
Radio-wave reception/transmis-
sion in the vehicle
Declaration of conformity ................ 30
Reading lamp ..................................... 113
Rear compartment
Setting the air vents ...................... 129
Setting the airflow ......................... 124
Index
17
background
Setting the temperature ................ 123
Rear fog lamp
Display message ............................ 239
Switching on/off ........................... 110
Rear seat (folding the backrest for-
wards/back) ...................................... 281
Rear seat backrest
Display message ............................ 254
Rear seats
Display message ............................ 254
Rear view camera
"Reverse parking" function ............ 184
Cleaning instructions ..................... 309
Coupling up a trailer function ........ 186
Display in the multimedia system .. 183
General notes ................................ 182
Object detection (function/
notes) ............................................ 186
Switching on/off ........................... 183
Wide-angle function ....................... 186
Rear window defroster
Problem (malfunction) ................... 126
Switching on/off ........................... 125
Rear-view mirror
Dipping (automatic) ....................... 105
Recuperation display ........................ 213
Reflective safety jacket .................... 313
Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-
tem)
Important safety notes .................. 362
Refueling
Fuel gauge ....................................... 36
Important safety notes .................. 150
Refueling process .......................... 151
see Fuel
Remote control
Garage door opener ....................... 295
Programming (garage door
opener) .......................................... 296
Replacing bulbs
High-beam headlamps ................... 114
Important safety notes .................. 113
Installing/removing the cover
(front wheel arch) .......................... 115
Low-beam headlamps .................... 114
Overview of bulb types .................. 114
Replacing front bulbs (vehicles
with halogen headlamps) ............... 114
Turn signals (front) ......................... 115
Reporting safety defects .................... 31
Rescue card ......................................... 32
Reserve (fuel tank)
see Fuel
Reserve fuel
Display message ............................ 243
Warning lamp ................................. 262
Residual heat (climate control) ........ 126
Restraint system
Display message ............................ 235
Introduction ..................................... 43
Warning lamp ................................. 262
Warning lamp (function) ................... 44
Reversing feature
Side windows ................................... 90
Sliding sunroof ................................. 93
Tailgate ............................................ 85
Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 29
Roll away protection
see HOLD function
Roller sunblind
Rear side windows ......................... 290
Roof carrier ........................................ 288
Roof lining and carpets (cleaning
guidelines) ......................................... 312
Roof load (maximum) ........................ 363
Route guidance
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 268
Route guidance active ...................... 214
S
Safety
Children in the vehicle ..................... 59
see Occupant safety
see Operating safety
Safety system
see Driving safety systems
SD card
Inserting/removing ........................ 276
Selecting ........................................ 217
SD memory card
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 268
18
Index
background
Search & Send
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 268
Seat
Correct driver's seat position ........... 96
Seat belts
Adjusting the driver's and front-
passenger seat belt .........................47
Adjusting the height ......................... 47
center rear-compartment seat ......... 47
Cleaning ......................................... 311
Correct usage .................................. 46
Fastening ......................................... 47
Important safety guidelines ............. 45
Introduction ..................................... 44
Releasing ......................................... 47
Warning lamp ................................. 257
Warning lamp (function) ................... 48
Seats
Adjusting (AMG Performance
Seat) .............................................. 100
Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 98
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-
port ................................................ 100
Adjusting the head restraint ............ 98
Calling up a stored setting (mem-
ory function) .................................. 107
Cleaning the cover ......................... 311
Folding the backrest (rear com-
partment) forwards/back .............. 281
Important safety notes .................... 96
Seat heating .................................. 100
Seat heating problem .................... 101
Seat ventilation .............................. 101
Seat ventilation problem ................ 101
Storing settings (memory func-
tion) ............................................... 107
Securing a load
see Securing cargo
Securing cargo .................................. 283
Selecting a gear
see Automatic transmission
Selector lever
Cleaning ......................................... 311
see Automatic transmission
Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 309
Service menu (on-board com-
puter) .................................................. 219
Service message
see ASSYST PLUS
Service products
Brake fluid ..................................... 361
Coolant (engine) ............................ 361
Engine oil ....................................... 360
Fuel ................................................ 358
Important safety notes .................. 358
Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-
tem) ............................................... 362
Washer fluid ................................... 362
Setting the date/time format
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 268
Setting the language
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 268
Setting the time
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 268
Settings
Factory (on-board computer) ......... 223
On-board computer ....................... 219
SETUP (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................. 224
Side impact air bag ............................. 50
Side marker lamp (display mes-
sage) ................................................... 239
Side running board
Cleaning ......................................... 309
Side windows
Cleaning ......................................... 308
Convenience closing feature ............ 91
Convenience opening feature .......... 91
Important safety information ........... 89
Opening/closing .............................. 90
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 92
Resetting ......................................... 92
Reversing feature ............................. 90
SIRIUS services
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 268
Ski and snowboard bag .................... 280
Sliding sunroof
Important safety notes .................... 93
Opening/closing .............................. 93
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 94
Resetting ......................................... 94
Index
19
background
SmartKey
Changing the battery ....................... 80
Changing the programming .............79
Checking the battery .......................80
Convenience closing feature ............ 91
Convenience opening feature .......... 91
Display message ............................ 255
Door central locking/unlocking .......77
Important safety notes .................... 77
KEYLESS-GO start function .............. 79
Loss .................................................81
Mechanical key ................................ 79
Overview .......................................... 77
Positions (ignition lock) ................. 131
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 81
Starting the engine ........................ 133
Smartphone
Starting the engine ........................ 134
SMS
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 268
Snow chains ...................................... 332
Socket (12 V)
Cargo compartment ....................... 292
Center console .............................. 292
General notes ................................ 292
Rear compartment .........................292
Sound
Switching on/off ........................... 269
Special seat belt retractor .................. 59
Specialist workshop ............................ 31
Speed, controlling
see Cruise control
Speedometer
Activating/deactivating the addi-
tional speedometer ........................ 223
Digital ............................................ 213
In the Instrument cluster ................. 36
Segments ...................................... 208
Selecting the display unit ...............222
SPORT handling mode
Deactivating/activating
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ................ 70
Warning lamp ................................. 261
Sports exhaust system
AMG ............................................... 137
Standing lamps
Display message ............................ 239
Switching on/off ........................... 110
Start button
Display message ............................ 256
Start/Stop button
Key positions ................................. 132
Starting the engine ........................ 133
Start/stop function
see ECO start/stop function
Starting (engine) ................................ 133
Starting the engine
see Starting (engine)
STEER CONTROL .................................. 75
Steering
Display message ............................ 255
Warning lamps ............................... 267
Steering assistant STEER CON-
TROL
see STEER CONTROL
Steering wheel
Adjusting (electrically) ................... 102
Adjusting (manually) ...................... 102
Button overview ............................... 37
Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 209
Cleaning ......................................... 311
EASY ENTRY/EXIT feature ............. 103
Important safety notes .................. 102
Storing settings (memory func-
tion) ............................................... 107
Steering wheel heating
Problem (malfunction) ................... 103
Switching on/off ........................... 102
Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 147
Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 225
Stowage areas ................................... 278
Stowage compartments
Armrest (under) ............................. 279
Center console .............................. 279
Cup holders ................................... 289
Door ............................................... 280
Eyeglasses compartment ............... 279
Glove box ....................................... 279
Important safety information ......... 278
Map pockets .................................. 280
Rear ............................................... 280
Stowage net ................................... 280
see Stowage areas
Stowage net ....................................... 280
20
Index
background
Summer tires
In winter ........................................332
Sun visor ............................................ 290
Suspension settings
AIR BODY CONTROL ......................172
Suspension tuning
AMG sports suspension based on
AIR BODY CONTROL ......................174
SETUP (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ...............224
Switching air-recirculation mode
on/off ................................................. 126
Switching on media mode
Via the device list .......................... 276
T
Tachometer ........................................ 209
Tail lamps
Display message ............................ 239
Tailgate
Display message ............................ 254
Emergency unlocking ....................... 89
HANDS-FREE ACCESS ..................... 87
Important safety notes .................... 84
Limiting the opening angle ............... 89
object detection ............................... 85
Opening dimensions ...................... 363
Opening/closing (automatically
from inside) ...................................... 88
Opening/closing (automatically
from outside) ................................... 85
Reversing feature ............................. 85
Tank content
Fuel gauge ....................................... 36
Technical data
Capacities ...................................... 358
Drawbar load (maximum) ............... 364
Information .................................... 356
Trailer loads ................................... 364
Vehicle data ................................... 363
Telephone
Accepting a call (multifunction
steering wheel) .............................. 218
Authorizing a mobile phone (con-
necting) ......................................... 275
Connecting a mobile phone
(device manager) ........................... 275
Display message ............................ 255
Introduction ................................... 218
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 218
Number from the phone book ........ 218
Redialing ........................................ 219
Rejecting/ending a call ................. 218
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 268
see Mobile phone
Temperature
Coolant (display in the instrument
cluster) .......................................... 209
Engine oil (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 223
Outside temperature ...................... 209
Setting (climate control) ................ 123
Transmission oil (on-board com-
puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 223
Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 225
Tire pressure
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 337
Checking manually ........................ 336
Display message ............................ 250
Maximum ....................................... 336
Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 318
Notes ............................................. 334
Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 318
Recommended ............................... 333
Using the TIREFIT kit ...................... 317
Tire pressure loss warning system
General notes ................................ 336
Important safety notes .................. 336
Restarting ...................................... 337
Tire pressure monitor
Checking the tire pressure elec-
tronically ........................................ 339
Function/notes ............................. 337
General notes ................................ 337
Important safety notes .................. 338
Radio type approval for the tire
pressure monitor ........................... 340
Restarting ...................................... 339
Warning lamp ................................. 266
Warning message .......................... 339
Tire pressure sensors
Display message ............................ 251
Tire-change tool kit ........................... 314
Index
21
background
TIREFIT kit
Important safety notes .................. 316
Storage location ............................ 314
Tire pressure not reached .............. 318
Tire pressure reached .................... 318
Using ............................................. 317
Tires
Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 349
Average weight of the vehicle
occupants (definition) .................... 348
Bar (definition) ............................... 348
Changing a wheel .......................... 350
Characteristics .............................. 348
Checking ........................................ 330
Curb weight (definition) ................. 349
Definition of terms ......................... 348
Direction of rotation ...................... 350
Display message ............................ 250
Distribution of the vehicle occu-
pants (definition) ............................ 350
DOT (Department of Transporta-
tion) (definition) ............................. 348
DOT, Tire Identification Number
(TIN) ............................................... 347
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
(definition) ..................................... 348
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def-
inition) ........................................... 349
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
ing) (definition) .............................. 349
Important safety notes .................. 330
Increased vehicle weight due to
optional equipment (definition) ...... 348
Information on driving .................... 330
Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 349
Labeling (overview) ........................ 345
Load bearing index (definition) ...... 350
Load index ..................................... 347
Load index (definition) ................... 349
Maximum load on a tire (defini-
tion) ............................................... 349
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
(definition) ..................................... 349
Maximum permissible tire pres-
sure (definition) ............................. 349
Maximum tire load ......................... 347
Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 349
MOExtended tires .......................... 332
Optional equipment weight (defi-
nition) ............................................ 350
PSI (pounds per square inch) (def-
inition) ........................................... 349
Replacing ....................................... 350
Service life ..................................... 331
Sidewall (definition) ....................... 349
Snow chains .................................. 332
Speed rating (definition) ................ 349
Storing ........................................... 351
Structure and characteristics
(definition) ..................................... 348
Summer tires in winter .................. 332
Temperature .................................. 344
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
(definition) ..................................... 350
Tire bead (definition) ...................... 349
Tire pressure (definition) ................ 349
Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 348
Tire size (data) ............................... 354
Tire size designation, load-bearing
capacity, speed rating .................... 345
Tire tread ....................................... 331
Tire tread (definition) ..................... 349
Total load limit (definition) ............. 350
Traction ......................................... 344
Traction (definition) ....................... 350
Tread wear ..................................... 344
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards ...................................... 343
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards (definition) .................... 348
Wear indicator (definition) ............. 350
Wheel and tire combination ........... 354
Wheel rim (definition) .................... 348
see Flat tire
Top Tether ............................................ 61
Touchpad
Changing the station/music
track .............................................. 271
Character suggestions ................... 270
Deleting characters ....................... 270
Entering a space ............................ 270
Entering characters ....................... 270
Gesture control .............................. 270
Handwriting recognition ................ 270
Operating the touchpad ................. 270
Overview ........................................ 270
22
Index
background
Quick access for Audio .................. 271
Switching ....................................... 270
Switching input line ....................... 270
Tow-starting
Emergency engine starting ............ 327
Important safety notes .................. 324
Towing a trailer
Axle load, permissible .................... 365
Cleaning the trailer tow hitch ......... 310
Coupling up a trailer ...................... 204
Decoupling a trailer ....................... 206
Driving tips .................................... 203
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Pro-
gram) ............................................... 71
Important safety notes .................. 202
Installing the ball coupling ............. 204
Lights display message .................. 239
Power supply ................................. 206
Pulling away with a trailer .............. 135
Removing the ball coupling ............ 206
Trailer loads ................................... 364
Towing away
Important safety guidelines ........... 324
Installing the towing eye ................ 325
Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ............ 327
Removing the towing eye ............... 326
Transporting the vehicle ................ 326
With both axles on the ground ....... 326
Towing eye ......................................... 314
Traction system
see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac-
tion System)
Traffic reports
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 268
Traffic Sign Assist
Activating/deactivating the warn-
ing function .................................... 220
Display message ............................ 247
Function/notes ............................. 193
Important safety notes .................. 193
Instrument cluster display ............. 193
Trailer coupling
see Towing a trailer
Trailer loads and drawbar nose-
weights ............................................... 206
Trailer towing
Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 199
Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 202
Blind Spot Assist ............................ 195
Permissible trailer loads and
drawbar noseweights ..................... 206
Transfer case ..................................... 150
Transmission
Display message ............................ 253
see Automatic transmission
Transmission oil
Temperature (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 223
Transmission position display ......... 142
Transporting the vehicle .................. 326
Trim pieces (cleaning instruc-
tions) .................................................. 311
Trip computer (on-board com-
puter) .................................................. 213
Trip odometer
Calling up ....................................... 212
Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 214
Trunk
see Cargo compartment
Turn signals
Display message ............................ 239
Replacing bulbs (front) ................... 115
Switching on/off ........................... 110
Two-way radio
Frequencies ................................... 356
Installation ..................................... 356
Transmission output (maximum) .... 356
Type identification plate
see Vehicle identification plate
U
Unlocking
Emergency unlocking ....................... 84
From inside the vehicle (central
unlocking button) ............................. 83
USB devices
Connecting to the Media Inter-
face ............................................... 277
V
Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 290
Vehicle
Correct use ...................................... 31
Index
23
background
Data acquisition ............................... 32
Display message ............................ 252
Electronics .....................................356
Equipment ....................................... 28
Individual settings .......................... 219
Limited Warranty .............................32
Loading .......................................... 340
Locking (in an emergency) ............... 84
Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 77
Lowering ........................................ 354
Maintenance .................................... 29
Operating safety .............................. 30
Operation outside the USA/
Canada ............................................ 29
Parking .......................................... 152
Parking for a long period ................ 155
Pulling away ................................... 134
Raising ........................................... 351
Reporting problems ......................... 31
Securing from rolling away ............ 351
Technical data ............................... 356
Towing away .................................. 324
Transporting .................................. 326
Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 84
Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 77
Vehicle data ................................... 363
Vehicle data
Dimensions .................................... 363
Vehicle emergency locking ................ 84
Vehicle identification number
see VIN
Vehicle identification plate .............. 357
Vehicle level
AIR BODY CONTROL ...................... 173
Display message ............................ 244
Vehicle maintenance
see ASSYST PLUS
Video
Operating the DVD ......................... 217
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 268
VIN
Seat ............................................... 358
Type plate ...................................... 357
W
Warning and indicator lamps
ABS ................................................ 259
Active Brake Assist ........................ 265
Airbag ............................................ 262
Brakes ........................................... 258
Coolant .......................................... 263
Distance warning ........................... 265
Engine diagnostics ......................... 262
ESP
®
.............................................. 259
ESP
®
OFF ....................................... 261
Fuel tank ........................................ 262
General notes ................................ 256
Overview .......................................... 36
Parking brake ................................ 262
PASSENGER AIR BAG ...................... 44
Reserve fuel ................................... 262
Restraint system ............................ 262
Seat belt ........................................ 257
SPORT handling mode ................... 261
Steering ......................................... 267
Tire pressure monitor .................... 266
Warranty .............................................. 28
Washer fluid
Display message ............................ 255
Weather display (COMAND)
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 268
Wheel and tire combinations
Tires ............................................... 354
Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 354
Wheel chock ...................................... 351
Wheels
Changing a wheel .......................... 350
Checking ........................................ 330
Cleaning ......................................... 308
Important safety notes .................. 330
Information on driving .................... 330
Interchanging/changing ................ 350
Mounting a new wheel ................... 353
Mounting a wheel .......................... 351
Removing a wheel .......................... 353
Snow chains .................................. 332
Storing ........................................... 351
Tightening torque ........................... 354
Wheel size/tire size ....................... 354
24
Index
background
Window curtain air bag
Display message ............................ 236
Operation ......................................... 50
Windows
see Side windows
Windshield
Defrosting ...................................... 125
Windshield washer fluid
see Windshield washer system
Windshield washer system
Adding washer fluid ....................... 303
Important safety notes .................. 362
Windshield wipers
Problem (malfunction) ................... 118
Replacing the wiper blades ............ 116
Switching on/off ........................... 115
Winter driving
Important safety notes .................. 332
Slippery road surfaces ................... 159
Snow chains .................................. 332
Winter operation
Radiator cover ............................... 300
Summer tires ................................. 332
Winter tires
M+S tires ....................................... 332
Wiper arm
Moving to a vertical position .......... 116
Wiper blades
Cleaning ......................................... 308
Important safety notes .................. 116
Replacing ....................................... 116
Without changing gears
Display message ............................ 253
Wooden trim (cleaning instruc-
tions) .................................................. 311
Workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop
Index
25
background
Introduction
The printed Operator's Manual provides infor-
mation about the safe operation of your vehicle.
The Digital Operator's Manual provides compre-
hensive and specifically adapted information on
your vehicle's equipment and multimedia sys-
tem. You can call up the Digital Operator's Man-
ual via the multimedia system.
i
You will not incur any costs when calling up
the Digital Operator's Manual. The Digital
Operator's Manual works without connecting
to the Internet.
There are three ways to access the topics of the
Digital Operator's Manual:
R
Visual search
The visual search allows you to explore your
vehicle "virtually". Starting from either the
vehicle exterior view or interior view, you can
access many of the different topics covered
by the Digital Operator's Manual. To access
the vehicle interior section, select the "Vehi-
cle interior" view.
R
Keyword search
The keyword search allows you to search for a
keyword by entering characters.
R
Contents
You can select individual sections in the con-
tents.
i
The Digital Operator's Manual is deactiva-
ted for safety reasons while driving.
Operation
Calling up the Digital Operator's Man-
ual
X
Press the Ø button on the center console.
The overview relating to the vehicle appears.
X
Select the "Operator's Manual" menu item by
turning 3 or pressing 7 the controller.
X
Confirm 7 the message about the warning
and safety notes.
The menu for the Digital Operator's Manual
appears.
Operating the Digital Operator's Man-
ual
General notes
Please observe the information about the oper-
ation of the controller (Y page 269).
Content pages
The content pages can be accessed by means of
a visual search, a keyword search or using the
contents.
X
To scroll forward/back: turn 3 the con-
troller.
X
To display in full-screen or animation: slide
8 the controller to the left :.
X
To select information text or save book-
marks: slide 9 the controller to the
right ;.
X
To select a link: slide 6 the controller
down =.
X
To exit a content page: select the %
symbol ?.
X
To call up the menu of the Digital Opera-
tor's Manual: select the Þ symbol A.
X
To switch functions to the multimedia
system using the buttons on the center
console: press the $, %, Õ or Ø
button.
The selected menu appears. The Digital Oper-
ator's Manual remains open in the back-
ground.
26
Digital Operator's Manual
background
Protecting the environment
General notes
H
Environmental note
Daimler's declared policy is one of compre-
hensive environmental protection.
The objectives are for the natural resources
that form the basis of our existence on this
planet to be used sparingly and in a manner
that takes the requirements of both nature
and humanity into account.
You too can help to protect the environment
by operating your vehicle in an environmen-
tally responsible manner.
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,
transmission, brake and tire wear are affected
by these factors:
R
operating conditions of your vehicle
R
your personal driving style
You can influence both factors. You should
bear the following in mind:
Operating conditions:
R
avoid short trips as these increase fuel con-
sumption.
R
always make sure that the tire pressures
are correct.
R
do not carry any unnecessary weight.
R
remove roof racks once you no longer need
them.
R
a regularly serviced vehicle will contribute
to environmental protection. You should
therefore adhere to the service intervals.
R
always have service work carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Personal driving style:
R
do not depress the accelerator pedal when
starting the engine.
R
do not warm up the engine when the vehicle
is stationary.
R
drive carefully and maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle in front.
R
avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and
braking.
R
change gear in good time and use each gear
only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed.
R
switch off the engine in stationary traffic.
R
keep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-
tion.
Environmental concerns and recom-
mendations
Wherever the Operator's Manual requires you to
dispose of materials, first try to regenerate or re-
use them. Observe the relevant environmental
rules and regulations when disposing of materi-
als. In this way you will help to protect the envi-
ronment.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
H
Environmental note
Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major
assemblies and parts which are of the same
quality as new parts. They are covered by the
same Limited Warranty entitlements as new
parts.
!
Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-
ces, as well as control units and sensors for
these restraint systems, may be installed in
the following areas of your vehicle:
R
doors
R
door pillars
R
door sills
R
seats
R
cockpit
R
instrument cluster
R
center console
Do not install accessories such as audio sys-
tems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs
or welding. You could impair the operating
efficiency of the restraint systems.
Have aftermarket accessories installed at a
qualified specialist workshop.
You could jeopardize the operating safety of
your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as
well as accessories relevant to safety which
have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. This
could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
27
Introduction
Z
background
systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genu-
ine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal qual-
ity. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that
have been specifically approved for your vehi-
cle.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to
strict quality control. Every part has been spe-
cifically developed, manufactured or selected
for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Therefore, only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
should be used.
More than 300,000 different genuine
Mercedes-Benz parts are available for
Mercedes-Benz models.
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain
a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts for
necessary service and repair work. In addition,
strategically located parts delivery centers pro-
vide quick and reliable parts service.
Always specify the vehicle identification number
(VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz
parts (Y page 357).
Operator's Manual
Vehicle equipment
i
This Operator's Manual describes all models
and all standard and optional equipment of
your vehicle available at the time of publica-
tion of the Operator's Manual. Country-spe-
cific differences are possible. Bear in mind
that your vehicle may not feature all functions
described here. This also applies to safety-
relevant systems and functions. The equip-
ment in your vehicle may therefore differ from
that shown in the descriptions and illustra-
tions.
The original purchase agreement lists all sys-
tems installed in your vehicle.
Should you have any questions concerning
equipment and operation, please consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Book-
let are important documents and should be kept
in the vehicle.
Service and vehicle operation
Warranty
The Limited Warranty for your vehicle applies in
accordance with the warranty terms and condi-
tions in the Service and Warranty Information
booklet.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
replace and repair all factory-installed parts in
accordance with the following warranty terms
and conditions:
R
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
R
Emission System Warranty
R
Emission Performance Warranty
R
California, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-
setts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island
and Vermont Emission Control System War-
ranty
R
State warranty enforcement laws (lemon
laws)
Replacement parts and accessories are covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories
warranties. These are available at any author-
ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i
Should you lose your Service and Warranty
Information booklet, have an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replace-
ment. The new Service and Warranty Infor-
mation booklet will be posted to you.
Information for customers in Califor-
nia
Under California law you may be entitled to a
replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the
purchase price or lease price, if after a reason-
able number of repair attempts Mercedes-Benz
USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service
facilities fail to fix one or more substantial
defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are
covered by its express warranty.
During the period of 18 months from original
delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of
18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on the
odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first,
a reasonable number of repair attempts is pre-
sumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more
of the following occurs:
(1) the substantial defect or malfunction can
result in death or serious injuries for the
28
Service and vehicle operation
Introduction
background
vehicle occupants while driving and this
defect has already been repaired at least
twice and Mercedes-Benz, LLC has been
informed in writing of the necessity of a
repair.
(2) the defect or malfunction, though less seri-
ous than (1) above, has already been
repaired at least four times and Mercedes-
Benz has been informed in writing of the
necessity of a repair.
(3) the vehicle cannot be used for longer than
30 calendar days because of repair work
resulting from this or other substantial
defects or malfunctions.
Please send your written notice to:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Customer Assistance Center
3 Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
Maintenance
Always bring the Maintenance Booklet with you
when taking the vehicle to an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. Your customer service
advisor will enter every service into your Main-
tenance Booklet on your behalf.
Roadside Assistance
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro-
gram offers technical help in the event of a
breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assis-
tance Hotline are answered by our agents 24
hours a day, 365 days a year.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
(USA)
1-800-387-0100 (Canada)
For additional information, refer to the
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program
brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance"
section in the Service and Warranty Booklet
(Canada). You will find both in the vehicle docu-
ment wallet.
Change of address or change of own-
ership
In the event of a change of address, please send
us the "Notification of Address Change" in the
Service and Warranty Booklet or simply call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
(USA) at the hotline number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or
Customer Service Center (Canada) at
1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contact-
ing you in a timely manner should the need arise.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all liter-
ature in the vehicle so that it is available to the
next owner.
If you have purchased a used car, please send us
the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in the
Service and Warranty Booklet or simply call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
(USA) at the hotline number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or
Customer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.
Vehicle operation outside the USA
and Canada
When you are abroad with your vehicle, observe
the following points:
R
Service facilities or replacement parts may
not be readily available.
R
Lead-free fuel for vehicles with a catalytic
converter may not be available. Leaded fuel
can cause damage to the catalytic converter.
R
The fuel may have a considerably lower
octane number. Unsuitable fuel can cause
engine damage.
Some Mercedes-Benz models are available for
delivery in Europe through our European Deliv-
ery Program. For details, consult an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or write to one of the
following addresses.
In the USA
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
European Delivery Department
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
European Delivery Department
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Service and vehicle operation
29
Introduction
Z
background
Operating safety
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you do not have the prescribed service/
maintenance work or any required repairs
carried out, this can result in malfunctions or
system failures. There is a risk of an accident.
Always have the prescribed service/mainte-
nance work as well as any required repairs
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with
hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk
of fire.
When driving on an unpaved road or off-road,
check the vehicle underside regularly. In par-
ticular, remove trapped plant parts or other
flammable material. Contact a qualified spe-
cialist workshop immediately if damage is
detected.
G
WARNING
Modifications to electronic components, their
software as well as wiring can impair their
function and/or the function of other net-
worked components. In particular, systems
relevant to safety could also be affected. As a
result, these may no longer function as inten-
ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of
the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an
accident and injury.
Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-
tronic components or their software. You
should have all work to electrical and elec-
tronic equipment carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop.
!
There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:
R
the vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high
curb or an unpaved road
R
you drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a
curb, a speed bump or a pothole in the road
R
a heavy object strikes the underbody or
parts of the chassis
In situations like this, the body, the under-
body, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be
damaged without the damage being visible.
Components damaged in this way can unex-
pectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no
longer withstand the loads they are designed
to.
If the underbody paneling is damaged, com-
bustible materials such as leaves, grass or
twigs can gather between the underbody and
the underbody paneling. If these materials
come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust
system, they can catch fire.
In such situations, have the vehicle checked
and repaired immediately at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop. If on continuing your jour-
ney you notice that driving safety is impaired,
pull over and stop the vehicle immediately,
paying attention to road and traffic condi-
tions. In such cases, consult a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Declaration of conformity for wireless
vehicle components
USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle com-
ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is
subject to the two following two conditions: 1)
These devices may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and 2) These devices must accept any
interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation. Changes
or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment."
Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
comply with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) These devices may
not cause interference, and (2) These devices
must accept any interference, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired operation of
the device."
30
Operating safety
Introduction
background
Diagnostics connection
The diagnostics connection is only intended for
the connection of diagnostic equipment at a
qualified specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
If you connect equipment to a diagnostics
connection in the vehicle, it may affect the
operation of vehicle systems. As a result, the
operating safety of the vehicle could be affec-
ted. There is a risk of an accident.
Only connect equipment to a diagnostics con-
nection in the vehicle, which is approved for
your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
G
WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
loose floormats and do not place floormats on
top of one another.
!
If the engine is switched off and equipment
on the diagnostics connection is used, the
starter battery may discharge.
Connecting equipment to the diagnostics con-
nection can lead to emissions monitoring infor-
mation being reset, for example. This may lead
to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of
the next emissions test during the main inspec-
tion.
Qualified specialist workshop
An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a quali-
fied specialist workshop. It has the necessary
specialist knowledge, tools and qualifications to
correctly carry out the work required on your
vehicle. This is especially the case for work rel-
evant to safety.
Observe the notes in the Maintenance Booklet.
Always have the following work carried out at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:
R
work relevant to safety
R
service and maintenance work
R
repair work
R
alterations, installation work and modifica-
tions
R
work on electronic components
Correct use
If you remove any warning stickers, you or oth-
ers could fail to recognize certain dangers.
Leave warning stickers in position.
Observe the following information when driving
your vehicle:
R
the safety notes in this manual
R
technical data for the vehicle
R
traffic rules and regulations
R
laws and safety standards pertaining to motor
vehicles
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your
vehicle, particularly one that you believe may
affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immedi-
ately to have the problem diagnosed and recti-
fied. If the problem is not resolved to your sat-
isfaction, please discuss the problem again with
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or, if nec-
essary, contact us at one of the following
addresses.
In the USA
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
3 Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Reporting safety defects
USA only:
Operating safety
31
Introduction
Z
background
The following text is reproduced as required of
all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.
Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of
1966.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz
USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz
USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington,
DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov
Limited Warranty
!
Observe the notes in this Operator's Manual
regarding the correct operation of your vehi-
cle and possible damage to the vehicle. Dam-
age to the vehicle which is caused by violation
of these notes is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or the new
or used-vehicle warranty.
QR code for rescue card
The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flap
and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the
event of an accident, rescue services can use
the QR code to quickly find the appropriate res-
cue card for your vehicle. The current rescue
card contains the most important information
about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the
routing of the electric cables.
You can find more information under
www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code.
Data stored in the vehicle
Data storage
A wide range of electronic components in your
vehicle contain data memories.
These data memories temporarily or perma-
nently store technical information about:
R
the vehicle's operating state
R
incidents
R
malfunctions
In general, this technical information docu-
ments the state of a component, a module, a
system or the surroundings.
This includes, for example:
R
operating conditions of system components.
For example, fluid levels
R
the vehicle's status messages and those of its
individual components, e.g. number of wheel
revolutions/speed, deceleration in move-
ment, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedal
position
R
malfunctions and defects in important system
components, e.g. lights, brakes
R
vehicle reactions and operating conditions in
special driving situations, e.g. air bag deploy-
ment, intervention of stability control sys-
tems
R
ambient conditions, e.g. outside temperature
This data is of an exclusively technical nature
and can be used to:
R
assist in recognizing and rectifying malfunc-
tions and defects
R
analyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an acci-
dent
R
optimize vehicle functions
The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's
movements.
When your vehicle is serviced, technical infor-
mation can be read from the event data memory
and malfunction data memory.
Services include, for example:
R
repair services
R
service processes
R
warranties
R
quality assurance
The vehicle is read out by employees of the ser-
vice network (including the manufacturer) using
special diagnostic testers. More detailed infor-
mation is obtained from it, if required.
32
Data stored in the vehicle
Introduction
background
After a malfunction has been rectified, the infor-
mation is deleted from the malfunction memory
or is continually overwritten.
When operating the vehicle, situations are con-
ceivable in which this technical data, in connec-
tion with other information (if necessary, under
consultation with an authorized expert), could
be traced to a person.
Examples include:
R
accident reports
R
damage to the vehicle
R
witness statements
Further additional functions that have been con-
tractually agreed upon with the customer allow
certain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehi-
cle as well. The additional functions include, for
example, vehicle location in case of an emer-
gency.
COMAND/mbrace
If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or
mbrace, additional data about the vehicle's
operation, the use of the vehicle in certain sit-
uations, and the location of the vehicle may be
compiled through COMAND or the mbrace sys-
tem.
For additional information, please refer to the
COMAND User Manual or Digital Operator's
Manual and/or the mbrace Terms and Condi-
tions.
Event data recorders
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). This vehicle is equipped with an
event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of
an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air bag deploy-
ment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
R
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating
R
Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened
R
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal and
R
How fast the vehicle was traveling
These data can help provide a better under-
standing of the circumstances in which crashes
and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded
by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situa-
tion occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR
under normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g. name, gender, age and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as
law enforcement could combine the EDR data
with the type of personally identifying data rou-
tinely acquired during a crash investigation.
Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is needed
to read data that is recorded by an EDR, and
special equipment is required. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have
the special equipment, such as law enforce-
ment, can read the information by accessing the
vehicle or the EDR.
EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat-
ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci-
dent claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash
Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extract
data from the EDR is commercially available,
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly
disclaims any and all liability arising from the
extraction of this information by unauthorized
Mercedes-Benz personnel.
MBUSA will not share EDR data with others
without the consent of the vehicle owners or, if
the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the
lessee. Exceptions to this representation
include responses to subpoenas by law enforce-
ment; by federal, state or local government; in
connection with or arising out of litigation involv-
ing MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or,
as required by law.
Warning: The EDR is a component of the
Restraint System Module. Tampering with, alter-
ing, modifying or removing the EDR component
may result in a malfunction of the Restraint Sys-
tem Module and other systems.
State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that
conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted.
This means that in the event of such conflict, the
federal regulation governs. As of February 2013,
13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.
Data stored in the vehicle
33
Introduction
Z
background
Information on copyright
Free and open-source software
Information on license for free and open-source
software used in your vehicle can be found on
the data carrier in your vehicle document wallet
and, including updates, on the following web-
site:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource
Registered trademarks
Registered trademarks:
R
Bluetooth
®
is a registered trademark of Blue-
tooth SIG Inc.
R
DTS™ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.
R
Dolby
®
and MLP™ are registered trademarks
of DOLBY Laboratories.
R
BabySmart™, ESP
®
and PRE-SAFE
®
are reg-
istered trademarks of Daimler AG.
R
HomeLink
®
is a registered trademark of John-
son Controls.
R
iPod
®
and iTunes
®
are registered trademarks
of Apple Inc.
R
Burmester
®
is a registered trademark of
Burmester Audiosysteme GmbH.
R
Microsoft
®
and Windows media
®
are regis-
tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
R
SIRIUS
®
is a registered trademark of Sirius
XM Radio Inc.
R
HD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiq-
uity Digital Corporation.
R
Gracenote
®
is a registered trademark of
Gracenote, Inc.
R
ZAGAT Survey
®
and related brands are regis-
tered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC.
34
Information on copyright
Introduction
background
Cockpit
Function Page
:
Steering wheel paddle shift-
ers 147
;
Combination switch 110
=
Horn
?
Instrument cluster 36
A
DIRECT SELECT lever 141
B
Climate control systems 119
C
Overhead control panel 41
D
Control panel for multimedia
system and vehicle functions 38
E
Ignition lock 131
Start/Stop button 132
F
Adjusting the steering wheel 102
G
Cruise control lever 160
H
Electric parking brake 154
Function Page
I
Diagnostics connection 31
J
Opening the hood 299
K
Light switch 109
L
Control panel for:
Y Activating Active Dis-
tance Assist DISTRONIC with
Active Steering Assist 164
Ç Switching on Active
Lane Keeping Assist 200
c Deactivating Parking
Assist PARKTRONIC 181
Ô Switching on the 360°
camera 187
Switching on the head-up
display 211
Vehicles without a driver
assistance system: map/
coin holder
Cockpit
35
At a glance
background
Instrument cluster
Function Page
:
Speedometer with segments 208
Warning and indicator lamps:
å ESP
®
OFF
259
÷ ESP
®
259
· Distance warning
265
Ð Power steering assis-
tance malfunctioning
267
6 Restraint system
44
ü Seat belt not fastened
257
K High-beam headlamps
110
L Low-beam headlamps
110
T Parking lamps
110
R Rear fog lamp
110
h Tire pressure monitor
266
;
#! Turn signals
110
=
Multifunction display 210
?
Tachometer 209
Warning and indicator lamps:
! Electric parking brake
(yellow) 262
Function Page
! ABS malfunctioning
259
; Check Engine
262
% This indicator lamp has
no function
Electric parking brake
applied (red) 262
F USA only
! Canada only
Brakes (red) 258
$ USA only
J Canada only
M SPORT handling mode
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 261
A
Coolant temperature gage 209
Warning and indicator lamps:
? Coolant too hot/cold
263
B
Fuel level indicator
Warning and indicator lamps:
8 Reserve fuel level with
fuel filler flap location indica-
tor (right)
262
i
Information on displaying the outside tem-
perature in the multifunction display can be
found under "Outside temperature display"
(Y page 209).
36
Instrument cluster
At a glance
background
Multifunction steering wheel
Function Page
:
Multifunction display 210
;
Multimedia system display
=
~ Rejects or ends a call
6 Makes or accepts a call
Further telephone functions 218
WXAdjusts volume
8 Mute
ó Switches on voice-
operated control for naviga-
tion or the Voice Control Sys-
tem
Function Page
?
ò Opens the menu list
9:Selects a menu
a Confirms the selection
% Back
Operates the on-board com-
puter 209
ñ Switches on voice-
operated control for naviga-
tion or the Voice Control Sys-
tem
i Vehicles with Audio 20 multimedia sys-
tem: you can find further information
R
on the multimedia system in the Digital
Operator's Manual
R
on voice-controlled navigation in the man-
ufacturer's operating instructions
i Vehicles with COMAND multimedia sys-
tem: you can find further information
R
on the multimedia system in the Digital
Operator's Manual
R
on the single DVD drive in the Digital Oper-
ator's Manual
R
on the Voice Control System in the sepa-
rate operating instructions
Multifunction steering wheel
37
At a glance
background
Center console
Center console, upper section
Function Page
:
Climate control systems 119
;
£ Hazard warning lamps
111
=
Ø Vehicle functions/
system settings button (see
Digital Operator's Manual)
?
% Telephone button (see
Digital Operator's Manual)
A
PASSENGER AIRBAG indica-
tor lamps 44
ATA indicator lamp 75
Function Page
B
Õ Media button (see Dig-
ital Operator's Manual)
C
$ Radio button (see Digi-
tal Operator's Manual)
D
Ø Navigation button (see
Digital Operator's Manual)
E
þ Inserts or ejects a CD
or DVD (see Digital Opera-
tor's Manual)
38
Center console
At a glance
background
Center console, lower section (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Function Page
:
Stowage compartment 278
Ashtray 291
Cigarette lighter 291
Socket 292
Cup holder 289
;
Adjusts the volume 269
Switches the sound on/off 269
=
Ü Switches the multime-
dia system on/off 269
?
å Activates/deactivates
ESP
®
69
A
Touchpad 270
B
Opens stowage compart-
ment with Media Interface 278
Function Page
C
è ECO start/stop func-
tion 135
D
p Manual gearshifting (per-
manent setting) 147
E
É Adjusts the vehicle
level (AIR BODY CONTROL) 172
c Deactivates Parking
Assist PARKTRONIC 181
F
DYNAMIC SELECT switch 139
G
% Back button
269
H
Controller 269
I
g Favorites button
271
Center console
39
At a glance
background
Center console, lower section (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Function Page
:
Stowage compartment 278
Ashtray 291
Cigarette lighter 291
Socket 292
Cup holder 289
;
Adjusts the volume 269
Switches the sound on/off 269
Vehicles with AMG Perform-
ance exhaust system:
Ü Switches the multime-
dia system on/off 269
=
AMG Performance adjusta-
ble exhaust system can be
selected 137
Ü Switches the multime-
dia system on/off 269
?
è ECO start/stop func-
tion 135
A
É Adjusts the vehicle
level (AIR BODY CONTROL) 173
Function Page
B
Stowage compartment with
Media Interface 278
C
Touchpad 270
D
å Activates/deactivates
ESP
®
70
M Activates/deactivates
SPORT handling mode 70
E
AMG sports suspension
based on AIR BODY CON-
TROL 174
F
Manual gearshifting (perma-
nent setting) 147
G
DYNAMIC SELECT switch 139
H
% Back button
269
I
Controller 269
J
g Favorites button
271
40
Center console
At a glance
background
Overhead control panel
Function Page
:
p Switches the left-hand
reading lamp on/off 113
;
| Switches the automatic
interior lighting control
on/off 113
=
G SOS button
294
?
c Switches the front inte-
rior lighting on/off 113
A
u Switches the rear inte-
rior lighting on/off 113
B
p Switches the right-
hand reading lamp on/off 113
C
ï Info call button
295
D
Eyeglasses compartment 279
Function Page
E
3 Operates the sliding
sunroof 93
F
Inside rearview mirror
Automatic anti-glare 105
G
Buttons for the garage door
opener 296
H
Microphone for Mercedes
me connect, telephone and
Voice Control System; see
the separate Operator's
Manual
I
F Roadside Assistance
call button 295
Overhead control panel
41
At a glance
background
Door control panel
Function Page
:
r 45=
Stores settings for the seat,
exterior mirrors and steering
column 107
;
Adjusts the seats electrically 98
=
c Seat heating
100
?
s Seat ventilation
101
A
Opens the door 83
B
%&Unlocks/locks
the vehicle 83
C
W Opens/closes the rear
left side window 89
D
W Opens/closes the left
side window 89
Function Page
E
7Zª\
Adjusts and folds the exterior
mirrors out/in electrically 104
F
W Opens/closes the right
side window 89
G
W Opens/closes the rear
right side window 89
H
n Override feature for the
controls in the rear compart-
ment 64
I
p Opens/closes the tail-
gate 88
42
Door control panel
At a glance
background
Panic alarm
X
To arm: press and hold the ! button :
for approximately one second.
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the
alarm system is armed.
X
To disarm: press the ! button : again.
or
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
or
X
Press the Start/Stop button.
The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.
Occupant safety
Introduction to the restraint system
The restraint system can reduce the risk of vehi-
cle occupants coming into contact with parts of
the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident.
The restraint system can also reduce the forces
to which vehicle occupants are subjected during
an accident.
The restraint system comprises:
R
seat belt system
R
air bags
R
child restraint system
R
child seat securing systems
The components of the restraint system work in
conjunction with each other. They can only
deploy their protective function if, at all times, all
vehicle occupants:
R
have fastened their seat belts correctly
(Y page 46)
R
have the seat and head restraint adjusted
properly (Y page 96)
As the driver, you also have to make sure that
the steering wheel is adjusted correctly.
Observe the information relating to the correct
driver's seat position (Y page 96).
You also have to make sure that an air bag can
inflate properly if deployed (Y page 48).
An air bag supplements a correctly worn seat
belt. As an additional safety device, the air bag
increases the level of protection for vehicle
occupants in the event of an accident. For exam-
ple, if, in the event of an accident, the protection
offered by the seat belt is sufficient, the air bags
are not deployed. When an accident occurs, only
the air bags that increase protection in that par-
ticular accident situation are deployed. How-
ever, seat belts and air bags generally do not
protect against objects penetrating the vehicle
from the outside.
Information on restraint system operation can
be found under "Triggering of the Emergency
Tensioning Devices and air bags" (Y page 55).
See "Children in the vehicle" for information on
children traveling with you in the vehicle as well
as on child restraint systems (Y page 59).
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Modifications to the restraint system may
cause it to no longer work as intended. The
restraint system may then not perform its
intended protective function and may fail in an
accident or trigger unexpectedly, for example.
This poses an increased risk of injury or even
fatal injury.
Never modify parts of the restraint system.
Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic
components or their software.
If it is necessary to modify components of the
restraint system to accommodate a person with
disabilities, contact an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center for details. USA only: for further
information contact our Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800 FOR-MERCEDES
(1‑800‑367‑6372).
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use
driving aids which have been approved specifi-
cally for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
Occupant safety
43
Safety
Z
background
Restraint system warning lamp
The functions of the restraint system are
checked after the ignition is switched on and at
regular intervals while the engine is running.
Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in
good time.
The 6 restraint system warning lamp on the
instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is
switched on. It goes out no later than a few sec-
onds after the vehicle is started. The compo-
nents of the restraint system are in operational
readiness.
A malfunction has occurred if the 6 restraint
system warning lamp:
R
does not light up after the ignition is switched
on
R
does not go out after a few seconds with the
engine running
R
lights up again while the engine is running
G
WARNING
If the restraint system is malfunctioning,
restraint system components may be trig-
gered unintentionally or may not deploy as
intended during an accident. This can affect
for example the Emergency Tensioning
Device or the air bag. This poses an increased
risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Have the restraint system checked and
repaired in a qualified specialist workshop as
soon as possible.
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp : and
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp ; are
part of the Occupant Classification System
(OCS).
The indicator lamps display the status of the
front-passenger front air bag.
R
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 sec-
onds, subsequently both indicator lamps are
off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the
front-passenger front air bag is able to deploy
in the event of an accident.
R
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the front-
passenger front air bag is deactivated. It will
then not be deployed in the event of an acci-
dent.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is
off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp shows the status of the front-passenger
front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.
Depending on the person in the front-passenger
seat, the front-passenger front air bag must
either be deactivated or enabled; see the fol-
lowing points. You must make sure of this both
before and during a journey.
R
Children in a child restraint system:
whether the front-passenger front air bag is
enabled or deactivated depends on the instal-
led child restraint system, and the age and
size of the child. Therefore, be sure to observe
the notes on the "Occupant Classification
System (OCS)" (Y page 51) and on "Chil-
dren in the vehicle" (Y page 59). There you
will also find instructions on rearward and
forward-facing child restraint systems on the
front-passenger seat.
R
All other persons: depending on the classi-
fication of the person in the front-passenger
seat, the front-passenger front air bag is ena-
bled or deactivated (Y page 51). Be sure to
observe the notes on "Seat
belts“ (Y page 44) and "Air bags"
(Y page 48). There you can also find infor-
mation on the correct seat position.
Seat belts
Introduction
Seat belts are the most effective means of
restricting the movement of vehicle occupants
in the event of an accident or the vehicle rolling
over. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupants
coming into contact with parts of the vehicle
interior or being ejected from the vehicle. Fur-
thermore, the seat belt helps to keep the vehicle
44
Occupant safety
Safety
background
occupant in the best position in relation to the
air bag.
The seat belt system comprises:
R
Seat belts
R
Emergency Tensioning Devices for the front
seat belts and the outer seat belts in the rear
R
Seat belt force limiters for the front seat belts
and the outer seat belts in the rear
If the seat belt is pulled out of the belt outlet
quickly or with a jerky movement, the belt
retractor locks. The belt strap cannot be extrac-
ted any further.
The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens the
seat belt in an accident, pulling the belt close
against the body. However it does not pull the
vehicle occupant back in the direction of the
backrest.
The Emergency Tensioning Device does not cor-
rect an incorrect seat position or the routing of
an incorrectly fastened seat belt.
When triggered, a seat belt force limiter helps to
reduce the force exerted by the seat belt on the
vehicle occupant.
The seat belt force limiters for the front seats are
synchronized with the front air bags, which
absorb part of the deceleration force. This can
reduce the force exerted on the vehicle occu-
pants during an accident.
!
If the front-passenger seat is not occupied,
do not engage the seat belt tongue in the
buckle on the front-passenger seat. Other-
wise, in the event of an accident the Emer-
gency Tensioning Device and the side impact
air bag, in addition to other systems, may be
triggered and have to be replaced.
Important safety notes
The use of seat belts and child restraint systems
is required by law in:
R
all 50 states
R
the U.S. territories
R
the District of Columbia
R
all Canadian provinces
Even where this is not required by law, all vehicle
occupants should correctly fasten their seat
belts before starting the journey.
G
WARNING
If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot
perform its intended protective function. An
incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause
injuries, for example, in the event of an acci-
dent or when braking or changing direction
abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury
or even fatal injury.
Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have
their seat belts fastened correctly and are sit-
ting properly.
The components of the restraint system work in
conjunction with each other. They can only
deploy their protective function if, at all times, all
vehicle occupants:
R
have fastened their seat belts correctly
(Y page 46)
R
have the seat and head restraint adjusted
properly (Y page 96)
G
WARNING
The seat belt does not offer the intended level
of protection if you have not moved the back-
rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-
ing or in the event of an accident, you could
slide underneath the seat belt and sustain
abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This
poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal
injury.
Adjust the seat properly before beginning
your journey. Always ensure that the backrest
is in an almost vertical position and that the
shoulder section of your seat belt is routed
across the center of your shoulder.
G
WARNING
Persons less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall cannot
wear the seat belt correctly without an addi-
tional and suitable restraint system. If the
seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot per-
form its intended protective function. An
incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause
injuries, for example, in the event of an acci-
dent or when braking or changing direction
abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury
or even fatal injury.
For this reason, always secure persons under
5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable additional restraint
systems.
Occupant safety
45
Safety
Z
background
If a child younger than twelve years old and
under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the
vehicle:
R
always secure the child in a child restraint
system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi-
cle. The child restraint system must be appro-
priate to the age, weight and size of the child
R
always observe the instructions and safety
notes on "Children in the vehicle"
(Y page 59) in addition to the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation and oper-
ating instructions
R
always observe the instructions and safety
notes on the "Occupant Classification System
(OCS)" (Y page 51)
G
WARNING
The seat belts may not perform their intended
protective function if:
R
they are damaged, modified, extremely
dirty, bleached or dyed
R
the seat belt buckle is damaged or
extremely dirty
R
the Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt
anchorages or inertia reels have been modi-
fied.
Seat belts may be damaged in an accident,
although the damage may not be visible, e.g.
due to splinters of glass. Modified or damaged
seat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an accident.
Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices
could accidentally trigger or fail to deploy
when necessary. This poses an increased risk
of injury or even fatal injury.
Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten-
sioning Devices, belt anchorages and inertia
reels. Make sure that the seat belts are
undamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow-
ing an accident, have the seat belts checked
immediately at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Only use seat belts that have been approved for
your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
AMG Performance seat: this seat is designed
for the standard three-point seat belt. If you
install another multi-point seat belt, e.g. sport or
racing seat belts, the restraint system cannot
provide the best level of protection.
G
WARNING
If you feed seat belts through the opening in
the seat backrest, the seat backrest may be
damaged or may even break in the event of an
accident. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
Only use the standard three-point seat belt.
Never modify the seat belt system.
Proper use of the seat belts
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
(Y page 45).
All vehicle occupants must be wearing the seat
belt correctly before beginning the journey. Also
make sure that all vehicle occupants are always
wearing the seat belt correctly while the vehicle
is in motion.
When fastening the seat belt, always make sure
that:
R
the seat belt buckle tongue is inserted only
into the belt buckle belonging to that seat
R
the seat belt is pulled tight across your body
Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter
coat.
R
the seat belt is not twisted
Only then can the forces which occur be dis-
tributed over the area of the belt.
R
the shoulder section of the belt is routed
across the center of your shoulder
The shoulder section of the seat belt should
not touch your neck or be routed under your
arm or behind your back. Where possible,
adjust the seat belt to the appropriate height.
R
the lap belt is taut and passes across your lap
as low down as possible
The lap belt must always be routed across
your hip joints and not across your abdomen.
This applies particularly to pregnant women.
If necessary, push the lap belt down to your
hip joint and pull it tight using the shoulder
section of the belt.
R
the seat belt is not routed across sharp, poin-
ted or fragile objects
If you have such items located on or in your
clothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses, store
these in a suitable place.
R
only one person is using a seat belt
Infants and children must never travel sitting
on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the event
46
Occupant safety
Safety
background
of an accident, they could be crushed
between the vehicle occupant and seat belt.
R
objects are never secured with a seat belt if
the seat belt is also being used by one of the
vehicle's occupants
Also ensure that there are never objects
between a person and the seat, e.g. cushions.
Seat belts are only intended to secure and
restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the
"Loading guidelines" for securing objects, lug-
gage or loads (Y page 278).
Fastening and adjusting the seat belts
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
(Y page 45) and the notes on correct use of seat
belts (Y page 46).
If the center rear seat belt is being used, also
observe the information about the seat belt for
the center rear seat (Y page 47).
Basic illustration
X
Adjust the seat (Y page 96).
The seat backrest must be in an almost
upright position.
X
Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt outlet
and engage belt tongue ; into belt
buckle :.
The seat belt on the driver’s seat and the
front-passenger seat may be tightened auto-
matically, see "Belt adjustment"
(Y page 47).
X
If necessary, pull up on the shoulder section
of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your
body.
The shoulder section of the seat belt must
always be routed across the center of the shoul-
der. Adjust the belt outlet if necessary.
X
To raise: slide the belt outlet up.
The belt outlet will engage in various posi-
tions.
X
To lower: hold belt outlet release = and slide
the belt outlet down.
X
Let go of belt outlet release = in the desired
position and make sure that the belt outlet
engages.
All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are
equipped with a special seat belt retractor to
securely fasten child restraint systems in the
vehicle. Further information can be found under
"Special seat belt retractor" (Y page 59).
Seat belt for the center rear seat
If the left-hand rear seat backrest is folded down
and back up again, the rear center seat belt may
lock. The seat belt can then not be pulled out.
X
To release the rear center seat belt: pull
the seat belt out approximately 1 in (25 mm)
at the belt outlet on the backrest and then
release it again.
The seat belt is retracted and released.
Releasing seat belts
!
Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up.
Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be
trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism.
This could damage the door, the door trim
panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts
can no longer fulfill their protective function
and must be replaced. Visit a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
X
Press the release button in the belt buckle,
hold the belt tongue firmly and guide the belt
back.
Seat belt adjustment
The belt adjustment is a convenience function
integrated into PRE-SAFE
®
. With this function,
the driver's and front-passenger seat belts are
adjusted to the upper body of the vehicle occu-
pant.
The seat belt strap will slightly tighten if:
R
the belt tongue is inserted into the buckle and
R
the ignition is switched on
Occupant safety
47
Safety
Z
background
The seat belt adjustment will apply a certain
tightening force if any slack is detected between
the vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do not
grab hold of the seat belt.
You can switch the seat belt adjustment on and
off using the multimedia system. Information on
switching the seat belt adjustment on and off
can be found in the Digital Operating Instruc-
tions.
Belt warning for the driver and front
passenger
The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-
ment cluster is a reminder that all vehicle occu-
pants must wear their seat belts. It may light up
continuously or flash. In addition, there may be
a warning tone.
Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt has
already been fastened, the 7 seat belt warn-
ing lamp lights up for six seconds each time the
engine is started. If the front doors are closed
and the driver's or front-passenger seat belt has
not been fastened, the 7 seat belt warning
lamp lights up again after the six seconds. As
soon as the driver's and front-passenger seat
belts are fastened or a front door is opened
again, the 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out.
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after the
engine is started, an additional warning tone will
sound. The warning tone switches off after six
seconds or once the driver's seat belt is fas-
tened.
If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph
(25 km/h) once and the driver's and front-
passenger seat belts are not fastened, a warning
tone sounds. A warning tone also sounds with
increasing intensity for 60 seconds or until the
driver or front passenger have fastened their
seat belts.
If the driver or front passenger unfasten their
seat belts during the journey, the seat belt warn-
ing is activated again.
Air bags
Introduction
The installation point of an air bag can be rec-
ognized by the AIRBAG marking.
An air bag complements the correctly fastened
seat belt. It is no substitute for the seat belt. The
air bag provides additional protection in appli-
cable accident situations.
Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. The
different air bag systems function independ-
ently from one another (Y page 55).
However, no system available today can com-
pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.
It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injury
caused by an air bag due to the high speed at
which the air bag must be deployed.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you do not sit in the correct seat position,
the air bag cannot protect as intended and
could even cause additional injury when
deployed. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
To avoid hazardous situations, always make
sure that all of the vehicle's occupants:
R
have fastened their seat belts correctly,
including pregnant women
R
are sitting correctly and maintain the great-
est possible distance to the air bags
R
follow the following instructions
Always make sure that there are no objects
between the air bag and the vehicle's occu-
pants.
R
Adjust the seats properly before beginning
your journey. Always make sure that the seat
is in an almost upright position. The center of
the head restraint must support the head at
about eye level.
R
Move the driver's and front-passenger seats
as far back as possible. The driver's seat posi-
tion must allow the vehicle to be driven safely.
R
Only hold the steering wheel on the outside.
This allows the air bag to be fully deployed.
R
Always lean against the backrest while driv-
ing. Do not lean forward or lean against the
door or side window. You may otherwise be in
the deployment area of the air bags.
R
Always keep your feet in the footwell in front
of the seat. Do not put your feet on the dash-
48
Occupant safety
Safety
background
board, for example. Your feet may otherwise
be in the deployment area of the air bag.
R
For this reason, always secure persons less
than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint sys-
tems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannot
be worn correctly.
If a child is traveling in your vehicle, also
observe the following notes:
R
Always secure children under twelve years of
age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable
child restraint systems.
R
Child restraint systems should be installed on
the rear seats.
R
Only secure a child in a rearward-facing child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat
when the front-passenger front air bag is
deactivated. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp is permanently lit, the front-
passenger front air bag is deactivated
(Y page 44).
R
Always observe the instructions and safety
notes on the "Occupant Classification System
(OCS)" (Y page 51) and on "Children in the
vehicle" (Y page 59) in addition to the child
restraint system manufacturer's installation
and operating instructions.
Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent
an air bag from functioning correctly. Before
starting your journey and to avoid risks resulting
from the speed of the air bag as it deploys, make
sure that:
R
there are no people, animals or objects
between the vehicle occupants and an air bag
R
there are no objects between the seat, door
and B-pillar
R
there are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers,
hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks
R
no accessories, such as cup holders, are
attached to the vehicle within the deployment
area of an air bag, e.g. to doors, side windows,
rear side trim or side walls
R
no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are in
the pockets of your clothing. Store such
objects in a suitable place
G
WARNING
If you modify the air bag cover or affix objects
such as stickers to it, the air bag can no longer
function correctly. There is an increased risk
of injury.
Never modify an air bag cover or affix objects
to it.
G
WARNING
Sensors to control the air bags are located in
the doors. Modifications or work not per-
formed correctly to the doors or door panel-
ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the
function of the sensors being impaired. The air
bags might therefore not function properly
anymore. Consequently, the air bags cannot
protect vehicle occupants as they are
designed to do. There is an increased risk of
injury.
Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.
Always have work on the doors or door pan-
eling carried out at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Front air bags
!
Do not place heavy objects on the front-
passenger seat. This could cause the system
to identify the seat as being occupied. In the
event of an accident, the restraint systems on
the front-passenger side may be triggered
and have to be replaced.
Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the steer-
ing wheel. Front-passenger front air bag ;
deploys in front of and above the glove box.
When deployed, the front air bags offer addi-
tional head and thorax protection for the occu-
pants in the front seats.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
informs you about the status of the front-
passenger front air bag (Y page 44).
Occupant safety
49
Safety
Z
background
The front-passenger front air bag will only
deploy if:
R
the system, based on the OCS weight sensor
readings, detects that the front-passenger
seat is occupied (Y page 51). The
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is
not lit (Y page 51)
R
the restraint system control unit predicts a
high accident severity
Driver's knee bag
Driver's knee bag : deploys under the steering
column. The driver's knee bag is deployed
together with the front air bag.
The driver's knee bag offers additional thigh,
knee and lower leg protection for the occupant
in the driver's seat.
Side impact air bags
G
WARNING
Unsuitable seat covers can obstruct or pre-
vent deployment of the air bags integrated
into the seats. Consequently, the air bags
cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are
designed to do. In addition, the operation of
the occupant classification system (OCS)
could be adversely affected. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
You should only use seat covers that have
been approved for the respective seat by
Mercedes-Benz.
Front side impact air bags : and rear side
impact air bags ; deploy next to the outer bol-
ster of the seat backrest.
When deployed, the side impact air bag offers
additional thorax protection. However, it does
not protect the:
R
head
R
neck
R
arms
If the restraint system control unit detects a side
impact, the side impact air bag is deployed on
the side on which the impact occurs.
The side impact air bag on the front passenger
side deploys under the following conditions:
R
the OCS system detects that the front
passenger seat is occupied or
R
the seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in the
belt buckle of the front passenger seat
If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle,
the side impact air bag on the front passenger
side deploys if an appropriate accident situation
occurs. In this case, deployment is independent
of whether the front passenger seat is occupied
or not.
Window curtain air bags
50
Occupant safety
Safety
background
Window curtain air bags : are integrated into
the side of the roof frame and deployed in the
area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.
When deployed, the window curtain air bag
enhances the level of protection for the head.
However, it does not protect the chest or arms.
If the restraint system control unit detects a side
impact, the window curtain air bag is deployed
on the side on which the impact occurs.
If the system determines that they can offer
additional protection to that provided by the
seat belt, a window curtain air bag may be
deployed in other accident situations
(Y page 55).
Occupant Classification System
(OCS)
Introduction
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) cat-
egorizes the person in the front-passenger seat.
Depending on that result, the front-passenger
front air bag is either enabled or deactivated.
The system does not deactivate:
R
the side impact air bag
R
the window curtain air bag
R
the Emergency Tensioning Devices
Requirements
To be classified correctly, the front passenger
must sit:
R
with the seat belt fastened correctly
R
in an almost upright position with their back
against the seat backrest
R
with their feet resting on the floor, if possible
If the front passenger does not observe these
conditions, OCS may produce a false classifica-
tion, e.g. because the front passenger:
R
transfers their weight by supporting them-
selves on a vehicle armrest
R
sits in such a way that their weight is raised
from the seat cushion
If it is absolutely necessary to install a child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat, be
sure to observe the correct positioning of the
child restraint system. Never place objects
under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. a
cushion. Fully retract the seat cushion length.
The entire base of the child restraint system
must always rest on the seat cushion of the
front-passenger seat. The backrest of the
forward-facing child restraint system must lie as
flat as possible against the backrest of the front-
passenger seat.
The child restraint system must not touch the
roof or be subjected to a load by the head
restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest
and the head restraint position accordingly.
Only then can OCS be guaranteed to function
correctly. Always observe the child restraint sys-
tem manufacturer's installation and operating
instructions.
Occupant Classification System opera-
tion (OCS)
:
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp
;
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
The indicator lamps inform you whether the
front-passenger front air bag is deactivated or
enabled.
X
Press the Start/Stop button once or twice, or
turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
The system carries out self-diagnostics.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER
AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simul-
taneously for approximately six seconds.
The indicator lamps display the status of the
front-passenger front air bag.
R
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 sec-
onds, subsequently both indicator lamps are
off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the
front-passenger front air bag is able to deploy
in the event of an accident.
R
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the front-
passenger front air bag is deactivated. It will
then not be deployed in the event of an acci-
dent.
Occupant safety
51
Safety
Z
background
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is
off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp shows the status of the front-passenger
front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.
If the status of the front-passenger front air bag
changes while the vehicle is in motion, an air bag
display message appears in the instrument clus-
ter (Y page 237). When the front-passenger
seat is occupied, always pay attention to the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp. Be
aware of the status of the front-passenger front
air bag both before and during the journey.
G
WARNING
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag is
disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of
an accident and cannot perform its intended
protective function. A person in the front-
passenger seat could then, for example, come
into contact with the vehicle's interior, espe-
cially if the person is sitting too close to the
dashboard. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
When the front-passenger seat is occupied,
always ensure that:
R
the classification of the person in the front-
passenger seat is correct and the front-
passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-
bled in accordance with the person in the
front-passenger seat
R
the front-passenger seat has been moved
back as far back as possible.
R
the person is seated correctly.
Make sure, both before and during the jour-
ney, that the status of the front-passenger
front air bag is correct.
G
WARNING
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat
and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is off, the front-passenger front air bag
can deploy in the event of an accident. The
child could be struck by the air bag. This poses
an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Make sure that the front-passenger front air
bag has been deactivated. The PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint
on a seat protected by an ACTIVE FRONT AIR-
BAG in front of it; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY
to the child can occur.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
stays off, do not install a rearward-facing child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat.
You can find more information on OCS under
"Problems with the Occupant Classification Sys-
tem" (Y page 54).
G
WARNING
If you secure a child in a forward-facing child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat
and you position the front-passenger seat too
close to the dashboard, in the event of an
accident, the child could:
R
come into contact with the vehicle's inte-
rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-
cator lamp is lit, for example
R
be struck by the air bag if the PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off
This poses an increased risk of injury or even
fatal injury.
Always move the front-passenger seat as far
back as possible and fully retract the seat
cushion length. Always make sure that the
shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from
the vehicle belt sash guide to the shoulder
belt guide on the child restraint system. The
shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards
and downwards from the vehicle belt sash
guide. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt
sash guide and the front-passenger seat
accordingly. Always observe the child
restraint system manufacturer's installation
instructions.
If OCS determines that:
R
The front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
lights up after the system self-test and
52
Occupant safety
Safety
background
remains lit. This indicates that the front-
passenger front air bag is deactivated.
R
The front-passenger seat is occupied by a
child of up to twelve months old, in a standard
child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the
system self-test and remains lit. This indi-
cates that the front-passenger front air bag is
deactivated.
But even in the case of a twelve-month-old
child, in a standard child restraint system, the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp can
go out after the system self-test. This indi-
cates that the front-passenger front air bag is
activated. The result of the classification is
dependent on, among other factors, the child
restraint system and the child's stature. It is
recommended that you install the child
restraint system on a suitable rear seat.
R
The front-passenger seat is occupied by a
person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or
small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp lights up and remains lit after
the system self-test depending on the result
of the classification or, alternatively, goes out.
-
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is off, move the front-passenger seat
as far back as possible. Alternatively, a per-
son of smaller stature can sit on a rear seat.
-
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit, a person of smaller stature
should not use the front-passenger seat.
R
The front-passenger seat is occupied by an
adult or a person of adult stature, the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
goes out after the system self-test. This indi-
cates that the front-passenger front air bag is
activated.
If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to
observe the notes on "Children in the vehicle"
(Y page 59).
When the Occupant Classification System
(OCS) is malfunctioning, the red 6 restraint
system warning lamp on the instrument cluster
and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp light up simultaneously. The front-
passenger front air bag is deactivated in this
case and does not deploy during an accident.
Have the Occupant Classification System (OCS)
checked and repaired immediately at a qualified
specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you use an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center for this purpose.
If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or the
seat cushion are damaged, have the necessary
repair work carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that
you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for this purpose.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only use seat accessories that
have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not
mean that the front-passenger front air bag will
also deploy. The Occupant Classification Sys-
tem (OCS) categorizes the occupant on the
front-passenger seat. Depending on that result,
the front-passenger front air bag is either ena-
bled or deactivated.
Self-check
G
DANGER
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps do
not both light up during the self-test, the sys-
tem is malfunctioning. The front-passenger
front air bag might be triggered unintention-
ally or might not be triggered at all in the event
of an accident with high deceleration. This
poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal
injury.
In this case the front-passenger seat may not
be used. Do not install a child restraint system
on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occu-
pant Classification System (OCS) checked
and repaired immediately at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
G
WARNING
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit after the self-test, the front-
passenger front air bag is deactivated. It will
not be deployed in the event of an accident. In
this case, the front-passenger front air bag
cannot perform its intended protective func-
tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front-
passenger seat.
That person could, for example, come into
contact with the vehicle's interior, especially
if the person is sitting too close to the dash-
Occupant safety
53
Safety
Z
background
board. This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
When the front-passenger seat is occupied,
always ensure that:
R
the classification of the person in the front-
passenger seat is correct and the front-
passenger front air bag is enabled or deac-
tivated in accordance with the person in the
front-passenger seat
R
the person is seated properly with a cor-
rectly fastened seatbelt
R
the front-passenger seat has been moved
as far back as possible
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit when it should not, the front-
passenger seat must not be used. Do not
install a child restraint system on the front-
passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classifi-
cation System (OCS) checked and repaired
immediately at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
G
WARNING
Objects between the seat surface and the
child restraint system could affect OCS oper-
ation. This could result in the front-passenger
air bag not functioning as intended during an
accident. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
Do not place any objects between the seat
surface and the child restraint system. The
entire base of the child restraint system must
always rest on the seat cushion of the front-
passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-
facing child restraint system must, as far as
possible, be resting on the backrest of the
front-passenger seat. Always comply with the
child restraint system manufacturer's instal-
lation instructions.
After the self-test, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp
displays the status of the front-passenger front
air bag (Y page 51). If the front-passenger front
air bag is enabled, the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON
indicator lamp lights up for 60 seconds and then
goes out.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is
off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp displays the status of the front-passenger
front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.
For more information about the OCS, see "Prob-
lems with the Occupant Classification System"
(Y page 54).
Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)
Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 53).
54
Occupant safety
Safety
background
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp
lights up and remains lit,
even though the front-
passenger seat is occu-
pied by an adult or a per-
son of a stature corre-
sponding to that of an
adult.
The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is incor-
rect.
X
Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the person
on the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 51).
X
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the front-
passenger seat may not be used.
X
Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
The PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp
does not light up and/or
does not stay on.
The front-passenger seat
is:
R
unoccupied
R
occupied by the
weight of a child up to
twelve months old in a
child restraint system
OCS is malfunctioning.
X
Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the child
seat.
X
Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests on
the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the
forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possible
against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If necessary,
adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.
X
Make sure that the seat cushion length is fully retracted.
X
When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seat
belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front-passenger
seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and the child
restraint system being pulled too tightly.
X
Check for correct installation of the child restraint system.
Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the child
restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint accord-
ingly.
X
Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto the
seat.
X
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/or
the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not install
a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. It is recom-
mended that you install the child restraint system on a suitable rear
seat.
X
Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
Deployment of Emergency Tensioning
Devices and air bags
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has
been deployed. There is a risk of injury.
Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a
deployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop as soon as possible.
G
WARNING
A deployed air bag no longer offers any pro-
tection and cannot provide the intended pro-
tection in an accident. There is an increased
risk of injury.
Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special-
ist workshop in order to have a deployed air
bag replaced.
It is important for your safety and that of your
passenger to have deployed air bags replaced
Occupant safety
55
Safety
Z
background
and to have any malfunctioning air bags
repaired. This will help to make sure the air bags
continue to perform their protective function for
the vehicle occupants in the event of a crash.
G
WARNING
Emergency Tensioning Devices that have
deployed pyrotechnically are no longer opera-
tional and are unable to perform their inten-
ded protective function. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Have pyrotechnically triggered Emergency
Tensioning Devices replaced immediately at a
qualified specialist workshop.
An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE
®
to trig-
ger the tightening of the seat belt in hazardous
situations. This procedure is reversible.
If Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggered
or air bags are deployed, you will hear a bang,
and some powder may also be released. The
6 restraint system warning lamp lights up.
Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hear-
ing. The powder that is released generally does
not constitute a health hazard, but it may cause
short-term breathing difficulties in people with
asthma or other respiratory problems. Provided
it is safe to do so, you should leave the vehicle
immediately or open the window in order to pre-
vent breathing difficulties.
Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning
Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material,
which may require special handling and regard
for the environment. National guidelines must
be observed during disposal. In California, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/
Perchlorate/index.cfm.
Method of operation
During the first stage of a collision, the restraint
system control unit evaluates important physi-
cal data relating to vehicle deceleration or accel-
eration, such as:
R
duration
R
direction
R
intensity
Based on the evaluation of this data, the
restraint system control unit triggers the Emer-
gency Tensioning Devices during a head-on or
rear-end collision.
An Emergency Tensioning Device can only be
triggered, if:
R
the ignition is switched on
R
the components of the restraint system are
operational. You can find further information
under "Restraint system warning lamp"
(Y page 44)
R
the seat belt buckle tongue has engaged in
the belt buckle of the respective front seat
The Emergency Tensioning Devices in the rear
passenger compartment are triggered inde-
pendently of the lock status of the seat belts.
If the restraint system control unit detects a
more severe accident, further components of
the restraint system are activated independ-
ently of each other in certain frontal collision
situations:
R
Front air bags and driver's knee bag
R
Window curtain air bag, if the system deter-
mines that deployment can offer additional
protection to that provided by the seat belt
Depending on the person in the front-passenger
seat, the front-passenger front air bag is either
disabled or enabled. The front-passenger front
air bag can be deployed in an accident only if the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off.
Observe the information on the PASSENGER AIR
BAG indicator lamps (Y page 44).
Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags. At the
first deployment threshold the front air bag fills
with gas. If the second deployment threshold is
then reached within a few milliseconds, the front
air bag is filled with the maximum quantity of
gas.
The activation threshold of the Emergency Ten-
sioning Devices and the air bags is determined
by evaluating the rate of vehicle deceleration or
acceleration which occurs at various points in
the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in
nature. Deployment should take place in good
time at the start of the collision.
The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration
and the direction of the force are essentially
determined by:
R
the distribution of forces during the collision
R
the collision angle
R
the deformation characteristics of the vehicle
R
the characteristics of the object with which
the vehicle has collided
Factors which can only be seen and measured
after a collision has occurred do not play a deci-
sive role in the deployment of an air bag. Nor do
56
Occupant safety
Safety
background
they provide an indication of air bag deploy-
ment.
The vehicle can be deformed considerably, with-
out an air bag being deployed. This is the case if
only parts which are relatively easily deformed
are affected and the rate of deceleration is not
high. Conversely, air bags may be deployed even
though the vehicle suffers only minor deforma-
tion. This is the case if, for example, very rigid
vehicle parts such as longitudinal body mem-
bers are hit, and sufficient deceleration occurs
as a result.
If the restraint system control unit detects a side
impact or if the vehicle rolls over, the applicable
components of the restraint system are
deployed independently of each other depend-
ing on the apparent type of accident.
R
Side impact air bags on the side where the
impact takes place, independently of the
Emergency Tensioning Device and the use of
the seat belt on the driver's seat and outer
seats in the second row
The side impact air bag on the front-
passenger side deploys under the following
conditions:
-
the OCS system detects that the front-
passenger seat is occupied or
-
the seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in
the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat
R
Window curtain air bag on the side of impact,
independently of the use of the seat belt and
independently of whether the front-
passenger seat is occupied
R
Front Emergency Tensioning Devices, if the
system determines that deployment can offer
additional protection for the vehicle occu-
pants in this situation
R
Rear passenger compartment Emergency
Tensioning Devices in certain situations if the
vehicle rolls over
R
Window curtain air bags on the driver's and
front-passenger side in certain situations
when the vehicle rolls over, if the system
determines that deployment can offer addi-
tional protection to that provided by the seat
belt
i
Not all air bags are deployed in an accident.
The different air bag systems work independ-
ently of each other.
How the air bag system works is determined
by the severity of the accident detected,
especially the vehicle deceleration or accel-
eration and the apparent type of accident:
R
Head-on collision
R
Side impact
R
Rollover
PRE-SAFE
®
(anticipatory occupant
protection system)
Introduction
In certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE
®
takes pre-emptive measures to protect the vehi-
cle occupants.
Important safety notes
!
Make sure that there are no objects in the
footwell or behind the seats. There is a danger
that the seats and/or objects could be dam-
aged when PRE-SAFE
®
is activated.
Despite your vehicle being equipped with the
PRE-SAFE
®
system, the possibility of personal
injuries occurring as a result of an accident can-
not be eliminated. Always adapt your driving
style to suit the prevailing road and weather
conditions and maintain a safe distance from
the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.
Function
PRE-SAFE
®
intervenes:
R
in emergency braking situations, e.g. when
BAS is activated
R
in critical driving situations, e.g. when physi-
cal limits are exceeded and the vehicle under-
steers or oversteers severely
R
vehicles with the Driving Assistance package:
when a driver assistance system intervenes
powerfully or the radar sensor system detects
an imminent danger of collision in certain sit-
uations
Occupant safety
57
Safety
Z
background
PRE-SAFE
®
takes the following measures
depending on the hazardous situation detected:
R
the front seat belts are pre-tensioned.
R
if the vehicle skids, the side windows and the
sliding sunroof are closed.
R
vehicles with the memory function for the
front-passenger seat: the front-passenger
seat is adjusted if it is in an unfavorable posi-
tion.
If the hazardous situation passes without result-
ing in an accident, PRE-SAFE
®
slackens the belt
pre-tensioning. All settings made by PRE-SAFE
®
can then be reversed.
If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced:
X
Move the seat backrest or seat back slightly
when the vehicle is stationary.
The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and
the locking mechanism is released.
The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of
the PRE-SAFE
®
convenience function. Informa-
tion about the convenience function can be
found under "Belt adjustment" (Y page 47).
PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS (anticipatory occu-
pant protection system PLUS)
Introduction
PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS is only available in vehicles
with the Driving Assistance package.
Using the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS is able to detect that a frontal or rear-end
collision is imminent. In certain hazardous sit-
uations, PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS takes pre-emptive
measures to protect the vehicle occupants.
Important safety notes
The intervention of PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS cannot
prevent an imminent collision.
The driver is not warned about the intervention
of PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS.
PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS does not intervene:
R
if the vehicle is backing up
R
when the vehicle is towing a trailer and there
is a risk of a rear-end collision
When driving, or when parking or exiting a park-
ing space using Active Parking Assist, PRE-
SAFE
®
PLUS will not apply the brakes.
Function
PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS intervenes in certain situa-
tions if the radar sensor system detects an
imminent frontal or rear-end collision.
PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS takes the following measures
depending on the hazardous situation detected:
R
if the radar sensor system detects that a
head-on collision is imminent, the seat belts
are pre-tensioned.
R
if the radar sensor system detects that a rear-
end collision is imminent:
-
the brake pressure is increased if the driver
applies the brakes when the vehicle is sta-
tionary.
-
the seat belts are pre-tensioned.
The PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS braking application is can-
celed:
R
if the accelerator pedal is depressed when a
gear is engaged
R
if the risk of a collision passes or is no longer
detected
R
if Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC indicates
an intention to intervene
If the hazardous situation passes without result-
ing in an accident, the original settings are
restored.
Automatic measures after an acci-
dent
Immediately after an accident, the following
measures are implemented, depending on the
type and severity of the impact:
R
the hazard warning lamps are switched on
R
the emergency lighting is activated
R
the vehicle doors are unlocked
R
the front side windows are lowered
R
vehicles with a memory function: the electri-
cally adjustable steering wheel is raised when
the driver's door is opened
R
the engine is switched off and the fuel supply
is cut off
R
vehicles with mbrace: automatic emergency
call
58
Occupant safety
Safety
background
Children in the vehicle
Important safety notes
Accident statistics show that children secured
in the rear seats are safer than children secured
in the front-passenger seat. For this reason,
Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install
a child restraint system on a rear seat. Children
are generally better protected there.
If a child younger than twelve years old and
under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the
vehicle:
R
always secure the child in a child restraint
system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
The child restraint system must be appropri-
ate to the age, weight and size of the child.
R
be sure to observe the instructions and safety
notes in this section in addition to the child
restraint system manufacturer's installation
instructions.
R
always observe the instructions and safety
notes on the "Occupant classification system
(OCS)". (Y page 51)
G
WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
R
release the parking brake.
R
shift the automatic transmission out of the
parking position P.
R
start the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
G
WARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjected
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
G
WARNING
If the child restraint system is subjected to
direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-
dren may burn themselves on these parts,
particularly on the metal parts of the child
restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
you, always ensure that the child restraint
system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-
tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child
restraint system has been exposed to direct
sunlight, let it cool down before securing the
child in it. Never leave children unattended in
the vehicle.
Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have
their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting
properly. Particular attention must be paid to
children.
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
(Y page 45)and the notes on correct use of seat
belts (Y page 46).
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
proper seat belt positioning for children over
40 lbs(18 kg) until they reach a height where a
three-point seat belt can be properly fastened
without a booster seat.
Special seatbelt retractor
G
WARNING
If the seat belt is released while driving, the
child restraint system will no longer be
secured properly. The special seat belt retrac-
tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in a
portion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannot
be immediately refastened. There is an
increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-
tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate
the special seat belt retractor and secure the
child restraint system properly.
All seat belts in the vehicle, except the driver's
seat belt, are equipped with a special seat belt
retractor. When activated, the special seat belt
retractor ensures that the seat belt cannot
slacken once the child seat is secured.
Children in the vehicle
59
Safety
Z
background
Installing a child restraint system:
X
Make sure you observe the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation instruc-
tions.
X
Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt out-
let.
X
Engage seat belt tongue in belt buckle.
Activating the special seat belt retractor:
X
Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia
reel retract it again.
While the seat belt is retracting, you should
hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat belt
retractor is enabled.
X
Push the child restraint system down so that
the seat belt is tight and does not loosen.
Removing the child restraint system and deac-
tivating the special seat belt retractor:
X
Make sure you observe the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation instruc-
tions.
X
Press the release button of the seat belt
buckle and guide the seat belt tongue back
towards the belt sash guide.
The special seat belt retractor is deactivated.
Child restraint system
The use of seat belts and child restraint systems
is required by law in:
R
all 50 states
R
the U.S. territories
R
the District of Columbia
R
all Canadian provinces
You can obtain further information about the
correct child restraint system from any author-
ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
G
WARNING
If the child restraint system is installed incor-
rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as
intended. The child cannot then be restrained
in the event of an accident, heavy braking or
sudden changes of direction. There is an
increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Make sure that you observe the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation instruc-
tions and the notes on use. Please ensure,
that the base of the child restraint system is
always resting completely on the seat cush-
ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under
or behind the child restraint system. Only use
child restraint systems with the original cover
designed for them. Only replace damaged
covers with genuine covers.
G
WARNING
If the child restraint system is installed incor-
rectly or is not secured, it can come loose in
the event of an accident, heavy braking or a
sudden change in direction. The child
restraint system could be thrown about, strik-
ing vehicle occupants. There is an increased
risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Always install child restraint systems prop-
erly, even if they are not being used. Make
sure that you observe the child restraint sys-
tem manufacturer's installation instructions.
You will find further information on stowing
objects, luggage or loads under "Loading guide-
lines" (Y page 278).
G
WARNING
Child restraint systems or their securing sys-
tems which have been damaged or subjected
to a load in an accident can no longer protect
as intended. The child cannot then be
restrained in the event of an accident, heavy
braking or sudden changes of direction. There
is an increased risk of injury, possibly even
fatal.
Replace child restraint systems which have
been damaged or subjected to a load in an
accident as soon as possible. Have the secur-
ing systems on the child restraint system
checked at a qualified specialist workshop,
before you install a child restraint system
again.
The securing systems of child restraint systems
are:
R
the seat belt system
R
the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings
R
the Top Tether anchorages
If it is absolutely necessary to carry a child on
the front passenger seat, be sure to observe the
60
Children in the vehicle
Safety
background
information on the "Occupant Classification
System (OCS)" (Y page 51). There you will also
find information on disabling the front
passenger front air bag.
All child restraint systems must meet the fol-
lowing standards:
R
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 225
R
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 210.2
Confirmation that the child restraint system cor-
responds to the standards can be found on an
instruction label on the child restraint system.
This confirmation can also be found in the instal-
lation instructions that are included with the
child restraint system.
Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte-
rior and on the child restraint system.
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur-
ing system
G
WARNING
For LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint sys-
tems in which the child is secured using the
safety belt integrated in the child restraint
system, the maximum permissible weight of
the child and child restraint system together
is 73 lbs (33 kg).
If the child and the child restraint system
together weigh more than 73 lbs (33 kg), the
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system
with integrated safety belt no longer offers
sufficient protection. The LATCH-type (ISO-
FIX) child seat securing system may be over-
loaded, and the child may not be restrained in
an accident, for example. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
If the child and the child restraint system
together weigh more than 73 lbs (33 kg), use
only a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint sys-
tem in which the child is also secured with the
vehicle seat belt. Also secure the child
restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if
available.
Regularly check that the permissible gross
weight of the child together with the child
restraint system is still maintained.
Always comply with the manufacturer's instal-
lation and operating instructions for the child
restraint system used.
Before every trip, make sure that the LATCH-
type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged
correctly in both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing
rings
!
When installing the child restraint system,
make sure that the seat belt for the middle
seat does not get trapped. The seat belt could
otherwise be damaged.
Vehicles with rear seat armrest: adjust the
rear seat armrest so that LATCH-type (ISOFIX)
securing rings : for the LATCH-type (ISOFIX)
child restraint system are accessible.
X
Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
system on both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing
rings :.
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) is a standardized securing
system for specially designed child restraint
systems on the rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX)
securing rings for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint systems are installed on the left and
right of the rear seats.
Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may also
be used and can be installed using the vehicle's
seat belt system. Install the child seat according
to the manufacturer's instructions.
Top Tether
Introduction
Top Tether provides an additional connection
between the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
system secured with a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) sys-
Children in the vehicle
61
Safety
Z
background
tem and the vehicle. This helps reduce the risk of
injury even further. If the child restraint system
is equipped with a Top Tether belt, this should
always be used.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they
could fold forwards in the event of an acci-
dent, heavy braking or sudden changes of
direction. As a result, child restraint systems
cannot perform their intended protective
function. Rear seat backrests that are not
locked can also cause additional injuries, e.g.
in the event of an accident. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Always lock rear seat backrests after instal-
ling a Top Tether belt. Observe the lock veri-
fication indicator.
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and
locked, this will be shown in the multifunction
display in the instrument cluster.
Top Tether anchorages
Top Tether anchorage points ? are located on
the rear side of the rear seat backrests.
X
Move head restraint : upwards.
X
Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
system with Top Tether. Always comply with
the child restraint system manufacturer's
installation instructions when doing so.
X
Route Top Tether belt B under head
restraint : between the two head restraint
bars.
X
Guide Top Tether belt B down between cargo
compartment cover = and seat backrest ;.
X
Hook Top Tether hook A into Top Tether
anchorage ? on the back of seat back-
rest ;.
X
Make sure that Top Tether belt B is not twis-
ted.
X
Tension Top Tether belt B. Always comply
with the child restraint system manufactur-
er's installation instructions when doing so.
X
Move head restraint : back down again
slightly if necessary (Y page 99). Make sure
that you do not interfere with the correct rout-
ing of Top Tether belt B.
Child restraint system on the front
passenger seat
General notes
Accident statistics show that children secured
in the rear seats are safer than children secured
in the front-passenger seat. For this reason,
Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install
the child restraint system on a rear seat.
If it is absolutely necessary to install a child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat,
always observe the instructions and safety
notes on the "Occupant Classification System
(OCS)" (Y page 51).
62
Children in the vehicle
Safety
background
You can thus avoid the risks that could arise as
a result of:
R
an incorrectly categorized person in the front-
passenger seat
R
deactivating the front passenger front air bag
unintentionally
R
the unsuitable positioning of the child
restraint system, e.g. too close to the dash-
board
Rearward-facing child restraint system
If circumstances require you to secure a child in
a rearward-facing child restraint system on the
front-passenger seat, always make sure that the
front passenger front air bag is deactivated.
Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit continuously (Y page 44), is the front
passenger front air bag deactivated.
Always observe the child restraint system man-
ufacturer's installation and operating instruc-
tions.
Forward-facing child restraint system
If it is absolutely necessary to install a forward-
facing child restraint system on the front-
passenger seat, always move the front-
passenger seat as far back as possible. Fully
retract the seat cushion length. The entire base
of the child restraint system must always rest on
the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat.
The backrest of the child restraint system must
lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the
front-passenger seat. The child restraint system
must not touch the roof or be subjected to a load
by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the
seat backrest and the head restraint position
accordingly. Always make sure that the shoul-
der belt strap is correctly routed from the vehi-
cle belt outlet to the shoulder belt guide on the
child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap
must be routed forward and down from the vehi-
cle belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the vehicle
belt outlet and the front-passenger seat accord-
ingly.
Always observe the child restraint system man-
ufacturer's installation and operating instruc-
tions.
Child-proof locks
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If children are traveling in the vehicle, they
could:
R
open doors, thus endangering other people
or road users
R
exit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming
traffic
R
operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Always activate the child-proof locks and
override feature if children are traveling in the
vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Override feature for:
R
the rear doors (Y page 64)
R
the rear side windows (Y page 64)
G
WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
R
release the parking brake.
R
shift the automatic transmission out of the
parking position P.
R
start the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
G
WARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjected
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
Children in the vehicle
63
Safety
Z
background
G
WARNING
If the child restraint system is subjected to
direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-
dren may burn themselves on these parts,
particularly on the metal parts of the child
restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
you, always ensure that the child restraint
system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-
tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child
restraint system has been exposed to direct
sunlight, let it cool down before securing the
child in it. Never leave children unattended in
the vehicle.
Child-proof locks for the rear doors
You secure each door individually with the child-
proof locks on the rear doors. A door secured
with a child-proof lock cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle. When the vehicle is unlocked,
the door can be opened from the outside.
X
To activate: press the child-proof lock lever
up in the direction of arrow :.
X
Make sure that the child-proof locks are work-
ing properly.
X
To deactivate: press the child-proof lock
lever down in the direction of arrow ;.
Child-proof locks for the rear side win-
dows
X
To enable/disable: press button ;.
If indicator lamp : is lit, operation of the rear
side windows is disabled. Operation is only
possible using the switches in the driver's
door. If indicator lamp : is off, operation is
possible using the switches in the rear com-
partment.
Pets in the vehicle
G
WARNING
If you leave animals unsupervised or unse-
cured in the vehicle, they may press buttons
or switches, for instance.
In this way, animals may:
R
activate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example
R
switch systems on or off and thereby
endanger other road users
Furthermore, unsecured animals may be flung
around inside the vehicle in the event of an
accident or abrupt steering or braking maneu-
ver, and thereby injure vehicle occupants.
There is a risk of accident and injury.
Never leave animals unattended in the vehi-
cle.
Always secure animals properly when driving,
for instance with a suitable pet carrier.
64
Pets in the vehicle
Safety
background
Driving safety systems
Overview of driving safety systems
In this section, you will find information about
the following driving safety systems:
R
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
(Y page 65)
R
BAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 66)
R
Active Brake Assist (Y page 66)
R
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program)
(Y page 68)
R
EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)
(Y page 72)
R
ADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 72)
R
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
(Y page 72)
R
STEER CONTROL (Y page 75)
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are
inattentive, the driving safety systems can nei-
ther reduce the risk of an accident nor override
the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are
merely aids designed to assist driving. You are
responsible for maintaining the distance to the
vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in
good time, and for staying in lane. Always adapt
your driving style to suit the prevailing road and
weather conditions and maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.
The driving safety systems described only work
as effectively as possible when there is ade-
quate contact between the tires and the road
surface. Pay particular attention to the informa-
tion regarding tires, recommended minimum
tire tread depths etc. in the "Wheels and tires"
section (Y page 330).
In wintry driving conditions, always use winter
tires (M+S tires)and if necessary, snow chains.
Only in this way will the driving safety systems
described in this section work as effectively as
possible.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
General information
ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that
the wheels do not lock when you brake. This
allows you to continue steering the vehicle when
braking.
The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when the ignition is switched
on. It goes out when the engine is running.
ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph
(8 km/h), regardless of road-surface conditions.
ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you
only brake gently.
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 65).
G
WARNING
If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when
braking. The steerability and braking charac-
teristics may be severely impaired. Addition-
ally, further driving safety systems are deac-
tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-
ding and accidents.
Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-
diately at a qualified specialist workshop.
When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,
including driving safety systems, will also
become inoperative. Observe the information
on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 259) and dis-
play messages which may be shown in the
instrument cluster (Y page 228).
Braking
X
If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the
brake pedal vigorously until the braking sit-
uation is over.
X
To make a full brake application: depress
the brake pedal with full force.
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a
pulsing in the brake pedal.
The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication
of hazardous road conditions, and functions as a
reminder to take extra care while driving.
Driving safety systems
65
Safety
Z
background
BAS (Brake Assist System)
General information
BAS operates in emergency braking situations.
If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS
automatically boosts the braking force, thus
shortening the stopping distance.
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 65).
G
WARNING
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance
in an emergency braking situation is
increased. There is a risk of an accident.
In an emergency braking situation, depress
the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents
the wheels from locking.
Braking
X
Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until
the emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The brakes will function as usual once you
release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
Active Brake Assist
General information
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 65).
Active Brake Assist consists of a distance warn-
ing function with an autonomous braking func-
tion and Adaptive Brake Assist.
Active Brake Assist can help you to minimize the
risk of a collision with the vehicle traveling in
front or reduce the effects of such a collision.
If Active Brake Assist detects that there is a risk
of collision, you will be warned visually and
acoustically. If you do not react to the visual and
audible collision warning, autonomous braking
can be initiated in critical situations. If you apply
the brake yourself in a critical situation, Adap-
tive Brake Assist of the Active Brake Assist sys-
tem supports you.
Important safety notes
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
impaired if:
R
There is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
R
There is snow or heavy rain
R
There is interference by other radar sources
R
There are strong radar reflections, for exam-
ple in parking garages
R
A narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a
motorbike
R
A vehicle is traveling in front on a different line
R
You are driving a new vehicle or servicing on
the Active Brake Assist system has just been
carried out
Observe the important safety notes in the
"Breaking-in notes" section (Y page 130).
Following damage to the front end of the vehicle,
have the configuration and operation of the
radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist
workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow
speeds where there is no visible damage to the
front of the vehicle.
Activating/deactivating
Active Brake Assist is automatically active after
switching on the ignition.
You can activate or deactivate Active Brake
Assist (Y page 220) in the on-board computer.
When deactivated, the distance warning func-
tion and the autonomous braking function are
also deactivated.
If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the æ
symbol appears on the assistant display.
Distance warning function
General information
The distance warning function can help you to
minimize the risk of a front-end collision with a
vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a
collision. If the distance warning function
detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will
be warned visually and acoustically.
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion for driving safety systems (Y page 65).
66
Driving safety systems
Safety
background
G
WARNING
The distance warning function does not react:
R
to people or animals
R
to oncoming vehicles
R
to crossing traffic
R
when cornering
The distance warning function may not give
warnings in all critical situations. There is a
risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
uation and be ready to brake.
Always adapt your speed to suit the prevailing
road and traffic conditions.
G
WARNING
The distance warning function cannot always
clearly identify objects and complex traffic
situations.
In such cases, the distance warning function
may:
R
give an unnecessary warning
R
not give a warning
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
uation and do not rely solely on the distance
warning function.
Function
Starting at a speed of approximately 4 mph
(7 km/h), the distance warning function warns
you if you are rapidly approaching a vehicle in
front. An intermittent warning tone will then
sound, and the · distance warning lamp will
light up in the instrument cluster.
X
Brake immediately in order to increase the
distance from the vehicle in front.
or
X
Take evasive action, provided it is safe to do
so.
Due to the nature of the system, particularly
complicated but non-critical driving conditions
may also cause the system to display a warning.
With the help of the radar sensor system, the
distance warning function can detect obstacles
that are in the path of your vehicle for an exten-
ded period of time.
Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph
(70 km/h), the distance warning function can
also react to stationary obstacles, such as stop-
ped or parked vehicles.
Autonomous braking function
If the driver does not react to the distance warn-
ing signal in a critical situation, Active Brake
Assist can assist the driver with the autonomous
braking function.
Vehicles without Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC: the autonomous braking function
is available in the following speed ranges:
R
4–65 mph (7–105 km/h) for moving objects
R
4–31 mph (7–50 km/h) for stationary objects
Vehicles with Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC: the autonomous braking function
is available in the following speed ranges:
R
4–124 mph (7–200 km/h) for moving objects
R
4–31 mph (7–50 km/h) for stationary objects
Due to the nature of the system, particularly
complicated but non-critical driving conditions
may also cause the autonomous braking func-
tion to intervene.
If the autonomous braking function requires a
particularly high braking force, preventative
passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE
®
)
are activated simultaneously (Y page 57).
Adaptive Brake Assist
General information
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 65).
With the help of adaptive Brake Assist, the dis-
tance warning signal can detect obstacles that
are in the path of your vehicle for an extended
period of time.
If adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of colli-
sion with the vehicle in front, it calculates the
braking force necessary to avoid a collision. If
you apply the brakes forcefully, adaptive Brake
Assist will automatically increase the braking
force to a level suitable for the traffic conditions.
Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking assis-
tance in hazardous situations at speeds above
4 mph (7 km/h). It uses radar sensor technology
to assess the traffic situation.
Up to a speed of approximately 155 mph
(250 km/h), Adaptive Brake Assist is capable of
Driving safety systems
67
Safety
Z
background
reacting to moving objects that have already
been detected as such at least once over the
period of observation.
Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph
(70 km/h), Adaptive Brake Assist reacts to sta-
tionary obstacles.
If adaptive Brake Assist demands particularly
high braking force, preventative passenger pro-
tection measures (PRE-SAFE
®
) are activated
simultaneously (Y page 57).
X
Keep the brake pedal depressed until the
emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The brakes will work normally again if:
R
you release the brake pedal
R
there is no longer any danger of a collision
R
no obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle
Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion for driving safety systems (Y page 65).
G
WARNING
Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly
identify objects and complex traffic situa-
tions.
In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can:
R
intervene unnecessarily
R
not intervene
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
uation and be ready to brake. Terminate the
intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
G
WARNING
Adaptive Brake Assist does not react:
R
to people or animals
R
to oncoming vehicles
R
to crossing traffic
R
when cornering
As a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may not
intervene in all critical conditions. There is a
risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
uation and be ready to brake.
Always adapt your speed to suit the prevailing
road and traffic conditions.
Due to the nature of the system, particularly
complicated but non-critical driving conditions
may also cause Brake Assist to intervene.
If adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to a
malfunction in the radar sensor system, the
brake system remains available with full brake
boosting effect and BAS.
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program)
General notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 65).
ESP
®
monitors driving stability and traction, i.e.
power transmission between the tires and the
road surface.
If ESP
®
detects that the vehicle is deviating from
the direction desired by the driver, one or more
wheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. The
engine output is also modified to keep the vehi-
cle on the desired course within physical limits.
ESP
®
assists the driver when pulling away on
wet or slippery roads. ESP
®
can also stabilize
the vehicle during braking.
4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 65).
ETS traction control is part of ESP
®
. On vehicles
with 4MATIC, 4ETS is part of ESP
®
.
Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi-
vidually if they spin. This enables you to pull
away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for
example if the road surface is slippery on one
side. In addition, more drive torque is transfer-
red to the wheel or wheels with traction.
Traction control remains active, even if you
deactivate ESP
®
.
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 65).
68
Driving safety systems
Safety
background
G
WARNING
If ESP
®
is malfunctioning, ESP
®
is unable to
stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv-
ing safety systems are deactivated. This
increases the risk of skidding and an accident.
Drive on carefully. Have ESP
®
checked at a
qualified specialist workshop.
If the å ESP
®
OFF warning lamp lights up
continuously, ESP
®
is deactivated.
If the ÷ ESP
®
warning lamp lights up contin-
uously, ESP
®
is not available due to a malfunc-
tion.
Observe the information on warning lamps
(Y page 259) and display messages which may
be shown in the instrument cluster
(Y page 228).
Only use wheels with the recommended tire
sizes. Only then will ESP
®
function properly.
Characteristics of ESP
®
General information
If the ÷ ESP
®
warning lamp goes out before
beginning the journey, ESP
®
is automatically
active.
If ESP
®
intervenes, the ÷ ESP
®
warning lamp
flashes in the instrument cluster.
If ESP
®
intervenes:
X
Do not deactivate ESP
®
under any circum-
stances.
X
Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as
necessary when pulling away.
X
Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing
road and weather conditions.
ECO start/stop function
The ECO start/stop function switches the
engine off automatically when the vehicle stops
moving. The engine starts automatically when
the driver wants to pull away again. ESP
®
remains in its previously selected status, e.g. if
ESP
®
was deactivated before the engine was
automatically switched off.
Deactivating/activating ESP
®
(except
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles)
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 65).
You can select between the following states of
ESP
®
:
R
ESP
®
is activated.
R
ESP
®
is deactivated.
G
WARNING
If you deactivate ESP
®
, ESP
®
no longer sta-
bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk
of skidding and an accident.
Only deactivate ESP
®
in the situations descri-
bed in the following.
It may be best to deactivate ESP
®
in the follow-
ing situations:
R
when using snow chains
R
in deep snow
R
on sand or gravel
Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action
which provides better grip.
i
Activate ESP
®
as soon as the situations
described above no longer apply. ESP
®
will
otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if
the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to
spin.
!
Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an
extended period with ESP
®
deactivated. You
could otherwise damage the drivetrain.
Deactivating/activating ESP
®
Driving safety systems
69
Safety
Z
background
X
To deactivate: press button :.
The å ESP
®
OFF warning lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up.
X
To activate: press button :.
The å ESP
®
OFF warning lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out.
Characteristics when ESP
®
is deactivated
If ESP
®
is deactivated and one or more wheels
start to spin, the ÷ ESP
®
warning lamp in the
instrument cluster flashes. In such situations,
ESP
®
will not stabilize the vehicle.
If you deactivate ESP
®
:
R
ESP
®
no longer improves driving stability.
R
Engine torque is no longer limited and the
drive wheels are able to spin.
R
Traction control is still activated.
R
Active Brake Assist is no longer available; nor
is it activated if you brake firmly with assis-
tance from ESP
®
.
R
PRE-SAFE
®
is no longer available, nor is it
activated if you brake firmly and ESP
®
inter-
venes.
R
PRE-SAFE
®
Brake is no longer available, it is
also not activated if you brake firmly and ESP
®
intervenes.
R
ESP
®
still provides support when you brake
firmly.
Deactivating/activating ESP
®
(Mercedes‑AMG vehicles)
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 65).
You can select between the following states of
ESP
®
:
R
ESP
®
is activated.
R
SPORT handling mode is activated.
R
ESP
®
is deactivated.
G
WARNING
When SPORT handling mode is activated,
there is a greater risk of skidding and acci-
dents.
Only activate SPORT handling mode in the sit-
uations described in the following.
G
WARNING
If you deactivate ESP
®
, ESP
®
no longer sta-
bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk
of skidding and an accident.
Only deactivate ESP
®
in the situations descri-
bed in the following.
!
Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an
extended period with ESP
®
deactivated. You
could otherwise damage the drivetrain.
In the following situations, it may be better to
activate SPORT handling mode or deactivate
ESP
®
:
R
when using snow chains
R
in deep snow
R
on sand or gravel
R
on specially designated roads when the vehi-
cle's own oversteering and understeering
characteristics are desired
Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action
which provides better grip.
Driving in SPORT handling mode or without
ESP
®
requires an extremely qualified and expe-
rienced driver.
i
Activate ESP
®
as soon as the situations
described above no longer apply. ESP
®
will
otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if
the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to
spin.
Deactivating/activating ESP
®
X
To activate SPORT handling mode: briefly
press button :.
The M SPORT handling mode warning
lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The
70
Driving safety systems
Safety
background
SPORTSPORT handlinghandling modemode message appears on
the multifunction display.
X
To deactivate SPORT handling mode:
briefly press button :.
The M SPORT handling mode warning
lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
X
To deactivate ESP
®
: press button : until
the å ESP
®
OFF warning lamp lights up in
the instrument cluster.
The ÷ OFFOFF message appears on the mul-
tifunction display.
X
To activate ESP
®
: briefly press button :.
The å ESP
®
OFF warning lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out. The ÷ ONON
message appears on the multifunction dis-
play.
Characteristics of activated SPORT han-
dling mode
If SPORT handling mode is activated and one or
more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP
®
warn-
ing lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. ESP
®
only stabilizes the vehicle to a limited degree.
When SPORT handling mode is activated:
R
ESP
®
only improves driving stability to a limi-
ted degree.
R
Traction control is still activated.
R
Engine torque is no longer limited and the
drive wheels are able to spin.
R
ESP
®
still provides support when you brake
firmly.
Characteristics when ESP
®
is deactivated
If ESP
®
is deactivated and one or more wheels
start to spin, the ÷ ESP
®
warning lamp in the
instrument cluster does not flash. In such situa-
tions, ESP
®
will not stabilize the vehicle.
If you deactivate ESP
®
:
R
ESP
®
no longer improves driving stability.
R
Engine torque is no longer limited and the
drive wheels are able to spin.
R
Traction control is still activated.
R
Active Brake Assist is no longer available; nor
is it activated if you brake firmly with assis-
tance from ESP
®
.
R
PRE-SAFE
®
is no longer available, nor is it
activated if you brake firmly and ESP
®
inter-
venes.
R
PRE-SAFE
®
Brake is no longer available, it is
also not activated if you brake firmly and ESP
®
intervenes.
R
ESP
®
still provides support when you brake
firmly.
ESP
®
trailer stabilization
General information
If your vehicle/trailer combination begins to
swerve, ESP
®
assists you in this situation. ESP
®
slows the vehicle down by braking and limiting
the engine output until the vehicle/trailer com-
bination has stabilized.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If road and weather conditions are poor,
trailer stabilization will not be able to prevent
the vehicle/trailer combination from swerv-
ing. Trailers with a high center of gravity can
tip over before ESP
®
can detect this. There is
a risk of an accident.
Always adapt your driving style to the prevail-
ing road and weather conditions.
If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailer com-
bination) begins to lurch, you can only stabilize
the vehicle/trailer combination by depressing
the brake firmly.
ESP
®
trailer stabilization is active above speeds
of approximately 40 mph (65 km/h).
ESP
®
trailer stabilization does not work if ESP
®
is deactivated or malfunctioning.
Crosswind Assist
General information
Strong crosswind gusts can impair the ability of
your vehicle to drive straight ahead. The cross-
wind driving assistance function integrated in
ESP
®
noticeably reduces these impairments.
ESP
®
intervenes automatically according to the
direction and intensity of the crosswinds affect-
ing your vehicle.
ESP
®
intervenes with stabilizing braking to
assist you in keeping the vehicle in the lane.
Driving safety systems
71
Safety
Z
background
Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speeds
above 50 mph (80 km/h) when driving straight
ahead or cornering gently.
Important safety notes
Crosswind Assist does not work if ESP
®
is
switched off or deactivated because of a mal-
function.
EBD (electronic brake force distribu-
tion)
General information
EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure
on the rear wheels to improve driving stability
while braking.
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 65).
G
WARNING
If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can
lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the
risk of skidding and an accident.
You should therefore adapt your driving style
to the different handling characteristics. Have
the brake system checked at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Observe information regarding indicator and
warning lamps (Y page 259) as well as display
messages (Y page 230).
ADAPTIVE BRAKE
ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and
offers increased braking comfort. In addition to
the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has
the HOLD function (Y page 170) and hill start
assist (Y page 135).
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic
function
General information
i
Observe the important safety notes in the
"Driving safety systems" section (Y page 65).
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
can help you to minimize the risk of a collision
with a vehicle in front or a pedestrian and reduce
the effects of such a collision. If the Active Brake
Assist with cross-traffic function detects a risk
of collision, you will be warned visually and
acoustically and, if necessary, your brake appli-
cation will be assisted according to the situa-
tion. If you do not react, the system can also
react by braking automatically. In the event of a
detected risk of collision due to crossing traffic,
you will also be visually and acoustically warned
as well as assisted by the brake boosting effect
according to the situation.
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is
only available in vehicles with the Driving Assis-
tance Plus package.
For Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-
tion to assist you when driving, the radar sensor
system and the camera system must be opera-
tional.
If the radar sensor system or the camera system
is malfunctioning, Active Brake Assist with
cross-traffic function is restricted or no longer
available. The brake system is still available with
complete brake boosting effect and BAS.
The radar sensor system and camera system
help Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-
tion to detect obstacles that are in the path of
your vehicle for an extended period of time.
In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehi-
cle can be detected.
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
detects pedestrians using typical characteris-
tics such as body contours and the posture of a
person standing upright.
i
Observe the restrictions described in the
"Important safety notes" section
(Y page 72).
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
will initially brake your vehicle by a partial
72
Driving safety systems
Safety
background
application of the brakes if a danger of colli-
sion is detected. There may be a collision
unless you brake yourself. Even after subse-
quent full application of the brakes a collision
cannot always be avoided, particularly when
approaching at too high a speed. There is a
risk of an accident.
Always apply the brakes yourself and try to
take evasive action, provided it is safe to do
so.
In the event of a partial application of the brakes,
the vehicle is braked with up to 50% of the full
braking pressure.
G
WARNING
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
cannot always clearly identify objects and
complex traffic situations.
In such cases, Active Brake Assist with cross-
traffic function might:
R
issue an unnecessary warning or engage
R
neither give a warning nor intervene
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
situation and be prepared to brake, especially
if Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-
tion alerts you. Terminate the intervention in a
non-critical driving situation.
G
WARNING
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
cannot always clearly identify people, partic-
ularly if they are moving. Active Brake Assist
with cross-traffic function cannot intervene in
these cases. There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
situation and be prepared to brake, especially
if Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-
tion alerts you.
In order to maintain the appropriate distance to
the vehicle in front and thus prevent a collision,
you must apply the brakes yourself.
G
WARNING
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
does not react:
R
to small people, e.g. children
R
to animals
R
to oncoming vehicles
R
when cornering
As a result, Active Brake Assist with cross-
traffic function may not warn you or engage in
all critical situations. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
uation and be ready to brake.
In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec-
ognition can be impaired.
Recognition by the radar sensor system is also
impaired if:
R
there is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
R
there is interference by other radar sources
R
there are strong radar reflections, for exam-
ple in parking garages
R
a narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a
motorbike
R
a vehicle is traveling in front on a different line
R
vehicles moving quickly into the radar sensor
system detection range
Recognition by the camera system is also
impaired in the event of:
R
dirt on the camera or if the camera is covered
R
glare on the camera system, e.g. from the sun
being low in the sky
R
darkness
R
or if:
-
pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the path
of the vehicle
-
the camera system no longer recognizes a
pedestrian as a person due to special cloth-
ing or other objects
-
a pedestrian is concealed by other objects
-
the typical outline of a pedestrian is not
distinguishable from the background
Following damage to the front end of the vehicle,
have the configuration and operation of the
radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist
workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow
Driving safety systems
73
Safety
Z
background
speeds where there is no visible damage to the
front of the vehicle.
Following damage to the windshield, have the
configuration and operation of the camera sys-
tem checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Function
X
To activate or deactivate: activate or deac-
tivate Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic
function using the on-board computer
(Y page 220).
If Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-
tion is deactivated, the æ symbol appears
on the multifunction display.
Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h),
this function warns you if you are rapidly
approaching a vehicle in front. An intermittent
warning tone will then sound and the · dis-
tance warning lamp will light up in the instru-
ment cluster.
X
Brake immediately to defuse the situation.
or
X
Take evasive action provided it is safe to do
so.
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
can also brake the vehicle automatically under
the following conditions:
R
the driver and front passenger have their seat
belts fastened
R
the vehicle speed is between approximately
4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h)
Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph
(70 km/h), Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic
function may react to:
R
stationary objects in the path of your vehicle,
e.g. stopped or parked vehicles
R
pedestrians in the path of your vehicle
i
If there is an increased risk of a collision,
preventive passenger protection measures
(PRE-SAFE
®
) are triggered (Y page 57).
If the risk of collision with the vehicle in front
remains and you do not brake, take evasive
action or accelerate significantly, the vehicle
may perform automatic emergency braking, up
to the point of full brake application. Automatic
emergency braking is not performed until imme-
diately prior to an imminent accident.
If you apply the brake yourself in a critical sit-
uation or during autonomous braking, situation-
dependent braking assistance is implemented.
If necessary, this increases the brake pressure
up to full brake application.
To avoid a collision, Active Brake Assist with
cross-traffic function calculates the brake force
necessary if:
R
you approach an obstacle, and
R
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
has detected a risk of a collision
When driving at a speed under 20 mph
(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal,
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is
activated. The increase in brake pressure from
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is
carried out at the last possible moment.
When driving at a speed above 20 mph
(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal
sharply, Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic
function automatically increases the brake pres-
sure to a degree suited to the traffic situation.
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
provides braking assistance in hazardous situa-
tions with vehicles in front within a speed range
between 4 mph (7 km/h) and 155 mph
(250 km/h).
Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph
(70 km/h) the Active Brake Assist with cross-
traffic function assists you with braking in haz-
ardous situations with:
R
stationary obstacles in the path of the vehicle,
e.g. stopped or parked vehicles
R
stationary pedestrians in the path of the vehi-
cle
R
obstacles crossing your path that move in the
detection range of the sensors and are detec-
ted
X
Keep the brake pedal depressed until the
emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
You can prevent the intervention of Active Brake
Assist with cross-traffic function at any time by:
R
depressing the accelerator pedal further.
R
activating kickdown.
R
releasing the brake pedal
The braking application of Active Brake Assist
with cross-traffic function is ended automati-
cally if:
R
you maneuver to avoid the obstacle.
R
there is no longer a risk of collision.
R
an obstacle is no longer detected in front of
your vehicle.
74
Driving safety systems
Safety
background
STEER CONTROL
General information
STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a
noticeable steering force to the steering wheel
in the direction required for vehicle stabilization.
This steering assistance is provided in particular
if:
R
both right wheels or both left wheels are on a
wet or slippery road surface when you brake
R
the vehicle begins to skid
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 65).
No steering support is provided from STEER
CONTROL, if:
R
ESP
®
is deactivated
R
ESP
®
is malfunctioning
R
the steering is malfunctioning
If ESP
®
is malfunctioning, you will be assisted
further by the electrical power steering.
Protection against theft
Immobilizer
The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from
being started without the correct SmartKey.
X
To activate with the SmartKey: remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X
To activate with KEYLESS-GO start-func-
tion or KEYLESS-GO: switch the ignition off
and open the driver's door.
X
To deactivate: switch on the ignition.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone
can start the engine if a valid SmartKey has been
left inside the vehicle.
i
The immobilizer is always deactivated when
you start the engine.
In the event that the engine cannot be started
(yet the vehicle's battery is charged), the sys-
tem is not operational. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or call
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
X
To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or
KEYLESS-GO.
Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm system
is armed after approximately ten seconds.
X
To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the Smart-
Key or KEYLESS-GO.
or
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
or
X
Press the Start/Stop button.
The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the
alarm system is armed and you open:
R
a door
R
the vehicle with the mechanical key
R
the tailgate
R
the hood
X
To stop the alarm with the SmartKey:
press the % or & button on the Smart-
Key.
The alarm is stopped.
or
X
Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni-
tion lock (Y page 132).
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
The alarm is stopped.
X
To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:
grasp the outside door handle. The SmartKey
must be outside the vehicle.
The alarm is stopped.
or
X
Press the Start/Stop button on the dash-
board. The SmartKey must be inside the vehi-
cle.
The alarm is stopped.
Protection against theft
75
Safety
Z
background
The alarm is not stopped, even if you close the
open door that triggered it, for example.
76
Protection against theft
Safety
background
SmartKey
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
R
open the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
R
get out and disrupt traffic.
R
operate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
R
release the parking brake.
R
shifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P
R
Start the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
G
WARNING
If you attach heavy or large objects to the
SmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-
tionally turned in the ignition lock. This could
cause the engine to be switched off. There is a
risk of an accident.
Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the
SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before
inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
!
Keep the SmartKey away from strong mag-
netic fields. Otherwise, the remote control
function could be affected.
Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicin-
ity of powerful electrical installations.
Do not keep the SmartKey:
R
with electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone
or another SmartKey.
R
with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil.
R
inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.
This can affect the functionality of the Smart-
Key.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function: do
not keep the SmartKey in the cargo compart-
ment. Otherwise, the SmartKey may not be
detected, e.g. when starting the engine using
the Start/Stop button.
A brief radio connection between the vehicle
and the SmartKey determines whether a valid
SmartKey is in, or in the direct vicinity of, the
vehicle. This occurs, for example:
R
when starting the engine
R
while driving
R
when using HANDS-FREE ACCESS
R
when the external door handles are touched
R
during convenience closing
SmartKey functions
:
& Locks the vehicle
;
F Opens/closes the tailgate
=
% Unlocks the vehicle
X
To unlock centrally: press % button.
If you do not open the vehicle within approx-
imately 40 seconds of unlocking:
R
the vehicle is locked again.
R
protection against theft is reactivated.
X
To lock centrally: press the & button.
The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks the
following components:
R
the doors
R
the tailgate
R
the fuel filler flap
The turn signals flash once when unlocking and
three times when locking.
You can also set an audible signal to confirm
that the vehicle has been locked. The audible
signal can be activated and deactivated via the
SmartKey
77
Opening and closing
Z
background
multimedia system; see the Digital Operator's
Manual.
You will receive visual and acoustic locking con-
firmation if all components were able to be
locked.
When the locator lighting is activated via the
multimedia system, it lights up when it is dark
after the vehicle is unlocked with the SmartKey;
see the Digital Operator's Manual.
X
To open the tailgate automatically from
outside the vehicle: press and hold the F
button until the tailgate opens.
X
To close the tailgate automatically from
outside the vehicle: if the SmartKey is loca-
ted in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle,
press the F button on the SmartKey.
When the tailgate closes you can then release
the button.
KEYLESS-GO
General notes
Bear in mind that the engine can be started by
any of the vehicle occupants if there is a Smart-
Key in the vehicle (Y page 133).
Locking/unlocking centrally
You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using
KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry the
SmartKey with you. You can combine the func-
tions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a conven-
tional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by using
KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the
& button on the SmartKey.
The driver's door and the door at which the han-
dle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKey
must be outside the vehicle. When locking or
unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distance
between the SmartKey and the corresponding
door handle must not be greater than 3 ft (1 m).
A brief radio connection between the vehicle
and the SmartKey determines whether a valid
SmartKey is in, or in the direct vicinity of, the
vehicle. This occurs, for example:
R
when starting the engine
R
while driving
R
when using HANDS-FREE ACCESS
R
when the external door handles are touched
R
during convenience closing
X
To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur-
face of the door handle.
X
To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface :
or ;.
Make sure that you do not touch the inner
surface of the door handle.
X
Convenience closing feature: touch
recessed sensor surface ; for an extended
period.
Further information on the convenience clos-
ing feature (Y page 91).
X
To unlock the tailgate: push the top of star
on the tailgate.
Deactivating and activating
If you do not intend to use a SmartKey for an
extended period of time, you can deactivate the
KEYLESS-GO function of the SmartKey. The
SmartKey will then use very little power, thereby
conserving battery power. For the purposes of
activation/deactivation, the vehicle must not be
nearby.
X
To deactivate: press the & button on the
SmartKey twice in rapid succession.
The battery check lamp (Y page 80) of the
SmartKey flashes twice briefly and lights up
once, then KEYLESS-GO is deactivated.
X
To activate: press any button on the Smart-
Key.
or
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated features
are available again.
78
SmartKey
Opening and closing
background
KEYLESS-GO start function
General notes
Bear in mind that the engine can be started by
any of the vehicle occupants if there is a Smart-
Key in the vehicle (Y page 133).
Changing the settings of the locking
system
You can change the settings of the locking sys-
tem. This means that only the driver's door and
the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicle
is unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel
alone.
X
To change the setting: press and hold down
the % and & buttons simultaneously
for approximately six seconds until the bat-
tery check lamp (Y page 80) flashes twice.
If the setting of the locking system is changed
within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing
the & or % button:
R
locks or
R
unlocks the vehicle
The SmartKey now functions as follows:
X
To unlock: press the % button once.
X
To unlock centrally: press the % button
twice.
X
To lock: press the & button.
X
To restore the factory settings: press and
hold the % and & buttons simultane-
ously for approximately six seconds until the
battery check lamp (Y page 80) flashes
twice.
The KEYLESS-GO functions can be changed as
follows:
X
To unlock the driver's door: touch the inner
surface of the door handle on the driver's
door.
X
To unlock centrally: touch the inner surface
of the door handle on the front-passenger
door or the rear door.
X
To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor
surface on one of the door handles.
Mechanical key
General notes
If the vehicle can no longer be locked or
unlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO,
use the mechanical key.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm sys-
tem will be triggered. Switch off the alarm
(Y page 75).
If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical
key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked auto-
matically.
X
To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the
SmartKey into the ignition lock.
Removing the mechanical key
X
Push release catch : in the direction of the
arrow and at the same time remove mechan-
ical key ; from the SmartKey.
For further information about:
R
Locking/unlocking the driver's door
(Y page 84)
R
Unlocking the tailgate (Y page 89)
Inserting the mechanical key
X
Push mechanical key ; completely into the
SmartKey until it engages and release
catch : is back in its basic position.
SmartKey
79
Opening and closing
Z
background
SmartKey battery
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-
ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in
severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal
injury.
Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If
a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention
immediately.
H
Environmental note
Batteries contain dangerous
substances. It is against the
law to dispose of them with
the household rubbish. They
must be collected separately
and recycled to protect the
environment.
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally friendly
manner. Take discharged
batteries to a qualified spe-
cialist workshop or a special
collection point for used bat-
teries.
The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate
material, which may require special handling
and regard for the environment. National guide-
lines must be observed during disposal. In Cal-
ifornia, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
batteries replaced at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Checking the battery
X
Press the & or % button.
The battery is working properly if battery
check lamp : lights up briefly.
The battery is discharged if battery check
lamp : does not light up briefly.
X
Change the battery (Y page 80).
If the SmartKey battery is checked within the
signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing
the & or % button:
R
locks or
R
unlocks the vehicle
i
You can get a battery at any qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Replacing the battery
You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.
X
Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey
(Y page 79).
X
Press mechanical key ; into the SmartKey
opening in the direction of the arrow until bat-
tery compartment cover : opens. Do not
hold battery compartment cover : closed
while doing so.
X
Remove battery compartment cover :.
80
SmartKey
Opening and closing
background
X
Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your
palm until battery = falls out.
X
Insert the new battery with the positive ter-
minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to
do so.
X
Make sure that the surface of the battery is
free of lint, grease and other contaminants.
X
Insert the front tabs of battery compartment
cover : into the housing first and then press
to close it.
X
Insert mechanical key ; into the SmartKey
(Y page 79).
X
Check the function of all SmartKey buttons on
the vehicle.
Problems with the SmartKey
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
You can no longer lock or
unlock the vehicle using
the SmartKey.
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X
Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 80) and replace it if necessary
(Y page 80).
If this does not work:
X
Lock or unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 84).
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
X
Lock or unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 84).
The SmartKey is faulty.
X
Lock or unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 84).
X
Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
You can no longer lock or
unlock the vehicle using
KEYLESS-GO.
KEYLESS-GO was deactivated.
X
Reactivate KEYLESS-GO (Y page 78).
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X
Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 80) and replace it if necessary
(Y page 80).
If this does not work:
X
Lock or unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 84).
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
X
Lock or unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 84).
SmartKey
81
Opening and closing
Z
background
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning.
X
Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the
SmartKey.
X
Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote con-
trol function:
X
Lock or unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 84).
X
Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
The engine cannot be
started using the Smart-
Key.
The on-board voltage is too low.
X
Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior
lighting, and try to start the engine again.
If this does not work:
X
Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 321).
or
X
Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 322).
or
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine cannot be
started using the Start/
Stop button. The Smart-
Key is in the vehicle.
The vehicle is locked.
X
Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X
Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 80) and replace it if necessary
(Y page 80).
If this does not work:
X
Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
X
Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
You have lost a Smart-
Key.
X
Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.
X
Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X
If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
You have lost the
mechanical key.
X
Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X
If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
82
SmartKey
Opening and closing
background
Doors
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
R
open the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
R
get out and disrupt traffic.
R
operate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
R
release the parking brake.
R
shifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P
R
Start the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
Unlocking and opening doors from
the inside
You can open a door from inside the vehicle
even if it has been locked. You can only open the
rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not
secured by the child-proof locks (Y page 64). If
the vehicle has been locked with the SmartKey
or with KEYLESS-GO, opening a door from the
inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.
Switch off the alarm (Y page 75).
X
To unlock and open a front door: pull door
handle ;.
If the door is locked, locking knob : pops up.
The door is unlocked and opens.
X
To unlock a rear door: pull the rear door
handle.
The locking knob on the rear door pops up and
the rear door unlocks.
X
To open a rear door: pull the rear door han-
dle again.
The rear door opens.
Centrally locking and unlocking the
vehicle from the inside
You can centrally lock and unlock the vehicle
from the inside. The buttons are on the driver’s
door.
X
To unlock: press button :.
X
To lock: press button ;.
When the front-passenger door is closed, the
vehicle is locked.
Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be locked
or unlocked.
You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the
inside if the vehicle has been locked with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.
If the vehicle has been locked with the SmartKey
or with KEYLESS-GO, opening a door from the
inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.
Switch off the alarm (Y page 75).
If a locked door is opened from the inside, the
previous unlock status of the vehicle will be
taken into consideration if:
R
the vehicle was locked using the locking but-
ton for the central locking, or
R
locked automatically
Doors
83
Opening and closing
Z
background
The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previ-
ously been fully unlocked. If only the driver's
door had been previously unlocked, only the
door which has been opened from the inside is
unlocked.
Automatic locking feature
X
To deactivate: press and hold button : for
approximately five seconds until a tone
sounds.
X
To activate: press and hold button ; for
approximately five seconds until a tone
sounds.
If you press one of the two buttons and do not
hear a tone, the relevant setting has already
been selected.
The vehicle is locked automatically when the
ignition is switched on and the wheels are turn-
ing.
You could therefore be locked out if:
R
the vehicle is being pushed
R
the vehicle is being towed
R
the vehicle is being tested on a dynamometer.
You can activate and deactivate the automatic
locking mechanism via the multimedia system
(see the Digital Operator's Manual).
Locking/unlocking the driver's door
with the mechanical key
i
If you want to centrally lock the vehicle using
the mechanical key, begin by pressing the
locking button for the interior locking mech-
anism while the driver's door is open. Then
lock the driver's door using the mechanical
key.
X
Insert the mechanical key into opening : in
the protective cap.
X
Pull and hold the door handle.
X
Pull the protective cap on the mechanical key
as straight as possible away from the vehicle
until it releases.
X
Release the door handle.
X
To lock: turn the mechanical key clockwise as
far as it will go to position 1.
X
To unlock: turn the mechanical key counter-
clockwise as far as it will go to position 1.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm sys-
tem will be triggered. Switch off the alarm
(Y page 75).
Cargo compartment
Important safety notes
G
DANGER
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tail-
gate is open while the engine is running, espe-
84
Cargo compartment
Opening and closing
background
cially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk
of poisoning.
Always switch off the engine before opening
the tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate
open.
G
WARNING
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip
over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle
occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-
larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-
den change in direction.
Always store objects so that they cannot be
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
loads against slipping or tipping before the
journey.
!
The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear
when opened. Therefore, make sure that
there is sufficient clearance above and behind
the tailgate.
The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be
found in the "Vehicle data" section
(Y page 363).
You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate
(Y page 89).
Do not leave the SmartKey in the cargo com-
partment. You could otherwise lock yourself
out.
You should preferably place luggage or loads in
the cargo compartment. Observe the loading
guidelines (Y page 278).
Tailgate object detection with revers-
ing feature
Vehicles with remote tailgate closing:
The tailgate is equipped with automatic object
detection with reversing function. If a solid
object blocks or restricts the tailgate when auto-
matically opening, this procedure is stopped. If a
solid object blocks or restricts the tailgate when
automatically closing, the tailgate automatically
opens again slightly. Automatic object detection
with reversing function is only an aid. It is not a
substitute for your attentiveness when opening
and closing the tailgate.
G
WARNING
The reversing feature does not respond:
R
to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers
R
over the last Ó in (8 mm) of the closing
movement
The reversing feature cannot prevent some-
one from becoming trapped in these situa-
tions in particular. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure.
If somebody becomes trapped:
R
press the F button on the SmartKey, or
R
pull or press the remote operating switch
on the driver's door or
R
press the closing or locking button on the
tailgate or
R
push the top of the star on the tailgate
Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS:
It is also possible to stop the closing process by
performing a kicking movement under the rear
bumper.
Opening/closing automatically from
the outside
Important safety notes
G
DANGER
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tail-
gate is open while the engine is running, espe-
cially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk
of poisoning.
Always switch off the engine before opening
the tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate
open.
G
WARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped dur-
ing automatic closing of the tailgate. More-
over, people, e.g. children, may be standing in
the closing area or may enter the closing area
Cargo compartment
85
Opening and closing
Z
background
during the closing process. There is a risk of
injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
closing area during the closing process.
Use one of the following options to stop the
closing process:
R
press the F button on the SmartKey.
R
pull or press the remote operating switch
on the driver's door.
R
press the closing or locking button on the
tailgate.
R
press the top of the star on the tailgate.
Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS:
You can also stop the closing process by per-
forming a kicking movement under the rear
bumper.
!
The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear
when opened. Therefore, make sure that
there is sufficient clearance above and behind
the tailgate.
Two warning tones sound while the tailgate is
opening or closing.
The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be
found in the "Vehicle data" section
(Y page 363).
Opening automatically
You can open the tailgate automatically using
the SmartKey or by pressing the top of star :
on the tailgate.
X
Press and hold the F button on the Smart-
Key until the tailgate opens.
or
X
With the tailgate unlocked, press the top of
star :.
or
X
With the tailgate stopped in an intermediate
position, pull the tailgate upwards.
You can release the tailgate as soon as the
tailgate starts to open.
X
When the rearview camera is activated:
pull on folded-out star :.
The tailgate opens.
Closing automatically
:
Closing button
;
Locking button
X
Press closing button : in the tailgate.
or
X
Pull the tailgate down slightly.
You can release the tailgate as soon as the
tailgate starts to close.
When the driver's door is closed, you can simul-
taneously close the tailgate and lock the vehicle.
The SmartKey must be at the rear of the vehicle
in the detection range of KEYLESS-GO.
X
Press locking button ; in the tailgate.
If KEYLESS-GO detects a SmartKey outside
the vehicle, the tailgate closes. The vehicle is
locked.
or
X
Vehicles with EASY-PACK tailgate and
KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start func-
tion: if the SmartKey is located in the imme-
diate vicinity of the vehicle, press the F
button on the SmartKey.
You can release the button as soon as the
tailgate starts to close.
If KEYLESS-GO detects a SmartKey in the cargo
compartment, the tailgate is unlocked again
after closing.
If KEYLESS-GO detects a second SmartKey out-
side the vehicle, the tailgate remains locked.
86
Cargo compartment
Opening and closing
background
If KEYLESS-GO detects a SmartKey in the cargo
compartment before the closing procedure
starts, the tailgate remains open.
HANDS-FREE ACCESS
General notes
With KEYLESS-GO and HANDS-FREE ACCESS,
you can open or close the tailgate or stop the
procedure without using your hands. This is use-
ful if you have your hands full. To do this, make
a kicking movement under the bumper with your
foot.
Observe the following points:
R
Carry your KEYLESS-GO key about your per-
son. The SmartKey must be at the rear of the
vehicle in the detection range of KEYLESS-
GO.
R
When making the kicking movement, make
sure that you are standing firmly on the
ground and that there is sufficient clearance
to the rear of the vehicle. You could otherwise
lose your balance, for example on ice.
R
Always ensure that you only make the kicking
movement within the detection range of sen-
sors :.
R
Stand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from the
rear area while doing so.
R
Do not come into contact with the bumper
while making the kicking movement. Other-
wise, the sensors may not function correctly.
R
HANDS-FREE ACCESS does not function dur-
ing engine start.
R
Dirt caused by road salt or snow around sen-
sors : may restrict functionality.
Using the HANDS-FREE ACCESS with a pros-
thetic leg may restrict functionality.
R
If a KEYLESS-GO key is at the rear of the vehi-
cle in the detection range of KEYLESS-GO,
HANDS-FREE ACCESS could be triggered.
The tailgate could thus be opened or closed
unintentionally, for example, if you:
-
install or remove the ball coupling.
-
couple or uncouple a trailer.
-
install or remove a rear-mounted bicycle
rack.
-
load/unload bicycles on/from a rear-
mounted bicycle rack.
-
sit on the edge of the cargo compartment.
-
set something down or lift something up
behind the vehicle.
-
polish the rear of the vehicle.
Do not carry the KEYLESS-GO key about your
person in these situations or in situations sim-
ilar to these. This will prevent unintentional
opening or closing of the tailgate.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
The vehicle exhaust system can become very
hot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you
could burn yourself by touching the exhaust
system. There is a risk of injury. Always
ensure that you make the kicking movement
only within the detection range of the sensors.
!
If the SmartKey is within the rear detection
range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situa-
tions, for example, could lead to the uninten-
tional opening of the tailgate:
R
when using an automatic car wash
R
when using a power washer
Make sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft
(3 m) away from the vehicle.
Cargo compartment
87
Opening and closing
Z
background
Operation
X
To open or close: kick with your foot into
sensor detection range : beneath the
bumper.
Two warning tones sound while the tailgate is
opening or closing.
X
If the tailgate does not open or close after
several attempts: wait at least ten seconds
then kick under the bumper once again.
If you hold your foot under the bumper for too
long, the tailgate does not open or close. Repeat
the leg movement more quickly if this occurs.
To stop the opening or closing procedure, you
have the following options:
R
Kick with your foot into sensor detection
range : beneath the bumper.
R
Press the top of the star on the tailgate.
R
Press the closing button on the tailgate.
R
Press the F button on the SmartKey.
If the tailgate closing procedure has been stop-
ped:
R
Move your foot under the bumper again and
the tailgate will open.
If the tailgate opening procedure has been stop-
ped:
R
Kick with your foot under the bumper again
and the tailgate will close.
Opening/closing automatically from
inside
Important safety notes
G
DANGER
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tail-
gate is open while the engine is running, espe-
cially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk
of poisoning.
Always switch off the engine before opening
the tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate
open.
G
WARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped dur-
ing automatic closing of the tailgate. In addi-
tion, people may be standing in the closing
area or may enter the closing area, e.g. chil-
dren, during the closing procedure. There is a
risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
closing area during the closing process.
Release the remote operating switch imme-
diately if somebody becomes trapped. To re-
open the tailgate pull on the remote operating
switch.
Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS:
You can also stop the closing process by per-
forming a kicking movement under the rear
bumper.
!
The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear
when opened. Therefore, make sure that
there is sufficient clearance above and behind
the tailgate.
Two warning tones sound while the tailgate is
opening or closing.
The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be
found in the "Vehicle data" section
(Y page 363).
Opening and closing
88
Cargo compartment
Opening and closing
background
X
To open: pull remote operating switch : for
the tailgate until the tailgate opens.
X
To close: turn the SmartKey to position 1 or
2 in the ignition lock.
X
Press and hold remote operating switch for
tailgate : until the tailgate is completely
closed.
When the vehicle is stationary, you can close the
tailgate from the driver's seat. When the vehicle
is also unlocked, you can also open the tailgate
from inside.
Limiting the opening angle of the tail-
gate
General notes
!
Make sure there is sufficient clearance to
open the tailgate fully when setting the open-
ing angle. The tailgate could otherwise be
damaged. Ideally, set the opening angle out-
side.
You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate.
This is possible in the top half of its opening
range, up to approximately 8 in (20 cm) before
the stop.
To open the tailgate fully, push the top of the star
on the tailgate again after it has stopped auto-
matically. This does not delete the stored posi-
tion.
Activating
X
To open the tailgate: push the top of the star
on the tailgate.
X
To stop the opening process at the
desired position: press the closing button on
the tailgate or push the top of the star on the
tailgate again.
X
To store the position: press and hold the
closing button in the tailgate until you hear a
short tone.
The opening angle limiter is activated. The
tailgate will now stop in the stored position
when opening.
Deactivating
X
Press and hold the closing button on the tail-
gate until two short tones sound.
Unlocking the tailgate using the
mechanical key
General notes
Use the mechanical key if the tailgate can no
longer be unlocked:
R
using the SmartKey
R
using HANDS-FREE ACCESS
R
using the remote operating switch on the door
control panel
!
The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear
when opened. Therefore, make sure that
there is sufficient clearance above and behind
the tailgate.
Unlocking
X
Remove the cargo compartment cover
(Y page 284).
X
Fold the rear seat backrest forward
(Y page 281).
X
Insert mechanical key ; into opening : in
the paneling and push it in.
X
Open the tailgate.
When you lock the vehicle, the cargo compart-
ment is also locked again.
Side windows
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
While opening the side windows, body parts
could become trapped between the side win-
dow and the door frame as the side window
moves. There is a risk of injury.
Side windows
89
Opening and closing
Z
background
Make sure that nobody touches the side win-
dow during the opening procedure. If some-
body becomes trapped, release the switch or
pull the switch to close the side window again.
G
WARNING
While closing the side windows, body parts in
the closing area could become trapped. There
is a risk of injury.
When closing make sure that no parts of the
body are in the closing area. If somebody
becomes trapped, release the switch or press
the switch to open the side window again.
G
WARNING
If children operate the side windows they
could become trapped, particularly if they are
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
Activate the override feature for the rear side
windows. When leaving the vehicle, always
take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehi-
cle. Never leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle.
Side window reversing feature
The side windows are equipped with an auto-
matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks
or restricts a side window from traveling
upwards during the automatic closing process,
the side window opens again automatically. Dur-
ing the manual closing process, the side window
only opens again automatically after the corre-
sponding switch is released. The automatic
reversing feature is only an aid and does not
relieve you of the responsibility of paying atten-
tion when closing a side window.
G
WARNING
The reversing feature does not react:
R
to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-
gers
R
while adjusting
This means that the reversing feature cannot
prevent someone being trapped in these sit-
uations. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure. If
someone becomes trapped, press the W
button to open the side window again.
Opening and closing the side win-
dows
The switches for all side windows are located on
the driver's door. There is also a switch on each
door for the corresponding side window.
The switches on the driver's door take prece-
dence.
:
Front left
;
Front right
=
Rear right
?
Rear left
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
X
To open manually: press and hold the cor-
responding switch.
X
To open fully: press the switch beyond the
pressure point and release it.
Automatic operation is started.
X
To close manually: pull the corresponding
switch and hold it.
X
To close fully: pull the switch beyond the
pressure point and release it.
Automatic operation is started.
X
To interrupt automatic operation: press/
pull the corresponding switch again.
If you press the switch beyond the pressure
point and release, automatic operation is star-
ted in the corresponding direction. You can stop
automatic operation by pressing/pulling the
switch again.
90
Side windows
Opening and closing
background
You can continue to operate the side windows
after you switch off the engine or remove the
SmartKey. This function remains active for five
minutes or until you open a front door.
When the override feature for the side windows
is activated, the side windows cannot be oper-
ated from the rear (Y page 64).
Information on opening and closing the roller
sunblinds on the rear side windows
(Y page 290).
Convenience opening
General notes
If the SmartKey is in close proximity to the vehi-
cle, the convenience opening function is availa-
ble.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO
start function: you can ventilate the vehicle
before you start driving.
To do this, the SmartKey is used to carry out the
following functions simultaneously:
R
unlock the vehicle
R
open the side windows
R
open the sliding sunroof
R
switch on the seat ventilation for the driver's
seat
The "convenience opening" feature is also avail-
able when the vehicle is unlocked.
Convenience opening
X
Press and hold the % button on the Smart-
Key until the sliding sunroof is in the desired
position.
X
To interrupt convenience opening: release
the % button.
Convenience closing feature
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
When the convenience closing feature is oper-
ating, parts of the body could become trapped
in the closing area of the side window and the
sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
Observe the complete closing procedure
when the convenience closing feature is oper-
ating. Make sure that no body parts are in
close proximity during the closing procedure.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO
start function: if the SmartKey is in close prox-
imity to the vehicle, the convenience closing
function is available.
When you lock the vehicle, you can simultane-
ously:
R
close the side windows
R
close the sliding sunroof
Notes on the automatic reversing feature for:
R
the side windows (Y page 90)
R
the sliding sunroof (Y page 93)
Using the SmartKey
X
Press and hold the & button until the side
windows and the sliding sunroof are fully
closed.
X
Make sure that all the side windows and the
sliding sunroof are closed.
X
To interrupt convenience closing: release
the & button.
Using KEYLESS-GO
The driver's door and the door at which the han-
dle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKey
must be outside the vehicle. The gap between
the SmartKey and the corresponding door han-
dle should not be greater than 3 ft (1 m).
X
Touch recessed sensor surface : on the
door handle until the side windows and the
sliding sunroof are fully closed.
Side windows
91
Opening and closing
Z
background
Make sure you only touch recessed sensor
surface :.
X
Make sure that all the side windows and the
sliding sunroof are closed.
X
To interrupt convenience closing: release
recessed sensor surface : on the door han-
dle.
Resetting the side windows
If a side window can no longer be closed fully,
you must reset it.
X
Close all the doors.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
X
Pull the corresponding switch on the door
control panel until the side window is com-
pletely closed (Y page 90).
X
Hold the switch for an additional second.
If the side window opens again slightly:
X
Immediately pull the corresponding switch on
the door control panel until the side window is
completely closed (Y page 90).
X
Hold the switch for an additional second.
X
If the respective side window remains closed
after the button is released, then it has been
set correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the
steps above.
Problems with the side windows
G
WARNING
If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window
closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the
body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release
the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
A side window cannot be
closed because it is
blocked by objects, e.g.
leaves in the window
guide.
X
Remove the objects.
X
Close the side window.
A side window cannot be
closed and you cannot
see the cause.
If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again
slightly:
X
Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch
again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed with increased force.
If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again
slightly:
X
Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch
again until the side window has closed.
The side windows are closed without the automatic reversing fea-
ture.
92
Side windows
Opening and closing
background
Sliding sunroof
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
While opening and closing the sliding sunroof,
body parts in close proximity could become
trapped. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the opening and closing pro-
cedures.
If somebody becomes trapped:
R
release the switch immediately, or
R
during automatic operation, push the
switch briefly in any direction
The opening or closing procedure will be stop-
ped.
G
WARNING
If children operate the sliding sunroof they
could become trapped, particularly if they are
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
!
Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free of
snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may
occur.
Do not allow anything to protrude from the
sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could be
damaged.
!
The weather can change abruptly. It could
start to rain or snow. Make sure that the slid-
ing sunroof is closed when you leave the vehi-
cle. The vehicle electronics can be damaged if
water enters the vehicle interior.
Resonance noises can occur in addition to the
usual airflow noises when the sliding sunroof is
open. They are caused by minor pressure fluc-
tuations in the vehicle interior. Change the posi-
tion of the sliding sunroof or open a side window
slightly to reduce or eliminate these noises.
Sliding sunroof reversing feature
The sliding sunroof is equipped with an auto-
matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks
or restricts the sliding sunroof during the closing
process, the sliding sunroof opens again auto-
matically. The automatic reversing feature is
only an aid and is no substitute for your attention
when closing the sliding roof.
G
WARNING
The reversing feature does not react:
R
to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-
gers
R
over the last 1/6 in (4 mm) of the closing
movement
R
during resetting
R
when closing the sliding sunroof again man-
ually immediately after automatic reversing
This means that the reversing feature cannot
prevent someone being trapped in these sit-
uations. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure.
If somebody becomes trapped:
R
release the switch immediately, or
R
press the switch in any direction during the
automatic closing process
The closing process is stopped.
Operating the sliding sunroof
Opening and closing
:
To raise
;
To open
=
To close/lower
Sliding sunroof
93
Opening and closing
Z
background
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
X
Press or pull the 3 switch in the corre-
sponding direction.
If you press/pull the 3 switch beyond the
pressure point, automatic operation is started in
the corresponding direction. When being raised
or opened, the sliding sunroof first automatically
moves to the comfort setting. If you activate
raise or open again, the sliding sunroof is raised
or opened completely. You can stop automatic
operation by pressing/pulling the switch again.
When opening and raising the roof, automatic
operation is only available if the sliding sunroof
is in the closed position.
The sun protection cover automatically opens
along with the sliding sunroof. You can open or
close the sun protection cover manually when
the sliding sunroof is raised or closed.
You can continue to operate the sliding sunroof
after switching off the engine or removing the
SmartKey from the ignition lock. This function is
available for up to five minutes or until the driv-
er's or front-passenger door is opened.
Resetting
!
If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened
or closed fully after resetting, contact a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
Reset the sliding sunroof if it does not move
smoothly.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
X
Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear
(Y page 93).
X
Keep the 3 switch pressed for another
second.
X
Make sure that the sliding sunroof can be fully
opened and closed again (Y page 93).
X
If this is not the case, repeat the steps above.
Problems with the sliding sunroof
G
WARNING
If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding
sunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts
of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
If somebody becomes trapped:
R
release the switch immediately, or
R
press the switch in any direction during the automatic closing process
The closing process is stopped.
!
If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contact a
qualified specialist workshop.
94
Sliding sunroof
Opening and closing
background
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The sliding sunroof can-
not be closed and you
cannot see the cause.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again
slightly:
X
Immediately after it blocks, pull the 3 switch down again to the
point of resistance until the sliding sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and then
reopens slightly:
X
Immediately after it blocks, pull the 3 switch down again to the
point of resistance until the sliding sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof is closed without the automatic reversing fea-
ture.
Sliding sunroof
95
Opening and closing
Z
background
Correct driver's seat position
G
WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
R
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
R
fasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.
Observe the following when adjusting steering
wheel :, seat belt ; and driver's seat =:
R
you are as far away from the driver's air bag as
possible
R
you are sitting in a normal upright position
R
your thighs are slightly supported by the seat
cushion
R
your legs are not entirely stretched and you
can depress the pedals properly
R
the back of your head is supported at eye level
by the center of the head restraint
R
you can hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent
R
you can move your legs freely
R
you can see all the displays in the instrument
cluster clearly
R
you should have a good overview of traffic
conditions
R
the seat belt is pulled snugly against the body
and is routed across the center of your shoul-
der and across your hips in the pelvic area
Further related subjects:
R
Adjusting the seats electrically (Y page 98).
R
Adjusting the steering wheel mechanically
(Y page 102).
R
Adjusting the steering wheel electrically
(Y page 102).
R
Fastening the seat belt correctly (Y page 47).
R
Adjusting the rear-view mirror and exterior
mirrors (Y page 104).
R
Storing the seat, steering wheel, exterior mir-
ror and head-up display settings with the
memory function (Y page 107).
Seats
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Children could become trapped if they adjust
the seats, particularly when unattended.
There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
The seats can still be adjusted when there is no
SmartKey in the ignition lock.
G
WARNING
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the
seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one
has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
Observe the safety notes on "Air bags"
(Y page 48) and "Children in the vehicle"
(Y page 59).
G
WARNING
If the head restraints are not installed or not
adjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-
tection as intended. There is an increased risk
96
Seats
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
background
of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the
event of an accident or when braking.
Always drive with the head restraints instal-
led. Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the center of the head
restraint supports the back of the head at
about eye level.
Using the fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust the
head restraint so that it is as close as possible to
your head.
G
WARNING
If the driver's seat is not engaged, it could
move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in
motion. This could cause you to lose control of
the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Always make sure that the driver's seat is
engaged before starting the vehicle.
G
WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
R
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
R
fasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.
G
WARNING
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or
other vehicle occupants could be trapped and
thereby injured. Children in particular could
accidentally press the electrical seat adjust-
ment buttons and become trapped. There is a
risk of injury.
While moving the seats, make sure that your
hands or other body parts do not get under the
lever assembly of the seat adjustment sys-
tem.
G
WARNING
The seat belt does not offer the intended level
of protection if you have not moved the back-
rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-
ing or in the event of an accident, you could
slide underneath the seat belt and sustain
abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This
poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal
injury.
Adjust the seat properly before beginning
your journey. Always ensure that the backrest
is in an almost vertical position and that the
shoulder section of your seat belt is routed
across the center of your shoulder.
!
To prevent damage to the seats and the seat
heating, observe the following notes:
R
Do not spill liquids onto the seats. Dry the
seats as soon as possible if liquid does get
spilled on the seats.
R
If the seat covers are damp or wet, do not
switch on the seat heating. Also, do not use
the seat heating to dry the seats.
R
Clean the seat covers as recommended;
see keyword "Care".
R
Do not transport heavy loads on the seats.
Do not place pointed objects on the seat
cushions such as knives, nails or tools.
Where possible, use the seats only for car-
rying passengers.
R
When operating the seat heating, do not
cover the seats with insulating materials,
e.g. blankets, coats, bags, protective cov-
ers, child seats or booster seats.
!
Make sure that there are no objects in the
footwell under or behind the seats when mov-
ing the seats back. There is a risk that the
seats and/or the objects could be damaged.
i
For more information, contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
i Related topic:
R
EASY-PACK Quickfold rear bench seat
(Y page 281)
Seats
97
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
background
Adjusting the seats electrically
Electrically adjustable seats with memory function
:
Head restraint height
;
Backrest angle
=
Seat height
?
Seat cushion length
A
Seat cushion angle
B
Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
i Further related subjects:
R
You can store the seat settings using the
memory function (Y page 107).
R
If PRE-SAFE
®
is triggered, the front-
passenger seat will be moved to a better
position if it was previously in an unfavora-
ble position (Y page 57).
R
When the seat is moved forward or back,
the headrest is moved up or down auto-
matically.
Vehicles with AMG Performance Seat: the
height of the head restraints cannot be adjus-
ted.
Electrically adjustable seats without memory func-
tion
:
Backrest angle
;
Seat height
=
Seat cushion angle
?
Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
Electrically adjustable seats without memory func-
tion
:
Seat cushion length
X
Lift lever : and slide the seat cushion
forward or back.
X
Release lever : again.
The seat cushion engages.
Adjusting the head restraints
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
R
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
R
fasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.
G
WARNING
If the head restraints are not installed or not
adjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-
tection as intended. There is an increased risk
of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the
event of an accident or when braking.
Always drive with the head restraints instal-
led. Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the center of the head
98
Seats
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
background
restraint supports the back of the head at
about eye level.
Adjusting the head restraint height
manually
X
To raise: pull the head restraint up to the
desired position.
X
To lower: press release catch : in the direc-
tion of the arrow and push the head restraint
down to the desired position.
Adjusting the head restraint fore-and-
aft position manually
With this function you can adjust the distance
between the head restraint and the back of the
seat occupant's head.
X
To move forward: pull the head restraint
forward in the direction of the arrow until it
engages in the desired position.
X
To move back: press and hold the release
catch :.
X
Push the head restraint back.
X
Release the release button once the head
restraint is in the desired position.
X
Ensure that the head restraint has engaged
properly.
Using the fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust the
head restraint so that it is as close as possible to
your head.
Adjusting the height of the head
restraints electrically
X
To adjust the head restraint height: slide
the switch for the head restraint adjustment
(Y page 98) up or down in the direction of the
arrow.
Adjusting the rear seat head restraint
height
X
Once the head restraint is fully lowered, press
release catch :.
X
To raise: pull the head restraint up to the
desired height.
X
To lower: press release catch : and push
the head restraint down until it is in the
desired position.
Seats
99
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
background
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support
:
Raises the backrest contour
;
Softens the backrest contour
=
Lowers the backrest contour
?
Hardens the backrest contour
You can adjust the contour of the front seat
backrests individually to provide optimum sup-
port for your back.
Adjusting the AMG Performance Seat
To adjust the contour of the seat and for
improved lateral support, you can individually
adjust the front seats.
Adjusting the side bolsters of the seat cush-
ion
X
To set narrower: press button :.
X
To set wider: press button ;.
To adjust the side bolsters of the seat back-
rest
X
To set narrower: press button =.
X
To set wider: press button ?.
Adjusting the seat cushion length mechani-
cally
X
Lift handle A and slide the seat cushion
forward or back.
X
Release lever A again.
The seat cushion engages.
Switching the seat heating on/off
Switching on/off
G
WARNING
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can
cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to
become very hot. The health of persons with
limited temperature sensitivity or a limited
ability to react to high temperatures may be
affected or they may even suffer burn-like
injuries. There is a risk of injury.
Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on
repeatedly.
!
When the seat heating is switched on, the
seat surface can be damaged as a result of
objects being placed on the seats, for exam-
ple, seat cushions, child seats and protective
covers not approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Ensure that there are no objects on the seat
surface when the seat heating is switched on.
Front seats
100
Seats
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
background
Rear seats
The three red indicator lamps in the button indi-
cate the heating level you have selected.
The system automatically switches down from
level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight
minutes.
The system automatically switches down from
level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten
minutes.
The system automatically switches off approx-
imately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 131).
X
To switch on: press button : repeatedly
until the desired heating level is set.
X
To switch off: press button : repeatedly
until all the indicator lamps go out.
i
If the battery voltage is too low, the seat
heating may switch off.
i
If drive program E is selected, the power of
the seat heating is reduced.
Switching the seat ventilation on/off
Switching on/off
The blue indicator lamps in the button indicate
the blower setting you have selected.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 131).
X
To switch on: press button : repeatedly
until the desired blower setting is set.
X
To switch off: press button : repeatedly
until all the indicator lamps go out.
i
If the battery voltage is too low, the seat
ventilation may switch off.
i
You can open the side windows and the slid-
ing sunroof using the "Convenience opening"
feature (Y page 91). The seat ventilation of
the driver's seat automatically switches to the
highest level.
i
When the vehicle is stationary, the fan
speed can be reduced automatically. This
reduces the noises of the seat ventilation.
Problems with the seat heating / seat ventilation
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The seat heating or seat
ventilation has switched
off prematurely or can-
not be switched on.
The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum-
ers are switched on.
X
Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the
rear window defroster or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating or seat
ventilation can be switched back on manually.
Seats
101
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
background
Steering wheel
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
R
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
R
fasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.
G
WARNING
Children could injure themselves if they
adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of
injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
The electrically adjustable steering wheel can
still be adjusted when there is no key in the igni-
tion lock.
Adjusting the steering wheel man-
ually
:
Release lever
;
Adjusts the steering wheel height
=
Adjusts the steering wheel position (fore-
and-aft adjustment)
X
Push release lever : down completely.
The steering column is unlocked.
X
Adjust the steering wheel to the desired posi-
tion.
X
Push release lever : up as far as it will go.
The steering column is locked.
X
Check if the steering column is locked. When
doing so, try to push the steering wheel up or
down or try to move it in the fore-and-aft
direction.
Adjusting the steering wheel electri-
cally
:
Adjusts the steering wheel height
;
Adjusts the steering wheel position (fore-
and-aft adjustment)
i Further related subjects:
R
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 103)
R
Storing settings (Y page 107)
Steering wheel heating
Switching on/off
102
Steering wheel
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
background
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 131).
X
To switch on/off: turn the lever in the direc-
tion of arrow : or ;.
Indicator lamp = lights up or goes out.
If you switch off the ignition, the steering wheel
heating is deactivated.
Problems with the steering wheel heating
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The steering wheel heat-
ing has switched off pre-
maturely or cannot be
switched on.
The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum-
ers are switched on.
X
Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the
rear window defroster or interior lighting.
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts
the steering wheel, you and other vehicle
occupants – particularly children – could
become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-
ing adjustments, make sure that no one has
any body parts in the sweep of the steering
wheel.
Move the steering wheel adjustment lever if
there is a risk of entrapment by the steering
wheel. The adjustment process is stopped.
You can stop the adjustment process by press-
ing one of the memory function's position but-
tons. This function is only available on vehicles
with memory function.
G
WARNING
If children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT fea-
ture, they can become trapped, particularly
when unattended. There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
G
WARNING
If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT
feature is making adjustments, you could lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Always wait until the adjustment process is
complete before driving off.
The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting in
and out of your vehicle easier.
You can activate and deactivate the EASY-
ENTRY/EXIT feature using the multimedia sys-
tem (see the Digital Operator's Manual)
Position of the steering wheel when the
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active
The steering wheel swings up when you:
R
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
R
with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start
function: open the driver's door; the voltage
supply must be switched on
R
with the SmartKey: open the driver's door;
the SmartKey must be in position g or 1 in
the ignition lock (Y page 131)
R
open the driver's door when the ignition is
switched off
i
The steering wheel only tilts up if the driving
position is stored after the steering column
adjustment has been adjusted (Y page 107).
The most recent driving position of the steering
wheel is stored if:
R
the ignition is switched off
R
the setting is stored using the memory func-
tion (Y page 107)
Steering wheel
103
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
background
i
The steering wheel only moves up if it has
not already reached the upper steering lim-
iter.
Position of the steering wheel for driv-
ing
The steering wheel is moved to the last selected
position when:
R
the driver's door is closed and you insert the
SmartKey into the ignition lock
R
you close the driver's door when the ignition
is switched on
R
you press the Start/Stop button once in vehi-
cles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-GO
start function
i
The steering wheel only returns to the last
set position if the driving position is stored
after the seat or steering column has been
adjusted (Y page 107).
The most recent driving position of the steering
wheel is stored if:
R
the ignition is switched off
R
the setting is stored using the memory func-
tion (Y page 107)
Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature
If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is trig-
gered in an accident, the steering column will
move up when the driver's door is opened or the
SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock. This
makes it easier to exit the vehicle and rescue the
occupants.
The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is
operational only if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY fea-
ture is activated in the multimedia system (see
Digital Operator's Manual).
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
R
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
R
fasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.
G
WARNING
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side reduces the size of the image. Visible
objects are actually closer than they appear.
This means that you could misjudge the dis-
tance from road users traveling behind, e.g.
when changing lane. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
For this reason, always make sure of the
actual distance from the road users traveling
behind by glancing over your shoulder.
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 131).
X
Exterior mirror on the front-passenger side:
press button ;.
104
Mirrors
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
background
Exterior mirror on the driver's side: press but-
ton =.
The indicator lamp lights up in the button that
has been pressed.
The indicator lamp goes out again after some
time. You can adjust the selected exterior
mirror using button : as long as the indicator
lamp is lit.
X
Press button : up, down, or to the left or
right until you have adjusted the exterior mir-
ror to the correct position. You should have a
good overview of traffic conditions.
The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field
of vision.
After the engine has been started, the exterior
mirrors are automatically heated if the rear win-
dow defroster is switched on and the outside
temperature is low.
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
electrically
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 131).
X
Briefly press :.
Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.
i
Make sure that the exterior mirrors are
always folded out fully while driving. They
could otherwise vibrate.
i
If you are driving faster than 30 mph
(47 km/h), you can no longer fold in the exte-
rior mirrors.
Resetting the exterior mirrors
If the battery has been disconnected or com-
pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors must be
reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise not
fold in if you have activated the AutomaticAutomatic
Mirror FoldingMirror Folding function in the multimedia
system.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 131).
X
Briefly press :.
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
automatically
When the Automatic Mirror FoldingAutomatic Mirror Folding func-
tion is activated in the multimedia system (see
Digital Operator's Manual):
R
the exterior mirrors fold in automatically as
soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside.
R
the exterior mirrors fold out again automati-
cally as soon as you unlock the vehicle.
i
If the exterior mirrors have been folded in
manually, they do not fold out.
Exterior mirror pushed out of position
If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of
position, proceed as follows:
X
Vehicles without electrically folding exte-
rior mirrors: manually move the exterior mir-
ror into the correct position.
X
Vehicles with electrically folding exterior
mirrors: press and hold button : until you
hear a click and then the mirror engaging in
position (Y page 105).
The mirror housing is engaged again and you
can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual
(Y page 104).
If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of
position, proceed as follows:
X
Press and hold button : until you hear a click
and the mirror engages audibly into position
(Y page 105).
The mirror housing is engaged again and you
can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual
(Y page 104).
Automatic anti-glare mirrors
G
WARNING
Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an auto-
matic anti-glare mirror breaks. The electrolyte
is harmful and causes irritation. It must not
come into contact with your skin, eyes, res-
Mirrors
105
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
background
piratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.
There is a risk of injury.
If you come into contact with the electrolyte,
observe the following:
R
Rinse off the electrolyte from your skin
immediately with water.
R
Immediately rinse the electrolyte out of
your eyes thoroughly with clean water.
R
If the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately
rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not
induce vomiting.
R
If electrolyte comes into contact with your
skin or hair or is swallowed, seek medical
attention immediately.
R
Immediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with electrolyte.
R
If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
attention immediately.
The exterior mirror on the driver's side and the
rear-view mirror automatically go into anti-glare
mode if:
R
the ignition is switched on
R
incident light from headlamps strikes the sen-
sor in the rear-view mirror
The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if
reverse gear is engaged or if the interior lighting
is switched on.
Parking position for the exterior mir-
ror on the front passenger side
Storing the parking position
You can set the front-passenger side exterior
mirror such that you can see the rear wheel on
that side as soon as you engage reverse gear.
You can store this position.
Storing using reverse gear
:
Memory button M
;
Button for the exterior mirror setting
=
Button for the front-passenger side exterior
mirror
?
Button for the driver's side exterior mirror
X
Start the engine.
X
Press button =.
X
Engage reverse gear.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves to the preset parking position.
X
Use button ; to adjust the exterior mirror to
a position that allows you to see the rear
wheel and the curb.
The parking position is stored.
i
If you shift the transmission to another posi-
tion, the exterior mirror on the front-
passenger side returns to the driving position.
Saving using the memory button
You can store the parking position of the exte-
rior mirror on the front-passenger side using
memory button M :. The reverse gear must not
be engaged.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 131).
X
Press button =.
X
Use button ; to adjust the exterior mirror to
a position that allows you to see the rear
wheel and the curb.
X
Press memory button M : and one of the
arrows on button ; within three seconds.
The parking position is stored if the exterior
mirror does not move.
X
If the mirror moves out of position, repeat the
steps.
X
After successfully storing, reset the driving
position of the exterior mirror.
106
Mirrors
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
background
Calling up a stored parking position set-
ting
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 131).
X
Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-
passenger side using button =.
X
Engage reverse gear.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves to the stored parking position.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side
moves back to its original position:
R
as soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph
(15 km/h)
R
about ten seconds after you have disengaged
reverse gear
R
when you use button ? to select the exterior
mirror on the driver's side
Memory function
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you use the memory function on the driver's
side while driving, you could lose control of
the vehicle as a result of the adjustments
being made. There is a risk of an accident.
Only use the memory function on the driver's
side when the vehicle is stationary.
G
WARNING
When the memory function adjusts the seat or
steering wheel, you and other vehicle occu-
pants – particularly children – could become
trapped. There is a risk of injury.
While the memory function is making adjust-
ments, make sure that no one has any body
parts in the sweep of the seat or steering
wheel. If somebody becomes trapped, imme-
diately release the memory function position
button. The adjustment process is stopped.
G
WARNING
Children could become trapped if they acti-
vate the memory function, particularly when
unattended. There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
The memory function can be used at any time,
e.g. even when the SmartKey is not in the igni-
tion lock.
Storing settings
With the memory function, you can store up to
three different settings, e.g. for three different
people.
The following settings are stored as a single
memory preset:
R
position of the seat, backrest and head
restraint
R
driver's side: position of the exterior mirrors
on the driver's and front-passenger sides
R
position of the head-up display
X
Adjust the seat accordingly (Y page 98).
X
On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel
(Y page 102) and the exterior mirrors
(Y page 104).
X
Press memory button M and then press one of
the memory position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within
three seconds.
The settings are stored in the selected preset
position. A tone sounds when the settings
have been completed.
Calling up a stored setting
X
Press and hold the relevant memory position
button 1, 2 or 3 until the following compo-
nents are in the saved position:
Memory function
107
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
background
R
Seat
R
Steering wheel
R
Exterior mirrors
R
Head-up display
i
If you release the memory position switch,
the seat, steering wheel and mirror setting
functions stop immediately. The head-up dis-
play continues to be adjusted.
108
Memory function
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
background
Exterior lighting
General notes
USA only: if you wish to drive during the daytime
without lights, switch off the Daytime Run‐Daytime Run‐
ning Lightsning Lights function via the on-board com-
puter (Y page 222).
Setting the exterior lighting
Setting options
Exterior lighting can be set using the:
R
light switch (Y page 109)
R
combination switch (Y page 110)
R
on-board computer (Y page 222)
Light switch
Operation
1 W
Left-hand standing lamps
2 X
Right-hand standing lamps
3 T
Parking lamps, license plate and
instrument cluster lighting
4 Ã
Automatic headlamp mode, controlled
by the light sensor
5 L
Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
B R
Rear fog lamp
If you hear a warning tone when you leave the
vehicle, the lights may still be switched on.
X
Turn the light switch to the à position.
The exterior lighting (except the parking/stand-
ing lamps) switches off automatically if you:
R
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
R
open the driver's door with the SmartKey in
position g in the ignition lock
Automatic headlamp mode
G
WARNING
When the light switch is set to Ã, the low-
beam headlamps may not be switched on
automatically if there is fog, snow or other
causes of poor visibility due to the weather
conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an
accident.
In such situations, turn the light switch to
L.
The automatic headlamp mode is only an aid.
The driver is responsible for the vehicle's light-
ing at all times.
à is the favored light switch setting.
The light setting is automatically selected
according to the brightness of the ambient light,
but not in the event of poor visibility due to
weather conditions such as fog, snow or spray.
R
With the SmartKey in position 1 in the igni-
tion lock, the parking lamps are switched on
or off automatically depending on the bright-
ness of the ambient light.
R
USA only: if you have switched on the Day‐
Day‐
time Running Lightstime Running Lights function via the on-
board computer, and the engine is running,
the daytime running lamps or the parking
lamps and low-beam headlamps are switched
on or off automatically depending on the
ambient light.
R
Canada only: depending on the ambient light,
the daytime running lamps or the parking and
low-beam headlamps are switched on/off
automatically when the engine is running.
X
To switch on the automatic headlamps:
turn the light switch to the à position.
USA only: the daytime running lamps improve
the visibility of your vehicle during the day. Here,
the Daytime Running LightsDaytime Running Lights function must
be switched on via the on-board computer
(Y page 222).
If the engine is running and you turn the light
switch to the T or L position, the manual
settings take precedence over the daytime run-
ning lamps.
Canada only: the daytime running lamps
improve the visibility of your vehicle during the
day. The daytime running lamps function is
required by law in Canada. It cannot therefore
be deactivated.
Exterior lighting
109
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
background
When the engine is running and the vehicle is
stationary: if you move the selector lever from a
driving position to j, the daytime driving lights
and low-beam headlamps go out after three
minutes.
When the engine is running, the vehicle is sta-
tionary and in bright ambient light: if you turn the
light switch to the T position, the daytime
running lamps and parking lamps switch on.
If the engine is running and you turn the light
switch to the L position, the manual settings
take precedence over the daytime running
lamps.
Low-beam headlamps
G
WARNING
When the light switch is set to Ã, the low-
beam headlamps may not be switched on
automatically if there is fog, snow or other
causes of poor visibility due to the weather
conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an
accident.
In such situations, turn the light switch to
L.
Even if the light sensor does not detect that it is
dark, the parking lamps and low-beam head-
lamps switch on when the ignition is switched on
and the light switch is set to the L position.
This is a particularly useful function in the event
of rain and fog.
X
To switch on the low-beam headlamps:
turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock or start the engine.
X
Turn the light switch to the L position.
The green L indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up.
Rear fog lamp
The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your
vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of thick
fog. You must observe the legal requirements
for the country in which you are currently driving
when operating the rear fog lamp.
X
To switch on the rear fog lamp: turn the
SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or
start the engine.
X
Turn the light switch to the L or Ã
position.
X
Press the R button.
The yellow R indicator lamp on the instru-
ment cluster lights up.
Parking lamps
!
If the battery charge is very low, the parking
lamps or standing lamps are automatically
switched off to enable the next engine start.
Always park your vehicle safely and in a well lit
area, in accordance with the relevant legal
stipulations. Avoid using the T parking
lamps over a period of several hours. If pos-
sible, switch on the right-hand X or left-
hand W standing lamps.
X
To switch on the parking lamps: turn the
light switch to the T position.
The green T indicator lamp on the instru-
ment cluster lights up.
Standing lamps
Switching on the standing lamps ensures the
corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated.
X
To switch on the parking lamp: turn the
SmartKey to position g in the ignition lock or
remove the SmartKey.
X
Turn the light switch to the W (left-hand
side of the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of
the vehicle) position.
Combination switch
:
High-beam headlamps
;
Turn signal, right
110
Exterior lighting
Lights and windshield wipers
background
=
High-beam flasher
?
Turn signal, left
X
To indicate briefly: press the combination
switch briefly to the pressure point in the
direction of arrow ; or ?.
The corresponding turn signal flashes three
times.
X
To indicate: press the combination switch
beyond the pressure point in the direction of
arrow ; or ?.
X
To switch on the high-beam headlamps:
turn the light switch to the L or Ã
position.
X
Press the combination switch beyond the
pressure point in the direction of arrow :.
In the à position, the high-beam head-
lamps are switched on only when it is dark and
the engine is running.
The blue K indicator lamp on the instru-
ment cluster lights up when the high-beam
headlamps are switched on.
X
To switch off the high-beam headlamps:
move the combination switch back to its nor-
mal position.
The blue K indicator lamp on the instru-
ment cluster goes out.
Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist:
If Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active, it auto-
matically controls activation and deactivation of
the high-beam headlamps (Y page 111).
X
High-beam flasher: pull the combination
switch in the direction of arrow =.
Hazard warning lamps
X
To switch the hazard warning lamps on or
off: press button :.
The turn signal lamps flash when the hazard
warning lamps are switched on. If you now
switch on a turn signal lamp using the com-
bination switch, only the turn signal lamp on
the corresponding side of the vehicle will
flash.
The hazard warning lamps switch on automati-
cally if an air bag is deployed.
The hazard warning lamps still operate if the
ignition is switched off.
Cornering light function
The cornering light function improves the illu-
mination of the road over a wide angle in the
direction you are turning, enabling better visi-
bility in tight bends, for example. It can only be
activated when the low-beam headlamps are
switched on.
Active:
R
if you are driving at speeds below 25 mph
(40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal or
turn the steering wheel
R
if you are driving at speeds between 25 mph
(40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) and turn
the steering wheel
The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short
time, but is automatically switched off after no
more than three minutes.
Cornering light function with traffic circle
function:
The cornering light function is activated on both
sides before entering a traffic circle through an
evaluation of the current GPS position of the
vehicle. It remains active until after the vehicle
has left the traffic circle. In this way, pedestrians
crossing the road, for example, are illuminated
by your vehicle in good time.
Only vehicles with the COMAND multimedia sys-
tem have this function.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
General notes
You can use this function to set the headlamps
to change between low beam and high beam
automatically. The system recognizes vehicles
with their lights on, either approaching from the
opposite direction or traveling in front of your
vehicle, and consequently switches the head-
lamps from high beam to low beam.
Exterior lighting
111
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
background
The system automatically adapts the low-beam
headlamp range depending on the distance to
the other vehicle. Once the system no longer
detects any other vehicles, it reactivates the
high-beam headlamps.
The system's optical sensor is located behind
the windshield near the overhead control panel.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognize
road users:
R
who have no lights, e.g. pedestrians
R
who have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
R
whose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier
On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam
Assist may fail to recognize other road users
that have lights, or may recognize them too
late. In this, or in similar situations, the auto-
matic high-beam headlamps will not be deac-
tivated or will be activated regardless. There is
a risk of an accident.
Always carefully observe the traffic conditions
and switch off the high-beam headlamps in
good time.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into
account road, weather or traffic conditions.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are
responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting
to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic con-
ditions.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
impaired if:
R
there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy
rain or snow
R
there is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist
on/off
X
To switch on: turn the light switch to the
à position.
X
Press the combination switch forwards
beyond the pressure point (Y page 110).
The _ indicator lamp on the multifunction
display lights up when it is dark and the light
sensor switches on the low-beam headlamps.
If you are driving at speeds above approx-
imately 16 mph (25 km/h):
The headlamp range is set automatically
depending on the distance between the vehi-
cle and other road users.
If you are driving at speeds above approx-
imately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other road
users are detected:
The high-beam headlamps are switched on
automatically. The K indicator lamp on the
instrument cluster also lights up.
If you are driving at speeds below approx-
imately 16 mph (25 km/h) or other road users
are detected or the roads are adequately lit:
The high-beam headlamps are switched off
automatically. The K indicator lamp on the
instrument cluster goes out. The _ indi-
cator lamp on the multifunction display
remains lit.
X
To switch off: move the combination switch
back to its normal position or move the light
switch to another position.
The K indicator lamp on the instrument
cluster goes out.
Headlamps fogged up on the inside
Certain climatic and physical conditions may
cause moisture to form in the headlamp. This
moisture does not affect the functionality of the
headlamp.
112
Exterior lighting
Lights and windshield wipers
background
Interior lighting
Overview of interior lighting
Front overhead control panel
:
p Left-hand front reading lamp
;
| Automatic interior lighting control
=
c Front interior lighting
?
u Rear interior lighting
A
p Right-hand front reading lamp
Control panel in the grab handle (rear
compartment)
:
Reading lamp
;
p Switches the reading lamp on/off
Interior lighting control
General notes
In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from
discharging, the interior lighting functions are
automatically deactivated after some time
except for when the SmartKey is in position 2
in the ignition lock.
The color and brightness of the ambient lighting
are set using the multimedia system (see Digital
Operator's Manual).
Automatic interior lighting control
X
To switch on or off: press the | button.
When the automatic interior lighting control is
activated, the button is flush with the over-
head control panel.
The interior lighting automatically switches on if
you:
R
unlock the vehicle
R
open a door
R
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
The interior lighting is switched on for a set time
when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition
lock. This delayed switch-off can be adjusted via
the multimedia system (see Digital Operator's
Manual).
Replacing bulbs
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Bulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hot
when operating. If you change a bulb, you
could burn yourself on these components.
There is a risk of injury.
Allow these components to cool down before
changing a bulb.
Do not use a bulb if it has been dropped or if its
glass tube has been scratched.
The bulb may explode if:
R
you touch it
R
it is hot
R
you drop it
R
you scratch it
Use bulbs only in closed lamps that have been
designed for this purpose. Only install spare
bulbs of the same type and the specified volt-
age.
Marks on the glass tube reduce the service life
of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube with
your bare hands. If necessary, clean the glass
tube when cold with alcohol or spirit and rub it
off with a lint-free cloth.
Replacing bulbs
113
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
background
Protect bulbs from moisture during operation.
Do not allow bulbs to come into contact with
liquids.
Replace only the bulbs listed (Y page 114).
Have the bulbs that you cannot change yourself
replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
If you require assistance replacing bulbs, con-
sult a qualified specialist workshop.
If the new bulb still does not light up, consult a
qualified specialist workshop.
Headlamps and lights are an important aspect of
vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
that these function correctly at all times. Have
the headlamp setting checked regularly.
Vehicles with LED headlamps: the front and
rear light clusters of your vehicle are equipped
with LED bulbs. Do not replace the bulbs your-
self. Contact a qualified specialist workshop
which has the necessary specialist knowledge
and tools to carry out the work required.
Overview of bulb types
You can replace the following bulbs. The bulb
type can be found in the legend.
Halogen headlamps
:
Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
;
High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
=
Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W
Replacing front bulbs (vehicles with
halogen headlamps)
Low-beam headlamps
X
Switch off the lights.
X
Open the hood.
X
Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and
remove it.
X
Push bulb holder ; up and pull out.
X
Pull defective bulb out of bulb holder ;.
X
Insert new bulb into bulb holder ;.
X
Insert bulb holder ; into groove with lug at
top.
X
Push bulb holder ; down until it engages
audibly.
X
Press on housing cover : and turn it clock-
wise.
High-beam headlamps
X
Switch off the lights.
X
Open the hood.
X
Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and
remove it.
X
Push bulb holder ; upwards and pull out.
X
Pull defective bulb out of bulb holder ;.
114
Replacing bulbs
Lights and windshield wipers
background
X
Insert new bulb into bulb holder ;.
X
Insert bulb holder ; into groove with lug at
top.
X
Push bulb holder ; down until it engages
audibly.
X
Press on housing cover : and turn it clock-
wise.
Turn signals
X
Remove the cover in the front wheel housing
(Y page 115).
X
Turn bulb holder : counter-clockwise using
the grip under the headlamp casing and
remove it downwards with bulb.
X
Turn defective bulb counter-clockwise and
remove it from bulb holder :.
X
Insert new bulb into bulb holder :.
X
Insert bulb holder :, turn it clockwise and
lock.
X
Replace the cover in the front wheel housing
(Y page 115).
Removing and installing the cover in the
front wheel housing
You must remove the cover of the front wheel
housing before you can change the front turn
signal lamp.
X
To remove: switch off the lights.
X
Turn the front wheels inwards.
X
Turn rotary knob : 180° outwards until it
stops using a suitable object.
Cover ; is released.
X
Fold cover ; up.
X
To install: insert cover ; into the left, right
and two lower catches.
X
Turn rotary knob : 180° inwards until it
stops using a suitable object.
Cover ; is locked.
Windshield wipers
Switching the windshield wipers
on/off
!
Do not operate the windshield wipers when
the windshield is dry, as this could damage
the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has col-
lected on the windshield can scratch the glass
if wiping takes place when the windshield is
dry.
If it is necessary to switch on the windshield
wipers in dry weather conditions, always use
washer fluid when operating the windshield
wipers.
!
If the windshield wipers leave smears on the
windshield after the vehicle has been washed
in an automatic car wash, wax or other resi-
dues may be the reason for this. Clean the
windshield using washer fluid after washing
the vehicle in an automatic car wash.
!
Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due to
optical influences and the windshield becom-
ing dirty in dry weather conditions, the wind-
shield wipers may be activated inadvertently.
This could then damage the windshield wiper
blades or scratch the windshield.
Windshield wipers
115
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
background
For this reason, you should always switch off
the windshield wipers in dry weather.
1
$ Windshield wiper off
2
Ä Intermittent wipe, normal
3
Å Intermittent wipe, frequent
4
° Continuous wipe, slow
5
¯ Continuous wipe, fast
B
í Single wipe
î Wipe with washer fluid
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Turn the combination switch to the corre-
sponding position.
Vehicles with a rain sensor: in the Å or
Ä position, the appropriate wipe frequency
is automatically set according to the intensity of
the rain. In the Å position, the rain sensor is
more sensitive than in the Ä position, caus-
ing the windshield wiper to wipe more fre-
quently.
If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield will
no longer be wiped properly. This could prevent
you from observing the traffic conditions.
Replacing the wiper blades
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If the windshield wipers begin to move while
you are changing the wiper blades, you could
be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of
injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
ignition before changing the wiper blades.
!
Never open the hood if a windshield wiper
arm has been folded away from the wind-
shield.
Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a
wiper blade back onto the windshield.
Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when
you change the wiper blade. If you release the
windshield wiper arm without a wiper blade
and it falls onto the windshield, the windshield
may be damaged by the force of the impact.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
the wiper blades changed at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
!
To avoid damaging the wiper blades, make
sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the
wiper.
Changing the windshield wiper blades
Moving the wiper arms to a vertical posi-
tion
On vehicles without KEYLESS-GO or KEY-
LESS‑GO start function:
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 131).
X
Set the windshield wipers to the ° posi-
tion on the combination switch.
X
When the wiper arms are vertical to the hood,
turn the SmartKey to position u in the igni-
tion lock and remove SmartKey.
X
Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield.
On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEY-
LESS‑GO start function:
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Remove your foot from the brake pedal.
X
Set the windshield wiper to the ° position
on the combination switch.
X
Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until
the windshield wiper starts.
X
When the wiper arms are vertical to the hood,
press the Start/Stop button.
X
Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield.
116
Windshield wipers
Lights and windshield wipers
background
Removing the wiper blades
X
Hold on to the wiper arm with one hand. With
the other hand, turn the wiper blade in the
direction of arrow : away from the wiper arm
as far as it will go.
X
Slide the catch ; in the direction of arrow =
until it engages in the removal position with a
noticeable click.
X
Remove the wiper blade in the direction of
arrow ? away from the wiper arm.
Installing the wiper blades
X
Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm
in the direction of arrow :.
X
Slide the catch ; in the direction of arrow =
until it engages in the locking position with a
noticeable click.
X
Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor-
rectly.
X
Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield.
X
Remove the protective film : from the ser-
vice indicator on the tip of the wiper blade.
If the color of the service indicator changes from
black to yellow, the wiper blades should be
replaced.
i
The duration of the color change varies
depending on the usage conditions.
Windshield wipers
117
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
background
Problems with the windshield wipers
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The windshield wipers
are jammed.
Leaves or snow, for example, are obstructing windshield wiper move-
ment. The wiper motor has been deactivated.
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
or, on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS‑GO start function:
X
Open the driver's door.
The vehicle electronics are now in position u. This means: "Key
removed".
X
Remove the cause of the obstruction.
X
Switch the windshield wipers back on.
The windshield wipers
fail completely.
The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.
X
Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.
X
Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
The windshield washer
fluid from the spray noz-
zles no longer hits the
center of the windshield.
The spray nozzles are misaligned.
X
Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist workshop.
118
Windshield wipers
Lights and windshield wipers
background
Overview of climate control systems
General notes
Observe the settings recommended on the fol-
lowing pages. The windows could otherwise fog
up.
To prevent the windows from fogging up:
R
switch off climate control only briefly
R
switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly
R
switch on the cooling with air dehumidifica-
tion function
R
activate the "Windshield defrosting" function
briefly, if required
Climate control regulates the temperature and
air humidity in the vehicle interior. The interior
filter cleans the air, thus improving the interior
climate.
The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function
is only available when the engine is running.
Optimum climate control is only achieved with
the side windows and roof closed.
If you start the engine using your smartphone,
the last selected climate control setting is reac-
tivated (Y page 134).
The integrated filter filters out most particles of
dust and soot and completely filters out pollen.
It also reduces gaseous pollutants and odors. A
clogged filter reduces the amount of air supplied
to the vehicle interior. For this reason, you
should always observe the interval for replacing
the filter, which is specified in the Maintenance
Booklet. As it depends on environmental condi-
tions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval may
be shorter than stated in the Maintenance Book-
let.
i
Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during
warm weather, e.g. using the convenience
opening feature (Y page 91). This will speed
up the cooling process and the desired inte-
rior temperature will be reached more
quickly.
i
It is possible that the blower may be activa-
ted automatically 60 minutes after the Smart-
Key has been removed depending on various
factors, e.g. the outside temperature. The
vehicle is then ventilated for 30 minutes to dry
the automatic climate control.
Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control
Example: control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control
:
Sets the temperature, left (Y page 123)
;
Sets the air distribution (Y page 124)
=
Sets the airflow (Y page 124)
Switches off climate control (Y page 122)
Overview of climate control systems
119
Climate control
background
?
Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 123)
A
Defrosts the windshield (Y page 125)
B
Calls up the climate control menu of the multimedia system (Y page 273)
C
Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 125)
D
Activates or deactivates synchronization (Y page 124)
E
Switches air-recirculation mode manually on/off (Y page 126)
F
Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 122)
G
Sets the temperature, right (Y page 123)
Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control
Example for vehicles in Canada: control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control
Front control panel
:
Sets the temperature, left (Y page 123)
;
Sets the air distribution, left (Y page 124)
=
Sets the airflow (Y page 124)
Switches off climate control (Y page 122)
?
Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 123)
A
Defrosts the windshield (Y page 125)
B
Calls up the climate control menu of the multimedia system (Y page 273)
Switches the residual heat on/off (Y page 126)
C
Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 125)
D
Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 122)
E
Switches air-recirculation mode manually on/off (Y page 126)
F
Sets the air distribution, right (Y page 124)
G
Sets the temperature, right (Y page 123)
Rear control panel
H
Sets the temperature (Y page 123)
I
Display
J
Sets the airflow (Y page 124)
120
Overview of climate control systems
Climate control
background
Example for vehicles in the USA: control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control
Front control panel
:
Sets the temperature, left (Y page 123)
;
Sets the air distribution, left (Y page 124)
=
Sets the airflow (Y page 124)
Switches off climate control (Y page 122)
?
Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 123)
A
Defrosts the windshield (Y page 125)
B
Calls up the climate control menu of the multimedia system (Y page 273)
Switches the residual heat on/off (Y page 126)
C
Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 125)
D
Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 122)
E
Switches air-recirculation mode manually on/off (Y page 126)
F
Sets the air distribution, right (Y page 124)
G
Sets the temperature, right (Y page 123)
Rear control panel
H
Sets the temperature (Y page 123)
I
Display
J
Sets the airflow (Y page 124)
Optimum use of automatic climate
control
Optimum use of automatic climate con-
trol
The following contains notes and recommenda-
tions on how best to use dual-zone automatic
climate control or 3-zone automatic climate
control.
X
Activate climate control using the Ã
rocker switch. The indicator lamp above the
à rocker switch lights up. The "Cooling
with dehumidification" function is activated in
automatic mode.
X
Set the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).
i
Only use the "Windshield defrosting" func-
tion briefly until the windshield is clear again.
i
Only use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.
if there are unpleasant outside odors or when
in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog
up, since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle
in air-recirculation mode.
Overview of climate control systems
121
Climate control
background
Vehicles with 3-zone automatic climate control:
use the "Residual heat" function if you want to
heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when the
ignition is switched off. The residual heat func-
tion can only be activated or deactivated with
the ignition switched off. The residual heat func-
tion is deactivated when the ignition is switched
on.
DYNAMIC SELECT switch (except
Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 4MATIC/
GLC 63 S 4MATIC)
You can choose between various drive programs
with the DYNAMIC SELECT switch
(Y page 139).
If you have selected drive program E:
R
when heating, the electrical heater booster is
deactivated and heat output is reduced as a
result
R
the rear window defroster running time is
reduced
If you have selected drive program C, S or S+,
the current climate settings are maintained.
ECO start/stop function
During automatic engine switch-off, the climate
control system only operates at a reduced capa-
city. If you require the full climate control output,
you can switch off the ECO start/stop function
by pressing the ECO button (Y page 137).
Operating the climate control sys-
tems
Activating/deactivating climate con-
trol
General notes
When the climate control is switched off, the air
supply and air circulation are also switched off.
The windows could fog up. Therefore, switch off
climate control only briefly
Switch on climate control primarily using the
à rocker switch (Y page 123).
Activating/deactivating
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 131).
X
To switch on: set the airflow to level 1 or
higher using the H rocker switch.
X
To switch off: set the airflow to level 0 using
the H rocker switch.
i
3-zone automatic climate control: when cli-
mate control is switched off, "OFF" appears in
the rear-compartment display.
Switching cooling with air dehumidification on/off
General notes
If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will not
be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can fog up more
quickly. Therefore, only deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function briefly.
The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is only available when the engine is running. The air
inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected.
Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is normal
and not a sign that there is a malfunction.
Activating/deactivating
X
Press the ¿ rocker switch up or down.
The indicator lamp above the rocker switch lights up or goes out.
122
Operating the climate control systems
Climate control
background
Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The indicator lamp above
the ¿ rocker switch
remains off. The cooling
with air dehumidification
function cannot be acti-
vated via the multimedia
system any longer
(Y page 273).
Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a mal-
function.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Setting climate control to automatic
General notes
In automatic mode, the set temperature is main-
tained automatically at a constant level. The
system automatically regulates the temperature
of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air dis-
tribution.
During automatic controlling, the "Cooling with
air dehumidification" function is activated.
Automatic control
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 131).
X
To activate: press the à rocker switch up
or down.
The indicator lamp above the à rocker
switch lights up.
X
Set the desired temperature using the w
rocker switch on the front control unit.
X
To switch to manual operation: press the
H rocker switch up or down.
or
X
Press the _ rocker switch up or down.
The indicator lamp above the à rocker
switch goes out.
In automatic mode, if you adjust the airflow or
air distribution manually, the indicator lamp
above the à rocker switch goes out. The
function which has not been changed manually,
however, continues to be controlled automati-
cally. When the manually set function switches
back to automatic mode, the indicator lamp
above the à rocker switch lights up again.
Adjusting the climate mode settings
This function is only available with 3-zone auto-
matic climate control.
In automatic mode you can select the following
airflow settings for the driver's and front-
passenger areas:
FOCUS high airflow, slightly cooler setting
MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting
DIFFUSE low airflow, slightly warmer and draft-
free setting
X
To set: set the climate mode using the mul-
timedia system (Y page 273).
Setting the temperature
Dual-zone automatic climate control
Different temperatures can be set for the driv-
er's and front-passenger sides.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 131).
X
To increase or reduce: press the w
rocker switch up or down.
Only change the temperature setting in small
increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
Dual-zone automatic climate control
General notes
You can select different temperature settings
for the driver's and front-passenger sides as well
as for the rear compartment.
Operating the climate control systems
123
Climate control
background
Setting the temperature in the front com-
partment using the front control panel
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 131).
X
To increase or reduce: press rocker switch
w up or down.
Only change the temperature setting in small
increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
Setting the temperature in the rear com-
partment using the rear control panel
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 131).
X
To increase or reduce: press the w
rocker switch on the rear control panel up or
down (Y page 120).
Only change the temperature setting in small
increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
The set temperature appears on the rear-
compartment display.
Setting the air distribution
Air distribution settings
¯
Directs air through the defroster vents
P
Directs air through the center and side air
vents
O
Directs air through the footwell air vents
S
Directs air through the center, side and
footwell vents
a
Directs air through the defroster and
footwell vents
_
Directs air through the defroster, center,
side and footwell vents
b
Directs air through the defroster, center
and side air vents
W
Sets the air distribution to automatic
Setting
3-zone automatic climate control: you can set
the air distribution separately for the driver's
and front-passenger side.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2
(Y page 131).
X
Press the _ rocker switch up or down.
The various air distribution settings appear in
the multimedia system.
Setting the airflow
Setting the front-compartment airflow
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 131).
X
To increase or reduce: press rocker switch
H up or down.
Setting the rear compartment airflow
using the rear control panel
It is only possible to set the airflow using the rear
control panel on vehicles with 3-zone automatic
climate control.
You can set the airflow separately for the front
and rear compartment.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 131).
X
To increase or reduce: press rocker switch
K or I on the rear control panel up or
down.
The selected airflow level appears in the rear
display.
Activating or deactivating the syn-
chronization function
General notes
The "Synchronization" function is available only
with dual-zone automatic climate control and 3-
zone automatic climate control.
Climate control can be set centrally using the
synchronization function. The temperature set-
ting is adopted for the front-passenger side. For
3-zone automatic climate control, the tempera-
ture setting is adopted for the front-passenger
side and rear compartment.
Activating/deactivating
Dual-zone automatic climate control
X
Press the 0 rocker switch up or down.
The indicator lamp above the 0 rocker
switch lights up or goes out.
The synchronization function deactivates if the
settings for the front-passenger side are
changed.
124
Operating the climate control systems
Climate control
background
3-zone automatic climate control
X
Activate or deactivate the "Synchronization"
function using the multimedia system
(Y page 273).
The synchronization function is deactivated:
R
if the settings for the front-passenger side are
changed
R
the settings for the rear compartment are
changed
Defrosting the windshield
General notes
You can use this function to defrost the wind-
shield or to clear a fogged up windshield or front
side windows on the inside.
Switch off the "Windshield defrosting" function
as soon as the windshield is clear again.
Switching the "Windshield defrosting"
function on or off
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 131).
X
To switch on: press rocker switch ¬ on
the front control unit up or down.
The indicator lamp above the ¬ rocker
switch lights up. The current climate control
settings are deactivated.
The climate control system switches to the
following functions:
R
high airflow
R
high temperature
R
air distribution to the windshield and front
side windows
R
air-recirculation mode off
i
If necessary, the "Cooling with air dehumid-
ification" function is activated. In this case,
the indicator lamp above the ¿ rocker
switch remains switched off.
X
To switch off: press rocker switch ¬ up or
down.
The indicator lamp above the ¬ rocker
switch goes out. The previously selected set-
tings are restored. Air-recirculation mode
remains deactivated.
Removing condensation from the win-
dows
Windows fogged up on the inside
X
Activate the "Cooling with air dehumidifica-
tion" function with the ¿ rocker switch.
X
Switch on automatic mode using the Ã
rocker switch.
X
If the windows continue to fog up, activate the
"Windshield defrosting" function using the
¬ rocker switch.
i
You should only select this setting until the
windshield is clear again.
Windows fogged up on the outside
X
Activate the windshield wipers.
X
Switch on automatic mode using the Ã
rocker switch.
i
If you clean the windows regularly, they do
not fog up so quickly.
Rear window defroster
General notes
The rear window defroster has a high current
draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon
as the rear window is clear. Otherwise, the rear
window defroster switches off automatically
after several minutes.
If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window
defroster may switch off.
Activating/deactivating
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 131).
X
Press rocker switch ¤ up or down.
The indicator lamp above rocker switch ¤
lights up or goes out.
Operating the climate control systems
125
Climate control
background
Problems with the rear window defroster
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The rear window
defroster has deactiva-
ted prematurely or can-
not be activated.
The battery has not been sufficiently charged.
X
Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps,
interior lighting or the seat heating.
When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window defroster
can be activated again.
Switching air-recirculation mode
on/off
General notes
You can also temporarily deactivate the flow of
fresh air manually if unpleasant odors are enter-
ing the vehicle from outside. The air already
inside the vehicle will then be recirculated.
If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the win-
dows can fog up more quickly, in particular at
low temperatures. Only use air-recirculation
mode briefly to prevent the windows from fog-
ging up.
Activating/deactivating
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 131).
X
To activate: press the g rocker switch up
or down.
The indicator lamp above the g rocker
switch lights up.
Air-recirculation mode switches on automati-
cally:
R
at high outside temperatures
R
at high levels of pollution (3-zone automatic
climate control only)
R
in a tunnel (vehicles with a navigation system
only)
The indicator lamp above the g rocker
switch is not lit when automatic air-recirculation
mode is activated. Outside air is added after
about 30 minutes.
X
To deactivate: press the g rocker switch
up or down.
The indicator lamp above the g rocker
switch goes out.
Air-recirculation mode deactivates automati-
cally:
R
after approximately five minutes at outside
temperatures below approximately 41 ‡
(5 †)
R
after approximately five minutes if cooling
with air dehumidification is deactivated
R
after approximately 30 minutes at outside
temperatures above approximately 41 ‡
(5 †) if the "Cooling with dehumidification"
function is activated
Switching the residual heat on or off
General notes
The residual heat function is only available with
3-zone automatic climate control.
Once the engine is switched off, it is possible to
make use of the residual heat of the engine to
continue heating or ventilating the front com-
partment of the vehicle for approximately
30 minutes. The heating or ventilation time
depends on the interior temperature that has
been set.
Activating/deactivating
X
Turn the SmartKey to position u in the igni-
tion lock or remove it (Y page 131).
X
To activate: press the ! rocker switch up
or down.
The indicator lamp above the ! rocker
switch lights up.
The blower will run at a low speed regardless of
the airflow setting.
If you activate the residual heat function at high
temperatures, only the ventilation will be acti-
vated. The blower runs at medium speed.
126
Operating the climate control systems
Climate control
background
X
To deactivate: press the ! rocker switch
up or down.
The indicator lamp above the ! rocker
switch goes out.
Residual heat is deactivated automatically:
R
after approximately 30 minutes
R
when the ignition is switched on
R
if the battery voltage drops
Perfume atomizer
Operating the perfume atomizer
G
WARNING
If children open the vial, they could drink the
perfume or it could come into contact with
their eyes. There is a risk of injury. Therefore,
do not leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
cle.
If the perfume liquid has been drunk, consult
a doctor. If perfume comes into contact with
your eyes or skin, rinse the eyes with clean
water. If you continue to experience difficul-
ties, consult a doctor.
H
Environmental note
Full vials must not be dis-
posed of with household
waste. They must be collec-
ted separately and recycled
to protect the environment.
Dispose of full vials in an
environmentally responsible
manner and take them to a
harmful substance collec-
tion point.
:
Vial lid
;
Vial
The perfume atomizer helps to improve driving
comfort.
Via the multimedia system you can:
R
switch the perfume atomizer on/off
(Y page 273)
R
regulate the perfume intensity (Y page 273)
The following conditions can affect your percep-
tion of the perfume intensity:
R
operating mode of automatic climate control
R
interior temperature
R
time of year or day
R
air humidity
R
physiological condition of occupants, e.g. fati-
gue or hunger
The perfume atomizer is active only when the
glove box is closed.
The perfume atomizer is provided with a pre-fil-
led vial. You can also choose from a variety of
pre-filled vials and an empty vial which you can
fill yourself.
If you refill an empty perfume vial, observe the
separate information sheet attached to the vial.
!
If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz
interior perfumes, observe the safety notes
on the perfume packaging.
Do not refill the pre-filled vial when it is empty.
Dispose of the used vial after use.
X
To insert the perfume vial: open the glove
box (Y page 279).
X
Slide the perfume vial into the holder as far as
it will go.
X
To remove the perfume vial: pull out the
perfume vial.
Operating the climate control systems
127
Climate control
Z
background
X
To refill the perfume vial: unscrew the lid of
the empty perfume vial to refill it yourself.
X
Fill the perfume vial with a maximum of
0.5 fl. oz. (15 ml) of the desired liquid per-
fume.
X
Screw the lid back on to the vial.
!
Only refill the perfume vial when you are
outside the vehicle. Otherwise, liquid perfume
could drip into the interior and contaminate it.
Always refill the empty refillable vial with the
same perfume. Otherwise, you might not ach-
ieve optimum results from the perfume atom-
izer.
Problems with the perfume atomizer
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The vehicle interior is not
perfumed although the
perfume atomizer is acti-
vated.
The perfume vial has not been pushed into the holder as far as it will
go.
X
Slide the perfume vial into the holder as far as it will go.
The perfume vial is not filled sufficiently.
X
Pre-filled vials: dispose of the empty vial.
X
Use a new pre-filled vial.
X
Refillable vials: refill the vial with a maximum of 0.5 fl. oz. (15 ml)
of the same perfume.
The perfume atomizer is faulty.
X
Have the perfume atomizer checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Ionization
Ionization is used to purify the air in the vehicle
interior and attain an improved interior climate.
The ionization of the interior air is odorless and
cannot be perceived directly in the vehicle inte-
rior.
You can switch ionization on/off using the mul-
timedia system (Y page 273).
Ionization can only be operated when the auto-
matic climate control is switched on. The side air
vent on the driver's side must be open.
Air vents
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air
vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in
the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There
is a risk of injury.
Make sure that all vehicle occupants always
maintain a sufficient distance to the air out-
lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to
another area of the vehicle interior.
In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air
through the air vents into the vehicle interior,
please observe the following notes:
R
keep the air inlet between the windshield and
the hood free of blockages, such as ice, snow
or leaves.
R
never cover the air vents or air intake grilles in
the vehicle interior.
128
Air vents
Climate control
background
Setting the air vents
Air vents are located:
R
on the left and right-hand side of the dash-
board
R
in the middle of the dashboard
R
in the rear center console, depending on the
equipment installed
Side air vent (example)
:
Side window defroster vent
;
Side air vent, left
=
Control for left side air vent
X
To open or close: turn control = to the
counter-clockwise or clockwise as far as it will
go.
X
To adjust the air direction: hold side air
vent ; by control = and move it up or down
or to the left or right.
Adjusting the rear air vents (see the Digital
Operator's Manual).
Air vents
129
Climate control
Z
background
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle
Important safety notes
The sensor system of some driving and driving
safety systems adjusts automatically while a
certain distance is being driven after the vehicle
has been delivered or after repairs. Full system
effectiveness is not reached until the end of this
teach-in procedure.
New and replaced brake pads and discs only
reach their optimum braking effect after several
hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for
this by applying greater force to the brake pedal.
The first 1,000 miles (1,500 km)
The more you look after the engine when it is
new, the more satisfied you will be with its per-
formance in the future.
R
You should therefore drive at varying vehicle
and engine speeds for the first 1,000 miles
(1,500 km).
R
Avoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle,
during this period.
R
When changing gears manually, change up in
good time. Change gear before the tachome-
ter needle is Ô of the way to the red area of
the tachometer display, at the latest.
R
Do not manually shift to a lower gear to brake
the vehicle.
R
Try to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal
beyond the pressure point (kickdown).
R
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles): ideally, for the first 1,000 miles
(1,500 km), drive in drive program E.
Additional breaking-in notes for Mercedes-AMG
vehicles:
R
Do not drive faster than 85 mph (140 km/h)
for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km).
R
Only briefly allow the engine to reach a max-
imum engine speed of 4,500 rpm.
R
Change gear in good time.
R
Ideally, for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km),
drive in program C.
After 1,000 miles(1,500 km), you can increase
the engine speed gradually and accelerate the
vehicle to full speed.
You should also observe these notes on break-
ing in if the engine or parts of the drive train on
your vehicle have been replaced.
Always observe the maximum permissible
speed.
Locking differential (Mercedes-AMG
GLC 63 4MATIC+/GLC 63 S 4MATIC+)
Your vehicle is equipped with a self-locking dif-
ferential on the rear axle.
Change the oil to improve protection of the rear
axle differential:
R
after a breaking-in period of 1,850 miles
(3,000 km)
R
every 31,000 miles (50,000 km) or 3 years
These oil changes prolong the service life of the
differential. Have the oil change carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Driving
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict
the clearance around the pedals or block a
depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the oper-
ating and road safety of the vehicle. There is a
risk of an accident.
Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that
they do not get into the driver's footwell.
When using floormats or carpets, make sure
that they are properly secured so that they do
not slip or obstruct the pedals. Do not place
several floormats or carpets on top of one
another.
G
WARNING
Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage
of the pedals, e.g.:
R
shoes with thick soles
R
shoes with high heels
R
slippers
There is a risk of an accident.
Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct
usage of the pedals.
130
Driving
Driving and parking
background
G
WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
G
WARNING
If the parking brake has not been fully
released when driving, the parking brake can:
R
overheat and cause a fire
R
lose its hold function.
There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release
the parking brake fully before driving off.
!
Do not warm up the engine while stationary.
Pull away immediately. Avoid high engine
speeds and full throttle until the engine has
reached its operating temperature.
In vehicles with automatic transmission,
engage positions P and R only when the vehi-
cle is stationary.
Where possible, avoid spinning the drive
wheels when pulling away on slippery roads.
You could otherwise damage the drive train.
!
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: at low engine oil
temperatures below 68 ‡ (+20 †), the max-
imum engine speed is restricted in order to
protect the engine. To protect the engine and
maintain smooth engine operation, avoid driv-
ing at full throttle when the engine is cold.
Key positions
SmartKey
g
To remove the SmartKey
1
Power supply for some consumers, such as
the windshield wipers
2
Ignition (power supply for all consumers)
and drive position
3
To start the engine
i
The SmartKey can be turned in the ignition
lock even if it is not the correct SmartKey for
the vehicle. The ignition is not switched on.
The engine cannot be started.
Start/Stop button
General notes
When you insert the Start/Stop button into the
ignition lock, the system needs approximately
two seconds recognition time. You can then use
the Start/Stop button.
Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in
succession corresponds to the different Smart-
Key positions in the ignition lock. This is only the
case if you are not depressing the brake pedal.
If you depress the brake pedal and press the
Start/Stop button, the engine starts immedi-
ately.
A check which periodically establishes a radio
connection between the vehicle and the Smart-
Key determines whether a valid SmartKey is in
the vehicle. This occurs, for example, when
starting the engine.
Driving
131
Driving and parking
Z
background
To start the vehicle without actively using the
SmartKey:
R
the Start/Stop button must be inserted in the
ignition lock.
R
the SmartKey must be in the vehicle.
R
the vehicle must not be locked with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. (Y page 78)
Do not keep the SmartKey:
R
with electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone
or another SmartKey.
R
with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil.
R
inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.
This can affect the functionality of the Smart-
Key.
If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey remote
control or with KEYLESS-GO, after a short time:
R
you will not be able to switch on the ignition
with the Start/Stop button.
R
you will no longer be able to start the engine
with the Start/Stop button until the vehicle is
unlocked again.
If you lock the vehicle centrally using the button
on the front door (Y page 83), you can continue
to start the engine with the Start/Stop button.
The engine can be switched off while the vehicle
is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/
Stop button for three seconds. This function
operates independently of the ECO start/stop
automatic engine switch-off function.
Key positions with the Start/Stop button
:
Start/Stop button
;
Ignition lock
As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the
indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light
up. Warning and indicator lamps: see
(Y page 256).
If Start/Stop button : has not yet been
pressed, this corresponds to the SmartKey
being removed from the ignition.
X
To switch on the power supply: press
Start/Stop button : once.
The power supply is switched on. You can now
activate the windshield wipers, for example.
The power supply is switched off again if:
R
the driver's door is opened and
R
you press Start/Stop button : twice when in
this position
X
To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stop
button : twice.
The ignition is switched on.
The ignition is switched off again if:
R
you do not start the engine from this position
within 15 minutes
R
you press Start/Stop button : once when in
this position
The power supply is switched off again if:
R
the driver's door is opened and
R
you press Start/Stop button : once when in
this position
Removing the Start/Stop button
You can remove the Start/Stop button from the
ignition lock and start the vehicle as normal
using the SmartKey.
It is possible to switch between Start/Stop but-
ton mode and key operation only when the
transmission is in position j.
X
Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition
lock ;.
You do not have to remove the Start/Stop but-
ton from the ignition lock when you leave the
vehicle. You should, however, always take the
SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle. As
long as the SmartKey is in the vehicle:
R
the vehicle can be started using the Start/
Stop button
R
the electrically powered equipment can be
operated
132
Driving
Driving and parking
background
Starting the engine
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
R
open the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
R
get out and disrupt traffic.
R
operate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
R
release the parking brake.
R
shifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P
R
Start the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
G
DANGER
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases is hazardous to health
and can result in poisoning. There is a risk of
fatal injury. Therefore, never leave the engine
running an enclosed space without adequate
ventilation.
G
WARNING
Flammable materials introduced through
environmental influence or by animals can
ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or
parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk
of fire.
Carry out regular checks to make sure that
there are no flammable foreign materials in
the engine compartment or in the exhaust
system.
General notes
The catalytic converter is preheated for up to
30 seconds after a cold start. The sound of the
engine may change during this time.
Automatic transmission
X
Shift the transmission to position j
(Y page 141).
The transmission position indicator on the
multifunction display shows j
(Y page 142).
i
You can start the engine in transmission
position j and i.
Starting procedure with the SmartKey
To start the engine using the SmartKey instead
of the Start/Stop button, pull the Start/Stop
button out of the ignition lock.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the igni-
tion lock and release it as soon as the engine
is running.
If the engine will not start:
X
Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X
Reinsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock
after a short waiting period.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 131).
The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
light up (Y page 256).
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 131) and release it as soon
as the engine is running.
Starting procedure with the Start/Stop
button
The Start/Stop button is only available on vehi-
cles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-GO start
function.
The Start/Stop button can be used to start the
vehicle manually without inserting the SmartKey
into the ignition lock. The Start/Stop button
must be inserted in the ignition lock and the
SmartKey must be in the vehicle. This mode for
starting the engine operates independently of
the ECO start/stop automatic engine start func-
tion.
You can start the engine if a valid SmartKey is in
the vehicle. Switch off the engine and always
Driving
133
Driving and parking
Z
background
take the SmartKey with you when leaving the
vehicle, even if you only leave it for a short time.
Pay attention to the important safety notes.
X
Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
X
Press the Start/Stop button once
(Y page 132).
The engine starts.
Starting procedure via smartphone
Observe the important safety notes on starting
the engine (Y page 133).
You can also start your engine via your smart-
phone from outside the vehicle. In this case, the
previously selected climate control setting is
activated. In this way you can cool or heat the
interior of the vehicle before starting the jour-
ney.
Only start the engine via your smartphone if it is
safe to start and run the engine where your vehi-
cle is parked.
Observe the legal stipulations in the area where
your vehicle is parked. Engine start via smart-
phone may be limited to certain countries or
regions.
You can execute a maximum of two consecutive
starting attempts via your smartphone. If you
press the start/stop button or insert the Smart-
Key into the ignition lock, you can carry out two
more starting attempts with your smartphone.
The engine runs for ten minutes when starting
with the smartphone.
Once you have started the engine, you can
switch the engine off via your smartphone at any
time.
You can only start the engine via your smart-
phone if:
R
the SmartKey is in the ignition lock
R
park position j is selected
R
the accelerator pedal is not depressed
R
the anti-theft alarm system is not activated
R
the panic alarm is not activated
R
the hazard warning lamps are switched off
R
the hood is closed
R
the doors are closed and locked
R
the windows and sliding sunroof are closed
Also make sure that:
R
the fuel tank is sufficiently filled
R
the starter battery has been sufficiently
charged
G
WARNING
Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the
engine is started unintentionally during ser-
vice or maintenance work. There is a risk of
injury.
Always secure the engine against uninten-
tional starting before carrying out mainte-
nance or repair work.
Make sure that the engine cannot be started via
your smartphone before carrying out mainte-
nance or repairs. You can prevent an engine
start via your smartphone, for example, if you:
R
switch on the hazard warning lamps
R
do not lock the doors
R
open a side window
Pulling away
General notes
G
WARNING
If the engine speed is above the idling speed
and you engage transmission position D or R,
the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is
a risk of an accident.
When engaging transmission position D or R,
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
not simultaneously accelerate.
Depress the accelerator carefully when pulling
away.
The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled
away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down.
You can open the doors from the inside at any
time.
You can also deactivate the automatic locking
feature, see the Digital Operator's Manual.
It is possible to shift the transmission from posi-
tion j to the desired position only if you
depress the brake pedal. Only then is the park-
ing lock released. If you do not depress the
brake pedal, the DIRECT SELECT lever can still
134
Driving
Driving and parking
background
be moved but the parking lock remains
engaged.
i
Upshifts take place at higher engine speeds
after a cold start. This helps the catalytic con-
verter to reach its operating temperature
more quickly.
Information on the automatic release of the
electric parking brake (Y page 155).
Pulling away with a trailer
To ensure that you do not roll backwards when
pulling away on an uphill slope, engage the elec-
tric parking brake.
X
Press and hold handle :.
The electric parking brake continues to brake
and prevent the vehicle from rolling back-
wards.
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
remains on.
X
Depress the accelerator pedal.
X
As soon as the vehicle/trailer combination is
held by the driving force of the engine, release
lever :.
The electric parking brake is released.
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
goes out.
For further information on the electric parking
brake, see (Y page 154).
Hill start assist
Hill start assist helps you when pulling away
forward or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It
holds the vehicle for a short time after you have
removed your foot from the brake pedal. This
gives you enough time to move your foot from
the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and to
depress it before the vehicle begins to roll.
G
WARNING
After a short time, hill start assist will no lon-
ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Therefore, quickly move your foot from the
brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never
leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start
assist.
Hill start assist is not active if:
R
you are pulling away on a level road or on a
downhill gradient.
R
the transmission is in position i
R
the electric parking brake is applied.
R
ESP
®
is malfunctioning
ECO start/stop function
Introduction
The ECO start/stop function switches the
engine off automatically if the vehicle is stopped
under certain conditions.
The engine starts automatically when the driver
wants to pull away again. The ECO start/stop
function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel
consumption and emissions of your vehicle.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If the engine is switched off automatically and
you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted
automatically. The vehicle may begin moving.
There is a risk of accident and injury.
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
the ignition and secure the vehicle against
rolling away.
Driving
135
Driving and parking
Z
background
General notes
:
ECO start/stop display
The ECO start/stop function is activated when-
ever you start the engine using the SmartKey or
the Start/Stop button.
If the engine has been switched off automati-
cally by the ECO start/stop function, the è
ECO symbol is shown in the multifunction dis-
play.
Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 4MATIC+/GLC 63 S
4MATIC+: the ECO start/stop function is auto-
matically switched on only in drive program C.
Automatic engine switch-off
If the vehicle is braked to a standstill with the
transmission in h or i, the ECO start/stop
function switches off the engine automatically.
The ECO start/stop function is operational
when:
R
the indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit
green
R
the outside temperature and the atmospheric
air pressure is within the range that is suitable
for the system
R
the engine is at normal operating temperature
R
the set temperature for the vehicle interior
has been reached
R
the battery is sufficiently charged
R
the system detects that the windshield is not
fogged up when the air-conditioning system is
switched on
R
the hood is closed
R
the driver's door is closed and the driver's
seat belt is fastened
All of the vehicle's systems remain active when
the engine is stopped automatically.
The HOLD function can also be activated if the
engine has been switched off automatically. It is
then not necessary to continue applying the
brakes during the automatic stop phase. When
you depress the accelerator pedal, the engine
starts automatically and the braking effect of
the HOLD function is deactivated.
Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 4MATIC+/GLC 63 S
4MATIC+: the number of consecutive auto-
matic engine stops is unlimited.
All other models: automatic engine switch-off
can take place a maximum of four times in a row
(initial switch-off, then three subsequent switch-
offs).
Automatic engine start
The engine starts automatically if:
R
you switch off the ECO start/stop function by
pressing the ECO button
R
Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 4MATIC+/GLC 63
S 4MATIC+: you switch to drive program
RACE (S‑MODEL), S+ or S
R
all other models: you switch to drive pro-
gram S+
R
you permanently activate manual gearshifting
(Y page 147)
R
in transmission position h or i, the brake
pedal is released and the HOLD function is not
active
R
you depress the accelerator pedal
R
you engage reverse gear k
R
you move the transmission out of position j
R
you unfasten your seat belt or open the driv-
er's door
R
the vehicle starts to roll
R
the brake system requires this
R
the temperature in the vehicle interior devi-
ates from the set range
R
the system detects moisture on the wind-
shield when the air-conditioning system is
switched on
R
the condition of charge of the battery is too
low
Shifting the transmission to position j does
not start the engine.
136
Driving
Driving and parking
background
Deactivating or activating the ECO
start/stop function
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
X
To deactivate: press ECO button :.
Indicator lamp ; goes out.
X
To activate: press ECO button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop
function has been switched off manually or as
the result of a malfunction. The engine will then
not be switched off automatically when the vehi-
cle stops.
The ECO start/stop function is deactivated, if:
R
Mercedes-AMG GLC 43 4MATIC: you switch
to drive program S+ (Y page 139)
R
Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 4MATIC+/GLC 63
S 4MATIC+: you switch to drive program
RACE (S‑MODEL), S+ or S (Y page 139)
R
you permanently activate manual gearshifting
(Y page 147)
If you have permanently activated manual gear-
shifting and then press ECO button :, the ECO
start/stop function is switched on.
All other models
X
To deactivate: press ECO button :.
Indicator lamp ; goes out.
X
To activate: press ECO button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop
function has been deactivated manually or as
the result of a malfunction. The engine will then
not be switched off automatically when the vehi-
cle stops.
Selecting drive program S+ deactivates the ECO
start/stop function. If you press ECO button :,
the ECO start/stop function is activated.
AMG Performance adjustable exhaust
system (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
The volume of the AMG Performance adjustable
exhaust system changes depending on the posi-
tion of the switchable exhaust flap. The exhaust
flap is adjusted automatically according to the
selected drive program (Y page 139).
You can also adjust the position of the exhaust
flap and therefore the volume of the exhaust
system manually.
The automatic adjustment of the exhaust flap is
always active when you change drive program,
regardless of the manual setting.
Each time you start the engine with the Smart-
Key or the Start/Stop button, the quietest set-
ting is activated.
Setting the volume:
X
Press button :.
If you select the loudest setting, indicator
lamp lights up ;.
Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 4MATIC+/GLC 63 S
4MATIC+: you can preset the volume of the
exhaust system for drive program I (Individual).
Information on DYNAMIC SELECT and on con-
Driving
137
Driving and parking
Z
background
figuring drive program I with the multimedia sys-
tem (see the Digital Operator's Manual).
Problems with the engine
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The engine does not
start.
The HOLD function or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated.
X
Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 170) or Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC (Y page 167).
X
Try to start the engine again (Y page 133).
The engine does not
start. The starter motor
can be heard.
R
There is a malfunction in the engine electronics.
R
There is a malfunction in the fuel supply.
Before attempting to start the engine again:
X
Turn the SmartKey back to position u in the ignition lock.
or
X
Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in
the instrument cluster go out.
X
Try to start the engine again (Y page 133). Avoid excessively long
and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain the
battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine does not
start. The starter motor
can be heard. The
reserve fuel warning
lamp is lit and the fuel
gage display is at the
reserve level.
The fuel tank is empty.
X
Refuel the vehicle.
The engine does not
start. You cannot hear
the starter motor.
The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or
discharged.
X
Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 322).
If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.
X
Try to start the engine again (Y page 133).
If the engine still does not start:
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
138
Driving
Driving and parking
background
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The engine is not running
smoothly and is misfir-
ing.
There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical
component of the engine management system.
X
Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter
and damage it.
X
Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
The coolant temperature
display indicates a value
within the red band.
The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no
longer being cooled sufficiently.
X
Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to
cool down.
X
Check the coolant level (Y page 303). Observe the warning notes
as you do so and add coolant if necessary.
DYNAMIC SELECT switch
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
General information
Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to select the
drive program.
Available drive programs for Mercedes-
AMG GLC 43 4MATIC:
S+ Sport Plus Particularly sporty driving
characteristics
S Sport Sporty driving characteris-
tics
C Comfort Comfortable and economi-
cal driving characteristics
E Economy Particularly economical
driving characteristics
I Individual Individual settings
Available drive programs for Mercedes-
AMG GLC 63 4MATIC+/GLC 63 S 4MATIC+:
RACE
(S‑MODEL)
Driving characteristics suit-
able for a race circuit
S+ Sport Plus Particularly sporty driving
characteristics
S Sport Sporty driving characteris-
tics
C Comfort Comfortable and economi-
cal driving characteristics
I Individual Individual settings
Depending on the drive program selected the
following vehicle characteristics will change:
R
the drive (engine and transmission manage-
ment)
R
the suspension
R
the steering
R
the driver assistance systems
R
ESP
®
(Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 4MATIC+/
GLC 63 S 4MATIC+)
R
the position of the exhaust flap (Mercedes-
AMG GLC 63 4MATIC+/GLC 63 S 4MATIC+)
R
the setting of the ECO start/stop function
R
the availability of gliding mode
R
the climate control
Further information on automatic drive program
characteristics (Y page 145).
Additionally, in drive program I you can config-
ure the respective vehicle characteristics using
the multimedia system. You can find informa-
tion about this under "DYNAMIC SELECT" in the
vehicle's Digital Operator's Manual.
DYNAMIC SELECT switch
139
Driving and parking
Z
background
Selecting the drive program
X
Push DYNAMIC SELECT switch : forwards
or back until the desired drive program is
selected.
The symbol of the selected drive program is
shown in the multifunction display.
In addition, the current drive program settings
are displayed briefly in the multimedia system
display.
You can also change gear yourself using the
steering wheel paddle shifters. For further infor-
mation on the manual drive program
(Y page 147).
Additional settings
:
Position of the exhaust flap (Y page 137)
;
ECO start/stop function (Y page 135)
=
ESP
®
(Y page 68)
?
Suspension (Y page 174)
A
Permanently activates manual gearshifting
(Y page 147)
When you press buttons : - A the corre-
sponding setting is selected. The DYNAMIC
SELECT switch setting is overwritten.
If you switch to drive program I, all stored char-
acteristics will be accepted. This is also the case
if you have previously pressed one of buttons :
- A.
i
Mercedes-AMG GLC 43 4MATIC: for a few
countries, the ECO start/stop function is
deactivated at the factory due to the quality of
the available fuel. In this case, the ECO start/
stop function is not available in any drive pro-
gram, regardless of the display in the multi-
media system display.
All other models
Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change the
drive program.
Depending on the drive program selected the
following vehicle characteristics will change:
R
the drive (engine and transmission manage-
ment)
R
the suspension
R
the steering
R
the ECO start/stop function
R
the climate control
-
the climate control settings
-
the rear window defroster running time
-
the performance of the seat heating
X
Push DYNAMIC SELECT switch : forward or
back until the desired drive program is selec-
ted.
The symbol of the selected drive program is
shown in the multifunction display.
In addition, the current drive program settings
are displayed briefly in the multimedia system
display.
i
In a few countries, the ECO start/stop func-
tion is deactivated at the factory due to the
available fuel grade. In this case, the ECO
start/stop function is not available in any
140
DYNAMIC SELECT switch
Driving and parking
background
drive program, regardless of the display in the
multimedia system display.
Available drive programs:
I Individual Individual settings
S+ Sport Plus Particularly sporty driving
characteristics
S Sport Sporty driving characteris-
tics
C Comfort Comfortable and economi-
cal driving characteristics
E Economy Particularly economical
driving characteristics
Additional information for drive programs
(Y page 145).
You can also change gear yourself using the
steering wheel paddle shifters. For further infor-
mation on the manual drive program
(Y page 147).
Automatic transmission
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If the engine speed is above the idling speed
and you engage transmission position D or R,
the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is
a risk of an accident.
When engaging transmission position D or R,
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
not simultaneously accelerate.
G
WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to neu-
tral position N when you switch off the engine.
The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an
accident.
After switching off the engine, always switch
to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi-
cle from rolling away by applying the parking
brake.
DIRECT SELECT lever
Overview of transmission positions
j
Park position with parking lock
k
Reverse gear
i
Neutral
h
Drive
The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the
steering column.
The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its
original position. The current transmission posi-
tion j, k, i or h is shown on the trans-
mission position display on the multifunction
display (Y page 142).
Selecting park position
!
If the engine speed is too high or the vehicle
is coasting, do not shift the automatic trans-
mission directly from h to k, from k to h
or directly to j. Otherwise, the automatic
transmission may be damaged.
X
Push the DIRECT SELECT lever switch in the
direction of arrow j.
Engaging park position automatically
Park position j is automatically engaged if:
R
you switch off the engine using the SmartKey
and remove the SmartKey
R
you switch off the engine using the SmartKey
or using the Start/Stop button and open the
driver's door or front-passenger door
R
you open the driver's door when the vehicle is
stationary or when driving at a very low speed
and the transmission is in position h or k
Under certain conditions, the automatic trans-
mission shifts automatically to transmission
position j if the HOLD function or Active Dis-
Automatic transmission
141
Driving and parking
Z
background
tance Assist DISTRONIC is activated. Observe
the information on the HOLD function
(Y page 170) and on Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC (Y page 165).
Engaging reverse gear
!
Only move the automatic transmission to
k when the vehicle is stationary.
X
Depress the brake pedal.
X
Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the
first point of resistance.
The ECO start/stop function is not available
when reverse gear is engaged. Further informa-
tion on the ECO start/stop function
(Y page 136).
Shifting to neutral
G
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
R
open the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
R
get out and disrupt traffic.
R
operate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
R
release the parking brake.
R
shifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P
R
Start the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
X
If the transmission is in position h or k:
push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to
the first point of resistance.
X
If the transmission is in position j: depress
the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT
lever up or down to the first point of resist-
ance.
If you switch the engine off with the transmis-
sion in position k or h, the automatic trans-
mission shifts to i automatically.
With the SmartKey: if you then open the driv-
er's door or the front-passenger door or remove
the SmartKey from the ignition lock, the auto-
matic transmission shifts to j automatically.
With the Start/Stop button: if you then open
the driver's door or the front-passenger door,
the automatic transmission shifts to j auto-
matically.
If you want the automatic transmission to
remain in neutral i, e.g. when having the vehi-
cle cleaned in an automatic, tow-through car
wash:
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-
GO start function: remove the Start/Stop
button from the ignition lock.
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
X
All vehicles: switch the ignition on.
X
Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
X
Shift to neutral i.
X
Release the brake pedal.
X
Release the electric parking brake.
X
Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey
in the ignition lock.
Engaging the drive position
X
If the transmission is in position k or i:
push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the
first point of resistance.
X
If the transmission is in position j: depress
the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT
lever down past the first point of resistance.
Transmission position and drive pro-
gram display
The current transmission position and drive pro-
gram appear in the multifunction display.
142
Automatic transmission
Driving and parking
background
:
Status symbol drive program
;
Transmission position
=
Gear
The arrows in the transmission position display
show how and into which transmission positions
you can shift using the DIRECT SELECT lever.
If the transmission position display in the mul-
tifunction display is not working, you should pull
away carefully to check whether the desired
transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you
should select transmission position h and
drive program E or S.
Transmission positions
B
Park position
This prevents the vehicle from rolling
away when stopped.
Only shift the transmission into posi-
tion j (Y page 141) when the vehi-
cle is stationary. The parking lock
should not be used as a brake when
parking. Always apply the electronic
parking brake in addition to the park-
ing lock in order to secure the vehi-
cle.
Park position j is automatically
engaged if:
R
you switch off the engine using the
SmartKey and remove the Smart-
Key
R
you switch off the engine using the
SmartKey or using the Start/Stop
button and open the driver's door
or front-passenger door
R
you open the driver's door when
the vehicle is stationary or when
driving at a very low speed and the
transmission is in position h or
k
In the event of a malfunction of the
vehicle's electronics, the transmis-
sion may lock in position j. Have
the vehicle electronics checked
immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop.
C
Reverse gear
You can only shift the transmission
into position k when the vehicle is
stationary (Y page 142).
Automatic transmission
143
Driving and parking
Z
background
A
Neutral
Do not shift the transmission to i
while driving. Otherwise, the auto-
matic transmission could be dam-
aged.
No power is transmitted from the
engine to the drive wheels.
Releasing the brake pedal will allow
you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to
push it or tow it.
If ESP
®
is deactivated or faulty: shift
the transmission to position i if the
vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g.
on icy roads.
If you switch the engine off with the
transmission in position k or h,
the automatic transmission shifts to
i automatically.
!
Coasting in neutral i may
cause damage to the drive train.
7
Drive
The automatic transmission changes
gear automatically. All forward gears
are available.
Driving tips
Changing gear
The automatic transmission shifts through the
individual gears automatically when it is in trans-
mission position h. This automatic gear shift-
ing behavior is determined by:
R
the selected drive program
R
the position of the accelerator pedal
R
the road speed
Accelerator pedal position
Your style of driving influences how the auto-
matic transmission shifts gear:
R
little throttle: early upshifts
R
more throttle: late upshifts
Double-clutch function
When shifting down, the double-clutch function
is active regardless of the currently selected
drive program. The double-clutch function
reduces load change reactions and is conducive
to a sporty driving style. The sound generated by
the double-clutch function depends on the drive
program selected.
Kickdown
Use kickdown for maximum acceleration.
X
Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
pressure point.
The automatic transmission shifts to a lower
gear depending on the engine speed.
X
Ease off the accelerator pedal once the
desired speed is reached.
The automatic transmission shifts back up.
Gliding mode
Gliding mode is available depending on the
equipment.
Gliding mode is characterized by the following:
R
The combustion engine is disconnected from
the drive train.
R
The engine speed corresponds to the idling
speed.
R
The multifunction display hides the gear indi-
cator and displays transmission position h
in green (Y page 142).
R
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: symbol :
appears as the drive program symbol in the
multifunction display
In drive program E or in drive program C
(Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 4MATIC/
GLC 63 S 4MATIC) you can deactivate and acti-
vate gliding mode using the ECO button
(Y page 137).
Gliding mode can be activated under the follow-
ing conditions:
R
The speed is within a suitable range.
R
The course of the road is suitable, e.g. there
are no steep up or downhill gradients.
R
You are no longer depressing the accelerator
pedal.
144
Automatic transmission
Driving and parking
background
Gliding mode is deactivated under the following
conditions:
R
You depress the accelerator pedal.
R
You depress the brake pedal.
R
You change the transmission position
(Y page 141).
R
You switch to drive program RACE
(Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 S 4MATIC), S+ or S
(Y page 139).
R
you activate manual gearshifting
(Y page 147).
R
you leave the suitable speed range.
i
If you have selected the "Eco" or "Comfort"
(Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 4MATIC/
GLC 63 S 4MATIC) setting for the drive
(engine and transmission management) in
drive program I, you can also activate gliding
mode. Information on DYNAMIC SELECT and
on configuring drive program I with the mul-
timedia system (see the Digital Operator's
Manual).
Towing a trailer
X
Drive in the middle of the engine speed range
on uphill gradients.
X
Manual shifting: depending on the uphill or
downhill gradient, shift into a gear
(Y page 147), in which the engine will run the
middle of the engine speed range.
This also applies if cruise control or Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated.
Drive programs
All vehicles except Mercedes-AMG GLC
63 4MATIC+/GLC 63 S 4MATIC+
Drive program I (Individual)
In drive program I the following properties of the
drive program can be selected:
R
the drive (engine and transmission manage-
ment)
and therefore indirectly the availability of glid-
ing mode and the properties of the driver
assistance systems
R
the suspension
R
the steering
R
the availability of the ECO start/stop function
R
the climate control
Information about configuring drive program I
with the multimedia system can be found under
"DYNAMIC SELECT" in the vehicle's Digital
Operator's Manual.
Drive program S+ (Sport Plus)
Drive program S+ is characterized by the fol-
lowing:
R
the vehicle exhibits particularly sporty driving
characteristics.
R
the vehicle pulls away in first gear.
R
the automatic transmission shifts up later.
The fuel consumption possibly being higher
as a result of the later automatic transmission
shift points.
R
the suspension exhibits particularly stiff
springing and damping settings (vehicles with
AIR BODY CONTROL).
R
gliding mode is not available.
R
the ECO start/stop function is deactivated
(Y page 136).
Drive program S (Sport)
Drive program S is characterized by the follow-
ing:
R
the vehicle exhibits sporty driving character-
istics.
R
the vehicle pulls away in first gear.
R
the automatic transmission shifts up later.
The fuel consumption possibly being higher
as a result of the later automatic transmission
shift points.
R
the suspension exhibits stiff springing and
damping settings (vehicles with
AIR BODY CONTROL).
R
gliding mode is not available.
R
the ECO start/stop function is activated
(Y page 136).
Drive program C (Comfort)
Drive program C is characterized by the follow-
ing:
R
the vehicle delivers comfortable, economical
handling characteristics.
R
the vehicle pulls away more gently in forward
and reverse gears, unless the accelerator
pedal is depressed fully.
R
the vehicle has improved driving stability, for
example on slippery road surfaces.
Automatic transmission
145
Driving and parking
Z
background
R
optimal fuel consumption resulting from the
automatic transmission shifting up sooner.
The vehicle is driven in the low engine speed
range and the wheels are less likely to spin.
R
gliding mode is not available.
R
the ECO start/stop function is activated
(Y page 136).
Drive program E (Economy)
Drive program E is characterized by the follow-
ing:
R
the vehicle exhibits particularly economical
handling characteristics.
R
the vehicle pulls away more gently in forward
and reverse gears, unless the accelerator
pedal is depressed fully.
R
the vehicle has improved driving stability, for
example on slippery road surfaces.
R
optimal fuel consumption resulting from the
automatic transmission shifting up sooner.
The vehicle is driven in the low engine speed
range and the wheels are less likely to spin.
R
during deceleration, the engine is disconnec-
ted from the drive train. The vehicle uses
kinetic energy and consumes less fuel.
R
the cooling and heating output of the climate
control system has been reduced.
R
gliding mode is available.
R
the ECO start/stop function is activated
(Y page 136).
Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 4MATIC+/GLC
63 S 4MATIC+
Drive program RACE (S‑MODEL)
The RACE drive program is characterized by the
following:
R
the vehicle exhibits driving characteristics
suitable for the racetrack.
R
all vehicle systems are set for maximum
sportiness.
R
the gearshift recommendation gives you
information for slowly warming up the drive
assemblies and for adopting a fuel-efficient
driving style (Y page 147). You can follow the
gearshift recommendations at all times and
shift gear accordingly using the steering
wheel paddle shifters. On the basis of the
gearshift recommendation, using the steering
wheel paddle shifters, you can optimize the
drive train and engine operating mode at any
time.
R
if you have selected a gear manually, this will
be maintained until the vehicle speed increa-
ses or decreases dramatically.
R
the vehicle pulls away in first gear.
R
the automatic transmission shifts up later.
the fuel consumption possibly being higher as
a result of the later automatic transmission
shift points.
R
the suspension exhibits particularly hard
springing and damping settings.
R
gliding mode is not available.
R
the ECO start/stop function is switched off
(Y page 136).
Drive program S+ (Sport Plus)
Drive program S+ is characterized by the fol-
lowing:
R
the vehicle exhibits particularly sporty driving
characteristics.
R
the vehicle pulls away in first gear.
R
the automatic transmission shifts up later.
the fuel consumption possibly being higher as
a result of the later automatic transmission
shift points.
R
the suspension exhibits particularly hard
springing and damping settings.
R
gliding mode is not available.
R
the ECO start/stop function is switched off
(Y page 136).
Drive program S (Sport)
Drive program S is characterized by the follow-
ing:
R
the vehicle exhibits sporty driving character-
istics.
R
the vehicle pulls away in first gear.
R
the automatic transmission shifts up later.
the fuel consumption possibly being higher as
a result of the later automatic transmission
shift points.
R
the suspension exhibits stiff springing and
damping settings.
R
gliding mode is not available.
R
the ECO start/stop function is switched off
(Y page 136).
146
Automatic transmission
Driving and parking
background
Drive program C (Comfort)
Drive program C is characterized by the follow-
ing:
R
the vehicle delivers comfortable, economical
handling characteristics.
R
the vehicle pulls away more gently in forward
and reverse gears, unless the accelerator
pedal is depressed fully.
R
the vehicle has improved driving stability, for
example on slippery road surfaces.
R
optimal fuel consumption resulting from the
automatic transmission shifting up sooner.
The vehicle is driven in the low engine speed
range and the wheels are less likely to spin.
R
gliding mode is available.
R
the ECO start/stop function is switched on
(Y page 136).
Drive program I (Individual)
In drive program I the following properties of the
drive program can be selected:
R
the drive (engine management)
and therefore indirectly the availability of
glide mode and the ECO start/stop function
as well as the properties of the driver assis-
tance systems
R
the transmission management
R
ESP
®
(Y page 68)
R
the suspension
and therefore indirectly the steering
R
activation of the exhaust flap
To permanently shift the gears manually in drive
program I using the steering wheel paddle shift-
ers, select the M (Manual) setting for the trans-
mission management.
Information about configuring drive program I
with the multimedia system can be found under
"DYNAMIC SELECT" in the vehicle's Digital
Operator's Manual.
Manual gear shifting
General notes
You can change gear yourself using the steering
wheel paddle shifters. The transmission must be
in position h for this.
Depending on which steering wheel paddle
shifter is pulled, the automatic transmission
immediately shifts into the next gear down or
up, if permitted.
To use manual shifting, you have two options:
R
temporary setting
R
permanent setting
If you activate manual gearshifting, the multi-
function display will show the current gear and
p instead of transmission position h.
If you deactivate manual gearshifting, the gears
will be shifted automatically again.
Temporary setting
X
To activate: shift the DIRECT SELECT lever to
position h.
X
Pull steering wheel paddle shifter : or ;.
The temporary setting is active for a certain
amount of time. In certain conditions, the mini-
mum amount of time is extended, e.g. in the
case of lateral acceleration, overrun mode or
driving on steep terrain.
X
To deactivate: pull steering wheel paddle
shifter ; and hold it in place.
or
X
Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the
transmission position.
or
X
Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change
the drive program.
Permanent setting
!
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the automatic
transmission does not shift up automatically
even when the engine limiting speed for the
current gear is reached. When the engine lim-
iting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to
prevent the engine from overrevving. Always
make sure that the engine speed does not
Automatic transmission
147
Driving and parking
Z
background
reach the red area of the tachometer. There is
otherwise a risk of engine damage.
Manual mode button (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles)
Manual mode button (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
X
To activate/deactivate: shift the DIRECT
SELECT lever to position h.
X
Press button :.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: when indicator
lamp ; lights up, automatic transmission
manual mode is activated.
The manual mode activated with button :
remains activated when the drive program is
changed.
Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 4MATIC+/
GLC 63 S 4MATIC+: only if the D (Automatic)
setting has been preselected for the trans-
mission is manual mode deactivated when
you change to drive program I.
Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 4MATIC+/GLC 63 S
4MATIC+: you can also preset manual mode for
drive program I. To do so, select the M (Manual)
setting when configuring the transmission.
When driving in drive program I, you perma-
nently shift the gears manually using the steer-
ing wheel paddle shifters.
Information about configuring drive program I
with the multimedia system can be found under
"DYNAMIC SELECT" in the vehicle's Digital
Operator's Manual.
Shifting gears
X
To shift up: pull steering wheel paddle
shifter ;.
The automatic transmission shifts up to the
next gear.
If the maximum engine speed in the gear cur-
rently engaged is reached and you continue to
accelerate, the automatic transmission auto-
matically shifts up in order to prevent engine
damage (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles).
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: if the temporary
setting has been activated and you continue
to accelerate when the maximum engine
speed has been reached, the automatic trans-
mission automatically shifts up. If the perma-
nent setting is activated, the automatic trans-
mission does not shift up automatically even
when the engine limiting speed for the current
gear is reached. Observe the protection
against reaching the overrevving range on the
multifunction display. Always make sure that
the engine speed does not reach the red area
of the tachometer.
X
To shift down: pull steering wheel paddle
shifter :.
The automatic transmission shifts down to
the next gear.
Automatic down shifting occurs when coast-
ing.
If the engine were to exceed the maximum
engine speed when shifting down, the auto-
matic transmission protects against engine
damage by not shifting down.
148
Automatic transmission
Driving and parking
background
Shift recommendation
The gearshift recommendations assist you in
adopting an economical driving style. The rec-
ommended gear is shown in the multifunction
display.
X
When the corresponding gearshift recom-
mendation : appears in the multifunction
display of the instrument cluster, shift to rec-
ommended gear ;.
Protection against reaching the over-
revving range (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
!
In manual mode, the automatic transmis-
sion does not shift up automatically even
when the engine limiting speed for the current
gear is reached. When the engine limiting
speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to
prevent the engine from overrevving. Always
make sure that the engine speed does not
reach the red area of the tachometer. There is
otherwise a risk of engine damage.
Before the engine speed reaches the red area,
an upshift indicator will be shown in the multi-
function display.
X
When message : appears on the multifunc-
tion display, pull the right-hand steering
wheel paddle shifter.
Kickdown
X
For maximum acceleration, depress the
accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point.
The automatic transmission shifts to a lower
gear depending on the engine speed.
X
Shift back up once the desired speed is
reached.
If you apply full throttle, the automatic trans-
mission shifts up to the next gear when the
maximum engine speed is reached. This pre-
vents the engine from overrevving.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: kickdown is only
possible in the temporary setting.
Automatic transmission
149
Driving and parking
Z
background
Problems with the transmission
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The transmission has
problems shifting gear.
The transmission is losing oil.
X
Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
The acceleration ability
is deteriorating.
The transmission no lon-
ger changes gear.
The transmission is in emergency mode.
It is possible to shift to a gear and reverse gear only.
X
Stop the vehicle.
X
Shift the transmission to position j.
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.
X
Shift the transmission to position h or k.
If h is selected, the transmission only shifts to one gear; if k is
selected, the transmission shifts to reverse gear.
X
Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
Transfer case
This section is only valid for vehicles with 4-
wheel drive (4MATIC). Power is always trans-
mitted to both axles.
!
Performance tests may only be carried out
on a 2-axle dynamometer. The brake system
or transfer case could otherwise be damaged.
Contact a qualified specialist workshop for a
performance test.
!
Since ESP
®
engages automatically, the igni-
tion must be switched off (the SmartKey or
Start/Stop button must be in position g or
1) if
R
the electrical parking brake is being tested
using a dynamometer
R
the vehicle is being towed with only one
axle raised (not permitted for vehicles with
4MATIC)
Otherwise, the brake system can be dam-
aged.
!
Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed
with either the front or the rear axle raised, as
doing so will damage the transmission.
Refueling
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. Risk of fire and
explosion by improper handling of fuel.
You must avoid fire, open flames, smoking
and creating sparks. Switch off the ignition
before refueling and, if present, switch off the
auxiliary heating.
G
WARNING
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
There is a risk of injury.
You must make sure that fuel does not come
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel
vapors. Keep fuel away from children.
If you or others come into contact with fuel,
observe the following:
R
Wash away fuel from skin immediately
using soap and water.
R
If fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
150
Refueling
Driving and parking
background
clean water. Seek medical assistance with-
out delay.
R
If fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-
tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-
ing.
R
Immediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with fuel.
G
WARNING
Electrostatic charge can cause sparks and
thereby ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of
fire and explosion.
Before you open the fuel filler cap or take hold
of the pump nozzle, touch the metallic vehicle
body. This discharges any electrostatic
charge that may have built up.
Do not get into the vehicle again during the
refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic
charge could build up again.
Do not get into the vehicle again during the refu-
eling process. Otherwise electrostatic charge
could build up again.
!
Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition
if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.
Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
result in damage to the fuel system and the
engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop
and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained
completely.
!
Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the
fuel system.
!
Take care not to spill any fuel on painted
surfaces. You could otherwise damage the
paintwork.
!
Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel can.
The fuel lines and/or the fuel injection system
could otherwise be blocked by particles from
the fuel can.
If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray out
when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.
For further information on fuel and fuel quality
(Y page 358).
Refueling
General information
Pay attention to the important safety notes
(Y page 150).
If you unlock/lock the vehicle from the outside,
the fuel filler flap also unlocks/locks.
The position of the 8 fuel filler cap is dis-
played on the instrument cluster. The arrow next
to the filling pump indicates the side of the vehi-
cle.
Opening the fuel filler flap
:
To open the fuel filler flap
;
To insert the fuel filler cap
=
Tire pressure table
?
Instruction label for fuel type to be refueled
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function
or KEYLESS‑GO
X
Open the driver's door.
The vehicle electronics are now in setting u.
This is the same as "SmartKey removed".
X
Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of
arrow :.
The fuel filler flap swings up.
X
Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise and
remove it.
X
Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder on the
inside of fuel filler flap ;.
X
Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel
pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and
refuel.
X
Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle
switches off.
Refueling
151
Driving and parking
Z
background
Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops
filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak
out.
Closing the fuel filler flap
X
Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn
clockwise until it engages audibly.
X
Close the fuel filler flap.
Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehi-
cle.
If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open, the
8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. A mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display
(Y page 243).
Problems with fuel and the fuel tank
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Fuel is leaking from the
vehicle.
G
WARNING
The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.
Risk of explosion or fire.
X
Apply the electric parking brake.
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS‑GO
X
Open the driver's door.
The vehicle electronics are now in setting u. This is the same as
"SmartKey removed".
X
Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The fuel filler flap cannot
be opened.
The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.
X
Unlock the vehicle (Y page 77).
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X
Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 79).
The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed.
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Parking
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with
hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust
gas flow. There is a risk of fire.
Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-
rials come into contact with parts of the vehi-
cle which are hot. Take particular care not to
park on dry grassland or harvested grain
fields.
152
Parking
Driving and parking
background
G
WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
R
release the parking brake.
R
shift the automatic transmission out of the
parking position P.
R
start the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
!
Always secure the vehicle correctly against
rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its driv-
etrain could be damaged.
To ensure that the vehicle is secured against
rolling away unintentionally:
R
the electric parking brake must be applied.
R
the transmission must be in position j and
the SmartKey must be removed from the igni-
tion lock.
R
the front wheels must be turned towards the
curb on steep uphill or downhill gradients.
R
the empty vehicle must be secured at the
front axle with a wheel chock or similar, for
example, on uphill or downhill gradients.
R
on uphill or downhill gradients the laden vehi-
cle must also be secured at the rear axle, for
example with a wheel chock or similar object.
Switching off the engine
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to neu-
tral position N when you switch off the engine.
The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an
accident.
After switching off the engine, always switch
to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi-
cle from rolling away by applying the parking
brake.
Vehicles with automatic transmission
X
Apply the electric parking brake.
X
Shift the transmission to position j.
X
With the SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to
position u in the ignition lock and remove it.
The immobilizer is activated.
X
With the Start/Stop button: press the
Start/Stop button (Y page 132).
The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in
the instrument cluster go out.
When the driver's door is closed, this corre-
sponds to key position 1. When the driver's
door is open, this corresponds to key position
u, "Key removed".
If you switch the engine off with the transmis-
sion in position k or h the automatic trans-
mission shifts to i automatically.
With the SmartKey: if you then open the driv-
er's door or the front-passenger door or remove
the SmartKey from the ignition, the automatic
transmission shifts to j automatically.
With the Start/Stop button: if you then open
the driver's door or the front-passenger door,
the automatic transmission shifts to j auto-
matically.
If you want the automatic transmission to
remain in neutral i, for example, when having
the vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash
with a towing system:
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-
GO start function: remove the Start/Stop
button from the ignition lock.
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
X
All vehicles: switch the ignition on.
X
Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
X
Engage neutral i.
X
Release the brake pedal.
X
Release the electric parking brake.
X
Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey
in the ignition lock.
The engine can be switched off in an emergency
while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and
holding the Start/Stop button for three sec-
onds. This function operates independently of
the ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-off
function.
Parking
153
Driving and parking
Z
background
Electric parking brake
General notes
G
WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
R
release the parking brake.
R
shift the automatic transmission out of the
parking position P.
R
start the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
The function of the electric parking brake is
dependent on the on-board voltage. If the on-
board voltage is low or there is a malfunction in
the system, it may not be possible to apply the
released parking brake.
X
If this happens, park the vehicle on level
ground only and secure it to prevent it from
rolling away.
X
Shift the transmission to position j.
It may not be possible to release an applied
parking brake if the on-board voltage is low or
there is a malfunction in the system. Contact a
qualified specialist workshop.
The electric parking brake performs a function
test at regular intervals while the engine is
switched off. The sounds that can be heard while
this is occurring are normal.
Applying or releasing manually
X
To apply: push handle :.
When the electric parking brake is applied,
the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
only) indicator lamp lights up in the instru-
ment cluster.
The electric parking brake can also be applied
when the SmartKey is removed.
X
To release: pull handle :.
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
goes out.
The electric parking brake can only be released:
R
if the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 131) or
R
if the ignition was switched on using the
Start/Stop button
Applying automatically
The electric parking brake is automatically
applied when the transmission is in position j
and:
R
the engine is switched off or
R
the driver is not wearing a seat belt and the
driver's door is opened
To prevent the electric parking brake from being
automatically applied, pull handle :.
The electric parking brake is also applied auto-
matically if:
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brings the
vehicle to a standstill or
R
the HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta-
tionary
R
Active Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle
stationary
In addition, at least one of the following condi-
tions must be fulfilled:
R
the engine is switched off
R
the driver is not wearing a seat belt and the
driver's door is opened
R
there is a system malfunction
R
the power supply is insufficient
R
the vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only)
indicator lamp on the instrument cluster lights
up.
The electric parking brake is not automatically
applied if the engine is switched off by the ECO
start/stop function.
154
Parking
Driving and parking
background
Releasing automatically
Your vehicle's electric parking brake is auto-
matically released if all of the following condi-
tions are met:
R
the seat belt has been fastened
R
the engine is running
R
the transmission is in position h or k and
you accelerate
or
you shift from transmission position j to
position h or k. On steeper uphill gradi-
ents, you must also depress the accelerator
pedal.
If the transmission is in position k, the tailgate
must be closed.
If your seat belt is not fastened, the following
conditions must be fulfilled to automatically
release the electric parking brake:
R
The driver's door is closed.
R
You have shifted out of transmission position
j or you have previously driven faster than
2 mph (3 km/h).
Ensure that you do not depress the accelerator
pedal unintentionally. Otherwise, the parking
brake will be released and the vehicle will start
to move.
Emergency braking
The vehicle can also be braked during an emer-
gency by using the electric parking brake.
X
While driving, push handle : of the electric
parking brake (Y page 154).
The vehicle is braked as long as you keep
handle : of the electric parking brake
depressed. The longer electric parking brake
handle : is depressed, the greater the brak-
ing force.
During braking:
R
a warning tone sounds
R
the Please Release Parking BrakePlease Release Parking Brake mes-
sage appears
R
the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
flashes
When the vehicle has been braked to a stand-
still, the electric parking brake is applied.
Parking the vehicle for a long period
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than
four weeks, the battery may be damaged by
exhaustive discharging.
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six
weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a
result of lack of use.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek
advice.
i
You can obtain information about trickle
chargers from a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Driving tips
General driving tips
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
G
WARNING
If you operate mobile communication equip-
ment when driving, you may be distracted
from the traffic situation. You could also lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Only operate this equipment when the vehicle
is stationary.
Observe the legal requirements for the country
in which you are driving. Some jurisdictions pro-
hibit the driver from using a mobile phone while
driving a vehicle.
If you make a call while driving, always use
hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone
when the traffic situation permits. If you are
unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop
before operating the telephone.
Driving tips
155
Driving and parking
Z
background
Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a
distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per sec-
ond.
Drive sensibly – save fuel
Observe the following tips to save fuel:
X
The tires should always be inflated to the rec-
ommended tire pressure.
X
Remove unnecessary loads.
X
Remove roof racks when they are not needed.
X
Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.
X
Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.
X
Have all maintenance work carried out as
indicated by the service intervals in the Main-
tenance Booklet or by the service interval dis-
play.
Fuel consumption also increases when driving in
cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly ter-
rain.
Drinking and driving
G
WARNING
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and
driving are very dangerous combinations.
Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can
affect your reflexes, perceptions and judg-
ment.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci-
dent is greatly increased when you drink or
take drugs and drive.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
anyone to drive who has been drinking or tak-
ing drugs.
Emission control
G
DANGER
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases is hazardous to health
and can result in poisoning. There is a risk of
fatal injury. Therefore, never leave the engine
running an enclosed space without adequate
ventilation.
Certain engine systems are designed to keep
the level of poisonous components in exhaust
fumes within legal limits.
These systems only work at peak efficiency if
they are serviced exactly in accordance with the
manufacturer's specifications. Always have
work on the engine carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you use an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center for this purpose. In particular, work
relevant to safety or on safety-related systems
must be carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
The engine settings must not be changed under
any circumstances. Furthermore, all specific
service work must be carried out at regular
intervals and in accordance with the Mercedes-
Benz service requirements. Details can be found
in the Maintenance Booklet.
ECO display
The ECO display shows you how economical
your driving style is. The ECO display assists you
in achieving the most economical driving style
for the selected settings and prevailing condi-
tions. Your driving style can significantly influ-
ence the vehicle's consumption.
:
Acceleration
;
Coasting
=
Constant
?
Additional range achieved
Range ? is shown under Bonus
Bonus fr.fr. StartStart and
represents the additional range achieved since
the beginning of the journey as a result of an
adapted driving style.
If the fuel level has dropped into the reserve
range, the Reserve FuelReserve Fuel display message is
shown instead of range ? in the multifunction
156
Driving tips
Driving and parking
background
display. The 8 warning lamp in the instru-
ment cluster also lights up (Y page 262).
The ECO display consists of three sections, with
an inner and outer area. The sections corre-
spond to the following three categories:
:
Acceleration (evaluation of all accel-
eration processes):
R
the outer area fills up and the inner
area lights up green: moderate
acceleration, especially at higher
speeds
R
the outer area empties and the
inner area is gray: sporty acceler-
ation
;
Coasting (evaluation of all decelera-
tion processes):
R
the outer area fills up and the inner
area lights up green: anticipatory
driving, keeping your distance and
early release of the accelerator.
The vehicle can coast without use
of the brakes.
R
the outer area empties and the
inner area is gray: frequent heavy
braking
=
Constant (continuous evaluation
over the entire journey):
R
the outer area fills up and the inner
area lights up green: constant
speed and avoidance of unneces-
sary acceleration and deceleration
R
the outer area empties and the
inner area is gray: fluctuations in
speed
The three inner areas display the current driving
style and light up green as a result of a particu-
larly economical driving style. Depending on the
driving situation, up to two areas may light up
simultaneously.
At the beginning of the journey, the three outer
areas are empty and fill up as a result of eco-
nomical driving. A higher level indicates a more
economical driving style. If the three outer areas
are completely filled at the same time, the driver
has adopted the most economical driving style
for the selected settings and prevailing condi-
tions. The ECO display border lights up.
The ECO display does not indicate the actual fuel
consumption. The additionally achieved range
displayed under Bonus fr. StartBonus fr. Start does not
indicate a fixed consumption reduction.
In addition to driving style, the actual consump-
tion is affected by other factors, such as:
R
load
R
Tire pressure
R
Cold start
R
Choice of route
R
Active electrical consumers
These factors are not included in the ECO dis-
play.
An economical driving style specially requires
driving at moderate engine speeds.
Achieving a higher value in the categories
"Acceleration" and "Constant":
R
observe the gearshift recommendations
R
drive using drive program E
On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on the
highway, only the outer area for "constant" will
change.
The ECO display summarizes the driving style
from the start of the journey to its completion.
Therefore, there are more marked changes in
the outer areas at the start of a journey. On lon-
ger journeys, there are fewer changes. For more
marked changes, perform a manual rest
(Y page 214).
For further information on the ECO display, see
(Y page 213).
Braking
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
an attempt to increase the engine's braking
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
There is an increased danger of skidding and
accidents.
Do not shift down for additional engine brak-
ing on a slippery road surface.
Downhill gradients
!
On long and steep gradients, you must
reduce the load on the brakes by shifting to a
lower gear in good time. This allows you to
take advantage of the engine's braking effect.
Driving tips
157
Driving and parking
Z
background
This helps you to avoid overheating the
brakes and wearing them out excessively.
When you take advantage of engine braking, a
drive wheel may not turn for some time, e.g.
on a slippery road surface. This could cause
damage to the drive train. This type of damage
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz war-
ranty.
Heavy and light loads
G
WARNING
If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving, the braking system can overheat. This
increases the stopping distance and can even
cause the braking system to fail. There is a
risk of an accident.
Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never
depress the brake pedal and the accelerator
pedal at the same time.
!
Depressing the brake pedal constantly
results in excessive and premature wear to
the brake pads.
If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy
load, do not stop the vehicle immediately. Drive
on for a short while. This allows the airflow to
cool the brakes more quickly.
Wet roads
If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain
without braking, there may be a delayed reac-
tion from the brakes when braking for the first
time. This may also occur after the vehicle has
been washed or driven through deep water.
You have to depress the brake pedal more
firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the
vehicle in front.
After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle
washed, brake firmly while paying attention to
the traffic conditions. This will warm up the
brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly
and protecting them against corrosion.
Limited braking performance on salt-
treated roads
If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt resi-
due may form on the brake discs and brake
pads. This can result in a significantly longer
braking distance.
R
In order to prevent any salt build-up, apply the
brakes occasionally while paying attention to
the traffic conditions.
R
Carefully depress the brake pedal and the
beginning and end of a journey.
R
Maintain a greater distance to the vehicle
ahead.
Servicing the brakes
!
The brake fluid level may be too low, if:
R
if the red brake warning lamp lights up in
the instrument cluster and
R
you hear a warning tone while the engine is
running
Observe additional warning messages in the
multifunction display.
The brake fluid level may be too low due to
brake pad wear or leaking brake lines.
Have the brake system checked immediately.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop to
arrange this.
!
Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or per-
formance tests may only be carried out on a 2-
axle dynamometer. If you wish to operate the
vehicle on such a dynamometer, please con-
sult a qualified specialist workshop in
advance. You could otherwise damage the
drive train or the brake system.
!
Vehicles with 4MATIC: the ESP
®
system
operates automatically. If the electric parking
brake is tested on a brake dynamometer, the
engine and ignition must be switched off: turn
the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position
u or 1 or press the Start/Stop button
repeatedly in accordance with the given
SmartKey positions.
Braking triggered automatically by ESP
®
may
cause severe damage to the brake system.
All checks and maintenance work on the brake
system must be carried out at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Have brake pads installed and brake fluid
replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
If the brake system has only been subject to
moderate loads, you should test the functional-
ity of your brakes at regular intervals.
Information on BAS (Brake Assist System)
(Y page 66) and Active Brake Assist with cross-
traffic function (Y page 72).
158
Driving tips
Driving and parking
background
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends only installing the following brake disks
and brake pads/linings:
R
brake disks that have been approved by
Mercedes-Benz
R
brake pads/linings that have been approved
by Mercedes-Benz or that are of an equivalent
standard of quality
Other brake disks or brake pads/linings can
compromise the safety of your vehicle.
Always replace all brake disks and brake pads/
linings on an axle at the same time. Always
install new brake pads/linings when replacing
brake disks.
The vehicle is equipped with lightweight brake
disks to which the wheel assembly with rim and
threaded connection is matched.
The use of brake disks other than those
approved by Mercedes-Benz can change the
track width and is subject to approval, if appli-
cable.
Shock-type loads when handling the brake
discs, such as when changing wheels, can lead
to a reduction in comfort when driving with light-
weight brake discs. Avoid shock-type loads on
the lightweight brake disks, particularly on the
brake plate.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use
brake fluid that has been specially approved for
your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which corre-
sponds to an equivalent quality standard. Brake
fluid which has not been approved for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which is not of an
equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's
operating safety.
Driving on wet roads
Hydroplaning
If water has accumulated to a certain depth on
the road surface, there is a danger of hydro-
planing occurring, even if:
R
you drive at low speeds
R
the tires have adequate tread depth
For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in
conditions in which hydroplaning may occur,
you must drive in the following manner:
R
lower your speed
R
avoid ruts
R
avoid sudden steering movements
R
brake carefully
Driving on flooded roads
!
Bear in mind that vehicles traveling in front
or in the opposite direction create waves. This
may cause the maximum permissible water
depth to be exceeded.
Failure to observe these notes may result in
damage to the engine, electrical systems and
transmission.
If you have to drive on stretches of road on which
water has collected, please bear in mind that:
R
in the case of standing water, the water level
may be no higher than the lower edge of the
vehicle body
R
you should drive no faster than walking pace
Winter driving
G
WARNING
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
an attempt to increase the engine's braking
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
There is an increased danger of skidding and
accidents.
Do not shift down for additional engine brak-
ing on a slippery road surface.
G
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate
ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases
such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the
vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle
becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of
fatal injury.
If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating
running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area
around the vehicle are clear of snow. To
ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a
window on the side of the vehicle that is not
facing into the wind.
Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified
specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
Drive particularly carefully on slippery road sur-
faces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and
Driving tips
159
Driving and parking
Z
background
braking maneuvers. Do not use cruise control or
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC.
If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be
stopped when moving at low speed:
X
Shift the transmission to position i.
The outside temperature indicator is not
designed to serve as an ice-warning device and
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Changes in the outside temperature are dis-
played after a short delay.
Indicated temperatures just above the freezing
point do not guarantee that the road surface is
free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in
wooded areas or on bridges. The vehicle could
skid if you fail to adapt your driving style. Always
adapt your driving style and drive at a speed to
suit the prevailing weather conditions.
You should pay special attention to road condi-
tions when temperatures are around freezing
point.
For more information on driving with snow
chains, see (Y page 332).
For more information on driving with summer
tires, see (Y page 332).
Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" sec-
tion (Y page 332).
Driving systems
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive stands for inno-
vative driver assistance and safety systems
which enhance comfort and support the driver in
critical situations. With these intelligent coordi-
nated systems Mercedes-Benz has set a mile-
stone on the path towards autonomous driving.
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive embraces all
elements of active and passive safety in one well
thought out system – for the safety of the vehi-
cle occupants and that of other road users.
Further information on driving safety systems
(Y page 65).
Cruise control
General notes
Cruise control maintains a constant road speed
for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid
exceeding the set speed. Change into a lower
gear in good time on long and steep downhill
gradients. This is especially important if the
vehicle is laden or towing a trailer. By doing so,
you will make use of the braking effect of the
engine. This relieves the load on the brake sys-
tem and prevents the brakes from overheating
and wearing too quickly.
Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-
ditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady
speed for a prolonged period. You can store any
road speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).
Important safety notes
Cruise control can neither reduce the risk of an
accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor
override the laws of physics. Cruise control can-
not take into account the road, traffic and
weather conditions. Cruise control is only an
aid. You are responsible for maintaining a safe
distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle
speed, for braking in good time and for staying in
lane.
Do not use cruise control:
R
in road and traffic conditions which do not
allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in
heavy traffic or on winding roads
R
on slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-
erating could cause the drive wheels to lose
traction and the vehicle could then skid
R
when there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
heavy rain or snow
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
driver of the speed stored.
i
The speed indicated in the speedometer
may differ slightly from the speed stored.
Cruise control lever
:
Activates or increases speed
;
Activates or reduces speed
160
Driving systems
Driving and parking
background
=
Deactivates cruise control
?
Activates at the current speed/last stored
speed
When you activate cruise control, the stored
speed is shown in the multifunction display for
five seconds. The é symbol appears on the
multifunction display.
Speedometer with segments: when cruise
control is activated, the segments from the
stored speed to the end of the scale light up.
Storing and maintaining the current
speed
You can store the current speed if you are driv-
ing faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).
X
Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.
X
Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or
down ;.
X
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
Cruise control is activated. The vehicle auto-
matically maintains the stored speed.
i
Cruise control may be unable to maintain
the stored speed on uphill gradients. The
stored speed is resumed when the gradient
evens out. Cruise control maintains the
stored speed on downhill gradients by auto-
matically applying the brakes.
Storing the current speed or call up the
last stored speed
G
WARNING
If you call up the stored speed and it is lower
than the current speed, the vehicle deceler-
ates. If you do not know the stored speed, the
vehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. There
is a risk of an accident.
Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-
tions before calling up the stored speed. If you
do not know the stored speed, store the
desired speed again.
X
Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you ?.
X
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
The first time cruise control is activated, it
stores the current speed or regulates the
speed of the vehicle to the previously stored
speed.
Setting a speed
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment
until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to
the speed set.
X
Press the cruise control lever up : for a
higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.
X
To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-
ments (1 km/h increments): briefly press
the cruise control lever up : or down ; to
the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is pressed
up : or down ; the last speed stored is
increased or reduced.
X
To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-
ments (10 km/h increments): briefly press
the cruise control lever up : or down ;
beyond the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is pressed
up : or down ; the last speed stored is
increased or reduced.
i
Cruise control is not deactivated if you
depress the accelerator pedal. If you acceler-
ate to overtake, cruise control adjusts the
vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after
you have finished overtaking.
Deactivating cruise control
There are several ways to deactivate cruise con-
trol:
X
Briefly press the cruise control lever forward
=.
or
X
Brake.
Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:
R
you engage the electric parking brake
R
you are driving at less than 20 mph (30 km/h)
R
ESP
®
intervenes or you deactivate ESP
®
R
you shift the transmission to position i
while driving
If cruise control is deactivated, a warning tone
sounds. You will see the Cruise Control OffCruise Control Off
message in the multifunction display for approx-
imately five seconds. The message on the mul-
tifunction display disappears and the segments
on the speedometer go out.
i
When you switch off the engine, the last
speed stored is cleared.
Driving systems
161
Driving and parking
Z
background
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
General notes
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC regulates the
speed and automatically helps you maintain the
distance from the vehicle detected in front.
Vehicles are detected with the aid of the radar
sensor system. Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC brakes automatically so that the set
speed is not exceeded.
Change into a lower gear in good time on long
and steep downhill gradients. This is especially
important if the vehicle is laden. By doing so, you
will make use of the braking effect of the engine.
This relieves the load on the brake system and
prevents the brakes from overheating and wear-
ing too quickly.
If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC detects
that there is a risk of a collision with the vehicle
in front, you will be warned visually and audibly.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot pre-
vent a collision without your intervention. An
intermittent warning tone will then sound and
the distance warning lamp will light up in the
instrument cluster. Brake immediately in order
to increase the distance to the vehicle in front or
take evasive action provided it is safe to do so.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC operates in
the speed range between 0 mph (0 km/h) and
120 mph (200 km/h).
Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
while driving on roads with steep gradients.
As Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC transmits
radar waves, it can resemble the radar detectors
of the responsible authorities. You can refer to
the relevant chapter in the Operator's Manual if
questions are asked about this.
i
USA only: This device has been approved by
the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The
radar sensor is intended for use in an auto-
motive radar system only. Removal, tamper-
ing, or altering of the device will void any war-
ranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do
not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-
approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user's authority to operate the
equipment.
i
Canada only: This device complies with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Removal, tampering, or altering of the device
will void any warranties, and is not permitted.
Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-
approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user's authority to operate the
equipment.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not
react to:
R
people or animals
R
stationary objects in the road, e.g. stopped
or parked vehicles
R
oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic
As a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
may neither give warnings nor intervene in
such situations. There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
uation and be ready to brake.
G
WARNING
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot
always clearly identify other road users and
complex traffic situations.
In such cases, Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC can:
R
give an unnecessary warning and then
brake the vehicle
R
neither give a warning nor intervene
R
accelerate or brake unexpectedly
There is a risk of an accident.
Continue to drive carefully and be ready to
brake, especially if Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC warns you.
G
WARNING
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes
your vehicle with up to 50% of the maximum
162
Driving systems
Driving and parking
background
possible deceleration. If this deceleration is
not sufficient, Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acous-
tic warning. There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust your speed in these cases and main-
tain sufficient distance. Apply the brakes
yourself and try to take evasive action.
!
When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or
the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle
brakes automatically in certain situations.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and the
HOLD function in the following or similar sit-
uations:
R
when towing the vehicle
R
in the car wash
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC can neither
reduce the risk of an accident if you fail to adapt
your driving style, nor override the laws of phys-
ics. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot
take into account road, weather or traffic con-
ditions. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is
only an aid. You are responsible for maintaining
a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle
speed, for braking in good time and for staying in
lane.
Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC:
R
In road and traffic conditions which do not
allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in
heavy traffic or on winding roads
R
On slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-
erating could cause the drive wheels to lose
traction and the vehicle could then skid
R
In poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or
snow
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may not
detect narrow vehicles driving in front, e.g.
motorcycles, or vehicles driving in a staggered
formation.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
impaired if:
R
There is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
R
There is snow or heavy rain
R
There is interference by other radar sources
R
There are strong radar reflections, for exam-
ple in parking garages
If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no longer
detects a vehicle in front, Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC may unexpectedly accelerate to the
speed stored.
This speed may:
R
Be too high if you are driving in a turning lane
or an exit lane
R
be so high in the right lane that you pass vehi-
cles driving on the left (in countries where
they drive on the right)
R
be so high in the left lane that you pass vehi-
cles driving on the right (in countries where
they drive on the left)
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
driver of the speed stored.
Cruise control lever
:
Activates or increases speed
;
Activates or reduces speed
=
Deactivates Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC
?
Activates at the current speed or last stored
speed
A
Sets a specified minimum distance
When you activate Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC, the stored speed appears for five
seconds in the multifunction display.
Speedometer with segments: when Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated, the
segments from the stored speed to the end of
the scale or to a permanently set speed limit
light up.
Driving systems
163
Driving and parking
Z
background
Activating Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC
Activation conditions
To activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC,
the following conditions must be fulfilled:
R
the engine must be started. It may take up to
two minutes of driving before Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC is ready for use.
R
the electric parking brake must be released.
R
ESP
®
must be activated, but not intervening
at present.
R
Parking Pilot must not be activated.
R
the transmission must be in position h.
R
the driver's door must be closed when you
shift the transmission from position j to h
or your seat belt must be fastened.
R
the front-passenger door and rear doors must
be closed.
R
the vehicle must not slide.
Activating
X
Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you ? or push it up : or down ;.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa-
ted.
X
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
The vehicle adapts its speed to that of the
vehicle in front, but only up to the desired
stored speed.
If you do not fully release the accelerator
pedal, the Active Distance Assist Sus‐Active Distance Assist Sus‐
pendedpended message appears on the multifunc-
tion display. The set distance to a slower-
moving vehicle in front will then not be main-
tained. You will be driving at the speed you
determine by the position of the accelerator
pedal.
You can also activate Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC when stationary. The lowest speed
that can be set is 20 mph (30 km/h).
X
Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you ? or push it up : or down ;.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa-
ted.
Activates at the current speed or last
stored speed
G
WARNING
If you call up the stored speed and it differs
from the current speed, the vehicle acceler-
ates or decelerates. If you do not know the
stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or
brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-
tions before calling up the stored speed. If you
do not know the stored speed, store the
desired speed again.
X
Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you ?.
X
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
The first time Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC is activated, it stores the current
speed or regulates the speed of the vehicle to
the previously stored speed.
Driving with Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC
Pulling away and driving
X
To pull away with Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC: remove your foot from the brake
pedal.
X
Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you ?.
or
X
Accelerate briefly.
The vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed to
that of the vehicle in front. If no vehicle is
detected in front, your vehicle accelerates to
the stored speed.
The vehicle can also pull away when it is facing
an unidentified obstacle or is driving on a differ-
ent line from another vehicle. The vehicle then
brakes automatically.
If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not
detect a vehicle in front, the system operates
like cruise control.
If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC detects
that the vehicle in front has slowed down, it
brakes your vehicle. In this way, the specified
minimum distance you have selected is main-
tained.
164
Driving systems
Driving and parking
background
If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC detects a
faster-moving vehicle in front, it increases the
driving speed to the set speed.
Selecting the drive program
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC supports a
sporty driving style when you have selected the
S or S+, drive program (Y page 145). Accelera-
tion behind the vehicle in front or to the set
speed is then noticeably more dynamic. If you
have selected the C or E driving program, the
vehicle accelerates more gently. This setting is
recommended in stop-and-start traffic.
Changing lanes
If you change to the overtaking lane Active Dis-
tance Assist DISTRONIC supports you if:
R
you are driving faster than 45 mph (70 km/h)
R
you switch on the appropriate turn signal
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not
currently detect a danger of collision
If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle is
accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if
changing lanes takes too long or if the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
becomes too small.
When you change lanes, Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC monitors the left lane on left-hand-
drive vehicles or the right lane on right-hand-
drive vehicles.
Stopping
G
WARNING
If you leave the driver's seat when the vehicle
is only being braked by Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC, it could roll away:
R
if there is a malfunction in the system or in
the voltage supply
R
if Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is
deactivated using the cruise control lever,
for example by a vehicle occupant or from
outside the vehicle
R
if the electrical system in the engine com-
partment, the battery or the fuses are tam-
pered with
R
if the battery is disconnected
R
if the vehicle is accelerated, e.g. by a vehi-
cle occupant
There is a risk of an accident.
Always deactivate Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC and secure the vehicle against
rolling away before you leave it.
Further information on deactivating Active Dis-
tance Assist DISTRONIC (Y page 167).
If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC detects
that the vehicle in front is stopping, it brakes
your vehicle until it is stationary.
Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains sta-
tionary and you do not need to depress the
brake.
After a time, the electric parking brake secures
the vehicle and relieves the service brake.
Depending on the specified minimum distance,
your vehicle will come to a standstill at a suffi-
cient distance behind the vehicle in front. The
specified minimum distance is set using the
control on the cruise control lever.
When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is acti-
vated, the transmission is shifted automatically
to position j if:
R
the driver's seat belt is not fastened and the
driver's door is open
R
the engine is switched off, unless it is auto-
matically switched off by the ECO start/stop
function
The electric parking brake is applied automati-
cally if Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is
active when the vehicle is stationary and:
R
a system malfunction occurs
R
the power supply is insufficient
If a malfunction occurs, the transmission may
also be shifted to position j automatically.
Setting a speed
X
Push the cruise control lever up : for a
higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.
X
To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-
ments (1 km/h increments): briefly push
the cruise control lever up : or down ; to
the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is pressed
up : or down ; the last speed stored is
increased or reduced.
X
To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-
ments (10 km/h increments): briefly push
Driving systems
165
Driving and parking
Z
background
the cruise control lever up : or down ;
beyond the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is pressed
up : or down ;, the last speed stored is
increased or reduced.
i
If you accelerate to overtake, Active Dis-
tance Assist DISTRONIC adjusts the vehicle's
speed to the last speed stored after you have
finished overtaking.
Setting a specified minimum distance
You can set the specified minimum distance for
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC by varying
the time span between one and two seconds.
This determines the distance that Active Dis-
tance Assist DISTRONIC is to maintain from the
vehicle in front, depending on the road speed.
You can see this distance in the multifunction
display (Y page 166).
Make sure that you maintain the minimum dis-
tance to the vehicle in front as required by law.
Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front if nec-
essary.
X
To increase: turn control ; in direction =.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC then main-
tains a greater distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle in front.
X
To decrease: turn control ; in direction :.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC then main-
tains a shorter distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle in front.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Displays in the speedometer
If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC detects a
vehicle in front, segments between speed of the
vehicle in front : and stored speed ; light up.
Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Plus
package: the segments likewise light up if a
vehicle in front is detected in the fast lane.
For design reasons, the speed displayed on the
speedometer may differ slightly from the speed
set for Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC.
Displays in the assistance graphic
Display when Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC is deactivated
:
Vehicle in front, if detected
;
Distance indicator, current distance to the
vehicle in front
=
Specified minimum distance to the vehicle
in front; adjustable
?
Your vehicle
166
Driving systems
Driving and parking
background
Display when Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC is activated
:
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active
(text only appears when the cruise control
lever is actuated)
;
Vehicle in front, if detected
=
Specified minimum distance to the vehicle
in front; adjustable
?
Your vehicle
X
To call up the assistance graphic: select
the Assistance GraphicAssistance Graphic function using the
on-board computer (Y page 219).
The stored speed appears in the multifunction
display for approximately five seconds when
you activate Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC.
Deactivating Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC
There are several ways to deactivate Active Dis-
tance Assist DISTRONIC:
X
Briefly push the cruise control lever
forward :.
or
X
Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary.
When you deactivate Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC, the Active Distance AssistActive Distance Assist
Off
Off message appears in the multifunction dis-
play for approximately five seconds.
The last speed stored remains stored until you
switch off the engine.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is not deac-
tivated if you depress the accelerator pedal.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is automati-
cally deactivated if:
R
you engage the electric parking brake or if the
vehicle is automatically secured with the elec-
tric parking brake
R
ESP
®
intervenes or you deactivate ESP
®
R
you shift the transmission to position j, k
or i
R
you pull the cruise control lever towards you
in order to pull away and the front-passenger
door or one of the rear doors is open
R
the vehicle slips
R
you activate Parking Pilot
If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deacti-
vated under these conditions, a warning tone
sounds. The Active Distance Assist OffActive Distance Assist Off
message will then be shown on the multifunc-
tion display for approximately five seconds.
Tips for driving with Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC
Pay particular attention in the following traffic
situations:
R
Cornering, entering and exiting a bend: the
ability of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC to
detect vehicles on bends is limited. Your vehi-
cle may brake unexpectedly or late.
R
Vehicles driving in a staggered formation:
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may not
detect vehicles that are not driving in the mid-
dle of their lanes. The distance to the vehicle
in front will be too short.
R
Other vehicles changing lane: Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC has not detected the vehi-
cle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle
will be too short.
R
Narrow vehicles: Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC has not yet detected the vehicle
in front on the edge of the road because of its
narrow width. The distance to the vehicle in
front will be too short.
R
Obstacles and stationary vehicles: Active Dis-
tance Assist DISTRONIC does not brake for
obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for exam-
Driving systems
167
Driving and parking
Z
background
ple, the detected vehicle turns a corner and
an obstacle or stationary vehicle is revealed,
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC will not
brake for them.
R
Crossing vehicles: Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC may mistakenly detect vehicles
that are crossing your lane. Activating Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC at, for example, a
traffic light with crossing traffic could cause
your vehicle to pull away at the wrong time.
In such situations, brake if necessary. Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC will then be deacti-
vated.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC with
Active Steering Assist
General notes
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC with Active
Steering Assist aids you in keeping the vehicle in
the center of the driving lane by means of mod-
erate steering interventions in a speed range
from 0 - 125 mph (0 - 200 km/h).
It monitors the area in front of your vehicle by
means of multifunction camera :, which is
mounted at the top of the windshield.
In a speed range from 0 - 37 mph (0 - 60 km/h),
Active Steering Assist focuses on the vehicle in
front, taking into account lane markings, e.g.
when following vehicles in a traffic jam.
At speeds of more than 37 mph (60 km/h),
Active Steering Assist focuses on clear lane
markings (left and right), focusing on the vehicle
in front only if clear lane markings are not pres-
ent.
If these conditions are not present, Active Steer-
ing Assist cannot provide assistance.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC must be
active in order for the function to be available.
Important safety notes
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC with Active
Steering Assist can neither reduce the risk of an
accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor
override the laws of physics. Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC with Active Steering Assist
cannot take into account road, weather or traffic
conditions. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
with Active Steering Assist is only an aid. You are
responsible for maintaining a safe distance to
the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for brak-
ing in good time and for staying in lane.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC with Active
Steering Assist does not detect road and traffic
conditions and does not detect all road users. If
you are following a vehicle which is driving
towards the edge of the road, your vehicle could
come into contact with the curb or other road
boundaries. Be particularly aware of other road
users, e.g. cyclists, that are directly next to your
vehicle.
Obstacles such as traffic pylons at roadworks on
the lane or projecting out into the lane are not
detected.
An inappropriate steering intervention, e.g. after
intentionally driving over a lane marking, can be
corrected at any time if you steer slightly in the
opposite direction.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC with Active
Steering Assist cannot continuously keep your
vehicle in lane. In some cases, steering inter-
vention is not sufficient to bring the vehicle back
to the lane. In such cases, you must steer the
vehicle yourself to ensure that it does not leave
the lane.
The system may be impaired or may not function
if:
R
there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient
illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain,
fog or heavy spray
R
there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the
sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if
the road surface is wet)
R
the windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or
covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin-
ity of the camera
R
there are no or several unclear lane markings
for one lane, e.g. roadworks
R
the lane markings are worn away, dark or cov-
ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
168
Driving systems
Driving and parking
background
R
the distance to the vehicle in front is too short
and thus the lane markings cannot be detec-
ted
R
the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes
branch off, cross one another or merge
R
the road is narrow and winding
R
there are highly variable shade conditions on
the roadway
The system is switched to passive and no longer
assists you by performing steering interventions
if:
R
you actively change lane
R
you switch on the turn signal
R
you take your hands off the steering wheel or
do not steer for a prolonged period of time
Once you have finished changing lanes, Active
Steering Assist automatically reactivates.
Active Steering Assist cannot provide assis-
tance:
R
on very sharp corners
R
when towing a trailer
R
when a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire
has been detected and displayed
Observe the important safety notes on Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC (Y page 162).
The steering interventions are carried out with a
limited steering moment. The system requires
the driver to keep his hands on the steering
wheel and to steer himself.
If you do not steer yourself or if you take your
hands off the steering wheel for a prolonged
period of time, the system will first alert you with
a visual warning. A steering wheel symbol
appears in the multifunction display. If you have
still not started to steer and have not taken hold
of the steering wheel after five seconds at the
latest, a warning tone also sounds to remind you
to take control of the vehicle. Active Steering
Assist is then switched to passive. Active Dis-
tance Assist DISTRONIC remains active.
Activating Active Steering Assist
X
Press button ;.
Indicator lamp : lights up. The ActiveActive
Steering Assist OnSteering Assist On message appears on
the multifunction display. Active Steering
Assist is activated.
Information in the multifunction display
If Active Steering Assist is activated but not
ready for a steering intervention, steering wheel
symbol : appears in gray. If the system pro-
vides you with support by means of steering
interventions, symbol : is shown in green.
Deactivating Active Steering Assist
X
Press button ;.
Indicator lamp : goes out. The Active
Active
SteeringSteering AssistAssist OffOff message appears on
the multifunction display. Active Steering
Assist is deactivated.
When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is
deactivated or not available, Active Steering
Assist is deactivated automatically.
Driving systems
169
Driving and parking
Z
background
HOLD function
General notes
The HOLD function can assist the driver in the
following situations:
R
when pulling away, especially on steep slopes
R
when maneuvering on steep slopes
R
when waiting in traffic
The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver
having to depress the brake pedal.
The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD
function deactivated when you depress the
accelerator pedal to pull away.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If the vehicle is only braked using the HOLD
function, the vehicle may roll away in the fol-
lowing situations when you leave the vehicle:
R
if there is a malfunction in the system or in
the voltage supply
R
if the HOLD function is deactivated by
depressing the accelerator pedal or brake
pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant
R
if the electrical system in the engine com-
partment, the battery or the fuses are tam-
pered with or the battery is disconnected
There is a risk of an accident.
Always deactivate the HOLD function and
secure the vehicle against rolling away before
you leave it.
!
When DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD func-
tion is activated, the vehicle brakes automat-
ically in certain situations.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in
the following or similar situations:
R
when towing the vehicle
R
in the car wash
Deactivating the HOLD function (Y page 170).
Activation conditions
You can activate the HOLD function if all of the
following conditions are fulfilled:
R
the vehicle is stationary.
R
the engine is running or if it has been auto-
matically switched off by the ECO start/stop
function.
R
the driver's door is closed or your seat belt is
fastened.
R
the electric parking brake is released.
R
the transmission is in position h, k or i.
R
DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.
Activating the HOLD function
X
Make sure that the activation conditions are
met.
X
Depress the brake pedal.
X
Quickly depress the brake pedal further
until : appears in the multifunction display.
The HOLD function is activated. You can
release the brake pedal.
If depressing the brake pedal the first time does
not activate the HOLD function, wait briefly and
then try again.
Deactivating the HOLD function
The HOLD function is deactivated automatically
if:
R
you depress the accelerator and the trans-
mission is in position h or k
R
the transmission is in position j
R
you depress the brake pedal again with a cer-
tain amount of pressure until display ë
disappears from the multifunction display
170
Driving systems
Driving and parking
background
R
you secure the vehicle using the electric park-
ing brake
R
you activate DISTRONIC PLUS
After a time, the electric parking brake secures
the vehicle and relieves the service brake.
When the HOLD function is activated, the trans-
mission is shifted automatically to position j
if:
R
the driver's seat belt is not fastened and the
driver's door is open
R
the engine is switched off, unless it is auto-
matically switched off by the ECO start/stop
function
The electric parking brake secures the vehicle
automatically if the HOLD function is activated
when the vehicle is stationary and:
R
a system malfunction occurs
R
the power supply is insufficient
If a malfunction occurs, the transmission may
also be shifted to position j automatically.
RACE START
Important safety notes
i
RACE START is only available for the
Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 4MATIC+ and
Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 S 4MATIC+ models.
i
RACE START must not be used on normal
roads. RACE START must only be activated
and used on dedicated road circuits, outside
of public road use.
i
RACE START is only available after the vehi-
cle has been run-in (Y page 130).
RACE START enables optimal acceleration from
a standing start. For this, a suitably high-grip
road surface is required and the vehicle and tires
must be in good working order.
G
WARNING
If you use RACE START, individual tires may
start to spin and the vehicle could skid.
Depending on the selected ESP
®
mode, there
is an increased risk of skidding and having an
accident. Make sure that no persons, animals
or obstacles are within range of the vehicle.
i
Observe the safety notes on driving safety
systems (Y page 65).
Be sure to read the safety notes and informa-
tion on ESP
®
(Y page 68).
Activation conditions
You can activate RACE START if:
R
the doors are closed
R
the hood is closed
R
the tailgate is closed
R
the engine is running and the engine and
transmission are at operating temperature
R
the steering wheel is in the straight-ahead
position.
R
the vehicle is on a level surface
R
the vehicle is stationary, the brake pedal is
depressed (left foot) and the parking brake is
released
R
the transmission is in position h
R
the drive program S, S+ or Race is selected.
(Y page 139)
Activating RACE START
X
Quickly depress the accelerator pedal fully.
The engine speed is increased.
i
If the activation conditions are not fulfilled,
RACE START cannot be carried out. The RACERACE
START Not Possible See Operator'sSTART Not Possible See Operator's
ManualManual message appears in the multifunction
display.
X
The RACERACE STARTSTART ReleaseRelease brakebrake toto startstart
message appears on the multifunction dis-
play.
i
In this phase you can adjust RACE START
depending on the road conditions: you can
vary the engine speed by pulling on one of the
steering wheel paddle shifters. The segments
in the multifunction display flicker rapidly.
i
If you do not release the brake pedal within
a short time, RACE START will be canceled.
The RACE START CanceledRACE START Canceled message
appears in the multifunction display.
X
Take your foot off the brake, but keep the
accelerator pedal depressed.
The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceler-
ation.
The RACE START ActiveRACE START Active message appears
on the multifunction display.
Driving systems
171
Driving and parking
Z
background
RACE START is deactivated when the vehicle
reaches a speed of approximately 30 mph (Can-
ada: 50 km/h).
RACE START is deactivated immediately if you
release the accelerator pedal during RACE
START or if any of the activation conditions are
no longer fulfilled. The RACE START CanceledRACE START Canceled
message appears in the multifunction display.
i
If RACE START is used repeatedly within a
short period of time, it is only available again
after the vehicle has been driven a certain
distance.
AIR BODY CONTROL
General notes
AIR BODY CONTROL is an air suspension system
with variable damping for improved driving com-
fort. All-round level control ensures the best
possible suspension and constant ground clear-
ance, even with a laden vehicle. When you drive
fast, the vehicle is lowered automatically to
improve driving safety and to reduce fuel con-
sumption. There is also the option to manually
adjust the vehicle level.
AIR BODY CONTROL consists of:
R
air suspension system with variable spring
rate
R
automatic level control
R
speed-dependent lowering to reduce fuel
consumption
R
manual level control
R
ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System with
continuous damping adjustment)
R
DYNAMIC SELECT switch (Y page 139) and
level button (Y page 173)
Available suspension settings
C (Comfort)
R
the suspension setting is
comfortable
R
the vehicle is set to normal
level
R
Mercedes-AMG GLC 43
4MATIC: at speeds above
100 mph (160 km/h), the
vehicle level lowers
R
Mercedes-AMG GLC 63
4MATIC+/GLC 63 S
4MATIC+: at speeds above
112 mph (180 km/h), the
vehicle level lowers
R
All other models: at speeds
above 86 mph, (138 km/h)
the vehicle level lowers
R
Mercedes-AMG GLC 43
4MATIC: at speeds less than
87 mph (140 km/h), the
vehicle is raised again
R
Mercedes-AMG GLC 63
4MATIC+/GLC 63 S
4MATIC+: at speeds less
than 75 mph (120 km/h),
the vehicle is raised again
R
All other models: at speeds
below 50 mph (80 km/h),
the vehicle is raised again
R
Mercedes-AMG GLC 63
4MATIC+/GLC 63 S
4MATIC+: the 4MATIC+ is
synchronised dynamically
E (Econ-
omy)
R
the suspension setting is
comfortable
R
the vehicle is set to low level
172
Driving systems
Driving and parking
background
S (Sport)
R
the suspension setting is
more taut
R
the vehicle is set to low level
R
Mercedes-AMG GLC 63
4MATIC+/GLC 63 S
4MATIC+: the 4MATIC+ is
synchronised more dynami-
cally
S+ (Sport
Plus)
Mercedes-
AMG GLC
63 4MATIC
+/GLC
63 S
4MATIC+:
RACE
R
the suspension setting is
even more taut
R
the vehicle is set to low level
R
Mercedes-AMG GLC 63
4MATIC+/GLC 63 S
4MATIC+: the 4MATIC+ is
synchronised more dynami-
cally
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
When the vehicle is being lowered, people
could become trapped if their limbs are
between the vehicle body and the wheels or
underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of
injury.
Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or
in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches
when the vehicle is being lowered.
i
If one of the doors is open, the vehicle is not
lowered.
Vehicle level
Setting the raised vehicle level
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: it is possible to
choose between the "Normal" and "Raised"
vehicle levels below a speed of 30 mph
(50 km/h). Select the "Normal" setting for nor-
mal road surfaces and "Raised" for driving with
snow chains or on particularly poor road surfa-
ces. Your selection remains stored even if you
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
All other models: it is possible to choose
between the "Normal" and "Raised" vehicle lev-
els below a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Select
the "Normal" setting for normal road surfaces
and "Raised" for driving with snow chains or on
particularly poor road surfaces. Your selection
remains stored even if you remove the Smart-
Key from the ignition lock.
X
Start the engine.
If indicator lamp ; is not lit:
X
Press button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
The vehicle is set to high level.
The VehicleVehicle RisingRising message appears in the
multifunction display.
i
The message disappears after ten seconds,
irrespective of the level reached. If necessary,
the vehicle is raised further.
Mercedes-AMG GLC 43 4MATIC: the "Raised
level" setting is canceled if you:
R
drive at speeds greater than 44 mph
(70 km/h)
R
drive for approximately three minutes at
speeds greater than 37 mph (60 km/h)
Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 4MATIC+/GLC 63 S
4MATIC+: the "Raised level" setting is canceled
if you:
R
drive at speeds greater than 44 mph
(70 km/h)
R
drive for approximately three minutes at
speeds greater than 37 mph (60 km/h)
All other models: the "Raised level" setting is
canceled if you:
R
drive faster than 75 mph (120 km/h)
R
drive for approximately three minutes at a
speed above 50 mph (80 km/h)
The "Raised level" remains active when you are
not driving within these speed ranges.
Setting the normal vehicle level
X
Start the engine.
Driving systems
173
Driving and parking
Z
background
If indicator lamp ; is lit:
X
Press button :.
Indicator lamp ; goes out. The vehicle is
adjusted to the height of the currently selec-
ted drive program (Y page 139).
Lowering the rear of the vehicle (except
Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Lowering using the button in the left-hand-
side cargo compartment trim
X
Apply the electric parking brake.
X
Shift the transmission to position j.
X
Pull switch : briefly.
Indicator lamp ; flashes until the vehicle has
been lowered.
The vehicle is lowered.
When the vehicle has been lowered, indicator
lamp ; remains lit.
Lowering is interrupted if:
R
a vehicle door is opened
R
button : was briefly pulled again
R
the vehicle is moving faster than 1 mph
(2 km/h)
The vehicle is automatically set to the level of
the most recently selected drive program
(Y page 139) if you drive faster than 1 mph
(2 km/h).
Raising the rear of the vehicle (except
Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Raising using the button in the left-hand-
side cargo compartment trim
X
Pull switch : briefly.
Indicator lamp ; goes out.
The vehicle is raised.
The vehicle is automatically set to the level of
the most recently selected drive program
(Y page 139) if you drive faster than 1 mph
(2 km/h).
X
If the vehicle can no longer be raised
when stationary: start the engine.
The process will then be continued.
If you drive off when the rear of the vehicle has
been lowered, the Á Vehicle Rising
Vehicle Rising
Please WaitPlease Wait message may appear in the mul-
tifunction display.
AMG sports suspension based on AIR
BODY CONTROL (Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles)
General notes
The electronically controlled damping system
works continuously. This improves driving
safety and ride comfort.
The damping is tuned individually to each wheel
and depends on:
R
your driving style, e.g. sporty
R
the road surface condition, e.g. bumps
R
your individual selection of Sport, Sport+ or
Comfort
The suspension setting is adjusted using the
corresponding button in the center console.
i
The mode can also be set using the
DYNAMIC SELECT switch (Y page 139).
This is possible only if the same mode is
selected for the suspension by pressing the
button on the center console for AMG sports
suspension based on AIR BODY CONTROL
and the DYNAMIC SELECT switch. This is the
case, for example, when both are set to Com-
fort mode.
Each time you start the engine with the Smart-
Key or the Start/Stop button, Comfort mode is
activated. For further information about starting
the engine, see (Y page 133).
174
Driving systems
Driving and parking
background
Sport mode
"Sport" mode ensures a more taut suspension
setting. Select this mode when employing a
sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country
roads.
X
Press button :.
Indicator lamp = lights up. You have selected
Sport mode.
The AMG Suspension System SPORTAMG Suspension System SPORT mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
Sport + mode
"Sport +" mode ensures a very taut suspension
setting.
If indicator lamps ; and = are off:
X
Press button : twice.
Indicator lamps ; and = light up. You have
selected Sport + mode.
The AMGAMG SuspensionSuspension SystemSystem SPORT +SPORT + mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
If indicator lamp = lights up:
X
Press button : once.
Second indicator lamp ; lights up. You have
selected Sport + mode.
The AMGAMG SuspensionSuspension SystemSystem SPORT +SPORT + mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
Comfort mode
In "Comfort" mode, the driving characteristics of
your vehicle are comfortable. Select this mode if
you favor a more comfortable driving style.
X
Press button : repeatedly until indicator
lamps ; and = go out.
You have selected Comfort mode.
The AMGAMG SuspensionSuspension SystemSystem COMFORTCOMFORT mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive)
4MATIC ensures permanent drive for all four
wheels. Together with ESP
®
, it improves the
traction of your vehicle whenever a drive wheel
spins due to insufficient grip.
If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are
inattentive, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk
of an accident nor override the laws of physics.
4MATIC does not take into account
R
the road and weather conditions
R
the traffic situation
4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible for
the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle
speed, for braking in good time and for staying in
your lane.
If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip:
R
Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as
necessary when pulling away.
R
Accelerate less when driving.
!
Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised.
This may damage the transfer case. Damage
of this sort is not covered by the Mercedes-
Benz Limited Warranty. All wheels must
remain either on the ground or be fully raised.
Observe the instructions for towing the vehi-
cle with all wheels in full contact with the
ground.
i
In wintry driving conditions, the maximum
effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if you
use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains
if necessary.
Active Parking Assist
General notes
Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking aid
with ultrasound. It measures the road on both
sides of the vehicle. A parking symbol indicates
a suitable parking space. Active steering inter-
vention and brake application can assist you
during parking and when exiting a parking
space. You can also still use Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC (Y page 179).
Important safety notes
Active Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is not a
replacement for your attention to your immedi-
ate surroundings. You are always responsible
Driving systems
175
Driving and parking
Z
background
for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a
parking space. Make sure that no persons, ani-
mals or objects are in the path of your vehicle.
When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactiva-
ted, Active Parking Assist is also unavailable.
For vehicles with a trailer tow hitch installed, the
minimum length for parking spaces is slightly
longer.
If you have attached a trailer to your vehicle, you
should not use Active Parking Assist. Once the
electrical connection is established between
your vehicle and the trailer, Active Parking
Assist is no longer available. Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area.
G
WARNING
While parking or pulling out of a parking
space, the vehicle swings out and can drive
onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could
result in a collision with another road user.
There is a risk of an accident.
Pay attention to other road users. Stop the
vehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Park-
ing Assist parking procedure.
!
If they cannot be avoided, drive over obsta-
cles such as curbs slowly and at an obtuse
angle. Otherwise, you may damage the
wheels or tires.
Active Parking Assist may possibly indicate
parking spaces which are not suitable for park-
ing, for example:
R
where parking or stopping is prohibited
R
in front of driveways or entrances and exits
R
on unsuitable surfaces
Parking tips:
R
On narrow roads, drive as close to the parking
space as possible
R
Parking spaces that are littered or overgrown
might be identified or measured incorrectly
R
Parking spaces that are partially occupied by
trailer drawbars might not be identified as
such or be measured incorrectly
R
Snowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking
space being measured inaccurately
R
Pay attention to the warning messages of
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC during the park-
ing procedure (Y page 181).
R
You can intervene in the steering procedure
to correct it at any time. Active Parking Assist
is then deactivated
R
When transporting a load which protrudes
from your vehicle, you should not use Active
Parking Assist
R
never use Active Parking Assist when snow
chains are installed
R
Always pay attention to the specified tire
pressure for your vehicle. This has a direct
influence on the parking characteristics of the
vehicle.
Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces:
R
parallel or at right angles to the direction of
travel
R
on straight roads, not bends
R
on the same level as the road, e.g. not on the
pavement
Detecting parking spaces
Objects located above the detection range of
Active Parking Assist will not be detected when
the parking space is measured. These are not
taken into account when the parking procedure
is calculated, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sec-
tions or loading ramps of trucks. Active Parking
Assist may therefore guide you into the parking
space too early.
G
WARNING
If there are objects above the detection range:
R
Active Parking Assist may steer too early
R
the vehicle may not stop in front of these
objects
This could cause a collision. There is a risk of
an accident.
If objects are located above the detection
range, stop and deactivate Active Parking
Assist.
Further information about the detection range
(Y page 180).
176
Driving systems
Driving and parking
background
Active Parking Assist does not assist you park-
ing in spaces at right angles to the direction of
travel if:
R
two parking spaces are located directly next
to one another
R
the parking space is directly next to a low
obstacle such as a low curb
R
you park forwards
Active Parking Assist does not assist you park-
ing in spaces that are parallel or at right angles
to the direction of travel if:
R
the parking space is on a curb
R
the system reads the parking space as being
blocked, for example by foliage or grass pav-
ing blocks
R
the area is too small for the vehicle to maneu-
ver into
R
the parking space is bordered by an obstacle,
e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer
:
Detected parking space on the left
;
Parking symbol
=
Detected parking space on the right
Active Parking Assist is switched on automati-
cally when driving forwards. The system is
operational at speeds of up to approximately
22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, the sys-
tem independently locates and measures park-
ing spaces on both sides of the vehicle.
Active Parking Assist will only detect parking
spaces:
R
parallel or at right angles to the direction of
travel
R
that are parallel to the direction of travel and
at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide
R
that are parallel to the direction of travel and
at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) longer than your vehi-
cle
R
at right angles to the direction of travel and at
least 39.5 in (1.0 m) wider than your vehicle
i
Note that Active Parking Assist cannot
measure the length of a parking space if it is
perpendicular to the direction of travel. You
will need to judge whether your vehicle will fit
into the parking space.
When driving at speeds below 19 mph
(30 km/h), you will see parking symbol ; as a
status indicator on the instrument cluster. When
a parking space has been detected, an arrow
towards the right or the left also appears. By
default, Active Parking Assist only displays park-
ing spaces on the front-passenger side. Parking
spaces on the driver's side are displayed as
soon as the turn signal on the driver's side is
activated. When parking on the driver's side,
this must remain switched on until you acknowl-
edge the use of Active Parking Assist by press-
ing the a button on the multifunction steer-
ing wheel. The system automatically determines
whether the parking space is parallel or at right
angles to the direction of travel.
A parking space is displayed while you are driv-
ing past it, and until you are approximately 50 ft
(15 m) away from it.
Parking
G
WARNING
If you leave the driver's seat when the vehicle
is being braked only by the Active Parking
Assist, it could roll away in the following sit-
uations:
R
if there is a malfunction in the system or in
the voltage supply
R
if the electrical system in the engine com-
partment, the battery or the fuses have
been tampered with
R
if the battery is disconnected
R
if the vehicle is accelerated, e.g. by a vehi-
cle occupant
There is a risk of an accident.
Before leaving the vehicle, always secure it
against rolling away.
Driving systems
177
Driving and parking
Z
background
i
If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC detects
obstacles, Active Parking Assist will brake
automatically whilst the vehicle is parking.
You are responsible for braking in good time.
X
Stop the vehicle when the parking space sym-
bol shows the desired parking space in the
instrument cluster.
X
Shift the transmission to position k.
The Start Parking Assist?Start Parking Assist? Yes: OKYes: OK No:No:
% message appears in the multifunction
display.
X
To cancel the procedure: press the %
button on the multifunction steering wheel or
pull away.
or
X
To park using Active Parking Assist: press
the a button on the multifunction steering
wheel.
The Parking
Parking AssistAssist ActiveActive AccelerateAccelerate
and Brakeand Brake Observe SurroundingsObserve Surroundings mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
X
Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.
X
Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake at all
times. When backing up, drive at a speed
below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Oth-
erwise, Active Parking Assist will be canceled.
Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to a
standstill when the vehicle approaches the
rear border of the parking space.
Maneuvering may be required in tight parking
spaces.
The Parking Assist Active Select DParking Assist Active Select D
Observe SurroundingsObserve Surroundings message appears in
the multifunction display.
X
Shift the transmission to position h when
the vehicle is stationary.
Active Parking Assist immediately steers in
the other direction.
The ParkingParking AssistAssist ActiveActive AccelerateAccelerate
and Brake
and Brake Observe SurroundingsObserve Surroundings mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
i
You will achieve the best results by waiting
for the steering procedure to complete before
pulling away.
X
Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all
times.
Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to a
standstill when the vehicle approaches the
rear border of the parking space.
Maneuvering may be required in tight parking
spaces.
The Parking Assist Active Select R
Parking Assist Active Select R
Observe SurroundingsObserve Surroundings message appears in
the multifunction display.
As soon as the parking procedure is complete,
the Active Parking Assist FinishedActive Parking Assist Finished mes-
sage appears and a warning tone sounds. The
vehicle is now parked.
The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver
having to depress the brake pedal. The braking
effect is canceled when you depress the accel-
erator pedal.
Active Parking Assist no longer supports you
with steering interventions and brake applica-
tions. When Active Parking Assist is finished,
you must steer and brake again yourself. Park-
ing Assist PARKTRONIC is still available.
Parking tips:
R
The way your vehicle is positioned in the park-
ing space after parking is dependent on vari-
ous factors. These include the position and
shape of the vehicles parked in front and
behind it and the conditions of the location. It
may be the case that Active Parking Assist
guides you too far into a parking space, or not
far enough into it. In some cases, it may also
lead you across or onto the curb. If necessary,
cancel the parking procedure with Active
Parking Assist.
R
You can also prematurely select transmission
position h. The vehicle redirects and does
not drive as far into the parking space. Should
the transmission change take place too early,
the parking procedure is canceled. A sensible
parking position can no longer be achieved
from this position.
Exiting a parking space
In order that Active Parking Assist can support
you when exiting the parking space:
R
the border of the parking space must be high
enough at the front and the rear. A curb stone
is too small, for example.
R
the border of the parking space must not be
too wide. Your vehicle can be maneuvered
into the parking space at a maximum angle of
45° to the starting position.
R
a maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft
(1.0 m) must be available.
Active Parking Assist can only assist you with
exiting a parking space if you have parked the
vehicle parallel to the direction of travel using
Active Parking Assist.
178
Driving systems
Driving and parking
background
i
If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC detects
obstacles, Active Parking Assist brakes auto-
matically whilst the vehicle is exiting the park-
ing space. You are responsible for braking in
good time.
X
Start the engine.
X
Release the electric parking brake.
X
Switch on the turn signal in the direction you
are pulling away.
X
Shift the transmission to position h or k.
The Start Parking Assist?Start Parking Assist? Yes: OKYes: OK No:No:
% message appears in the multifunction
display.
X
To cancel the procedure: press the %
button on the multifunction steering wheel or
pull away.
or
X
To exit a parking space using Active Park-
ing Assist: press the a button on the mul-
tifunction steering wheel.
The Parking
Parking AssistAssist ActiveActive AccelerateAccelerate
and Brakeand Brake Observe SurroundingsObserve Surroundings mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
X
Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.
X
Pull away, being ready to brake at all times. Do
not exceed a maximum speed of approx-
imately 6 mph (10 km/h) when exiting a park-
ing space. Otherwise, Active Parking Assist
will be canceled.
X
Depending on the message or as required,
shift the transmission to position h or k.
Active Parking Assist immediately steers in
the other direction. The Parking AssistParking Assist
Active Accelerate and BrakeActive Accelerate and Brake ObserveObserve
SurroundingsSurroundings message appears in the mul-
tifunction display.
i
You will achieve the best results by waiting
for the steering procedure to complete before
pulling away.
If you back up after activation, the steering
wheel is moved to the straight-ahead posi-
tion.
X
Drive forwards and reverse as prompted by
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning dis-
plays, several times if necessary.
Once you have exited the parking space com-
pletely, the steering wheel is moved to the
straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and the
Active Parking Assist FinishedActive Parking Assist Finished message
appears in the multifunction display. You will
then have to steer and merge into traffic on your
own. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is still availa-
ble. You can take over the steering before the
vehicle has exited the parking space com-
pletely. This is useful if you recognize that it is
already possible to pull out of the parking space.
Canceling Active Parking Assist
X
Stop the movement of the multifunction
steering wheel or steer yourself.
Active Parking Assist will be canceled at once.
The Active Parking Assist CanceledActive Parking Assist Canceled
message appears in the multifunction display.
or
X
Press the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC button
(Y page 181).
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is switched off
and Active Parking Assist is immediately can-
celed. The Active Parking Assist Can‐Active Parking Assist Can‐
celedceled message appears on the multifunction
display.
Active Parking Assist is canceled automatically
if:
R
the electric parking brake is applied
R
transmission position j is selected
R
parking using Active Parking Assist is no lon-
ger possible
R
you are driving faster than 6 mph (10 km/h)
R
a wheel spins, ESP
®
intervenes or fails. In
such cases the ÷ warning lamp lights up in
the instrument cluster
A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol dis-
appears and the multifunction display shows the
ActiveActive ParkingParking AssistAssist CanceledCanceled message.
When Active Parking Assist is canceled, you
must steer and brake again yourself.
If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle is
braked to a standstill. To drive on, depress the
accelerator again.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Important safety notes
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic
parking aid with ultrasound. It monitors the area
around your vehicle using six sensors in the
front bumper and six sensors in the rear
bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC visually
and audibly indicates the distance between your
vehicle and an object.
Driving systems
179
Driving and parking
Z
background
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is
not a replacement for your attention to your
immediate surroundings. You are always
responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and
exiting a parking space. Make sure that there
are no persons, animals or objects in the maneu-
vering area while maneuvering and parking in/
leaving parking spaces.
!
When parking, pay particular attention to
objects above or below the sensors, such as
flower pots or trailer drawbars. Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects
when they are in the immediate vicinity of the
vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the
objects.
The sensors may not detect snow and other
objects that absorb ultrasonic waves.
Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car
wash, the compressed-air brakes of a truck or
a pneumatic drill could cause Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC to malfunction.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not function
correctly on uneven terrain.
!
If you do not need the trailer tow hitch,
remove the detachable ball coupling. Parking
Assist PARKTRONIC measures the minimum
detection range to an obstacle from the
bumper, not the ball coupling.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated auto-
matically when you:
R
switch on the ignition
R
shift the transmission to position h, k or
i
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated at
speeds above 11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactiva-
ted at lower speeds.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated for
the rear area when you establish an electrical
connection between your vehicle and a trailer.
Range of the sensors
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not take into
account obstacles located:
R
below the detection range, such as persons,
animals or objects
R
above the detection range, e.g. overhanging
loads, tail sections or loading ramps of trucks
:
Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side
(example)
:
Approx. 24 in (approx. 60 cm) (corners)
;
Approx. 32 in (approx. 80 cm) (corners)
=
Approx. 48 in (approx. 120 cm) (center)
?
Approx. 40 in (approx. 100 cm) (center)
The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or slush.
They can otherwise not function correctly. Clean
the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch
or damage them (Y page 309).
Minimum distance
Center Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm)
Corners Approx. 6 in (approx. 15 cm)
180
Driving systems
Driving and parking
background
If there is an obstacle within this range, the rel-
evant warning displays light up and a warning
tone sounds. If the distance falls below the min-
imum, the distance may no longer be shown.
Warning displays
:
Segments on the left-hand side of the vehi-
cle
;
Segments on the right-hand side of the vehi-
cle
=
Segments showing operational readiness
The warning displays show the distance
between the sensors and the obstacle. The
warning display for the front area is in the instru-
ment cluster. The warning display for the rear
area is located on the headliner in the rear com-
partment.
The warning display for each side of the vehicle
is divided into five yellow and two red segments.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational if
operational readiness indicator = lights up.
The selected transmission position and the
direction in which the vehicle is rolling deter-
mine which warning display is active when the
engine is running.
Transmission posi-
tion
Warning display
h
Front area activated
k, i or the vehicle
is rolling backwards
Rear and front areas
activated
j
No areas activated
One or more segments light up as the vehicle
approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehi-
cle's distance from the obstacle. In addition,
warning tones are issued.
When the distance to the obstacle is sufficient,
you will hear an intermittent warning tone. The
shorter the distance to the obstacle, the shorter
the frequency of the intermittent warning tones
becomes. When the minimum distance is
reached, you hear a continuous warning tone.
Deactivating/activating Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC
d
Switch on the dashboard
e
Switch on the center console
:
Deactivating or activating Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC
;
Indicator lamp
If indicator lamp ; lights up, Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC is deactivated. Active Parking
Assist is then also deactivated.
i
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automati-
cally activated when you turn the SmartKey to
position 2 in the ignition lock.
Driving systems
181
Driving and parking
Z
background
Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Only the red segments in
the Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC warning
displays are lit. You also
hear a warning tone for
approximately two sec-
onds.
Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC is then
deactivated and the indi-
cator lamp on the
PARKTRONIC button
lights up.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has been deacti-
vated.
X
If problems persist, have Parking Assist PARKTRONIC checked at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Only the red segments in
the Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC warning
displays are lit. Parking
Assist PARKTRONIC is
then deactivated.
The Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is inter-
ference.
X
Clean the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 309).
X
Switch the ignition back on.
The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultra-
sound waves.
X
Check to see if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC works at a different
location.
Rear view camera
General notes
Rear view camera : is an optical parking and
maneuvering aid. It shows the area behind the
vehicle with guide lines in the multimedia sys-
tem.
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a
mirror image, as in the rear view mirror.
i
The text shown in the multimedia system
depends on the language setting. The follow-
ing are examples of rear view camera displays
in the multimedia system.
Important safety notes
The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a
replacement for your attention to your immedi-
ate surroundings. You are always responsible
for safe maneuvering and parking. Make sure
that there are no persons, animals or objects in
the maneuvering area while maneuvering and
parking in parking spaces.
Under the following circumstances, the rear
view camera will not function, or will function in
a limited manner:
R
if the tailgate is open
R
in heavy rain, snow or fog
R
at night or in very dark places
R
if the camera is exposed to very bright light
R
if the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED
lighting (the display may flicker)
182
Driving systems
Driving and parking
background
R
if there is a sudden change in temperature,
e.g. when driving into a heated garage in win-
ter
R
if the camera lens is dirty or obstructed.
Observe the notes on cleaning
(Y page 309)
R
if the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this
case, have the camera position and setting
checked at a qualified specialist workshop
The field of vision and other functions of the rear
view camera may be restricted due to additional
accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g.
license plate holder, rear bicycle rack).
The rear view camera is protected from rain-
drops and dust by means of a flap. When the rear
view camera is activated, this flap opens.
The flap closes again when:
R
you have finished the maneuvering process
R
you switch off the engine
R
you open the cargo compartment
Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 309).
For technical reasons, the flap may remain open
briefly after the rear view camera has been
deactivated.
Activating/deactivating the rear view
camera
X
To activate: make sure that the Activa‐Activa‐
tion by R geartion by R gear function is selected in the
multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's
Manual).
X
Engage reverse gear.
The rear view camera flap opens. The multi-
media system shows the area behind the vehi-
cle with guide lines.
The image from the rear view camera is avail-
able throughout the maneuvering process.
X
To switch the function mode for vehicles
with trailer tow hitch: using the controller,
select symbol : for the "Reverse parking"
function or symbol ; for "Coupling up a
trailer".
The symbol of the selected function is high-
lighted.
X
To deactivate: shift the transmission to posi-
tion j.
or
X
Drive forwards at a speed greater than 7 mph
(12 km/h).
Multimedia display
The rear view camera may show a distorted view
of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all.
The rear view camera does not show objects in
the following positions:
R
very close to the rear bumper
R
under the rear bumper
R
in the area immediately above the tailgate
handle
!
Objects not at ground level may appear to
be further away than they actually are, e.g.:
R
the bumper of a parked vehicle
R
the drawbar of a trailer
R
the ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
R
the rear section of an HGV
R
a slanted post
Use the guidelines only for orientation.
Approach objects no further than the bottom-
most guideline.
Driving systems
183
Driving and parking
Z
background
:
Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the
vehicle
;
White guide lines without steering input,
vehicle width including the exterior mirrors
(static)
=
Yellow guide lines for vehicle width including
the exterior mirrors, for current steering
input (dynamic)
?
Yellow lanes marking the course the tires
will take at the current steering wheel angle
(dynamic)
A
Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-
cle
B
Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)
C
Bumper
D
Red guide line at a distance of approximately
12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle
When the transmission is shifted to position k,
guide lines appear in the camera image.
The distance specifications only apply to
objects that are at ground level.
E
Front warning display
F
Rear warning display
G
Additional vehicle icon as Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC measurement operational
readiness indicator
Vehicles with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC:
When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is opera-
tional, vehicle icon (Y page 181), appears on the
multimedia system display G. If the Parking
Assist PARKTRONIC warning displays are active
or light up, warning displays E and F are also
active or light up correspondingly on the multi-
media system display.
"Reverse parking" function
Backing up straight into a parking space
without steering input
:
White guide line without steering input –
vehicle width including the exterior mirrors
(static)
;
Yellow guide lines for vehicle width including
the exterior mirrors – dynamic for current
steering input
184
Driving systems
Driving and parking
background
=
Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-
cle
?
Red guide line at a distance of approximately
12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle
X
Make sure that the rear view camera is
switched on (Y page 183).
The lane and the guide lines appear.
X
With the help of white guide line :, check
whether the vehicle will fit into the parking
space.
X
Using white guide line : as a guide, carefully
back up until you reach the end position.
Red guide line ? is then at the end of the
parking space. The vehicle is almost parallel
in the parking space.
Reverse perpendicular parking with steer-
ing input
X
After driving past the parking space, stop the
vehicle safely.
X
Make sure that the rear view camera is
switched on (Y page 183).
The lane and the guide lines appear in the
camera image.
X
While the vehicle is stationary, turn the steer-
ing wheel in the direction of the parking space
until yellow guide lines ; reach parking
space marking :.
Yellow guide lines ; dynamically adapt to the
current steering input.
X
Maintain the steering input and reverse care-
fully.
X
Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in
front of the parking space.
:
Parking space markings
=
White guide lines – for current steering input
White guide lines = should be as close to par-
allel with parking space markings : as possi-
ble.
X
Turn the steering wheel to the center position
while the vehicle is stationary.
?
Red guide line at a distance of approximately
12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle
A
White guide lines – no steering input
B
End of parking space
Driving systems
185
Driving and parking
Z
background
X
Back up carefully until you have reached the
final position.
The red guide line ? is then at the end of the
parking space B. The vehicle is almost par-
allel in the parking space.
"Coupling up a trailer" function
:
Vehicle center point on the yellow guide line
at a distance of approximately 3 ft (1.0 m)
from the rear of the vehicle
;
Trailer drawbar
This function is only available on vehicles with a
trailer tow hitch.
X
Before coupling up a trailer, set the height of
trailer drawbar ; so that it is slightly higher
than the ball coupling.
X
Position the vehicle centrally in front of trailer
drawbar ;.
=
Trailer drawbar marker assistant
?
Symbol for the "Coupling up a trailer" func-
tion
A
Ball coupling
B
Red guide line at a distance of approximately
12 in (0.30 m) from the ball coupling
X
Select symbol ? using the multimedia sys-
tem controller.
The "Coupling up a trailer" function is selec-
ted. The distance specifications now only
apply to objects that are at the same level as
the ball coupling.
X
Reverse carefully, making sure that trailer
drawbar locating aid = points approximately
in the direction of trailer drawbar ;.
X
Reverse carefully until trailer drawbar ; rea-
ches red guide line B.
The distance between trailer drawbar ; and
red guide line B is now approximately 12 in
(0.30 m).
X
Couple up the trailer (Y page 204).
"Wide-angle" function
:
Symbol for the wide-angle view function
;
Your vehicle
=
Warning displays for Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC
You can also use the rear view camera to select
a wide-angle view.
When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is opera-
tional (Y page 181), a symbol for your own vehi-
cle appears in the multimedia system display. If
the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning dis-
plays are active, warning displays = light up on
the multimedia system display in yellow or red
accordingly.
Object detection
The rear view camera helps detect moving and
stationary objects. If an object (person, vehicle
or other obstacle) is detected, this object is
marked with a bar. Objects located some dis-
tance from the vehicle away are marked with a
yellow bar. If the distance to the object is very
small, the bar is displayed in red.
186
Driving systems
Driving and parking
background
Object detection only works in wide-angle view.
To ensure that you can use the function, it must
be switched on in the multimedia system (see
the Digital Operator's Manual).
360° Camera
General notes
The 360° camera is a system consisting of four
cameras.
The system processes images from the follow-
ing cameras:
R
Rear view camera
R
Front camera
R
Two side cameras in the exterior mirrors
The cameras cover the immediate surroundings
of the vehicle. The system supports you, for
example when parking or if vision is restricted at
an exit.
You can show images from the 360° camera in
full-screen mode or in seven different split-
screen views on the multimedia system. A split-
screen view also includes a top view of the vehi-
cle. This view is calculated from the data sup-
plied by the installed cameras (virtual camera).
The seven split-screen views are:
R
Top view and picture from the rear view cam-
era (130° viewing angle)
R
Top view and image from the front camera
(130° viewing angle without displaying the
maximum steering wheel angle)
R
Top view and enlarged rear view
R
Top view and enlarged front view
R
Top view and trailer view (vehicles with trailer
tow hitch)
R
Top view and images from the rear-facing side
cameras (rear wheel view)
R
Top view and images from the forward-facing
side cameras (front wheel view)
When the function is active and you shift the
transmission from h or k to i, the guide
lines on the multimedia system are hidden.
When you shift between transmission positions
h and k, you see the previously selected front
or rear view.
Distances measured by Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC will also be optically displayed:
R
in split screen view as red or yellow brackets
around the vehicle icon in the top view, or
R
at the bottom right as red or yellow brackets
around the vehicle symbol in full-screen mode
The line thickness and color of the brackets
show how far the vehicle is from an object.
R
yellow brackets with thin lines: Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC is active
R
yellow brackets with normal lines: an object is
present in close range of the vehicle
R
red line: an object is present in the immediate
close range of the vehicle
Important safety notes
The 360°camera is only an aid and may show a
distorted view of obstacles, show them incor-
rectly or not at all. The 360°camera is not a
substitute for attentive driving.
You are always responsible for safe maneuver-
ing and parking. Make sure that there are no
persons, animals or objects in the maneuvering
area while maneuvering and parking in parking
spaces.
You are always responsible for safety, and must
always pay attention to your surroundings when
parking and maneuvering. This applies to the
areas behind, in front of and beside the vehicle.
You could otherwise endanger yourself and oth-
ers.
The 360° camera will not function or will func-
tion in a limited manner:
R
if the doors are open
R
if the exterior mirrors are folded in
R
if the tailgate is open
R
in heavy rain, snow or fog
R
at night or in very dark places
R
if the cameras are exposed to very bright light
R
if the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED
lighting (the display may flicker)
R
if the camera lenses fog up, e.g. when driving
into a heated garage in winter, causing a rapid
change in temperature
R
if the camera lenses are dirty or covered
R
if the vehicle components in which the cam-
eras are installed are damaged. In this case,
have the camera position and setting checked
at a qualified specialist workshop
Driving systems
187
Driving and parking
Z
background
Do not use the 360° camera in this case. You
can otherwise injure others or cause damage to
objects or the vehicle.
The guide lines in the multimedia system display
show the distances to your vehicle. The distan-
ces only apply to road level.
In trailer mode, the guide lines are shown at the
level of the trailer tow hitch.
The camera in the rear area is protected by
means of a flap. This flap opens when the 360°
camera is activated. Observe the notes on
cleaning (Y page 309). For technical reasons,
the flap may remain open briefly after the 360°
camera has been deactivated.
The field of vision and other functions of the
camera system may be restricted due to addi-
tional attachments (e.g. license plate holder,
rear bicycle carrier).
On vehicles with height-adjustable chassis,
depending on technical conditions, leaving the
standard height can result in:
R
inaccuracies in the guide lines
R
inaccuracies in the display of generated
images (top view)
Activation conditions
The image from the 360° camera appears if:
R
the multimedia system is switched on
R
the 360° Camera360° Camera function is switched on
If you are driving faster than at a moderate
speed and you turn on the 360° camera, a warn-
ing message appears.
The warning message disappears if:
R
you are again driving at a moderate speed The
360° camera is then activated
R
the message is confirmed with the % but-
ton
Switching the 360° camera on and off
using the button
X
To switch on: press button :.
Depending on whether transmission position
h or k is selected, the following appears:
R
a split screen with top view and the image
from the front camera or
R
a split screen with top view and the image
from the rear view camera
X
To switch off: press button :.
Activating the 360° camera using
reverse gear
The 360° camera images can be automatically
displayed by engaging reverse gear.
X
Make sure that the Activation by R gear
Activation by R gear
function is selected on the multimedia system
(see the Digital Operator's Manual).
X
To show the 360° camera image: engage
reverse gear.
The multimedia system shows the area
behind the vehicle in split-screen mode. You
see the top view of the vehicle and the image
from the rear view camera.
You cannot stop the 360° camera display if
reverse gear is engaged.
Selecting the split-screen view or full
screen mode
Switching between split screen views:
X
To switch to the line with the vehicle icons:
slide 5 the controller.
X
To select a vehicle icon: turn the controller.
Switching to full screen mode:
X
Turn and press 180°180° ViewView with the controller.
188
Driving systems
Driving and parking
background
The full screen option is only available in the fol-
lowing views:
R
Top view with picture from the rear view cam-
era
R
Top view with picture from the front camera
Multimedia display
Important safety notes
The camera system may show a distorted view
of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all.
Obstacles are not shown by the system in the
following locations:
R
under the front and rear bumpers
R
very close to the front and rear bumpers
R
in the area immediately above the tailgate
handle
R
very close to the exterior mirrors
R
in the transitional areas between the various
cameras in the virtual top view
!
Objects not at ground level may appear to
be further away than they actually are, e.g.:
R
the bumper of a parked vehicle
R
the drawbar of a trailer
R
the ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
R
the rear section of an HGV
R
a slanted post
Use the guidelines only for orientation.
Approach objects no further than the bottom-
most guideline.
Top view with picture from the rear view
camera
:
Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the
vehicle
;
Symbol for the split screen setting with top
view and rear view camera image
=
Guide lines for the maximum steering input
?
Yellow lanes marking the course the tires
will take at the current steering wheel angle
(dynamic)
A
Yellow guide lines for vehicle width including
the exterior mirrors – dynamic for current
steering input
B
Vehicle center axis (locating aids)
C
Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-
cle
D
Bumper
E
Red guide line at a distance of approximately
12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle
When reverse gear is selected, guide lines
appear on the camera image.
The distance specifications only apply to
objects that are at ground level.
Top view with picture from the front cam-
era
:
Symbol for the split screen setting with top
view and front camera image
;
Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the front of the
vehicle
Driving systems
189
Driving and parking
Z
background
=
Yellow guide lines for vehicle width including
the exterior mirrors, for current steering
input (dynamic)
?
Yellow lanes marking the course the tires
will take at the current steering wheel angle
(dynamic)
A
Red guide line at a distance of approximately
12 in (0.30 m) from the front of the vehicle
B
Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the front of the
vehicle
Top view and enlarged rear view
:
Symbol for the split screen setting with top
view and rear view camera image enlarged
;
Red guide line at a distance of approximately
12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle
This view assists you in estimating the distance
to the vehicle behind you.
i
This setting can also be selected as an
enlarged front view.
Top view with image from the side cam-
eras
:
Symbol for the top view and forward-facing
side camera setting
;
Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors (right side of
vehicle)
=
Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors (left side of
vehicle)
i
You can also select the side camera setting
for the rear-facing view.
"Coupling up a trailer" function
:
Vehicle center point on the yellow guide line
at a distance of approximately 3 ft (1.0 m)
from the rear of the vehicle
;
Trailer drawbar
=
Red guide line at a distance of approximately
12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle
X
Set the height of trailer drawbar ; so that it
is slightly higher than the ball coupling.
X
Position the vehicle centrally in front of trailer
drawbar ;.
190
Driving systems
Driving and parking
background
For technical reasons, the ball coupling B of
the trailer tow hitch on the multimedia system
display is either only partially visible or not visi-
ble at all.
X
Select symbol ? using the controller.
The "Coupling up a trailer" function is selec-
ted. The distance specifications now only
apply to objects that are at the same level as
the ball coupling.
X
Reverse carefully, making sure that trailer
drawbar locating aid A points approximately
in the direction of the trailer drawbar.
X
Reverse carefully until the trailer drawbar rea-
ches red guide line C.
The distance between the trailer drawbar and
red guide line C is now approximately 12 in
(0.30 m).
X
Couple up the trailer (Y page 204).
The lines are shown at the level of the trailer tow
hitch.
180° view
:
Symbol for the full screen setting with rear
view camera image
;
Your vehicle
=
Warning displays for Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC
i
180° view can also be selected as front
view.
Select this view when you are driving out of an
exit and the view of crossing traffic is restricted,
for example.
If you select the % symbol in the display and
confirm with the controller, the split-screen view
appears.
Exiting 360° camera display mode
X
Shift the transmission to position j.
or
X
Drive forwards at a speed greater than 6 mph
(10 km/h).
The 360° camera display is stopped.
The view that was active before the 360°
camera was displayed appears in the multi-
media system display. You can stop the 360°
camera from the split-screen view by select-
ing the % symbol on the display and con-
firming with the controller.
You cannot stop the 360° camera display if
transmission position k is selected.
ATTENTION ASSIST
General notes
ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,
monotonous journeys, such as on highways. It is
active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 124 mph
(200 km/h) speed range. If ATTENTION ASSIST
detects typical indicators of fatigue or increas-
ing lapses in concentration on the part of the
driver, it suggests taking a break.
Important safety notes
ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the driver. It
might not always recognize fatigue or increasing
inattentiveness in time or fail to recognize them
at all. The system is not a substitute for a well-
rested and attentive driver.
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is
restricted and warnings may be delayed or not
occur at all:
R
if the length of the journey is less than approx-
imately 30 minutes
R
if the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface
is uneven or if there are potholes
Driving systems
191
Driving and parking
Z
background
R
if there is a strong side wind
R
if you have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds or high rates of accel-
eration
R
if you are predominantly driving at a speed
below 37 mph (60 km/h) or above 124 mph
(200 km/h)
R
if you are driving with Active Steering Assist of
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC activated
R
if the time has been set incorrectly
R
in active driving situations, such as when you
change lanes or change your speed
The ATTENTION ASSIST tiredness assessment
is deleted and restarted when continuing the
journey, if:
R
you switch off the engine
R
you take off your seat belt and open the driv-
er's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to
take a break
Displaying the attention level
In the Assistance menu (Y page 220) of the on-
board computer, you can call up the current sta-
tus information.
X
Select the Assistance display for ATTENTION
ASSIST using the on-board computer
(Y page 219).
The following information appears:
R
The length of the journey since the last break.
R
the attention level determined by ATTENTION
ASSIST (Attention LevelAttention Level), displayed in a
bar display in five levels from high to low.
R
if ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate
the attention level and cannot issue a warn-
ing, the System SuspendedSystem Suspended message
appears. The bar display then changes the
display, e.g. if you are driving at a speed below
37 mph (60 km/h) or above 124 mph
(200 km/h).
Activating ATTENTION ASSIST
X
Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-
board computer (Y page 221).
The system determines the attention level of
the driver depending on the setting selected:
Selection Standard
Standard: the sensitivity with which
the system determines the attention level is set
to normal.
Selection SensitiveSensitive: the sensitivity is set
higher. The attention level detected by ATTEN-
TION ASSIST is adapted accordingly and the
driver is warned earlier.
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the
é symbol appears in the multifunction dis-
play in the Assistance display.
When ATTENTION ASSIST has been deactivated,
it is automatically reactivated after the engine
has been stopped. The sensitivity selected cor-
responds to the last selection activated (stand-
ard/sensitive).
Warning in the multifunction display
If fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration
are detected, a warning appears in the multi-
function display: ATTENTION ASSISTATTENTION ASSIST Take aTake a
Break!Break!.
In addition to the message shown in the multi-
function display, you will then hear a warning
tone.
X
If necessary, take a break.
X
Confirm the message by pressing the a
button on the steering wheel.
On long journeys, take regular breaks in good
time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you do
not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST con-
tinues to detect increasing lapses in concentra-
tion, you will be warned again after 15 minutes
at the earliest. This will only happen if ATTEN-
TION ASSIST still detects typical indicators of
fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration.
Vehicles with COMAND multimedia system:
if a warning appears in the multifunction display,
a service station search is performed in the mul-
timedia system. You can select a service station
and navigation to this service station will then
begin. This function can be activated and deac-
tivated in the COMAND multimedia system (see
the Digital Operator's Manual).
192
Driving systems
Driving and parking
background
Traffic Sign Assist
General notes
Traffic Sign Assist displays the maximum speed
permitted to the driver in the instrument cluster.
The data and general traffic regulations stored in
the navigation system are used to determine the
current speed limit.
Traffic Sign Assist is a map-based system, and
for this reason, traffic signs put up temporarily
(e.g. near roadworks) are not detected. There is
also no display for changing traffic signs.
Traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an
additional sign (e.g. in wet conditions) are also
shown.
The sign indicating the end of a restriction only
appears with the restriction in the instrument
cluster when:
R
The regulation must be observed with the
restriction, or
R
Traffic Sign Assist is unable to determine
whether the restriction applies
If Traffic Sign Assist is unable to determine a
maximum permitted speed from any of the avail-
able sources, no speed limit appears in the
instrument cluster either.
Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all coun-
tries. In this case, display : appears in the
assistance graphic (Y page 219).
Important safety notes
Traffic Sign Assist is only an aid and is not always
able to correctly display speed limits. Traffic
signs always have priority over the Traffic Sign
Assist display.
The system may be either functionally impaired
or temporarily unavailable if the information in
the digital street map of the navigation system is
incorrect or out of date.
Instrument cluster display
Displaying the assistance graphic
X
Call up the assistance graphic display func-
tion using the on-board computer
(Y page 219).
Detected traffic signs appear in the instru-
ment cluster.
Speed limit with unknown restriction
:
Maximum permitted speed
;
Maximum permitted speed for vehicles for
which the restriction in the additional sign is
relevant
=
Additional sign for unknown restriction
A maximum permitted speed of 80 mph
(80 km/h) and a speed limit of 60 mph
(60 km/h) with an unknown restriction apply.
The unit for the speed limit (km/h or mph)
depends on the country in which you are driving.
It is generally neither shown on the traffic sign
nor on the instrument cluster but must be taken
into account when observing the maximum per-
mitted speed.
Lane Tracking package
General notes
The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind
Spot Assist (Y page 193) and Lane Keeping
Assist (Y page 195).
Blind Spot Assist
General notes
Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas on either
side of the vehicle that are not visible to the
driver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sen-
Driving systems
193
Driving and parking
Z
background
sors. A warning lamp lights up in the exterior
mirrors and draws your attention to vehicles
detected in the monitored area. If you then
switch on the corresponding turn signal to
change lanes, you will also receive a visual warn-
ing and a warning tone.
Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Blind Spot Assist does not react to:
R
vehicles overtaken too closely on the side,
placing them in the blind spot area
R
vehicles which approach with a large speed
differential and overtake your vehicle
As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give
warnings in such situations. There is a risk of
an accident.
Always observe the traffic conditions care-
fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to
detect some vehicles and is no substitute for
attentive driving. Always ensure that there is
sufficient distance to the side for other road
users and obstacles.
i
USA only:
This device has been approved by the FCC as
a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor
is intended for use in an automotive radar
system only. Removing, tampering with, or
altering the device will void any warranties,
and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tam-
per with, alter, or use in any non-approved
way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user's authority to operate the
equipment.
Radar sensors
The radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist are inte-
grated into the rear bumper. Make sure that the
bumpers are free from dirt, ice or slush. The
sensors must not be covered, for example by
cycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a
severe impact or in the event of damage to the
bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Blind Spot Assist may no longer work properly.
Monitoring area
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
impaired if:
R
There is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
R
there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy
rain, snow or spray
R
there are narrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles or
bicycles
R
the road has very wide lanes
R
the road has narrow lanes
R
you are not driving in the middle of the lane
R
there are barriers or other road boundaries
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not
indicated.
At a distance of around 1.6 ft (0.5 m) ; from the
vehicle, Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up
to 10 ft (3 m) next to = and behind : your
vehicle, as shown in the picture.
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be
indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv-
ing in the middle of their lane. This may be the
case if the vehicles are driving on the inner side
of their lane.
Due to the nature of the system:
R
warnings may be issued in error when driving
close to crash barriers or similar solid lane
borders
R
warnings may be interrupted when driving
alongside long vehicles, e.g. trucks, for a pro-
longed time
194
Driving systems
Driving and parking
background
Warning lamp
:
Warning lamp
Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in
the monitoring range are then not indicated.
If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot
monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph
(30 km/h), warning lamp : on the correspond-
ing side lights up red. This warning is always
emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot
monitoring range from behind or from the side.
When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only
occurs if the difference in speed is less than
7 mph (12 km/h).
If you select the reverse gear, Blind Spot Assist
is not operational.
The brightness of the warning lamps is auto-
matically adapted to the brightness of the sur-
roundings.
Collision warning
If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range of
Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the corre-
sponding turn signal, a double warning tone
sounds. The red warning lamp flashes on the
relevant exterior mirror. If the turn signal
remains on, detected vehicles are indicated by
the flashing of the red warning lamp on the exte-
rior mirror. No further warning tone sounds.
Activating Blind Spot Assist
X
Make sure that Blind Spot Assist is activated
in the on-board computer (Y page 220).
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock.
The red warning lamps on the exterior mirrors
light up until the engine is started.
Display in the assistance graphic
When Blind Spot Assist is activated, gray radar
waves propagating backwards appear next to
the vehicle in the assistance display in the mul-
tifunction display (Y page 219). Above a speed
of 20 mph (30 km/h), the color of the radar
waves in the assistance graphic changes to
green :. Blind Spot Assist is then ready for use.
Towing a trailer
When you attach a trailer, make sure you have
correctly established the electrical connection.
This can be accomplished by checking the trailer
lighting. In this event, Blind Spot Assist is deac-
tivated. The BlindBlind SpotSpot AssistAssist NotNot Avail‐Avail‐
able When Towing a Trailer See Opera‐able When Towing a Trailer See Opera‐
tor's Manualtor's Manual message appears in the multi-
function display.
Lane Keeping Assist
General notes
Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of
your vehicle by means of multifunction cam-
era : which is attached behind the top of the
windshield. Lane Keeping Assist detects lane
markings on the road and can warn you before
you leave your lane unintentionally.
Driving systems
195
Driving and parking
Z
background
This function is available in the range between
40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/hand 200 km/h).
A warning may be given if a front wheel passes
over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of
intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for
up to 1.5 seconds.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly
detect lane markings.
In such cases, Lane Keeping Assist can:
R
give an unnecessary warning
R
not give a warning
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
situation and keep within the lane, especially
if Lane Keeping Assist alerts you.
G
WARNING
The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not
return the vehicle to the original lane. There is
a risk of an accident.
You should always steer, brake or accelerate
yourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keep-
ing Assist.
Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk
of an accident if you fail to adapt your driving
style nor override the laws of physics. Lane
Keeping Assist cannot take into account the
road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane Keep-
ing Assist is merely an aid. You are responsible
for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi-
cle speed, for braking in good time and for stay-
ing in your lane.
The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the vehi-
cle in the lane.
The system may be impaired or may not function
if:
R
there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient
illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain,
fog or heavy spray
R
there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the
sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if
the road surface is wet)
R
the windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or
covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin-
ity of the camera
R
there are no or several unclear lane markings
for one lane, e.g. roadworks
R
the lane markings are worn away, dark or cov-
ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
R
the distance to the vehicle in front is too short
and thus the lane markings cannot be detec-
ted
R
the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes
branch off, cross one another or merge
R
the road is narrow and winding
R
there are highly variable shade conditions on
the roadway
Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping
Assist
X
To activate: press button ;.
Indicator lamp : lights up. The Lane Keep‐
Lane Keep‐
inging AssistAssist OnOn message appears in the mul-
tifunction display. If all conditions have been
satisfied, there may be a warning.
If you drive at speeds above 40 mph
(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,
the lines in the assistance graphic are shown
in green (Y page 219). Lane Keeping Assist is
ready for use.
X
To deactivate: press button ;.
Indicator lamp : goes out. Lane Keeping
Assist is deactivated. The Lane KeepingLane Keeping
Assist OffAssist Off message appears in the multi-
function display.
Selecting Standard or Adaptive setting
X
In the DriveAssistDriveAssist menu on the on-board
computer, select the LaneLane KeepingKeeping AssistAssist
function (Y page 221).
X
Select Standard
Standard or AdaptiveAdaptive.
Standard
When Standard
Standard is selected, no warning vibra-
tion occurs if:
196
Driving systems
Driving and parking
background
R
you switch on the turn signals. In this event,
the warnings are suppressed for a certain
period of time.
R
a driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS,
BAS or ESP
®
.
Adaptive
When Adaptive
Adaptive is selected, no warning vibra-
tion occurs if:
R
you switch on the turn signals. In this event,
the warnings are suppressed for a certain
period of time.
R
a driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS,
BAS or ESP
®
.
R
you accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
R
you brake hard.
R
you steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an
obstacle or change lanes quickly.
R
you cut the corner on a sharp bend.
In order that you are warned only when neces-
sary and in good time if you cross the lane mark-
ing, the system detects certain conditions and
warns you accordingly.
The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
R
you approach the outer lane marking on a
bend
R
the road has very wide lanes, e.g. a freeway
R
the system detects solid lane markings
The warning vibration occurs later if:
R
the road has narrow lanes
R
you cut the corner on a bend
Driving Assistance Plus package
General notes
The Driving Assistance Plus Package consists of
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
(Y page 162), Active Blind Spot Assist
(Y page 197) and Active Lane Keeping Assist
(Y page 200).
Active Blind Spot Assist
General notes
Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas on
either side of the vehicle that are not visible to
the driver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sen-
sors. A warning lamp lights up in the exterior
mirrors and draws your attention to vehicles
detected in the monitored area. If you then
switch on the corresponding turn signal to
change lanes, you will also receive a visual warn-
ing and hear a warning tone. If a risk of lateral
collision is detected, corrective braking may
help you avoid a collision. Before a course-cor-
recting brake application, Active Blind Spot
Assist evaluates the space in the direction of
travel and at the sides of the vehicle. For this,
Active Blind Spot Assist uses the forward-facing
radar sensors.
Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a
speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
Important safety notes
Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and is not
a substitute for attentive driving.
G
WARNING
Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to:
R
vehicles overtaken too closely on the side,
placing them in the blind spot area
R
vehicles which approach with a large speed
differential and overtake your vehicle
As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei-
ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit-
uations. There is a risk of an accident.
Always observe the traffic conditions care-
fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
i
USA only: This device has been approved by
the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The
radar sensor is intended for use in an auto-
motive radar system only. Removal, tamper-
ing, or altering of the device will void any war-
ranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do
not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-
approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user's authority to operate the
equipment.
i
Canada only: This device complies with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Removal, tampering, or altering of the device
will void any warranties, and is not permitted.
Driving systems
197
Driving and parking
Z
background
Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-
approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user's authority to operate the
equipment.
Radar sensors
The Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are
integrated into the front and rear bumpers and
behind a cover in the radiator trim. Make sure
that the bumpers and the cover in the radiator
grill are free of dirt, ice or slush. The rear sensors
must not be covered, for example by cycle racks
or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact
or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have
the function of the radar sensors checked at a
qualified specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot
Assist may otherwise no longer work properly.
Monitoring area
G
WARNING
Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all
traffic situations and road users. There is a
risk of an accident.
Always make sure that there is sufficient dis-
tance on the side for other traffic or obstacles.
At a distance of approximately 1.6 ft (0.5 m) ;
from the vehicle, Active Blind Spot Assist mon-
itors the area up to 10 ft (3 m) next to = and
behind : your vehicle, as shown in the picture.
The detection of obstacles can be impaired in
the case of:
R
There is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
R
poor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or spray
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not
indicated.
Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrow
vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or
may only detect them too late.
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be
indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv-
ing in the middle of their lane. This may be the
case if there are vehicles at the inner edge of
your lane.
Due to the nature of the system:
R
warnings may be issued in error when driving
close to crash barriers or similar solid lane
borders
R
warnings may be interrupted when you are
driving alongside particularly long vehicles,
such as trucks, for a prolonged time.
Warning lamp
:
Warning lamp
Active Blind Spot Assist is not operational at
speeds below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not
indicated.
If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot
monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph
(30 km/h), warning lamp : on the correspond-
ing side lights up red. This warning is always
emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot
monitoring range from behind or from the side.
When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only
occurs if the difference in speed is less than
7 mph (12 km/h).
198
Driving systems
Driving and parking
background
If you select the reverse gear, Active Blind Spot
Assist is not operational.
The brightness of the warning lamps is auto-
matically adapted to the brightness of the sur-
roundings.
When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, gray
radar waves propagating backward appear next
to the vehicle in the assistance display in the
multifunction display. Above a speed of 20 mph
(30 km/h), the color of the radar waves in the
assistance display changes to green ;. Active
Blind Spot Assist is then ready for use.
Collision warning from visual warning and
warning tone
If you switch on the turn signal to change lanes
and a vehicle is detected in the side monitoring
range, you receive a visual warning and a warn-
ing tone as a collision warning. You will then
hear a double warning tone and red warning
lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on,
detected vehicles are indicated by the flashing
of red warning lamp :. No further warning tone
sounds.
Course-correcting brake application
If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a lat-
eral collision in the monitoring range, a course-
correcting brake application is carried out. This
is meant to assist you in avoiding a collision.
G
WARNING
A course-correcting brake application cannot
always prevent a collision. There is a risk of an
accident.
Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,
especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns
you or makes a course-correcting brake appli-
cation. Always maintain a safe distance at the
sides.
If a course-correcting brake application occurs,
red warning lamp : flashes in the exterior mir-
ror and a double warning tone sounds. In addi-
tion, a display underlining the danger of a side
collision appears in the multifunction display.
In very rare cases, the system may make an
inappropriate brake application. A course-cor-
recting brake application may be interrupted at
any time by countersteering slightly or acceler-
ating.
The course-correcting brake application is avail-
able in the speed range between 20 mph
(30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).
Either no braking application, or a course-cor-
recting brake application adapted to the driving
situation occurs if:
R
there are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash
barriers, located on both sides of your vehicle.
R
a vehicle approaches you too closely at the
side.
R
you have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds.
R
you clearly brake or accelerate.
R
a driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP
®
or PRE-SAFE
®
Brake.
R
ESP
®
is switched off
R
a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is
detected.
Switching on Active Blind Spot Assist
X
Make sure that Active Blind Spot Assist is
activated in the on-board computer
(Y page 220).
X
Switch on the ignition.
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light
up red for approximately 1.5 seconds.
Gray radar waves propagating backwards ;
appear next to the vehicle on the assistant
display on the multifunction display.
Above a speed of 20 mph (30 km/h), the color
of the radar waves on the assistant display
changes to green ;. Active Blind Spot Assist
is then ready for use.
Towing a trailer
When you attach a trailer, make sure you have
correctly established the electrical connection.
This can be accomplished by checking the trailer
lighting. Active Blind Spot Assist is then deacti-
vated. Radar waves ; next to the vehicle are
hidden in the assistance graphic. The Active
Active
Blind Spot Asst. Not Available WhenBlind Spot Asst. Not Available When
Driving systems
199
Driving and parking
Z
background
TowingTowing aa TrailerTrailer SeeSee Operator'sOperator's ManualManual
message appears in the multifunction display.
Active Lane Keeping Assist
General notes
Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in
front of your vehicle by means of multifunction
camera : at the top of the windshield. Various
different areas to the front, rear and side of your
vehicle are also monitored with the aid of the
radar sensor system. Active Lane Keeping
Assist detects lane markings on the road and
can warn you before you leave your lane unin-
tentionally. If you do not react to the warning, a
lane-correcting application of the brakes can
bring the vehicle back into the original lane.
This function is available in the range between
40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h).
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active Lane
Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an
accident nor override the laws of physics. Active
Lane Keeping Assist cannot take account of
road and weather conditions. It may not recog-
nize traffic situations. Active Lane Keeping
Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for the
distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle
speed, for braking in good time and for staying in
your lane.
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continuously
keep your vehicle in its lane.
G
WARNING
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot always
clearly detect lane markings.
In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assist
can:
R
give an unnecessary warning and then
make a course-correcting brake application
R
neither give a warning nor intervene
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
situation and keep within the lane, especially
if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Ter-
minate the intervention in a non-critical driv-
ing situation.
The system may be impaired or may not function
if:
R
there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient
illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain,
fog or heavy spray
R
there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the
sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if
the road surface is wet)
R
the windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or
covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin-
ity of the camera
R
the radar sensors in the front or rear bumpers
or the radiator trim are dirty, e.g. obscured by
snow
R
there are no or several unclear lane markings
for one lane, e.g. roadworks
R
the lane markings are worn away, dark or cov-
ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
R
the distance to the vehicle in front is too short
and thus the lane markings cannot be detec-
ted
R
the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes
branch off, cross one another or merge
R
the road is narrow and winding
R
there are highly variable shade conditions on
the roadway
If no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane and
broken lane markings are detected, no lane-cor-
recting brake application is made.
Warning vibration in the steering wheel
A warning may be given if a front wheel passes
over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of
intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for
up to 1.5 seconds.
200
Driving systems
Driving and parking
background
Lane-correcting brake application
If you leave your lane, under certain circumstan-
ces the vehicle will brake briefly on one side.
This is meant to assist you in bringing the vehicle
back to the original lane.
G
WARNING
A lane-correcting brake application cannot
always bring the vehicle back into the original
lane. There is a risk of an accident.
Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,
especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warns
you or makes a lane-correcting brake appli-
cation.
If a lane-correcting brake application occurs,
display : appears in the multifunction display.
The brake application also slightly reduces vehi-
cle speed.
A lane-correcting brake application can be made
after driving over a lane marking recognized as
being solid or broken. Before this, a warning
must be given by means of intermittent vibration
in the steering wheel. In addition, a lane with
lane markings on both sides must have been
detected.
In the case of a broken lane marking being
detected, a lane-correcting brake application
can only be made if a vehicle has been detected
in the adjacent lane. Oncoming vehicles, over-
taking vehicles and vehicles in adjacent lanes
can be detected.
A further lane-correcting brake application can
only occur after your vehicle has returned to the
original lane.
No lane-correcting brake application occurs if:
R
you clearly and actively steer, brake or accel-
erate
R
you cut the corner on a sharp bend
R
you have switched on the turn signal
R
a driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP
®
,
PRE-SAFE
®
Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist
R
you have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds or high rates of accel-
eration
R
ESP
®
is switched off
R
the transmission is not in position h
R
on vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the elec-
trical connection to the trailer has been cor-
rectly established
R
a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has
been detected and displayed.
R
an obstacle has been detected in the lane in
which you are driving
Active Lane Keeping Assist may not detect other
road users or traffic situations. An inappropriate
brake application may be interrupted at any time
if you:
R
steer slightly in the opposite direction
R
switch on the turn signal
R
you brake or accelerate significantly.
A lane-correcting brake application is interrup-
ted automatically if:
R
a driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP
®
,
PRE-SAFE
®
Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist
R
lane markings are no longer detected
Activating/deactivating Active Lane
Keeping Assist
X
To activate: press button ;.
Indicator lamp : lights up. The Lane Keep‐
Lane Keep‐
inging AssistAssist OnOn message appears in the mul-
tifunction display. If all conditions have been
satisfied, a warning or steering intervention
may be made.
If you drive at speeds above 40 mph
(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,
Driving systems
201
Driving and parking
Z
background
the lines on the assistance graphic display are
shown in green (Y page 219). Active Lane
Keeping Assist is ready for use.
X
To deactivate: press button ;.
Indicator lamp : goes out. The Active Lane
Keeping Assist is deactivated. The LaneLane
Keeping Assist OffKeeping Assist Off message appears in
the multifunction display.
Selecting Standard or Adaptive setting
X
In the DriveAssistDriveAssist menu on the on-board
computer, select the Active Lane Keep‐Active Lane Keep‐
ing Assisting Assist function (Y page 221).
X
Select setting StandardStandard or AdaptiveAdaptive.
When StandardStandard is selected, no warning vibra-
tion occurs if:
R
you switch on the turn signals. In this event,
the warnings are suppressed for a certain
period of time.
R
a driving safety system intervenes, such as
ABS, BAS or ESP
®
.
When Adaptive
Adaptive is selected, no warning vibra-
tion occurs if:
R
you switch on the turn signals. In this event,
the warnings are suppressed for a certain
period of time.
R
a driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
ABS, BAS or ESP
®
.
R
you accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
R
you brake hard.
R
you steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an
obstacle or change lanes quickly.
R
you cut the corner on a sharp bend.
To ensure that you are warned only when nec-
essary and in good time if you cross the lane
markings, the system detects certain conditions
and warns you accordingly.
The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
R
you approach the outer lane marking on a
bend
R
the road has very wide lanes, e.g. a freeway
R
the system detects solid lane markings
The warning vibration occurs later if:
R
the road has narrow lanes
R
you cut the corner on a bend
Towing a trailer
When you attach a trailer, make sure you have
correctly established the electrical connection.
This can be accomplished by checking the trailer
lighting.
Towing a trailer
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Installing an unsuitable ball coupling may
result in overloading of the trailer tow hitch
and the rear axle. This applies especially if the
ball coupling in question is longer or angled
differently. This could seriously impair the
driving characteristics and the trailer can
come loose. There is a risk of an accident.
You should only ever install a ball coupling
that has the permissible dimensions and that
is designed to meet your trailer-towing
requirements. Do not modify the ball coupling
or the trailer tow hitch.
You will find the values approved by the manu-
facturer on the vehicle identification plates and
those for the towing vehicle under "Technical
data" (Y page 364).
G
WARNING
When the vehicle/trailer combination begins
to lurch, you could lose control of it. The vehi-
cle/trailer combination could even rollover.
There is a risk of an accident.
On no account should you attempt to
straighten up the vehicle/trailer combination
by increasing the speed. Reduce vehicle
speed and do not countersteer. Apply the
brake as necessary.
!
If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,
changes to the engine cooling system may be
necessary, depending on the vehicle type.
If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,
observe the anchorage points on the chassis
frame.
The installation of a trailer tow hitch is only per-
missible if a towing weight is specified in your
vehicle documents. If this is not the case, then
the vehicle is not approved for the towing of a
trailer.
202
Towing a trailer
Driving and parking
background
For more information, please contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
Please observe the manufacturer's operating
instructions for the trailer coupling if a detach-
able trailer coupling is used.
Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. If you
do not couple the trailer to the towing vehicle
correctly, the trailer could become detached.
Make sure that the following values are not
exceeded:
R
the permissible trailer drawbar noseweight
R
the permissible trailer load
R
the permissible rear axle load of the towing
vehicle
R
the maximum permissible gross vehicle
weight of both the towing vehicle and the
trailer
The applicable permissible values, which must
not be exceeded, can be found:
R
in the vehicle documents
R
on the type plate for the trailer
R
on the vehicle identification plate
If the values differ, the lowest value applies.
When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling
characteristics will be different in comparison
with when driving without a trailer.
The vehicle/trailer combination:
R
is heavier
R
is restricted in its acceleration and gradient-
climbing capability
R
has an increased braking distance
R
is affected more by strong crosswinds
R
demands more sensitive steering
R
has a larger turning circle
This could impair the handling characteristics.
When towing a trailer, always adjust your speed
to the current road and weather conditions. Do
not exceed the maximum permissible speed for
your vehicle/trailer combination.
Notes on towing a trailer
General notes
R
Do not exceed the maximum permissible
speed for vehicle/trailer combinations in the
relevant country.
This lowers the risk of an accident.
R
Only install an approved trailer coupling on
your vehicle.
Further information on availability and on
installation is available from any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
R
The bumpers of your vehicle are not suitable
for installing detachable trailer couplings.
R
Do not install hired trailer couplings or other
detachable trailer couplings on the bumpers
of your vehicle.
R
If you no longer need the ball coupling,
remove it from the ball coupling recess. This
will reduce the risk of damage to the ball cou-
pling.
When towing a trailer, set the tire pressure on
the rear axle of the towing vehicle for a maxi-
mum load; see the tire pressure table in the fuel
filler flap (Y page 348).
Please note that when towing a trailer, the fol-
lowing driving systems have limited availability
or are not available at all:
R
PARKTRONIC (Y page 179)
R
Blind Spot Assist (Y page 193)
R
Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 200)
On vehicles without level control, the height of
the ball coupling will alter according to the load
placed on the vehicle. If necessary, use a trailer
with a height-adjustable drawbar.
You will find permissible trailer loads under
"Technical data" (Y page 364).
Driving tips
Observe the information on ESP
®
trailer stabili-
zation (Y page 71) and on pulling away with a
trailer (Y page 135).
The maximum permissible speed for vehicle/
trailer combinations depends on the type of
trailer. Before beginning the journey, check the
trailer's documents to see what the maximum
permitted speed is. Observe the maximum per-
missible speed in the relevant country.
For certain Mercedes-Benz vehicles, the maxi-
mum permissible rear axle load is increased
when towing a trailer. See the "Technical data"
section to find out whether this applies to your
vehicle (Y page 365). In the event of increased
rear axle load, the vehicle/trailer combination
may not exceed a maximum speed of 60 mph
(100 km/h) for reasons concerning the operat-
ing permit. This also applies in countries in
Towing a trailer
203
Driving and parking
Z
background
which the maximum permissible speed for vehi-
cle/trailer combinations is above 60 mph
(100 km/h).
When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling
characteristics will be different in comparison to
when driving without a trailer and it will con-
sume more fuel.
Shift to a lower gear on long and steep downhill
gradients.
This also applies to:
R
activated DISTRONIC PLUS
R
activated cruise control
This will use the braking effect of the engine, so
that less braking will be required to maintain the
speed. This relieves the load on the brake sys-
tem and prevents the brakes from overheating
and wearing too quickly. If you need additional
braking, depress the brake pedal repeatedly
rather than continuously.
Driving tips
If the trailer swings from side to side:
X
Do not accelerate.
X
Do not counter-steer.
X
Brake if necessary.
R
Maintain a greater distance from the vehicle
in front than when driving without a trailer.
R
Avoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake gen-
tly at first to allow the trailer to run on. Then,
increase the braking force rapidly.
R
The values given for gradient-climbing capa-
bilities from a standstill refer to sea level.
When driving in mountainous areas, note that
the power output of the engine and, conse-
quently, the vehicle's gradient-climbing capa-
bility, decreases with increasing altitude.
Installing the ball coupling
G
WARNING
If the ball coupling is not correctly installed
and secured, it could come loose while driving
and endanger other road users. There is a risk
of an accident and injury.
Install and secure the ball coupling as descri-
bed in the ball coupling manufacturer's instal-
lation instructions. Make sure that the ball
coupling is correctly installed and secured
before every journey.
G
WARNING
If the ball coupling is not installed and secured
correctly the trailer may come loose. There is
a risk of an accident.
Install and secure the ball coupling as descri-
bed in the ball coupling installation instruc-
tions. Make sure that the ball coupling is
installed and secured correctly before every
journey.
X
Pull protective cap : in the direction of the
arrow, out of the ball coupling recess.
X
Stow protective cap : so that it cannot be
thrown around.
X
Observe the manufacturer's installation
instructions.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 278)
and the safety notes regarding stowage
spaces (Y page 278).
Coupling up a trailer
!
Do not connect the trailer's brake system (if
featured) to the hydraulic brake system of the
towing vehicle, as the latter is equipped with
an anti-lock brake system. Doing so will result
in a loss of function of the brake systems of
both the vehicle and the trailer.
X
Apply the vehicle's electric parking brake
manually.
X
Start the engine.
X
Shift the transmission to position j.
X
Vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL: select
the Comfort drive program.
204
Towing a trailer
Driving and parking
background
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Close the doors and tailgate.
X
Couple up the trailer.
X
Establish the electrical connection between
the vehicle and the trailer.
X
Check that the trailer lighting system is work-
ing.
X
Push the combination switch upwards/down-
wards and check whether the corresponding
turn signal on the trailer flashes.
A trailer that is connected is recognized only
when the electrical connection is established
correctly and when the lighting system is work-
ing properly. The function of other systems also
depends on this, for example:
R
ESP
®
R
PARKTRONIC
R
Active Parking Assist
R
Active Blind Spot Assist
R
Active Lane Keeping Assist
Vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL: if you couple
up a trailer, the vehicle always remains at high-
way level. Observe the following note when cou-
pling up a trailer:
R
Unless highway level has been set manually,
the vehicle is automatically lowered to high-
way level. If a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) has
been reached, this may be the case.
These restrictions apply to accessories that are
supplied with power via the trailer socket in your
vehicle, e.g. a rear bicycle rack.
Observe the maximum permissible trailer
dimensions (width and length).
Most U.S. states and all Canadian provinces
require by law:
R
Safety chains between the towing vehicle and
the trailer. The chains should be cross-wound
under the trailer drawbar. They must be fas-
tened to the vehicle's trailer coupling, not to
the bumper or the axle.
Leave enough play in the chains to make tight
cornering possible.
R
A separate brake system for certain types of
trailer.
R
Safety switch for braked trailers. Check the
specific legal requirements applicable to your
state.
If the trailer becomes detached from the tow-
ing vehicle, the safety feature applies the
trailer brakes.
Towing a trailer
There are several legal requirements for towing
a trailer, e.g. the maximum permissible speed.
Make sure that your car/trailer combination
complies with the local regulations:
R
in your place of residence
R
at your destination
The police and local authorities can provide reli-
able information.
To accumulate driving experience and accustom
yourself to the new handling characteristics,
practice the following at a location where there
is no traffic:
R
Cornering
R
Stopping
R
Backing up
Check the following before the journey:
R
Trailer tow hitch
R
Safety switch for braked trailers
R
Safety chains
R
Electrical connections
R
Lighting system
R
Wheels and tires
R
Load securing
Adjust the exterior mirrors so that you have a
clear view of the rear section of the trailer.
If the trailer is equipped with electronically con-
trolled brakes, pull away carefully in the car/
trailer combination. Brake manually using the
brake controller and check whether the brakes
function correctly.
Regularly check that the load is secure.
When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling
characteristics will be different in comparison
with when driving without a trailer.
The vehicle/trailer combination:
R
is heavier
R
is restricted in its acceleration and gradient-
climbing capability
R
has an increased braking distance
R
is affected more by strong crosswinds
R
demands more sensitive steering
R
has a larger turning circle
Avoid sudden steering movements.
Avoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake gently
at first to allow the trailer to run on. Then,
increase the braking force rapidly.
Towing a trailer
205
Driving and parking
Z
background
When overtaking, pay particular attention to the
extended length of your vehicle/trailer combi-
nation.
Due to the length of the vehicle/trailer combi-
nation, you require additional road space when
overtaking before you can change back to the
original lane.
If the automatic transmission repeatedly shifts
between gears on uphill or downhill gradients,
shift to a lower gear.
Driving in a lower gear and at a reduced speed
decreases the risk of engine damage.
If the coolant temperature increases signifi-
cantly when climate control is switched on,
switch climate control off.
Coolant heat can also be dissipated by opening
the windows and switching the ventilation
blower and the interior temperature to the high-
est level.
Decoupling a trailer
G
WARNING
If you uncouple a trailer with the overrun
brake engaged, you could trap your hand
between the vehicle and the trailer drawbar.
There is a risk of injury.
Do not uncouple a trailer if the overrun brake
is engaged.
G
WARNING
Vehicles with level control:
The vehicle is lowered as soon as you discon-
nect the trailer cable. This could result in your
limbs or those of other people that are
between the vehicle body and tires or under-
neath the vehicle being trapped. There is a
risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the immediate
vicinity of the wheel housings or under the
vehicle when you disconnect the trailer cable.
!
Do not disconnect a trailer with an engaged
overrun brake. Otherwise, your vehicle could
be damaged by the rebounding of the overrun
brake.
X
Apply the vehicle's parking brake manually.
X
Shift the transmission to position j.
X
Close all doors and the tailgate.
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Secure the vehicle and trailer against rolling
away.
X
Remove the trailer cable.
X
Remove the safety chains, if there are any.
X
Uncouple the trailer.
Removing the ball coupling
X
Observe the manufacturer's installation
instructions.
X
Press the protective cap into the ball coupling
recess.
X
Make sure that the protective cap is firmly in
place.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 278)
and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces
(Y page 278).
Information on cleaning and care of the trailer
tow hitch (Y page 310).
Trailer power supply
!
Accessories with a maximum power con-
sumption of 180 W can be connected to the
permanent power supply.
You must not charge a trailer battery using the
power supply.
The trailer socket of your vehicle is equipped at
the factory with a permanent power supply.
The permanent power supply is supplied via
trailer socket pin 4.
The trailer's permanent power supply is
switched off in the event of low vehicle supply
voltage and after six hours at the latest.
A qualified specialist workshop can provide
more information about installing the trailer
electrics.
Permissible trailer loads and trailer
drawbar noseweights
Weight specifications
The gross trailer weight is calculated as the
weight of the trailer plus the weight of the load
and the trailer's equipment.
206
Towing a trailer
Driving and parking
background
You will find permissible trailer loads under
"Technical data" (Y page 364).
Loading a trailer
R
When loading the trailer, make sure that nei-
ther the permissible gross trailer weight nor
the permissible gross vehicle weight are
exceeded. The permissible gross vehicle
weight is indicated on the identification plate
on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehi-
cle.
You can find the maximum permissible values
on the type plates of your vehicle and the
trailer. When calculating how much weight
the vehicle and trailer may carry, pay atten-
tion to the respective lowest values.
R
The trailer drawbar load on the ball coupling
must be added to the rear axle load to avoid
exceeding the permissible gross axle weight.
The permissible gross vehicle weight is indi-
cated on the identification plate on the B-pil-
lar on the driver's side of the vehicle.
Mercedes-Benz recommends a trailer load
where the trailer drawbar noseweight accounts
for 8% to 15% of the permissible gross trailer
weight.
Additional accessories, passengers and load
reduce the permissible trailer load and nose-
weight that your vehicle can tow.
Checking the vehicle and trailer weight
R
Have the towing vehicle, including the driver,
passengers and load, and completely loaded
trailer weighed on a suitable weighing
machine. This will allow you to ensure that the
weights of the towing vehicle and trailer com-
ply with the maximum permissible values.
R
Check the gross axle weight rating of the front
and rear axles, the gross weight of the trailer
and trailer drawbar load.
Towing a trailer
207
Driving and parking
Z
background
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
cle when driving, you may be distracted from
the traffic situation. You could also lose con-
trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
Only operate this equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
ment when the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the on-board computer.
G
WARNING
If the instrument cluster has failed or mal-
functioned, you may not recognize function
restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The
operating safety of your vehicle may be
impaired. There is a risk of an accident.
Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked
at a qualified specialist workshop immedi-
ately.
If the operating safety of your vehicle is
impaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to do so.
Contact a qualified specialist workshop.
The on-board computer only shows messages or
warnings from certain systems in the multifunc-
tion display. You should therefore make sure
your vehicle is operating safely at all times.
For an overview, see the instrument panel illus-
tration (Y page 36).
Displays and operation
Instrument cluster lighting
The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the dis-
plays and the controls in the vehicle interior can
be adjusted using brightness control knob :.
X
Turn brightness control knob : up or down.
If you turn the light switch (Y page 109) to the
T, Ã or L position, the brightness
will depend upon the brightness of the ambi-
ent light.
i
The light sensor in the instrument cluster
automatically controls the brightness of the
multifunction display.
In daylight, the displays in the instrument
cluster are illuminated. A dimming function is
not possible in daylight.
Speedometer with segments
The speedometer is divided into segments
depending on the equipment.
The segments in the speedometer indicate
which speed range is available.
R
Cruise control activated (Y page 160):
The segments light up from the stored speed
to the end of the scale.
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC activated
(Y page 164):
One or two segments in the set speed range
light up.
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC detects a
vehicle in front moving more slowly than the
stored speed:
The segments between the speed of the vehi-
cle in front and the stored speed light up.
208
Displays and operation
On-board computer and displays
background
Tachometer
!
Do not drive in the overrevving range, as this
could damage the engine.
The red band in the tachometer indicates the
engine's overrevving range.
The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the
engine when the red band is reached.
Outside temperature display
You should pay special attention to road condi-
tions when temperatures are around freezing
point.
Bear in mind that the outside temperature dis-
play indicates the temperature measured and
does not record the road temperature.
The outside temperature display is in the multi-
function display (Y page 210).
Changes in the outside temperature are dis-
played after a short delay.
Coolant temperature gage
G
WARNING
Opening the hood when the engine is over-
heated or when there is a fire in the engine
compartment could expose you to hot gases
or other service products. There is a risk of
injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
and contact the fire department.
!
If the coolant temperature is too high, a dis-
play message is shown.
If the coolant temperature display is in the
area marked in red, do not continue driving.
Otherwise, the engine will be damaged.
The coolant temperature gauge is in the lower
section of the tachometer (Y page 36).
Under normal operating conditions and at the
correct coolant level, the display may rise to the
red mark.
Operating the on-board computer
:
Multifunction display
;
Right control panel
=
Left control panel
X
To activate the on-board computer: switch
on the power supply.
You can control the multifunction display and
the settings in the on-board computer using the
buttons on the multifunction steering wheel.
Left control panel
ò
R
Opens a menu list
9
:
Press briefly:
R
Scrolls in lists
R
Selects a menu or function
R
In the RadioRadio or MediaMedia menu:
opens a track or station list and
selects a station, an audio track or
a video scene.
R
In the Telephone
Telephone menu: switches
to the phone book and selects a
name or a telephone number
9
:
Press and hold:
R
Scrolls quickly through all lists
R
In the RadioRadio or MediaMedia menu:
selects a station, audio track or
video scene using rapid scrolling
R
In the Telephone
Telephone menu: starts
rapid scrolling if the phone book is
open
Displays and operation
209
On-board computer and displays
Z
background
a
R
In all menus: confirms the selected
entry in the list
R
In the RadioRadio or MediaMedia menu:
opens the list of available radio
sources or media
R
In the TelephoneTelephone menu: switches
to the phone book and starts dial-
ing the selected number
ñ
R
Vehicles with multimedia system
Audio 20:
switches off voice-operated con-
trol for navigation (see the manu-
facturer's operating instructions)
R
Vehicles with multimedia system
COMAND:
switches off the Voice Control Sys-
tem (see the separate Operator's
Manual)
%
Press briefly:
R
Back
R
In the RadioRadio or MediaMedia menu: exits
the track or station list or list of
available radio sources or media
R
Hides display messages
R
Exits the phone book/redial mem-
ory
%
Press and hold:
R
Calls up the standard display in the
TripTrip menu
Right control panel
~
R
Rejects or ends a call
R
Exits the phone book/redial mem-
ory
6
R
Makes or accepts a call
R
Switches to the redial memory
W
X
R
Adjusts the volume
8
R
Mute
ó
R
Vehicles with multimedia system
Audio 20:
Switches on voice-operated con-
trol for navigation (see the manu-
facturer's operating instructions)
R
Vehicles with multimedia system
COMAND:
Switches on the Voice Control Sys-
tem (see the separate Operator's
Manual)
Multifunction display
:
Drive program (Y page 142)
;
Transmission position (Y page 143)
=
Additional speedometer
?
Display panel
A
Time
B
Outside temperature (Y page 209)
Display panel ? shows the selected menu or
submenu and display messages.
X
To open the menu list: press ò on the
steering wheel.
Display panel ? appears in the menu list.
Possible displays in the multifunction dis-
play:
R
Z Gearshift recommendation, when shifting
manually (Y page 149)
R
j Active Parking Assist (Y page 175)
R
¯ Cruise control (Y page 160)
210
Displays and operation
On-board computer and displays
background
R
a Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Active Steering Assist (Y page 168)
R
_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist
(Y page 111)
R
è ECO start/stop function (Y page 136)
R
ë HOLD function (Y page 170)
Head-up display
General notes
The head-up display projects information from
the navigation system and the driver assistance
system above the dashboard into the driver's
field of vision. The head-up display allows the
driver to see all of the information without hav-
ing to take their eyes off the road.
A requirement for the display of the contents is
that the following functions are available in the
vehicle and are switched on:
R
Cruise control
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
R
Traffic Sign Assist
R
Navigation
Important safety notes
The head-up display is only an aid and is not a
substitute for attentive driving.
Speed limits and overtaking restrictions are not
always correctly displayed. Traffic signs always
have priority over the Traffic Sign Assist display.
The visibility of the head-up display is influenced
by the following conditions:
R
the driver's seat position
R
the positioning of the display image
R
the general ambient light
R
sunglasses with polarization filters
R
wet roads
R
blocking of sunlight by objects on the display
cover
In the event of extreme sunlight, sections of the
display may fade. This can be reversed by
switching the head-up display off and on again.
i
Vehicles with the head-up display are equip-
ped with a special windshield. Should repairs
be necessary, have the windshield replaced at
a qualified specialist workshop.
Displays and operation
Switching the head-up display on/off
X
Press button :.
When the head-up display is switched on, the
display appears in the driver's field of vision.
Standard displays in the head-up display
:
Navigation messages
;
Current speed
=
Detected traffic signs
?
Cruise control or Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC set speed
Displays and operation
211
On-board computer and displays
Z
background
AMG displays in the head-up display
:
Protection against reaching the overrevving
range
;
RACE TIMER lap
=
RACE TIMER lap time
?
Current speed
A
Currently selected gear, gearshift options
when shifting manually
B
Current engine speed
Setting options
You can adjust the following settings in the
head-up display submenu:
R
adjust the position of the head-up display on
the windshield (Y page 222)
R
adjust the brightness of the displays in the
head-up display (Y page 222)
R
select desired displays in the head-up display
(Y page 221)
Using the Display Content
Display Content function, you
can, depending on your vehicle's equipment,
choose between four standard displays. The
selected contents then appear in the head-up
display.
In Mercedes-AMG vehicles, you can choose
between further AMG displays in addition to
the standard displays, depending on your
vehicle's equipment.
If you select a display with traffic signs, detec-
ted traffic signs from Traffic Sign Assist
appear in the head-up display.
Menus and submenus
Menu overview
Press the ò button on the steering wheel to
open the menu list.
Operating the on-board computer (Y page 209).
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can
select the following menu:
R
TripTrip menu (Y page 212)
R
NaviNavi menu (navigation instructions)
(Y page 214)
R
RadioRadio menu (Y page 216)
R
MediaMedia menu (Y page 216)
R
TelephoneTelephone menu (Y page 218)
R
Assistance GraphicAssistance Graphic menu (Y page 219)
R
ServiceService menu (Y page 219)
R
SettingsSettings menu (Y page 219)
R
AMGAMG menu in Mercedes-AMG vehicles
(Y page 223)
Trip menu
Standard display
X
Press and hold the % button on the steer-
ing wheel until the Trip
Trip menu with trip odom-
eter : and odometer ; appears.
212
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
background
Displaying the range and current fuel
consumption
:
Range of the fuel supply
;
Current fuel consumption
=
Recuperation display
X
Press the ò button on the steering wheel
to open the menu list.
X
Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to
select the TripTrip menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Press 9 or : to select the display.
Approximate range : that can be covered is
calculated according to your current driving
style and the amount of fuel in the tank. If
there is only a small amount of fuel left in the
fuel tank, a vehicle being refueled C
appears instead of approximate range :.
Recuperation display = shows you if energy
has been recuperated from the kinetic energy
in overrun mode and saved in the battery.
Recuperation display = depends on the
engine installed and is therefore not available
in all vehicles.
ECO display
X
Press ò on the steering wheel to open the
menu list.
X
Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to
select the Trip
Trip menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select ECO
display.
If the ignition remains switched off for longer
than four hours, the ECO display will be auto-
matically reset.
For further information on the ECO display, see
(Y page 156).
Trip computer "From Start" or "From
Reset"
:
Distance
;
Driving time
=
Average speed
?
Average fuel consumption
X
Press the ò button on the steering wheel
to open the menu list.
X
Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to
select the TripTrip menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Press : or 9 to select From StartFrom Start or
From ResetFrom Reset.
The values in the From StartFrom Start submenu are
calculated from the start of a journey, while
the values in the From ResetFrom Reset submenu are
calculated from the last time the submenu
was reset (Y page 214).
In the following cases, the trip computer is
automatically reset From StartFrom Start:
R
the ignition has been switched off for more
than four hours.
R
999 hours have been exceeded.
R
9,999 miles have been exceeded.
When 9,999 hours or 99,999 miles have been
exceeded, the trip computer is automatically
reset From ResetFrom Reset.
Digital speedometer
X
Press ò on the steering wheel to open the
menu list.
X
Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to
select the TripTrip menu.
Menus and submenus
213
On-board computer and displays
Z
background
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
digital speedometer.
Resetting values
X
Press the ò button on the steering wheel
to open the menu list.
X
Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to
select the TripTrip menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
function that you wish to reset.
X
Press a briefly.
X
Press : to select YesYes and press a to
confirm.
You can reset the values of the following func-
tions:
R
Trip odometer
R
"From Start" trip computer
R
"From Reset" trip computer
R
ECO display
If you reset the values in the ECO display, the
values in the "From Start" trip computer are
also reset. If you reset the values in the "From
Start" trip computer, the values in the ECO
display are also reset.
Navigation system menu
Displaying navigation instructions
In the NaviNavi menu, the multifunction display
shows navigation instructions. You can find fur-
ther information on navigation instructions in
the multimedia system in the Digital Operator's
Manual.
X
Switch on the multimedia system.
X
Press the ò button on the steering wheel
to open the menu list.
X
Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to
select the NaviNavi menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
Route guidance not active
:
Direction of travel
;
Current road
Route guidance active
No change of direction announced
:
Distance to the next destination
;
Estimated arrival time
=
Distance to the next change of direction
?
Current road
214
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
background
Change of direction announced with a
lane recommendation
:
Target of the change of direction
;
Distance to the change of direction
=
Change-of-direction symbol
?
Recommended lane and new lane during a
change of direction (white)
A
Possible lane
B
Lane not recommended (dark gray)
On multilane roads, new lane recommendations
can be displayed for the next change of direction
if the digital map supports this data. During the
change of direction, new lanes may be added.
Lane not recommended B: you will not be able
to complete the next change of direction if you
stay in this lane.
Possible lane A: you will only be able to com-
plete the next change of direction in this lane.
Recommended lane ?: in this lane you will be
able to complete the next change of direction
and the one after that.
Change of direction without lane recom-
mendation
:
Road into which the change of direction
leads
;
Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display
=
Change-of-direction symbol
When a change of direction is to be made, you
will see symbol = for the change of direction
and distance graphic ;. The distance indicator
shortens towards the top of the display as you
approach the point of the announced change of
direction. The change of direction starts once
the distance display reaches zero.
Change of direction with lane recommen-
dation
:
Road into which the change of direction
leads
;
Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display
=
Change-of-direction symbol
?
Lane recommendation
Menus and submenus
215
On-board computer and displays
Z
background
Other status indicators of the naviga-
tion system
:
Additional information
Other possible additional information:
R
New Route...New Route... or Calculating Route...Calculating Route...
A new route is calculated.
R
Road Not MappedRoad Not Mapped
The vehicle position is inside the area of the
digital map but the road is not recognized, e.g.
newly built streets, car parks or private land.
R
No RouteNo Route
No route could be calculated to the selected
destination.
R
Off MapOff Map
The map for the current vehicle position is not
available.
R
O
You have reached the destination or an inter-
mediate destination.
Radio menu
:
Waveband
;
Station frequency with memory position
=
Name of artist
?
Name of track
The multifunction display shows station ; with
station frequency or station name. The preset
position is only displayed along with station ; if
this has been stored. You can store radio sta-
tions in the multimedia system.
X
Switch on the multimedia system.
X
Press the ò button on the steering wheel
to open the menu list.
X
Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to
select the Radio
Radio menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
Currently set station ; appears in the multi-
function display.
X
To open the channel list: press the : or
9 button briefly.
X
To select a station in the station list: press
the : or 9 button briefly.
X
To select a station in the station list using
rapid scrolling: press and hold the : or
9 button.
X
To select the waveband or station mem-
ory: press a briefly.
X
Press : or 9 to select the waveband or
station memory.
X
Press a to confirm the selection.
i
SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a
normal radio.
Further information about radio operation can
be found in the multimedia system in the Dig-
ital Operator's Manual.
Media menu
Changing the media source
You can change the media source and playback
mode (audio or video) at any time in the Media
Media
menu.
X
Switch on the multimedia system.
X
Press the ò button on the steering wheel
to open the menu list.
X
Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to
select the MediaMedia menu.
216
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
background
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
To open the media sources list: press a
briefly.
The list shows the following media sources,
for example:
R
CD or DVD (DVD only in the COMAND mul-
timedia system)
R
SD card
R
Media Register (only in the COMAND mul-
timedia system)
R
USB storage device
R
Bluetooth
®
capable audio device
Please observe further information on media
support and media operation in the multimedia
system (see the Digital Operator's Manual).
Operating an audio player or audio
media
:
Media source, e.g. name of USB memory
stick
;
Current title
=
Name of artist
?
Name of album
A
Folder name
Audio data from various audio devices or media
can be played, depending on the equipment
installed in the vehicle.
X
Switch on the multimedia system.
X
Press the ò button on the steering wheel
to open the menu list.
X
Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to
select the Media
Media menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
To select an audio player or audio media:
press a briefly. The list containing the
media sources appears.
X
Press : or 9 to select the correspond-
ing audio player or media.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
To open the track list: press the : or
9 button briefly.
X
To select the next or previous track from
the track list: press the : or 9 button
briefly.
X
To select a track from the track list using
rapid scrolling: press and hold : or 9
until the desired track is reached.
If you press and hold the button, the speed of
rapid scroll increases after a short time. Not
all audio drives or data carriers support this
function.
If the corresponding track information is stored
on the audio player or media, the multifunction
display shows the following:
R
track number
R
the name of the track
R
the name of the artist
R
album
The track information does not appear in audio
AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external
audio source connected).
Video DVD operation
X
Switch on the multimedia system.
X
Press the ò button on the steering wheel
to open the menu list.
X
Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to
select the Media
Media menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
Menus and submenus
217
On-board computer and displays
Z
background
X
To select a DVD drive or DVD media: press
a briefly. The list containing the media
sources appears.
X
Press : or 9 to select the correspond-
ing DVD single drive or disc.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
To open the scene list: press the : or
9 button briefly.
X
To select the next or previous scene in the
scene list: press the : or 9 button
briefly.
X
To select a scene from the scene list using
rapid scrolling: press and hold : or 9
until desired scene : is reached.
X
Press a to confirm your selection.
Telephone menu
Introduction
G
WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
cle when driving, you may be distracted from
the traffic situation. You could also lose con-
trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
Only operate this equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
ment when the vehicle is stationary.
When telephoning, you must observe the legal
requirements for the country in which you are
currently driving.
X
Switch on the mobile phone (see the manu-
facturer’s operating instructions).
X
Switch on the multimedia system.
X
Establish a Bluetooth
®
connection to the mul-
timedia system (see the Digital Operator's
Manual).
X
Press the ò button on the steering wheel
to open the menu list.
X
Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to
select the TelephoneTelephone menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
You will see one of the following display mes-
sages in the multifunction display:
R
Phone READY
Phone READY or the name of the network
provider: the mobile phone has found a net-
work and is ready to receive.
R
Phone No ServicePhone No Service: there is no network
available or the mobile phone is searching for
a network.
Accepting a call
If someone calls you when you are in the Tele‐Tele‐
phonephone menu, a display message appears in the
multifunction display.
You can accept a call at any time regardless of
the menu selected.
X
Press the 6 button on the steering wheel
to accept an incoming call.
Rejecting or ending a call
X
Press the ~ button on the steering wheel
to reject or end a call.
Selecting an entry in the phone book
X
Press the ò button on the steering wheel
to open the menu list.
X
Press the : or 9 button on the steering
wheel to select the Telephone
Telephone menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Press the : or 9 or a button to
switch to the phone book.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
names one after the other.
or
X
To start rapid scrolling: press and hold :
or 9 for longer than one second.
The names are displayed quickly one after the
other in the phone book.
If you press and hold the : or 9 button
for longer than five seconds, the name with
the next or previous initial letter in the alpha-
bet appears.
Rapid scrolling stops when you release the
button or reach the end of the list.
X
If only one telephone number is stored for
a name: press the 6 or a button to
start dialing.
or
218
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
background
X
If there is more than one number for a
particular name: press the 6 or a
button to display the numbers.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
number you want to dial.
X
Press the 6 or a button to start dialing.
or
X
To exit the telephone book: press the ~
or % button briefly.
Redialing
The on-board computer saves the last names or
numbers dialed in the redial memory.
X
Press the ò button on the steering wheel
to open the menu list.
X
Press the : or 9 button on the steering
wheel to select the TelephoneTelephone menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Press the 6 button to switch to the redial
memory.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
desired name or number.
X
Press the 6 or a button to start dialing.
or
X
To exit the redial memory: press the ~
or % button briefly.
Assistance graphic menu
X
Press the ò button on the steering wheel
to open the menu list.
X
Press the : or 9 button on the steering
wheel to select the Assistance Graphic
Assistance Graphic
menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
The assistance graphic displays the status of
and information from the following driving
systems or driving safety systems:
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC dis-
tance display (Y page 166)
R
Traffic Sign Assist (Y page 193)
R
Distance warning function and autono-
mous brake function of Active Brake Assist
(Y page 66)
R
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-
tion (Y page 72)
R
Blind Spot Assist (Y page 193) or Active
Blind Spot Assist (Y page 197)
R
ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 192)
R
Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 195) or Active
Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 200)
X
Press : to display the ATTENTION ASSIST
assessment.
Service menu
Introduction
Depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle, you have the following options in the
ServiceService menu:
R
calling up display messages in message mem-
ory (Y page 227)
R
restarting the tire pressure loss warning sys-
tem (Canada only) (Y page 337).
R
checking the tire pressure electronically
(Y page 339).
R
calling up the service due date (Y page 304).
Settings menu
Introduction
Depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle, you have the following options in the
SettingsSettings menu:
R
Changing assistance settings (Y page 220).
R
Changing head-up display settings
(Y page 221).
R
Changing the light settings (Y page 222).
Menus and submenus
219
On-board computer and displays
Z
background
R
Changing the instrument cluster settings
(Y page 222).
R
Restoring the factory settings (Y page 223).
Assistance submenu
Traffic Sign Assist
You can activate or deactivate the warning func-
tion of Traffic Sign Assist in the TrafficTraffic SignSign
AssistAssist menu. When the function is activated,
detected traffic signs and information appear in
the multifunction display for five seconds.
X
Press ò on the steering wheel to open the
menu list.
X
Press the : or 9 button on the steering
wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Press : or 9 to select the DriveAs‐DriveAs‐
sistsist submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press : or 9 to select TrafficTraffic SignSign
AssistAssist.
X
Press a to confirm.
The current selection appears.
X
To activate or deactivate the warning
function: press a again.
Further information about Traffic Sign Assist
(Y page 193).
Activating/deactivating Active Brake
Assist
X
Press the ò button on the steering wheel
to open the menu list.
X
Press the : or 9 button on the steering
wheel to select the Settings
Settings menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Press : or 9 to select the DriveAs‐DriveAs‐
sistsist submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press 9 or : to select BrakeBrake AssistAssist.
X
Press a to confirm.
The current selection appears.
X
To activate/deactivate: press a again.
When Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the
æ symbol appears in the AssistanceAssistance
GraphicGraphic menu of the multifunction display.
Further information on Active Brake Assist
(Y page 66).
Activating/deactivating Active Brake
Assist with cross-traffic function
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is
only available in vehicles with the Driving Assis-
tance package.
X
Press the ò button on the steering wheel
to open the menu list.
X
Press the : or 9 button on the steering
wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Press : or 9 to select the DriveAs‐DriveAs‐
sistsist submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press : or 9 to select BrakeBrake AssistAssist.
X
Press a to confirm.
The current selection appears.
X
To activate/deactivate: press the a but-
ton again.
When Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic
function is deactivated, the æ symbol
appears in the AssistanceAssistance GraphicGraphic menu of
the multifunction display.
Further information about Active Brake Assist
with cross-traffic function (Y page 72).
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist
X
Press the ò button on the steering wheel
to open the menu list.
X
Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to
select the Settings
Settings menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Press : or 9 to select the DriveAs‐DriveAs‐
sistsist submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press : or 9 to select Blind SpotBlind Spot
AssistAssist.
X
Press a to confirm.
The current selection appears.
X
To activate/deactivate: press the a but-
ton again.
Further information about Blind Spot Assist
(Y page 193).
Further information about Active Blind Spot
Assist (Y page 197).
220
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
background
Setting ATTENTION ASSIST
X
Press the ò button on the steering wheel
to open the menu list.
X
Press the : or 9 button on the steering
wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Use : or 9 to select the DriveAssistDriveAssist
submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Select Attention AssistAttention Assist by pressing :
or 9.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press : or 9 to select OffOff, StandardStandard
or SensitiveSensitive.
X
Press the a button to confirm the selec-
tion.
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the
é symbol appears in the AssistanceAssistance
GraphicGraphic menu in the multifunction display.
For further information about ATTENTION
ASSIST, see (Y page 191).
Setting Lane Keeping Assist
X
Press the ò button on the steering wheel
to open the menu list.
X
Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to
select the SettingsSettings menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Press : or 9 to select the DriveAs‐DriveAs‐
sistsist submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press : or 9 to select LaneLane KeepingKeeping
AssistAssist.
X
Press a to confirm.
The current selection StandardStandard or AdaptiveAdaptive
appears.
X
To change the setting: press a again.
Further information about Lane Keeping Assist
(Y page 195).
Further information about Active Lane Keeping
Assist (Y page 200).
Head-up display submenu
Selecting other displays
:
Vehicle speed display
;
Vehicle speed and navigation instruction
display
=
Vehicle speed display and Traffic Sign Assist
Using the Display ContentDisplay Content function, you can
choose from up to four display options depend-
ing on the vehicle's equipment. The selected
contents appear in the head-up display.
In Mercedes-AMG vehicles, you can also choose
between two AMG displays. If you select an
AMG display, the head-up display shows AMG-
specific contents.
If you select a display with traffic signs, detected
traffic signs from Traffic Sign Assist appear in
the head-up display.
X
Press the ò button on the steering wheel
to open the menu list.
X
Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to
select the SettingsSettings menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Press : or 9 to select the Head-upHead-up
DisplayDisplay submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Select DisplayDisplay ContentContent by pressing : or
9.
X
Press a to confirm.
A graphic selection list appears.
X
Press : or 9 to select the desired dis-
play.
X
Press the a button to confirm the selec-
tion.
You can find more information on the navigation
displays in the multimedia system (see Digital
Operator's Manual).
Menus and submenus
221
On-board computer and displays
Z
background
Information on displays of Traffic Sign Assist
(Y page 193).
Setting the position
You can adjust the position of the head-up dis-
play on the windshield. You can compensate for
height differences if the seat positions are
changed, for example.
X
Switch on the head-up display (Y page 211).
X
Press the ò button on the steering wheel
to open the menu list.
X
Press the : or 9 button on the steering
wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Use : or 9 to select the Head-upHead-up
DisplayDisplay submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press : or 9 to select the PositionPosition
function.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
X
Press : or 9 to adjust the position to a
level from LevelLevel +5+5 (up) to LevelLevel -5-5 (down).
X
Press the a or % button to save the
setting.
Using the Memory function, you can save and
call up the set position of the head-up display as
a single memory preset (Y page 107).
Setting the brightness
The brightness of the head-up display is auto-
matically adjusted to the surrounding ambient
light. You can also individually adjust the bright-
ness of the head-up display.
X
Switch on the head-up display (Y page 211).
X
Press the ò button on the steering wheel
to open the menu list.
X
Press the : or 9 button on the steering
wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Use : or 9 to select the Head-upHead-up
DisplayDisplay submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press : or 9 to select the BrightnessBrightness
function.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
X
Press the : or 9 button to adjust the
brightness to a level from Level
Level +5+5 (bright) to
Level -5Level -5 (dark).
X
Press the a or % button to save the
setting.
Light submenu
Switching the daytime running lamps on/
off
This function is not available in Canada.
X
Press ò on the steering wheel to open the
menu list.
X
Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to
select the SettingsSettings menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Press : or 9 to select the LightsLights
submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Using : or 9, select the Daytime
Daytime
Running LightsRunning Lights function.
If the DaytimeDaytime RunningRunning LightsLights function has
been switched on, the multifunction display
shows the cone of light and the W symbol
in yellow.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
Further information on daytime running
lampsDaytimeDaytime RunningRunning LightsLights (Y page 109).
Instrument cluster submenu
Selecting the distance unit
The Display
Display UnitUnit Speed-/OdometerSpeed-/Odometer function
allows you to choose whether certain displays
appear in kilometers or miles in the multifunc-
tion display.
X
Press the ò button on the steering wheel
to open the menu list.
X
Press the : or 9 button on the steering
wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Press : or 9 to select the Instru‐Instru‐
ment Clusterment Cluster submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
222
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
background
X
Press : or 9 to select the DisplayDisplay
Unit Speed-/Odometer
Unit Speed-/Odometer function.
The current setting kmkm or MilesMiles appears.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
The selected unit of measurement for distance
applies to:
R
Digital speedometer in the TripTrip menu
R
Odometer and the trip odometer
R
Trip computer
R
Current consumption and the range
R
Navigation instructions in the NaviNavi menu
R
Cruise control
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC with Active
Steering Assist
R
ASSYST PLUS service interval display
Switching the additional speedometer
on/off
If the additional speedometer is switched on,
the speed is shown in the status bar in the mul-
tifunction display instead of the outside tem-
perature.
The speed display is inverse to the speedome-
ter.
X
Press the ò button on the steering wheel
to open the menu list.
X
Press the : or 9 button on the steering
wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Use : or 9 to select the InstrumentInstrument
ClusterCluster submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Using : or 9, select the AdditionalAdditional
Speedometer [km/h]Speedometer [km/h] function.
The current selection appears.
X
To activate/deactivate: press the a but-
ton again.
Restoring the factory settings
X
Press the ò button on the steering wheel
to open the menu list.
X
Press the : or 9 button on the steering
wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Use : or 9 to select the Factory
Factory
SettingsSettings submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
The Reset All Settings?
Reset All Settings? function
appears.
X
Press : or 9 to select NoNo or YesYes.
X
Press a to confirm the selection.
If you have selected YesYes, the multifunction
display shows a confirmation message.
For safety reasons, the Daytime RunningDaytime Running
LightsLights function in the LightsLights submenu is only
reset when the vehicle is stationary.
AMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Warm-up
:
Digital speedometer
;
Gear indicator
=
Charge-air pressure
?
Engine oil temperature
A
Transmission oil temperature
X
Press the ò button on the steering wheel
to open the menu list.
X
Press the : or 9 button on the steering
wheel to select the AMGAMG menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
Engine and transmission oil tempera-
tures: when the engine and transmission are
at normal operating temperature, oil temper-
atures ? and A are displayed in white in the
multifunction display.
If the multifunction display shows oil temper-
ature ? or A in blue, the engine or the
transmission are not yet at normal operating
temperature. Avoid driving at full engine out-
put during this time.
Menus and submenus
223
On-board computer and displays
Z
background
Traffic Sign Assist display
X
Switch on the display function for notes and
traffic signs (Y page 220).
X
Press the ò button on the steering wheel
to open the menu list.
X
Press the : or 9 button on the steering
wheel to select the AMGAMG menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
Traffic Sign Assist display appears.
G-Meter
While the vehicle is in motion, the G-Meter
shows the forces that are exerted on the driver
both laterally and in the direction of travel.
The maximum values are indicated in red in the
guideline system.
X
Press ò on the steering wheel to open the
menu list.
X
Press the : or 9 button on the steering
wheel to select the AMGAMG menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Press the 9 button repeatedly until the G-
Meter appears.
The maximum values of the G-Meter are
saved.
X
To reset the G-Meter: press a again.
X
Using : or 9 select Yes
Yes on the steer-
ing wheel.
X
Press a to confirm.
The maximum values of the G-Meter are
deleted.
If the ignition remains switched off for longer
than four hours, the G-Meter will be automati-
cally reset.
SETUP
Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 4MATIC+/
GLC 63 S 4MATIC+
(Example)
:
Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 4MATIC+: Drive
ComfortComfort/SportSport/Sport +Sport +
Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 S 4MATIC+: Drive
ComfortComfort/SportSport/Sport +Sport +/RaceRace
;
Suspension ComfortComfort/SportSport/Sport +Sport +
=
Transmission DD/MM
?
Exhaust system ComfortComfort/Sport +Sport +
A
ESP
®
OnOn/OffOff or SPORT handling mode
SportSport
SETUP shows the following functions and set-
tings:
R
the gear indicator
R
the digital speedometer
R
the drive system setting
R
the suspension mode
R
the transmission position
R
the exhaust flap position
R
the ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program) status
224
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
background
Mercedes-AMG GLC 43 4MATIC
(Example)
:
Drive EcoEco/ComfortComfort/SportSport/Sport +Sport +
;
Suspension ComfortComfort/SportSport/Sport +Sport +
=
Steering ComfortComfort/SportSport
?
ECO Start/Stop ActiveActive/InactiveInactive/OffOff
A
ESP
®
OnOn/OffOff or SPORT handling mode
SportSport
SETUP shows the following functions and set-
tings:
R
the gear indicator
R
the digital speedometer
R
the drive system setting
R
the suspension mode
R
the steering setting
R
the setting of the ECO start/stop function
R
the ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program) status
Select SETUP
X
Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the
list of menus.
X
Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to
select the AMG
AMG menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Press 9 repeatedly until SETUP appears.
RACE TIMER
Displaying and starting RACETIMER
:
Lap
;
RACETIMER
The RACETIMER is only intended for use on a
closed race circuit. Do not use the function on
public roads.
You can start the RACETIMER when the engine is
running or the ignition is switched on.
X
Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the
list of menus.
X
Press the : or 9 button on the steering
wheel to select the AMGAMG menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Press : or 9 repeatedly until the
RACETIMER appears.
X
To start: press the a button to start the
RACETIMER.
Starting a new lap
:
Lap
;
RACETIMER
=
Quickest lap time
Menus and submenus
225
On-board computer and displays
Z
background
X
Press the : or 9 button to select NewNew
Lap
Lap.
X
Press a to confirm.
A maximum of 32 laps may be stored.
Stopping the RACETIMER
X
Press : or 9 to select StopStop.
X
Press a to confirm.
Continuing the RACETIMER
X
Press : or 9 to select ContinueContinue.
X
Press a to confirm.
Resetting the RACETIMER
X
Press : or 9 to select StopStop.
The RACETIMER is stopped.
X
Press : or 9 to select Reset
Reset.
X
Press a to confirm.
All laps are deleted.
Lap statistics
:
Lap
;
Lap time
=
Average lap speed
?
Lap length
This function is only available if you have stored
at least two laps and have stopped the RACE-
TIMER.
X
Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the
list of menus.
X
Press the : or 9 button on the steering
wheel to select the AMGAMG menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select LapLap
ListList.
X
Press a to confirm.
The lap evaluation appears.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select a dif-
ferent lap evaluation.
The fastest lap is indicated by flashing sym-
bol :.
226
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
background
Display messages
Introduction
General notes
Display messages appear in the multifunction display.
Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manual
and may therefore differ from the multifunction display.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this
Operator's Manual.
With certain display messages, you will also hear a warning tone.
You can hide the display messages. The display messages are then stored in the message memory.
Rectify the cause of a display message as soon as possible.
When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:
R
HOLD function (Y page 170)
R
Parking (Y page 152)
Hiding display messages
X
Press the a or % button on the steering wheel.
The multifunction display hides the display message.
High-priority display messages are shown in red in the multifunction display. Some high-priority
display messages cannot be hidden.
The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages
have been remedied.
Message memory
The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call up
the display messages:
X
Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.
X
Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the ServiceService menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the message memory.
If there are no display messages, the No MessagesNo Messages display appears in the multifunction display.
When there are display messages, the number of stored messages appears.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to scroll through the display messages.
Display messages
227
On-board computer and displays
Z
background
Safety systems
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
!÷
Currently Unavaila‐Currently Unavaila‐
ble See Operator'sble See Operator's
ManualManual
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) and ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Pro-
gram) are temporarily not available.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-
tion.
In addition, the ÷ and ! warning lamps light up in the instru-
ment cluster.
For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake
hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Drive on carefully.
Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-
ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above
are available again.
If the multifunction display still shows the display message:
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
!÷
Inoperative SeeInoperative See
Operator's ManualOperator's Manual
ABS and ESP
®
are malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-
tion.
The $ (USA only) or J (Canada only), ÷ and ! warning
lamps in the instrument cluster may also light up.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake
hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
228
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
background
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
÷
Inoperative SeeInoperative See
Operator's ManualOperator's Manual
ESP
®
is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-
tion.
The ÷ warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
÷
Currently Unavaila‐Currently Unavaila‐
ble See Operator'sble See Operator's
ManualManual
ESP
®
is temporarily unavailable.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-
tion.
The ÷ warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake
hard, for example.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-
ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above
are available again.
If the multifunction display still shows the display message:
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Display messages
229
On-board computer and displays
Z
background
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
T !
÷
Inoperative SeeInoperative See
Operator's ManualOperator's Manual
EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS and ESP
®
are malfunc-
tioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-
tion.
In addition, the ÷ and ! warning lamps light up in the instru-
ment cluster and a warning tone sounds.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock
if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
F (USA
only) ! (Canada
only)
Turn On the Igni‐
Turn On the Igni‐
tiontion toto ReleaseRelease thethe
Parking BrakeParking Brake
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights
up.
You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the ignition
was switched off.
X
Switch on the ignition.
F (USA
only) ! (Canada
only)
PleasePlease ReleaseRelease Park‐Park‐
ing Brakeing Brake
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes
and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic release of the
electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 155).
You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.
X
Release the electric parking brake manually.
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes
and a warning tone sounds.
You are using the electric parking brake for emergency braking
(Y page 155).
F (USA
only) ! (Canada
only)
Parking Brake SeeParking Brake See
Operator's ManualOperator's Manual
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To apply:
X
Switch the ignition off.
X
Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds.
X
Shift the transmission to position j.
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
230
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
background
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The yellow ! warning lamp and the red F (USA only) or !
(Canada only) indicator lamp light up.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To release:
X
Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X
Release the electric parking brake manually.
or
X
Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 155).
If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:
X
Do not drive on.
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes
and the yellow ! warning lamp lights up.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To release:
X
Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X
Release the electric parking brake manually.
To apply:
X
Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X
Apply the electric parking brake manually.
If the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp con-
tinues to flash:
X
Do not drive on.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 351).
X
Shift the transmission to position j.
X
Turn the front wheels towards the curb.
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages
231
On-board computer and displays
Z
background
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only)
or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds
after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then
goes out or remains lit.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
X
Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X
Apply the electric parking brake.
If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake:
X
Shift the transmission to position j.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake manually:
X
Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 155).
If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or
release the electric parking brake, the red F (USA only) or !
(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to apply
the electric parking brake manually.
X
Shift the transmission to position j, as the electric parking brake
is not applied automatically.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake manually:
X
Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 155).
F (USA
only) ! (Canada
only)
Parking Brake Inop‐Parking Brake Inop‐
erativeerative
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only)
or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds
after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then
goes out or remains lit.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of over-
voltage or undervoltage.
X
Remove the cause of the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by
charging the battery or restarting the engine.
X
Apply or release the electric parking brake.
If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking brake:
X
Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X
Apply or release the electric parking brake.
If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied:
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
232
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
background
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up and the red F (USA only)
or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.
It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.
X
Shift the transmission to position j.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
$ (USA only)
J (Canada only)
Check Brake FluidCheck Brake Fluid
LevelLevel
There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
In addition, the $ (USA only) or J (Canada only) warning lamp
lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.
G
WARNING
The braking effect may be impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 152).
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X
Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.
#
CheckCheck BrakeBrake PadPad WearWear
The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.
USA only: the red $ brake system warning lamp is lit while the
engine is running.
G
WARNING
If the brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit, braking per-
formance may be impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
G
Inoperative
Inoperative
One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunctioning.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages
233
On-board computer and displays
Z
background
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
ActiveActive BrakeBrake AssistAssist
FunctionsFunctions CurrentlyCurrently
Limited See Opera‐Limited See Opera‐
tor's Manualtor's Manual
Active Brake Assist is temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
R
the radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-
tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or
other sources of electromagnetic radiation
R
the system is outside the operating temperature range
R
the on-board voltage is too low
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message
disappears.
Active Brake Assist is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 152).
X
Restart the engine.
ActiveActive BrakeBrake AssistAssist
Functions LimitedFunctions Limited
See Operator's Man‐See Operator's Man‐
ualual
Active Brake Assist is unavailable due to a malfunction. Adaptive
Brake Assist may also have failed.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
PRE-SAFE Inopera‐PRE-SAFE Inopera‐
tivetive SeeSee Operator'sOperator's
ManualManual
Important functions of PRE-SAFE
®
have failed. All other occupant
safety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
ActiveActive BrakeBrake AssistAssist
FunctionsFunctions CurrentlyCurrently
Limited See Opera‐Limited See Opera‐
tor's Manualtor's Manual
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is temporarily inopera-
tive.
Possible causes are:
R
function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow
R
the radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-
tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or
other sources of electromagnetic radiation
R
the system is outside the operating temperature range
R
the on-board voltage is too low
R
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: ESP
®
is deactivated
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message
disappears.
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 152).
X
Restart the engine.
X
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: switch ESP
®
on again (Y page 70).
234
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
background
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
ActiveActive BrakeBrake AssistAssist
Functions LimitedFunctions Limited
See Operator's Man‐See Operator's Man‐
ualual
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is unavailable due to a
malfunction.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
RadarRadar SensorsSensors DirtyDirty
See Operator's Man‐See Operator's Man‐
ualual
The radar sensor system is malfunctioning.
Possible causes are:
R
dirt on sensors
R
heavy rain or snow
R
when driving on inter-urban roads without traffic or infrastructure,
e.g. in desert-like areas
At least one driving system or driving safety system is malfunctioning
or is temporarily unavailable:
R
Active Brake Assist
R
Active Lane Keeping Assist
R
Active Blind Spot Assist
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC with Active Steering Assist
If the radar sensor system in front is dirty, Active Blind Spot Assist will
not perform a course-correcting brake application.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving and
drive safety systems will be available again. The display message dis-
appears.
If the display message does not disappear:
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 152).
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Clean all sensors (Y page 309).
X
Restart the engine.
The display message disappears.
6
SRSSRS MalfunctionMalfunction Ser‐Ser‐
vice Requiredvice Required
The restraint system is malfunctioning. The 6 warning lamp also
lights up in the instrument cluster.
G
WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Further information about the restraint system (Y page 43).
Display messages
235
On-board computer and displays
Z
background
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
6
Front Left Malfunc‐Front Left Malfunc‐
tion Servicetion Service
RequiredRequired or FrontFront
Right MalfunctionRight Malfunction
Service RequiredService Required
The restraint system is malfunctioning at the front on the left or right.
The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
G
WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
6
Rear Left Malfunc‐Rear Left Malfunc‐
tion Servicetion Service
RequiredRequired or RearRear
Right MalfunctionRight Malfunction
Service RequiredService Required
The rear left-hand or right-hand restraint system is malfunctioning.
The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
G
WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
6
RearRear CenterCenter Malfunc‐Malfunc‐
tion Servicetion Service
RequiredRequired
The rear center restraint system is malfunctioning. The 6 warning
lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
G
WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
6
Left Side CurtainLeft Side Curtain
Airbag MalfunctionAirbag Malfunction
Service RequiredService Required or
Right Side CurtainRight Side Curtain
Airbag MalfunctionAirbag Malfunction
Service RequiredService Required
The left-hand or right-hand window curtain air bag is malfunctioning.
The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
G
WARNING
The left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered unin-
tentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
236
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
background
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
FrontFront PassengerPassenger Air‐Air‐
bag Disabled Seebag Disabled See
Operator's ManualOperator's Manual
The front-passenger front air bag is deactivated during the journey,
even though:
R
an adult
or
R
a person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passenger seat
If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpret
the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.
G
WARNING
The front-passenger front air bag does not deploy during an accident.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 152).
X
Switch the ignition off.
X
Have the occupant on the front-passenger seat get out of the vehi-
cle.
X
Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X
Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center
console and the multifunction display and check the following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
R
a self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simulta-
neously for approximately six seconds.
R
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up
and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on,
OCS (Occupant Classification System) has disabled the front-
passenger front air bag (Y page 51)
R
the display messages Front Passenger Airbag EnabledFront Passenger Airbag Enabled
See Operator's ManualSee Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Dis‐Front Passenger Airbag Dis‐
abled See Operator's Manualabled See Operator's Manual must not appear in the multi-
function display
X
Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system
checks have been completed.
X
Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multi-
function display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occu-
pied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Further information about the Occupant Classification System
(Y page 51).
Display messages
237
On-board computer and displays
Z
background
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
FrontFront PassengerPassenger Air‐Air‐
bag Enabled Seebag Enabled See
Operator's ManualOperator's Manual
The front-passenger front air bag is activated during the journey, even
though:
R
a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system's
weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat
or
R
the front-passenger seat is unoccupied
The system may detect objects or forces applying additional weight on
the seat.
G
WARNING
The front-passenger front air bag may deploy unintentionally.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 152).
X
Switch the ignition off.
X
Open the front-passenger door.
X
Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-
passenger seat.
X
Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the
weight.
The system might otherwise detect the additional weight and inter-
pret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is.
X
Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X
Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center
console and the multifunction display and check the following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
R
a self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simulta-
neously for approximately six seconds.
R
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up
and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on,
OCS has disabled the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 51)
R
the display messages Front Passenger Airbag EnabledFront Passenger Airbag Enabled
See Operator's ManualSee Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Dis‐Front Passenger Airbag Dis‐
abled See Operator's Manualabled See Operator's Manual must not appear in the multi-
function display
X
Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system
checks have been completed.
X
Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multi-
function display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occu-
pied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
238
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
background
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Further information about the Occupant Classification System
(Y page 51).
Lights
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
b
CheckCheck LeftLeft LowLow BeamBeam
(Example)
The corresponding bulb is faulty.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
or
X
Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 114).
i
LED light sources: the display message for the corresponding
lamp only appears when all the LEDs in the lamp have failed.
b
Active HeadlampsActive Headlamps
InoperativeInoperative
The active light function is malfunctioning.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Malfunction SeeMalfunction See
Operator’s ManualOperator’s Manual
The exterior lighting is malfunctioning.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Vehicles with trailer tow hitch: a fuse may have blown.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 152).
X
Check the fuses (Y page 327).
X
If necessary, replace the blown fuse. Observe the warning notes.
If the display message remains on show:
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Automatic HeadlampAutomatic Headlamp
Mode InoperativeMode Inoperative
The light sensor is malfunctioning.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Switch Off LightsSwitch Off Lights
You leave the vehicle and the lights are switched on. A warning tone
also sounds.
X
Turn the light switch to the à position.
b
Switch On HeadlampsSwitch On Headlamps
You are driving with low-beam headlamps switched off.
X
Turn the light switch to the L or à position.
Display messages
239
On-board computer and displays
Z
background
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Adaptive HighbeamAdaptive Highbeam
Assist CurrentlyAssist Currently
Unavailable SeeUnavailable See
Operator's ManualOperator's Manual
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
R
the windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty
R
visibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog
X
Clean the windshield.
If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, the
AdaptiveAdaptive HighbeamHighbeam AssistAssist NowNow AvailableAvailable message is displayed.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.
Adaptive HighbeamAdaptive Highbeam
Assist InoperativeAssist Inoperative
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Engine
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
+
CheckCheck CoolantCoolant LevelLevel
See Operator's Man‐See Operator's Man‐
ualual
The coolant level is too low.
!
Avoid longer journeys when there is insufficient coolant in the
engine cooling system. You could otherwise damage the engine.
X
Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so
(Y page 303).
If you have to add coolant frequently:
X
Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine cooling
system checked.
?
The fan motor is faulty.
X
If the coolant temperature is below the red marking in the coolant
temperature gage, drive to the nearest qualified specialist work-
shop.
X
Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in moun-
tainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic.
240
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
background
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
?
Coolant Too HotCoolant Too Hot
Stop Vehicle TurnStop Vehicle Turn
Engine OffEngine Off
The coolant is too hot.
A warning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some
fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch
fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which
can occur just by opening the hood.
There is a risk of injury.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-
ing attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 152).
X
Wait until the engine has cooled down.
X
Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked,
e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X
Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out and
the coolant temperature gage is below the red marking. Otherwise,
the engine could be damaged.
X
Pay attention to the coolant temperature gage.
If the temperature increases again:
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant
level, the coolant temperature display may rise to the red marking.
#
See Operator's Man‐See Operator's Man‐
ualual
The battery is not being charged.
A warning tone also sounds.
Possible causes are:
R
a defective alternator
R
a torn poly-V-belt
R
a malfunction in the electronics
!
Do not drive any further. Otherwise the engine may overheat.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-
ing attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 152).
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages
241
On-board computer and displays
Z
background
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
Stop Vehicle SeeStop Vehicle See
Operator's ManualOperator's Manual
The battery is no longer being charged and the condition of charge is
too low.
A warning tone also sounds.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-
ing attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 152).
X
Observe the instructions in the # See Operator's ManualSee Operator's Manual
display message.
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Stop Vehicle LeaveStop Vehicle Leave
Engine RunningEngine Running
The battery condition of charge is too low.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X
Leave the engine running.
X
Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
#
Start Engine SeeStart Engine See
Operator's ManualOperator's Manual
The engine is switched off and the condition of charge is too low.
X
Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the
rear window defroster and interior lighting.
X
Leave the engine running for a few minutes or drive a long distance.
The battery is being charged.
4
CheckCheck EngineEngine OilOil AtAt
Next RefuelingNext Refueling
The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.
A warning tone also sounds.
!
Avoid longer journeys when there is insufficient engine oil. You
could otherwise damage the engine.
X
Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 301).
X
If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 301).
If you have to add engine oil frequently:
X
Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine
checked.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from a qualified
specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-
benz.com.
242
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
background
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
4
Check Engine OilCheck Engine Oil
LevelLevel (Add(Add 11 quart)quart)
(USA) Check EngineCheck Engine
Oil Level (Add 1Oil Level (Add 1
Liter)Liter) (Canada)
Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 vehicles:
The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.
!
Avoid longer journeys when there is insufficient engine oil. You
could otherwise damage the engine.
X
Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 301).
X
If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 301).
If you have to add engine oil frequently:
X
Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine
checked.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from a qualified
specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-
benz.com.
4
Engine Oil LevelEngine Oil Level
Low Stop VehicleLow Stop Vehicle
Turn Engine OffTurn Engine Off
Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 vehicles:
The engine oil level is too low. There is a risk of engine damage.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-
ing attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 152).
X
Check the engine oil level (Y page 301).
X
If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 301).
4
Engine Oil LevelEngine Oil Level
Cannot Be MeasuredCannot Be Measured
Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 vehicles: the measuring system is faulty.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
8
Fuel Level LowFuel Level Low
The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.
X
Refuel at the nearest gas station.
C
There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.
X
Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.
8
Gas Cap LooseGas Cap Loose
The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
X
Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:
X
Close the fuel filler cap.
If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages
243
On-board computer and displays
Z
background
Driving systems
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
À
ATTENTION ASSIST:ATTENTION ASSIST:
Take a Break!Take a Break!
Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or
a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone also
sounds.
X
If necessary, take a break.
During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get
enough rest.
À
ATTENTION ASSISTATTENTION ASSIST
InoperativeInoperative
ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Á
Vehicle RisingVehicle Rising
The vehicle is rising to the level you have selected.
Á
Vehicle RisingVehicle Rising
Please WaitPlease Wait
The vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. A warning
tone also sounds.
X
Do not pull away.
The vehicle level is set when the display message disappears.
Á
Stop Vehicle Vehi‐Stop Vehicle Vehi‐
cle Too Lowcle Too Low
You have pulled away while the vehicle level is still too low.
AIR BODY CONTROL sets the vehicle to the selected level after a short
period.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the AMG sports suspension based on AIR
BODY CONTROL sets the vehicle to the selected level after a short
period.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 152).
X
Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
AIR BODY CONTROL is faulty. A warning tone also sounds.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the AMG sports suspension based on AIR
BODY CONTROL is faulty. A warning tone also sounds.
X
Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).
X
Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the front fender
or the tires could be damaged if the steering movement is too large.
X
Listen for scraping sounds.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and
traffic conditions, and set a higher vehicle level.
Depending on the malfunction, it may be possible to raise the vehi-
cle.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
244
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
background
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Á
Drive More SlowlyDrive More Slowly
You cannot change the vehicle level. Possible causes are:
R
You are driving too fast for the selected vehicle level
R
You are driving too fast with a trailer or the trailer-coupling socket is
being used, e.g. for a bicycle rack
X
Drive more slowly and then select the desired vehicle level again
(Y page 173).
X
Observe the notes on towing a trailer (Y page 203).
Á
Compressor Is Cool‐Compressor Is Cool‐
inging
You have selected a higher vehicle level. The compressor first needs
to cool down because of frequent level changes.
X
Drive in a manner appropriate for the current vehicle level.
X
Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance.
X
Allow the compressor to cool down.
When the compressor has cooled down, the display message dis-
appears. The vehicle then continues rising to the selected level.
à
MalfunctionMalfunction
AIR BODY CONTROL is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling char-
acteristics may be affected.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the AMG sports suspension based on AIR
BODY CONTROL is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling character-
istics may be affected.
X
Drive as appropriate for the current vehicle level, but do not exceed
50 mph (80 km/h).
X
Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
LaneLane KeepingKeeping AssistAssist
Currently Unavaila‐Currently Unavaila‐
ble See Operator'sble See Operator's
ManualManual or ActiveActive
LaneLane KeepingKeeping AssistAssist
Currently Unavaila‐Currently Unavaila‐
ble See Operator'sble See Operator's
ManualManual
Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and
temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
R
the windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty
R
visibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog
R
there have been no lane markings for an extended period
R
the lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or
snow
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message
disappears.
Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational
again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 152).
X
Clean the windshield.
Display messages
245
On-board computer and displays
Z
background
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
LaneLane KeepingKeeping AssistAssist
InoperativeInoperative or
ActiveActive LaneLane KeepingKeeping
Assist InoperativeAssist Inoperative
Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is faulty.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Blind Spot AssistBlind Spot Assist
Currently Unavaila‐Currently Unavaila‐
ble See Operator'sble See Operator's
ManualManual or ActiveActive
Blind Spot AssistBlind Spot Assist
Currently Unavaila‐Currently Unavaila‐
ble See Operator'sble See Operator's
ManualManual
Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
R
the radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature range
R
the radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-
tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or
other sources of electromagnetic radiation
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message
disappears.
Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 152).
X
Restart the engine.
Blind Spot AssistBlind Spot Assist
InoperativeInoperative or
Active Blind SpotActive Blind Spot
Assist InoperativeAssist Inoperative
Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is faulty.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Active ParkingActive Parking
Assist CanceledAssist Canceled
The driver's door is open.
X
Repeat the parking gap measurement and parking process with the
driver's door closed.
You touched the multifunction steering wheel while steering inter-
vention was active.
X
While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multifunc-
tion steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.
The vehicle has started to skid and ESP
®
has intervened.
X
Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 175).
Active ParkingActive Parking
Assist InoperativeAssist Inoperative
Active Parking Assist is malfunctioning or faulty.
X
Follow the instructions and helpful hints in the "Problems with
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC" section (Y page 182).
If the multifunction display still shows the display message:
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
246
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
background
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Active Parking Assist is unavailable or faulty.
X
Switch off the ignition and restart the engine.
If Active Parking Assist continues to be unavailable (the j symbol
does not appear on the multifunction display):
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Active ParkingActive Parking
Assist FinishedAssist Finished
The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.
The display message disappears automatically.
TrafficTraffic SignSign AssistAssist
Currently Unavaila‐Currently Unavaila‐
ble See Operator'sble See Operator's
ManualManual
Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
R
the windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty
R
visibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog
X
Clean the windshield.
If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the display
message disappears.
Traffic Sign Assist is operational again.
TrafficTraffic SignSign AssistAssist
InoperativeInoperative
Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ë
OffOff
The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding.
A warning tone also sounds.
X
Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 170).
The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmly
depressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled.
A warning tone also sounds.
X
Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function
(Y page 170).
Active DistanceActive Distance
Assist OffAssist Off
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC was deactivated (Y page 167).
If it was not deactivated by the driver, a warning tone also sounds.
Active DistanceActive Distance
AssistAssist NowNow AvailableAvailable
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again after having
been temporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC (Y page 164).
Display messages
247
On-board computer and displays
Z
background
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Active DistanceActive Distance
Assist CurrentlyAssist Currently
Unavailable SeeUnavailable See
Operator's ManualOperator's Manual
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily inoperative.
Active Steering Assist is also temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
R
the radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-
tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or
other sources of electromagnetic radiation
R
the system is outside the operating temperature range
R
the on-board voltage is too low
A warning tone also sounds.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message
disappears.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 152).
X
Restart the engine.
Active DistanceActive Distance
Assist InoperativeAssist Inoperative
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is defective.
The following may have also failed:
R
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
A warning tone also sounds.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Active DistanceActive Distance
Assist SuspendedAssist Suspended
You have depressed the accelerator pedal. Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC is no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle.
X
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
Active DistanceActive Distance
Assist - - - mphAssist - - - mph
A condition for activating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has not
been met.
X
Check the activation conditions for Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC (Y page 164).
248
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
background
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Active SteeringActive Steering
Assist CurrentlyAssist Currently
Unavailable SeeUnavailable See
Operator's ManualOperator's Manual
Active Steering Assist is temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
R
the windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty
R
visibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog
R
there have been no lane markings for an extended period
R
the lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or
snow
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message
disappears.
Active Steering Assist is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 152).
X
Clean the windshield.
Active SteeringActive Steering
Assist InoperativeAssist Inoperative
Active Steering Assist is faulty.
However, the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC functions are still
available.
A warning tone also sounds.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
CruiseCruise ControlControl Inop‐Inop‐
erativeerative
Cruise control is malfunctioning.
A warning tone also sounds.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Cruise ControlCruise Control
- - - mph- - - mph
R
A condition for activating cruise control has not been met.
You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for exam-
ple.
R
ESP
®
is deactivated The yellow ESP
®
OFF warning lamp is lit.
X
If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and store
the speed.
or
X
Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 160).
or
X
Reactivate ESP
®
(Y page 69).
or
X
Reactivate ESP
®
in Mercedes-AMG vehicles (Y page 70).
Cruise Control OffCruise Control Off
Cruise control has been deactivated.
If a warning tone also sounds, cruise control has deactivated auto-
matically (Y page 160).
Display messages
249
On-board computer and displays
Z
background
Tires
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
CheckCheck TireTire PressurePressure
SoonSoon
Canada only:
The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss
in pressure.
A warning tone also sounds.
Possible causes:
R
you have changed the positions of the wheels and tires or installed
new wheels and tires
R
the tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly
G
WARNING
Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:
R
they may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
R
they may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
R
the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be
greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 152).
X
Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat
tire (Y page 315).
X
Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pressure.
X
Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire pres-
sure is correct (Y page 337).
CheckCheck TireTire PressurePressure
Then Restart RunThen Restart Run
Flat IndicatorFlat Indicator
Canada only:
The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display message
and has not been restarted since.
X
Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.
X
Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 337).
Run Flat IndicatorRun Flat Indicator
InoperativeInoperative
Canada only:
The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
PleasePlease CorrectCorrect TireTire
PressurePressure
The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire
pressure difference between the wheels is too great.
X
Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 339).
X
If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
X
Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 339).
250
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
background
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Check TiresCheck Tires
The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The
wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.
A warning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:
R
they may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
R
they may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
R
the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be
greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 152).
X
Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat
tire (Y page 315).
X
Check the tire pressure (Y page 339).
X
If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
Warning Tire Mal‐Warning Tire Mal‐
functionfunction
The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel
position is shown in the multifunction display.
G
WARNING
Driving with a flat tire poses a risk of the following hazards:
R
a flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle
R
you could lose control of the vehicle
R
continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up
and possibly a fire
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 152).
X
Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat
tire (Y page 315).
TireTire Press.Press. MonitorMonitor
Currently Unavaila‐Currently Unavaila‐
bleble
Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, no
signals from the tire pressure sensors are detected. The tire pressure
monitor is temporarily malfunctioning.
X
Drive on.
The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the
problem has been resolved.
TirePress. Sen‐TirePress. Sen‐
sor(s) Missingsor(s) Missing
There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several tires.
The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the multifunction
display.
X
Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified special-
ist workshop.
Display messages
251
On-board computer and displays
Z
background
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Tire Pressure Moni‐Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor Inoperative Notor Inoperative No
Wheel SensorsWheel Sensors
The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor. The
tire pressure monitor is deactivated.
X
Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.
The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for
a few minutes.
TireTire Press.Press. MonitorMonitor
InoperativeInoperative
The tire pressure monitor is faulty.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Tires OverheatedTires Overheated
The tire temperature monitoring function is not available in all vehi-
cles.
At least one tire has overheated. Affected tires are shown in red. At
temperatures close to the limit value, the tires are shown in yellow.
X
Drive more slowly.
Tires OverheatedTires Overheated
Decrease SpeedDecrease Speed
The tire temperature monitoring function is not available in all vehi-
cles.
At least one tire has overheated.
G
WARNING
Overheated tires can burst, particularly at high speeds.
X
Drive more slowly so that the tires cool down.
Vehicle
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
ShiftShift toto 'P''P' oror 'N''N'
to Start Engineto Start Engine
You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in posi-
tion k or h.
X
Shift the transmission to position j or i .
Apply Brake toApply Brake to
Shift from 'P'Shift from 'P'
You have attempted to shift the transmission to position h, k or i
without depressing the brake pedal.
X
Depress the brake pedal.
ToTo DeselectDeselect PP oror N,N,
Depress Brake andDepress Brake and
Start EngineStart Engine
With the engine switched off, you have attempted to shift the trans-
mission out of position j or i into another transmission position.
X
Depress the brake pedal.
X
Start the engine.
To Engage Trans‐To Engage Trans‐
miss. Position Rmiss. Position R
First Depress theFirst Depress the
BrakeBrake
You have attempted to shift from position h to position k.
X
Depress the brake pedal.
X
Shift the transmission to position k.
252
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
background
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Driver's Door OpenDriver's Door Open
& Transmission Not& Transmission Not
in P Risk of Vehi‐in P Risk of Vehi‐
cle Rolling Awaycle Rolling Away
The driver's door is open or not fully closed and the transmission is in
position k, i or h.
A warning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
The vehicle may roll away.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Shift the transmission to position j.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 152).
X
Close the driver's door completely.
Only Shift to 'P'Only Shift to 'P'
whenwhen VehicleVehicle isis Sta‐Sta‐
tionarytionary
The vehicle is moving.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Shift the transmission to position j.
ServiceService RequiredRequired DoDo
Not Shift GearsNot Shift Gears
Visit DealerVisit Dealer
You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.
A warning tone also sounds.
If transmission position h is selected:
X
Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the trans-
mission from position h.
If transmission position k, i or j is selected:
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 152).
X
Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
ReversingReversing NotNot Possi‐Possi‐
bleble ServiceService RequiredRequired
You cannot shift into transmission position k due to a malfunction.
The transmission positions j, i or h continue to be available.
A warning tone also sounds.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Transmission Mal‐Transmission Mal‐
function Stopfunction Stop
A malfunction has occurred in the mechanical transmission compo-
nents.
A warning tone also sounds. The transmission automatically shifts to
position i.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Shift the transmission to position j.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 152).
X
Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
Display messages
253
On-board computer and displays
Z
background
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Stop Vehicle LeaveStop Vehicle Leave
EngineEngine RunningRunning WaitWait
Transmission Cool‐Transmission Cool‐
inging
The transmission has overheated. Pulling away can be temporarily
impaired or not possible.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X
Leave the engine running.
X
Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
A
The tailgate is open
G
WARNING
When the engine is running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicle inte-
rior if the tailgate is open.
There is a risk of poisoning.
X
Close the tailgate.
?
The hood is open. A warning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 152).
X
Close the hood.
C
At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.
X
Close all the doors.
_
Rear Left BackrestRear Left Backrest
Not LatchedNot Latched or RearRear
Right Backrest NotRight Backrest Not
LatchedLatched
Vehicle with through-loading feature in the rear bench seat:
The backrest in the rear is not engaged on the left-hand and/or right-
hand side.
X
Push the backrest back until it engages.
_
Rear Center Back‐Rear Center Back‐
rest Not Engagedrest Not Engaged
Vehicle with through-loading facility in the rear compartment:
The center rear seat backrest is not engaged.
X
Push the backrest back until it engages.
254
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
background
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Ð
Power Steering Mal‐
Power Steering Mal‐
function See Opera‐function See Opera‐
tor's Manualtor's Manual
The power steering is malfunctioning.
A warning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
You will need to use more force to steer.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
If you are able to steer safely:
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
If you are unable to steer safely:
X
Do not drive on.
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Phone No ServicePhone No Service
Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver
range.
X
Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears
in the multifunction display.
¥
Check Washer FluidCheck Washer Fluid
The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below
the minimum.
X
Add washer fluid (Y page 303).
SmartKey
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Â
KeyKey DoesDoes NotNot BelongBelong
to Vehicleto Vehicle
You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.
X
Use the correct SmartKey.
Â
Take Your Key fromTake Your Key from
IgnitionIgnition
The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.
A warning tone sounds
X
Remove the SmartKey.
Â
Obtain a New Key
Obtain a New Key
The SmartKey needs to be replaced.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Â
Replace Key BatteryReplace Key Battery
The SmartKey battery is discharged.
X
Change the batteries (Y page 80).
Display messages
255
On-board computer and displays
Z
background
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Â
Don't Forget YourDon't Forget Your
KeyKey
The SmartKey is not in the ignition lock. You have opened the driver's
door with the engine switched off. A warning tone sounds
This display message is displayed for a maximum of 60 seconds and is
simply a reminder.
X
Take the SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.
Â
Key Not DetectedKey Not Detected
(white display message)
The SmartKey is currently undetected.
X
Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle.
If the SmartKey still cannot be detected:
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired
position.
Â
Key Not DetectedKey Not Detected
(red display message)
The SmartKey is not in the vehicle.
A warning tone also sounds.
If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle cen-
trally or start the engine.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 152).
X
Locate the SmartKey.
X
Press a on the steering wheel to confirm the display message.
Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, the
SmartKey is not detected whilst the engine is running.
A warning tone also sounds.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 152).
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and drive in SmartKey
mode.
Â
Remove 'Start' But‐Remove 'Start' But‐
ton and Insert Keyton and Insert Key
The SmartKey is continually undetected.
The SmartKey detection function has a temporary malfunction or is
faulty. A warning tone also sounds.
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired
position.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
General notes
Some systems carry out a self-diagnosis when the ignition is switched on. Therefore, some indicator
and warning lamps may light up or flash temporarily. This behavior is non-critical. These indicator
and warning lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up or flash after starting the engine or
whilst driving.
256
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
background
Safety
Seat belts
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
ü
N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for six sec-
onds.
The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their
seat belts.
X
Fasten your seat belt (Y page 47).
ü
N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addition, a
warning tone sounds for up to six seconds.
The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
X
Fasten your seat belt (Y page 47).
The warning tone ceases.
ü
N The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as the
driver's or the front-passenger door is closed.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
X
Fasten your seat belt (Y page 47).
The warning lamp goes out.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat.
X
Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure
place.
The warning lamp goes out.
ü
N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning
sounds.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicle is being
driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph
(25 km/h).
X
Fasten your seat belt (Y page 47).
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven faster
than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).
X
Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure
place.
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
257
On-board computer and displays
Z
background
Safety systems
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
$J
N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit
while the engine is running.
A warning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be
affected.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road
and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 152).
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
$J
N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp lights
up while the engine is running.
A warning tone also sounds.
There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
G
WARNING
The braking effect may be impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road
and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 152).
X
Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not correct the malfunction.
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
$
N USA only: the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The multifunction display also shows a display message with the # symbol.
The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
258
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
background
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
!
N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ABS (anti-lock braking system) is malfunctioning.
If there is an additional warning tone, the EBD (electronic brake force distribution)
is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed
above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam-
ple.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking
distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
If the ABS control unit is defective, there is also a possibility that other systems,
such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available.
$J
÷!
N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake warning lamp and the yellow
ESP
®
and ABS warning lamps are lit while the engine is running.
ABS and ESP
®
are malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed
above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam-
ple.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking
distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
259
On-board computer and displays
Z
background
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
÷
N The yellow ESP
®
warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.
ESP
®
or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding or at
least one wheel has started to spin.
Cruise control or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated.
X
When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary.
X
Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.
X
Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
X
Do not deactivate ESP
®
.
In exceptional cases, it may be better to deactivate ESP
®
:
R
when using snow chains
R
in deep snow
R
on sand or gravel
Observe the important safety notes on ESP
®
(Y page 68).
÷
N The yellow ESP
®
warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ESP
®
is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed
above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
260
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
background
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
å
N The yellow ESP
®
OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running or the ECO
start/stop function is activated.
ESP
®
is deactivated.
G
WARNING
If ESP
®
is switched off, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restricted, e.g. Active
Blind Spot Assist. The system does not perform braking actions.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Reactivate ESP
®
.
In exceptional cases, it may be better to deactivate ESP
®
:
R
when using snow chains
R
in deep snow
R
on sand or gravel
Observe the important safety notes on ESP
®
(Y page 68).
X
Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
If ESP
®
cannot be activated:
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have ESP
®
checked.
M
N Mercedes-AMG vehicles:
The yellow SPORT handling mode warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
SPORT handling mode is activated.
G
WARNING
When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Only activate SPORT handling mode in accordance with the conditions descri-
bed in the "Activating/deactivating ESP
®
" section (Y page 70).
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
261
On-board computer and displays
Z
background
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
F!
N F (USA only), ! (Canada only): the red indicator lamp for the electric
parking brake flashes or is lit and/or the yellow warning lamp for the electric
parking brake is lit.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
6
N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The restraint system is malfunctioning.
G
WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered uninten-
tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the restraint system checked.
Further information about the restraint system (Y page 43).
Engine
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
;
N The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
There may be a malfunction, for example:
R
in the engine management
R
in the fuel injection system
R
in the exhaust system
R
in the ignition system (for vehicles with gasoline engines)
R
in the fuel system
The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency
mode.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon
as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This is due to the legal require-
ments in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations
apply in the state in which you are currently driving.
X
Start the engine three to four times after refueling.
If the yellow Check Engine warning lamp goes out, emergency running mode is
canceled. The vehicle need not be checked.
8
N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.
X
Refuel at the nearest gas station.
262
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
background
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
8
N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.
In addition, the ; Check Engine warning lamp may light up.
The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
X
Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
X
If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler cap.
X
If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop.
?
N The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the
coolant temperature gage is at the start of the scale.
The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gage is malfunctioning.
The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of engine
damage if the coolant temperature is too high.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention
to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 152).
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
263
On-board computer and displays
Z
background
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
?
N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.
The coolant level is too low.
If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or
the electric engine radiator fan may be defective.
The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention
to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 152).
X
Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has
cooled down.
X
Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes
(Y page 303).
X
If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.
X
Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,
slush or ice.
X
Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature gage is below the red
marking. Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.
X
Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X
Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain
and stop-and-go traffic.
?
N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning
tone also sounds.
The coolant temperature gage has reached the red marking. The airflow to the
engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low.
G
WARNING
The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.
Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which
may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur
just by opening the hood.
There is a risk of injury.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention
to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 152).
X
Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has
cooled down.
X
Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes
(Y page 303).
X
If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.
X
Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,
slush or ice.
264
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
background
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
X
If the coolant temperature is below the red marking, drive to the nearest quali-
fied specialist workshop.
X
Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain
and stop-and-go traffic.
Driving systems
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
·
N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. A warning
tone also sounds.
You are approaching a vehicle, a pedestrian or a stationary obstacle in your line of
travel at too high a speed.
X
Be prepared to brake immediately.
X
Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take
evasive action.
Further information about Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
(Y page 72).
Further information on the distance warning function of Active Brake Assist
(Y page 66).
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
265
On-board computer and displays
Z
background
Tires
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
h
N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.
The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tires.
G
WARNING
Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:
R
they may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase
R
they may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire trac-
tion
R
the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly
impaired
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay
attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 152).
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X
Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire
(Y page 315).
X
Check the tire pressure (Y page 339).
X
If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
h
N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction)
flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit.
The tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.
G
WARNING
The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
266
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
background
Vehicle
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Ð
N The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The power steering is malfunctioning.
A warning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
You will need to use more force to steer.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
If you are able to steer safely:
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
If you are unable to steer safely:
X
Do not drive on.
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
267
On-board computer and displays
Z
background
General notes
The multimedia system section in this Opera-
tor's Manual describes the basic principles for
operation. More information can be found in the
Digital Operator's Manual.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
cle when driving, you may be distracted from
the traffic situation. You could also lose con-
trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
Only operate this equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
ment when the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
The multimedia system calculates the route to
the destination without taking the following into
account, for example:
R
traffic lights
R
stop and yield signs
R
parking or stopping restrictions
R
road narrowing
R
other road and traffic rules and regulations
The multimedia system may give incorrect nav-
igation recommendations if the actual street/
traffic situation does not correspond with the
digital map's data.
For example:
R
a diverted route
R
the road layout or the direction of a one-way
street has been changed
For this reason, you must always observe road
and traffic rules and regulations during your
journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations
always have priority over multimedia system
driving recommendations.
Navigation announcements are intended to
direct you while driving without diverting your
attention from the road and driving.
Please always use this feature instead of con-
sulting the map display for directions. Looking
at the icons or map display can distract you from
traffic conditions and driving, and increase the
risk of an accident.
This equipment complies with FCC radiation
exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equip-
ment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF)
Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65.
This equipment has very low levels of RF energy
that is deemed to comply without maximum
permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). How-
ever, it is recommended to install it at a distance
of at least 8 inches (approx. 20 cm) between the
radiation source and a person's body (not
including limbs such as hands, wrists, feet and
legs).
G
WARNING
Modifications to electronic components, their
software as well as wiring can impair their
function and/or the function of other net-
worked components. In particular, systems
relevant to safety could also be affected. As a
result, these may no longer function as inten-
ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of
the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an
accident and injury.
Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-
tronic components or their software. You
should have all work to electrical and elec-
tronic equipment carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Function restrictions
For safety reasons, some functions are restric-
ted or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion.
You will notice this, for example, because either
you will not be able to select certain menu items
or a message will appear to this effect.
268
Function restrictions
Multimedia system
background
Operating system
Overview
General notes
Wearing polarized sunglasses may impair your
ability to read the display.
The display has an automatic temperature-con-
trolled switch-off feature. The brightness is
automatically reduced if the temperature is too
high. The display may temporarily switch off
completely.
Cleaning instructions
!
Do not touch the display. The display has a
very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is a
risk of scratching. If you have to clean the
screen, however, use a mild cleaning agent
and a soft, lint-free cloth.
The display must be switched off and have
cooled down before you start cleaning. Do not
apply pressure to the display surface when
cleaning it, as this could cause irreversible dam-
age to the display.
Switching the multimedia system
on/off
X
Press the Ü button on the center console
to the right of the controller.
X
For Mercedes-AMG vehicles with a switch-
able AMG Performance exhaust system:
press the thumbwheel which is to the right of
the controller.
Adjusts the volume
X
Turn the thumbwheel to the right of the con-
troller.
The volume is adjusted:
R
for the currently selected media source
R
during traffic or navigation announcements
R
in hands-free mode during a phone call
Switching the sound on or off
This function is only available on the multifunc-
tion steering wheel for Mercedes-AMG vehicles
with a selectable AMG Performance exhaust
system.
X
Press the thumbwheel to the right of the con-
troller.
or
X
Press the 8 button on the multifunction
steering wheel.
If the audio output is switched off, the status
line will show the 8 symbol. If you switch
the media source or change the volume, the
sound is automatically switched on.
i
Navigation announcements will be heard
even if the sound is muted.
Functions
The multimedia system has the following func-
tions:
R
Radio mode
R
Media mode with media search
R
Sound system
R
Navigation system
COMAND: navigation via the hard drive
Audio 20: navigation via SD card
R
Communication functions
R
SIRIUS Weather (COMAND)
R
Vehicle functions with system settings
R
Favorites functions
Controller
The controller in the center console lets you:
R
select menu items on the display
R
enter characters
R
select a destination on the map
R
save entries
The controller can be:
R
turned 3
R
slid left or right 1
R
slid forwards or back 4
R
slid diagonally 2
R
pressed briefly or pressed and held 7
Back button
You can use the % button to exit a menu or to
call up the display of the current operating
mode.
Operating system
269
Multimedia system
Z
background
X
To exit the menu: briefly press the %
button.
The multimedia system changes to the next
higher menu level in the current operating
mode.
X
To call up the highest level menu: press the
% button for longer than two seconds.
Touchpad
Switching the touchpad on/off
Multimedia system:
X
Select VehicleVehicleQSystem Set‐System Set‐
tingstingsQTouchpadTouchpadQActivate Touch‐Activate Touch‐
pad
pad.
The touchpad is switched on O or off ª.
Operating the touchpad
:
Touch-sensitive surface
;
Favorites button
=
Calls up quick access for audio
?
Back button
Navigating in menus and lists can be done via
touch-sensitive surface : by swiping with
your finger.
X
To select the menu item: swipe up, down, to
the left or right.
X
Press the touchpad.
X
To move the digital map: swipe in all direc-
tions.
Swiping with two fingers, e.g. using this func-
tion:
X
To show or hide the audio menu: swipe up
or down with two fingers.
X
To increase or reduce the vehicle and
sound settings: turn two fingers to the right
or left.
X
To zoom in and out of the map: move two
fingers together or apart.
Character entry with handwriting rec-
ognition
Entering characters
X
Use one finger to write characters on the sur-
face.
The character is entered in the input line. If
the character that you have entered can be
interpreted in different ways, these character
suggestions are displayed.
X
If character suggestions are shown, turn and
press the controller.
X
Resume the character entry on the touchpad.
Handwriting recognition
Example: COMAND
:
Active input line
;
Inserts a space
=
Character entered on the touchpad
?
Deletes characters
X
To display the menu: press the touchpad.
270
Operating system
Multimedia system
background
Example: COMAND
:
To exit the menu
;
To return to handwriting recognition
=
To use the phone book or text templates
?
To select the input line or changes the posi-
tion of the cursor
A
To switch the language
B
To finish character entry
X
To select the input line: select p.
X
Swipe up or down.
X
To move the cursor within the input line:
select p.
X
Swipe to the left or right.
X
To delete characters: swipe to the left if an
input line is selected.
X
To confirm the entry: press the touchpad.
Switching the text reader function of the
handwriting recognition on/off
Multimedia system:
X
Select VehicleVehicleQSystem Set‐System Set‐
tingstingsQTouchpadTouchpadQRead Out Hand‐Read Out Hand‐
writing Recognitionwriting Recognition.
The read-aloud function is switched on O or
off ª.
Quick access for audio
Changing the station/music track
Depending on the audio source that is currently
activated, you can use this function to select the
next station or music track.
X
Swipe upwards with two fingers on the touch-
pad.
The current audio source is displayed.
X
To select the previous or next station/
music track: glide to the right or left.
The selected station/music track is played.
Switching the character entry between
touchpad and controller
Requirement: an input line for text, numbers or
characters has been selected.
X
To switch to the controller: press the con-
troller.
Character entry using the controller is active.
X
To switch to the touchpad: press the touch-
pad with your finger.
Handwriting recognition on the touchpad is
active.
Favorites
Calling up and exiting favorites
X
To call up: press the ß button on the con-
troller or on the touchpad.
X
Select a favorite, e.g. VehicleVehicle.
The favorites are displayed.
X
To exit: press the ß button again.
Operating system
271
Multimedia system
Z
background
Adding favorites
Adding predefined favorites
Example: favorites arranged in one row
:
Adds a new favorite
;
Renames a selected favorite
=
Moves a selected favorite
?
Deletes a selected favorite
X
Press the ß button.
The favorites are displayed.
These are arranged in either one or two rows,
each with five tiles.
X
Favorites are arranged in one row: slide
6 the controller.
The menu bar is shown.
X
Select ReassignReassign.
The categories are displayed.
X
Select a category.
The favorites are displayed.
X
Select a favorite.
X
Add a favorite at the desired position.
If a favorite has already been added at this
position, it will be overwritten.
X
Favorites are arranged in one row: slide
6 or 5 the controller.
X
To select WAddAdd: turn and press the con-
troller.
The categories and predefined favorites are
displayed.
X
Select a category.
The favorites are displayed.
X
Select a favorite.
X
Add a favorite at the desired position.
If a favorite has already been added at this
position, it will be overwritten.
Adding your own favorites
X
Select VehicleVehicleQClimate ControlClimate Control.
X
Press and hold the ß button until the
favorites are displayed.
X
Add a favorite at the desired position.
If a favorite has already been added at this
position, it will be overwritten.
Climate control settings
General notes
You can adjust the climate control settings
using the climate control bar or the climate con-
trol menu.
Important climate control functions can be set
in the climate control bar:
R
Temperature
R
Airflow
R
Air distribution
The climate control bar is visible in most dis-
plays.
You can find all available climate control func-
tions in the climate control menu. You can use
the climate control bar to switch to the climate
control menu.
Overview
Climate control bar (COMAND)
:
Adjusts temperature, air distribution on the
left and airflow, displays the current settings
;
Calls up the climate control menu, displays
the current cooling and climate mode set-
tings
=
Adjusts temperature and air distribution on
the right, displays the current settings
There may be fewer settings or none depending
on your vehicle's equipment.
272
Operating system
Multimedia system
background
Calling up the climate control bar
Multimedia system:
X
Select VehicleVehicle.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
Slide 6 the controller repeatedly until the
climate control bar is activated.
Calling up the climate control menu
Multimedia system:
X
Select VehicleVehicle.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
Slide 6 the controller repeatedly until the
climate control bar is activated.
X
To select from climate control bar ;: turn
and press the controller.
The menu for selecting the climate control
function is activated.
X
To select the climate control function: turn
and press the controller.
The selected climate control function
appears.
Settings in the climate menu
Adjusting the climate mode settings
The climate mode determines the type of air-
flow. The setting is active when the air-condi-
tioning system is set to à (Y page 123).
X
Call up the climate control menu
(Y page 273).
X
To select Climate ModeClimate Mode: turn and press the
controller.
X
To change the setting: turn the controller.
X
To exit the menu: press the % button.
The climate mode bar displays the current air-
flow setting: DIFFUSEDIFFUSE, MEDIUMMEDIUM or FOCUSFOCUS.
Starting/stopping the perfume atomizer
The perfume atomizer makes it possible to scent
the air in individual compartments in the vehicle
interior. Further information (Y page 127).
X
Call up the climate control menu
(Y page 273).
X
To select AirAir FreshenerFreshener: turn and press the
controller.
The setting element is active.
X
To start/stop the perfume atomizer: press
the controller.
X
To set the intensity: turn the controller when
the atomizer is switched on.
X
To exit the menu: press the % button.
Switching the ionization on/off
The ionization has a cleansing effect on the air in
the vehicle interior. Further information
(Y page 128).
X
Call up the climate control menu
(Y page 273).
X
To select Ionization
Ionization: turn and press the
controller.
The setting element is active.
X
To switch the ionization on or off: turn the
controller.
X
To exit the menu: press the % button.
Settings in the bottom bar of the cli-
mate control menu
Switching cooling with air dehumidifica-
tion on/off
X
Call up the climate control menu
(Y page 273).
X
Slide 6 the controller repeatedly until the
bottom bar is activated.
X
To select OO A/CA/C: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
Switch cooling with air dehumidification on
O or off ª.
i
The current status of the cooling function is
displayed in the climate control bar: A/C ON
– activated, A/C OFF – deactivated.
i
Deactivating the cooling with air dehumidi-
fication function reduces fuel consumption.
Synchronizing the climate control set-
tings
Use OO SyncSync (synchronization) to select the cli-
mate control setting for all zones together O or
separately ª.
X
Call up the climate control menu
(Y page 273).
X
Slide 6 the controller repeatedly until the
bottom bar is activated.
X
To select OO SyncSync: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Switch the synchronization function on O or
off ª.
Operating system
273
Multimedia system
Z
background
For further information on synchronizing climate
control settings, see (Y page 124).
Navigation mode
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
cle when driving, you may be distracted from
the traffic situation. You could also lose con-
trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
Only operate this equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
ment when the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the navigation system.
General notes
Among other things, correct functioning of the
navigation system depends on GPS reception. In
certain situations, GPS reception may be
impaired, there may be interference or there
may be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels or
parking garages.
The following descriptions apply to navigation
with COMAND. Further information can be
found in the Digital Operator's Manual.
Selecting a route type and route options
Multimedia system:
X
Select Navi
NaviQNavigationNavigation.
X
Select ZQRoute SettingsRoute Settings.
i
If route guidance is active, first slide 6 the
controller and show the menu.
X
Select a route type.
Notes for route types:
R
Eco RouteEco Route
Calculates an economic route.
R
Dynamic Traffic RouteDynamic Traffic Route (only available in
the USA)
Traffic reports on the route for the route guid-
ance are taken into account.
R
Calculate Alternative RoutesCalculate Alternative Routes
Different routes are being calculated. Instead
of StartStart, select the ContinueContinue menu item.
X
To avoid/use route options: select AvoidAvoid
OptionsOptions.
X
Select a route option.
Notes for route options:
R
Use Toll RoadsUse Toll Roads
The route calculation includes roads which
require you to pay a usage fee (toll).
R
Use Carpool LanesUse Carpool Lanes (only available in the
USA)
Prerequisite: your vehicle meets the access
conditions for carpool lanes.
Carpool lanes will be included if the carpool
lanes option is activated.
Entering an address
Multimedia system:
X
Select NaviNaviQNavigationNavigation.
X
Select DestinationDestinationQAddress EntryAddress Entry.
i
If route guidance is active, first slide 6 the
controller and show the menu.
Examples for entering an address are:
R
City or ZIP code, street, house number
R
Country, city or ZIP code
R
City or ZIP code, center
R
Street, city or ZIP code, intersection
X
Select CityCity.
The city in which the vehicle is currently loca-
ted (current vehicle position) is at the top.
Below this, you will see locations for which
route guidance has already been carried out.
X
Enter the city.
The G symbol: the location is contained on
the digital map multiple times.
X
To switch to the list: slide the 5 control-
ler.
X
Select the location.
If available, the ZIP code is shown. If there are
different ZIP codes available for the location,
the corresponding digits are displayed with an
XX.
X
Enter the street and house number.
The address is in the menu.
274
Operating system
Multimedia system
background
You can use additional options for entering
the destination:
R
Free destination search
The free destination search finds destinations
using fragments of words.
R
Select the last destination
R
Select a contact
R
Select a POI
You can search for a POI by location, name or
telephone number.
R
Select destination on the map
R
Enter intermediate destination
You can map the route to the destination
yourself with up to four intermediate destina-
tions.
R
Select destinations from Mercedes-Benz
Apps
R
Select geo-coordinates
Calculating the route
Prerequisite: the address has been entered and
is in the menu.
X
Select StartStart or ContinueContinue.
The route is calculated with the selected route
type and the selected route options.
If route guidance has already been activated,
a prompt will appear asking whether you wish
to end the current route guidance.
X
Select YesYes or Set as Intermediate Des‐Set as Intermediate Des‐
tinationtination.
YesYes cancels the current route guidance and
starts route calculation to the new destina-
tion.
Set as Intermediate DestinationSet as Intermediate Destination adds
the new destination in addition to the existing
destination and opens the intermediate des-
tinations list.
Connecting a mobile phone
Requirements
For telephony via the Bluetooth
®
interface, you
require at least one Bluetooth
®
-capable mobile
phone depending on use of one-telephone
mode or two-telephone mode. The mobile
phone must support Hands-Free Profile 1.0 or
above.
In two-telephone mode you can use all the
functions of the multimedia system with the
main telephone. With the additional tele-
phone, you can receive incoming calls.
Multimedia system:
X
Select Vehicle
VehicleQSystem Set‐System Set‐
tingstingsQActivate BluetoothActivate Bluetooth.
X
Activate Bluetooth
®
O.
Mobile phone:
X
Activate Bluetooth
®
and, if necessary, Blue-
tooth
®
visibility for other devices (see the
manufacturer's operating instructions).
The Bluetooth
®
device names for all of one man-
ufacturer's products might be identical. To
make it possible to clearly identify your mobile
phone, change the device name (see the man-
ufacturer's operating instructions).
If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone
Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message
Access Profile) Bluetooth
®
profiles, the follow-
ing information will be transmitted after you
connect:
R
Phone book
R
Call lists
R
Messages
i
Further information on suitable mobile
phones can be obtained on the Internet at:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/
connect
i
In the USA, you can get in touch with the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).
In Canada, you can get in touch with the Cus-
tomer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100.
Searching for and authorizing a mobile
phone
Before using your mobile phone with the multi-
media system for the first time, you will need to
search for the phone and then authorize (con-
nect) it. Depending on the mobile phone, author-
ization either takes place by means of Secure
Simple Pairing or by entering a passkey. The
multimedia system automatically makes the
procedure that is relevant for your mobile phone
available. The mobile phone is always connec-
ted automatically after authorization. Further
information on using a mobile phone with the
Operating system
275
Multimedia system
Z
background
multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's
Manual).
If the multimedia system does not detect your
mobile phone, this may be due to particular
security settings on your mobile phone (see the
manufacturer's operating instructions).
Only one mobile phone can be connected to the
multimedia system at any one time.
Searching for a mobile phone
COMAND:
X
Select PhonePhoneQConnect DeviceConnect DeviceQCon‐Con‐
nect Another Devicenect Another Device.
X
One-telephone mode: select Main PhoneMain Phone.
X
Two-telephone mode: select AdditionalAdditional
Phone (Incoming Calls Only)
Phone (Incoming Calls Only) when a
mobile phone is already connected.
X
Select Start SearchStart Search.
X
Select mobile phone.
Audio 20:
X
Select Tel/Tel/®QConn. DeviceConn. DeviceQCon‐Con‐
nect New Devicenect New DeviceQConnect via Vehi‐Connect via Vehi‐
clecle.
X
Select mobile phone.
X
One-telephone mode: select Connect asConnect as
New Main PhoneNew Main Phone.
X
Two-telephone mode: select Connect asConnect as
Additional Phone
Additional Phone.
Connecting a mobile phone
Authorization via Secure Simple Pairing
X
The code on the multimedia system and
mobile phone are the same: if applicable,
select Yes
Yes on the multimedia system.
X
Confirm code on the mobile phone. Depend-
ing on the mobile phone used, confirm the
connection to the multimedia system and for
the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth
®
profiles. The
prompt to confirm may take up to two
minutes to be displayed (see the manufactur-
er's operating instructions).
X
If the codes are different: select NoNo on the
multimedia system.
The process is canceled.
Repeat authorization.
Authorization via passkey entry (access code)
X
Choose a one to sixteen-digit number combi-
nation as a passkey.
X
Enter the passkey on the multimedia system.
X
Press ¬ to confirm.
X
Enter and confirm the passkey on the mobile
phone. Depending on the mobile phone used,
confirm the connection to the multimedia sys-
tem and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth
®
profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up
to two minutes to be displayed (see the man-
ufacturer's operating instructions).
Media mode
General notes
If you wish to play external media sources, the
appropriate media mode must already be turned
on. Further information on media mode (see the
Digital Operator's Manual).
The following external media sources can be
used:
R
Apple
®
devices (e.g. iPhone
®
)
R
USB devices (e.g. USB flash drive, MP3
player)
R
CD
R
DVD (COMAND)
R
SD cards
R
Via devices connected by Bluetooth
®
i
Information on the single DVD drive (see the
Digital Operator's Manual).
Activating media mode
Multimedia system:
X
Select MediaMediaQDevicesDevices.
The available media sources will be shown.
X
Select the media source.
Playable files are played.
Inserting and removing an SD card
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
SD cards are small parts. They can be swal-
lowed and cause choking. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Keep the SD card out of the reach of children.
If a SD card is swallowed, seek medical atten-
tion immediately.
276
Operating system
Multimedia system
background
!
If the SD card is no longer in use, you should
take it out and remove it from the vehicle.
High temperatures can damage the card.
Inserting an SD card
The SD card slot is located in the stowage com-
partment under the armrest.
X
Insert the SD card into the SD card slot until
the SD card engages. The side with the con-
tacts must face down.
X
Select the media source (Y page 276).
Removing an SD card
X
Press the SD card.
The SD card is ejected.
X
Remove the memory card.
Connecting USB devices
USB ports, e.g. when equipped with a navigation
system.
There are two USB ports in the stowage space
under the armrest.
X
Connect the USB device to the USB port.
X
Select the media source (Y page 276).
Operating system
277
Multimedia system
Z
background
Stowage areas
Loading guidelines
G
DANGER
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tail-
gate is open while the engine is running, espe-
cially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk
of poisoning.
Always switch off the engine before opening
the tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate
open.
G
WARNING
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip
over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle
occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-
larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-
den change in direction.
Always store objects so that they cannot be
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
loads against slipping or tipping before the
journey.
G
WARNING
The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can
become very hot. If you come into contact
with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn
yourself. There is a risk of injury.
Always be particularly careful around the
exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow
these components to cool down before touch-
ing them.
The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle
are dependent on the distribution of the load
within the vehicle. For this reason, you should
observe the following notes when transporting a
load:
R
Never exceed the maximum permissible
gross vehicle mass or the gross axle weight
rating for the vehicle (including occupants).
The values are specified on the vehicle iden-
tification plate on the B-pillar of the driver's
door.
R
The cargo compartment is the preferred place
to carry objects.
R
Position heavy loads as far forward as possi-
ble and as low down in the cargo compart-
ment as possible.
R
The load must not protrude above the upper
edge of the seat backrests.
R
Always place the load behind unoccupied
seats if possible.
R
Hook in the cargo net when loading.
R
Secure the load with sufficiently strong and
wear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edges for
protection.
Stowage spaces
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you transport objects in the vehicle interior
and these are not adequately secured, they
could slip or be flung around and thereby
strike vehicle occupants. In addition, cup
holders, open stowage spaces and mobile
phone brackets may not always be able to
hold the objects placed in them in the event of
an accident. There is a risk of injury, particu-
larly in the event of sharp braking or sudden
changes of direction.
R
Always stow objects in such a way that they
cannot be tossed about in these or similar
situations.
R
Always make sure that objects do not pro-
trude out of the stowage spaces, luggage
nets or stowage nets.
R
Ensure that closable stowage spaces are
shut before beginning your journey.
R
Always stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-
ted, sharp-edged, fragile or large objects in
the cargo compartment.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 278).
278
Stowage areas
Stowage and features
background
Stowage compartments in the front
Glove compartment
X
To open: pull handle : and open glove box
flap ;.
X
To close: fold glove box flap ; up until it
engages.
Objects in A4 format or an iPad
®
, for example,
can be stored in the glove box. For vehicles with
a perfume atomizer (Y page 127) the storage
space of the glove box is restricted.
The glove box can only be locked and unlocked
using the mechanical key (Y page 79).
X
To lock: insert the mechanical key into the
lock and turn it 90° clockwise to position 2.
X
To unlock: insert the mechanical key into the
lock and turn it 90° counter-clockwise to
position 1.
Eyeglasses compartment
X
To open: press marking :.
The eyeglasses compartment opens down.
Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment is
always closed while the vehicle is in motion.
Stowage compartment in the front center
console
X
Briefly press trim ; in the direction of the
arrow.
Cover : swings up.
Stowage compartment under the armrest
X
To open: press button : at front.
The stowage space opens.
Stowage areas
279
Stowage and features
Z
background
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the fol-
lowing may be in the stowage space:
R
an SD card slot
R
a multimedia connector unit with two USB
ports, e.g. for iPod
®
, iPhone
®
or MP3 player
(see the Digital Operator's Manual)
R
a mobile phone bracket
R
a small stowage space in the upper front sec-
tion
Stowage compartment in the doors
You can store items such as a rolled-up fluores-
cent jacket (driver's door) and the vehicle docu-
ment wallet (front-passenger door) in stowage
space : in the doors.
In doors ; you can store bottles with a capacity
of up to 34 fl. oz. (1.0 liter).
Stowage compartments in the rear
Stowage compartment in the rear armrest
!
Do not sit on or support your body weight on
the rear seat armrest when it is folded down,
as you could otherwise damage it.
!
Close the cover of the stowage compart-
ment before folding the rear seat armrest
back into the seat backrest.
X
To open: fold down the seat armrest.
X
Press on the front of release catch : and fold
the cover of the armrest upwards.
Additional stowage space
Depending on the equipment, the following
additional stowage areas are available in the
vehicle:
R
card and coin holder in the dashboard above
the light switch (not suitable for holding thin
objects such as shopping tokens)
R
the open stowage compartment in the center
console
R
stowage net in the front-passenger footwell
R
the map pockets on the back of the driver's
and front-passenger seat
R
parcel net on the left-hand side in the cargo
compartment
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 278)
and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces
(Y page 278).
Ski and snowboard bag
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
The skibag in conjunction with the lashing
straps cannot restrain any objects other than
skis.
Vehicle occupants could be struck in the fol-
lowing situations, for example, in the event of
sudden braking or an accident:
R
if you transport other heavy or sharp-edged
objects in the skibag
R
if you do not secure the skibag with the
lashing straps
There is a risk of injury.
Store only skis in the skibag. Always secure
the skibag with the lashing straps so that it
cannot move around.
A maximum of four pairs of skis or two snow-
boards can be transported in the ski and snow-
board bag.
280
Stowage areas
Stowage and features
background
Securing the ski/snowboard bag in the
cargo compartment
X
Fold the middle rear seat backrest forwards
(Y page 281).
X
Slide the ski and snowboard bag between the
two outer rear seat backrests. Ensure that the
wheels of the ski/snowboard bag are in the
cargo compartment.
X
Open the ski/snowboard bag with zip : and
place the skis or snowboards inside it.
X
Close the ski and snowboard bag.
X
Pull tensioning strap ; tight by the loose end
until the skis or snowboards are held firmly
inside the ski/snowboard bag.
X
Engage tensioning strap = in a diagonal pat-
tern on hooks ? in cargo tie-down rings A as
shown.
EASY-PACK Quickfold rear bench seat
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat
backrest are not engaged they could fold for-
wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the
event of an accident.
R
The vehicle occupant would thereby be
pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench
seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The
seat belt can no longer offer the intended
level of protection and could even cause
injuries.
R
Objects or loads in the trunk/cargo com-
partment cannot be restrained by the seat
backrest.
There is an increased risk of injury.
Before every trip, make sure that the seat
backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat
are engaged.
!
When folding the rear seat backrest for-
wards, ensure that there are no items lying on
the seat cushions. These items could other-
wise be damaged or could themselves dam-
age the rear seats.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 278).
The outer and the middle rear seat backrests
can be folded down separately to increase the
cargo compartment capacity. The division ratio
is 40/20/40.
Both outer seat backrests in the rear passenger
compartment are electrically unlocked with the
release button in the cargo compartment. The
corresponding rear seat backrests then fold
forward automatically.
Folding the rear seat backrest forwards
Preparation
X
Vehicles without memory function: if neces-
sary, move the driver's or front passenger
seat forward.
X
Vehicles with memory function: when one or
both parts of the rear seat backrest are folded
forward, the respective front seat moves
forward slightly, when necessary, in order to
avoid contact.
When the engine is running, the driver's seat
does not move forward.
X
Fully insert the rear seat backrest head
restraints.
Stowage areas
281
Stowage and features
Z
background
X
Hook seat belt buckle tongue : through seat
belt retainer ;.
Release handle in the cargo compartment
X
Pull left or right release handle :.
The corresponding backrest folds forward.
X
Move the driver's or front passenger seat
back if necessary.
Middle rear seat backrest
X
Pull release lever ; forward.
Rear seat backrest : is released.
X
Fold rear seat backrest : forward.
X
Move the driver's or front passenger seat
back if necessary.
Folding the rear seat backrest back
!
Make sure that the seat belt does not
become trapped when folding the rear seat
backrest back. Otherwise, it could be dam-
aged.
Left and right seat backrest:
X
Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
forward if necessary.
X
Fold rear seat backrest : back until it
engages.
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and
locked, this will be shown in the multifunction
display in the instrument cluster. A warning
tone also sounds.
X
Adjust the head restraints if necessary
(Y page 99).
X
Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
back if necessary.
Middle rear seat backrest:
X
Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
forward if necessary.
X
Fold seat backrest : back until it engages.
Red lock status indicator ; is no longer visi-
ble.
282
Stowage areas
Stowage and features
background
X
Adjust the head restraints if necessary
(Y page 99).
X
Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
back if necessary.
Locking the center rear seat backrest
In order to prevent the cargo compartment from
being accessed by unauthorized persons, the
center seat backrest can be locked using a
catch. The center seat backrest can only be fol-
ded forward together with the left seat backrest.
X
To lock: fold the left and center seat backr-
ests forward. Make sure that the center and
left seat backrests are engaged and joined
together.
X
Slide catch : upwards.
The release mechanism of the center seat
backrest is locked.
X
To unlock: fold the left and center seat backr-
ests forward.
X
Slide catch : downwards.
Securing loads
Cargo tie-down rings
Observe the following notes on securing loads:
R
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 278).
R
Secure the load using the cargo tie-down
rings.
R
Distribute the load on the cargo tie-down
rings evenly.
R
Do not use elastic straps or nets to secure a
load, as these are only intended as an anti-slip
protection for light loads.
R
Do not route tie-downs across sharp edges or
corners.
R
Pad sharp edges for protection.
:
Cargo tie-down rings in the cargo compart-
ment
Bag hook
G
WARNING
The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects
or items of luggage. Objects or items of lug-
gage could be flung around and thereby hit
vehicle occupants when braking or abruptly
changing directions. There is a risk of injury.
Only hang light objects on the bag hooks.
Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile
objects on the bag hooks.
!
The bag hook can bear a maximum load of
6.6lbs (3kg) and should not be used to secure
a load.
:
Bag hook
Stowage areas
283
Stowage and features
Z
background
Cargo compartment cover
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
On its own, the cargo compartment cover
cannot secure or restrain heavy objects,
items of luggage and heavy loads. You could
be hit by an unsecured load during sudden
changes in direction, braking or in the event of
an accident. There is an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
Always store objects so that they cannot be
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by
using tie downs, even if you are using the
cargo compartment cover.
!
When loading the vehicle, make sure that
you do not stack the load in the cargo com-
partment higher than the lower edge of the
side windows. Do not place heavy objects on
top of the cargo compartment cover.
The cargo compartment cover is secured behind
the rear bench seat backrest.
Extending and retracting the cargo
compartment cover
X
To extend: pull cargo compartment cover :
back and clip it into retainers ; on the left
and right.
X
To retract: unhook the cargo compartment
cover : from left-hand and right-hand retain-
ers ;.
You can vary the position of the rear of the cargo
compartment cover - parking position (horizon-
tal) or loading position (folded down).
X
Parking position: guide the grab handle =
forward and insert bracket ? beneath cargo
compartment cover : into guide A.
X
Loading position: guide the grab handle =
forward.
X
Fold rear part B of cargo compartment
cover : down and press it until you hear it
engage in position.
Installing/removing the cargo compart-
ment cover
X
To remove: make sure that cargo compart-
ment cover : is rolled up.
X
Push in the end cap of cargo compartment
cover : in the direction of the arrow on the
right-hand side using the grip =.
X
Push cargo compartment cover : into oppo-
site anchorage ;.
X
Remove cargo compartment cover : up.
X
To install: place cargo compartment
cover : into anchorage ; on the left-hand
side.
X
Push in the opposite end cap of cargo com-
partment cover : in the direction of the
284
Stowage areas
Stowage and features
background
arrow and insert the cargo compartment
cover : into the right-hand anchorage from
above ;.
If the cargo compartment cover is not being
used, it can be stored under the cargo compart-
ment floor.
Parcel net
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you transport objects in the vehicle interior
and these are not adequately secured, they
could slip or be flung around and thereby
strike vehicle occupants. In addition, cup
holders, open stowage spaces and mobile
phone brackets may not always be able to
hold the objects placed in them in the event of
an accident. There is a risk of injury, particu-
larly in the event of sharp braking or sudden
changes of direction.
R
Always stow objects in such a way that they
cannot be tossed about in these or similar
situations.
R
Always make sure that objects do not pro-
trude out of the stowage spaces, luggage
nets or stowage nets.
R
Ensure that closable stowage spaces are
shut before beginning your journey.
R
Always stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-
ted, sharp-edged, fragile or large objects in
the cargo compartment.
Observe the following notes:
R
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 278).
R
To avoid damaging the side trim panels in the
cargo compartment, maintain a sufficient dis-
tance from the side trim panels in the cargo
compartment when removing and inserting
the cargo compartment floor.
Installing the parcel net
X
Open the cargo compartment floor
(Y page 287) and fold forward.
X
Lift up cargo compartment floor : and pull it
up and out of the front guides.
X
Pull cargo compartment floor : back
slightly, tilt to the side and remove from the
cargo compartment.
X
Place cargo compartment floor : on a clean
surface as shown.
X
Stretch rubber band ? over the front part of
the cargo compartment floor. Position rubber
band ? directly under mountings =.
Tab ; must be facing up.
Stowage areas
285
Stowage and features
Z
background
X
Fold cargo compartment floor : together
and slide horizontally into the cargo compart-
ment as far as it will go.
X
Lift up cargo compartment floor : so that
mountings = engage audibly in guides B on
both sides.
X
Make sure that rubber band ? is below base
A.
X
Lower the cargo compartment floor and fold
out rear part C. Position rubber band E
below clasp D as shown.
X
Fold down rear part C of cargo compartment
floor : and press firmly into the lock.
Coat hooks on the tailgate
:
Coat hook
Cargo compartment plug-in module
(telescope bars)
General notes
The cargo compartment plug-in module allows
you to use your cargo compartment for a variety
of purposes.
The following accessory parts are located under
the cargo compartment floor:
R
a telescopic rod
R
two mounting elements
R
two brackets
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you drive when the cargo compartment floor
is open, objects could be flung around, thus
striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of
injury, particularly in the event of sudden
braking or a sudden change in direction.
Always close the cargo compartment floor
before a journey.
286
Stowage areas
Stowage and features
background
Installation
X
Open cargo compartment floor ;
(Y page 287).
X
Attach brackets : in the desired position on
the side of cargo compartment floor ;.
X
Close cargo compartment floor ;.
X
Turn mounting elements = to =.
X
Insert mounting elements = into brack-
ets :.
X
Pull telescopic rod ? apart.
X
Insert telescopic rod ? into mounting ele-
ments =.
X
Turn both mounting elements = to & until
you feel them engage.
Stowage well under the cargo com-
partment floor
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you drive when the cargo compartment floor
is open, objects could be flung around, thus
striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of
injury, particularly in the event of sudden
braking or a sudden change in direction.
Always close the cargo compartment floor
before a journey.
The following items are located beneath the
cargo compartment floor:
R
the folding box
R
tire-change tool kit
R
TIREFIT kit
R
the EASY-PACK load-securing kit
Opening/closing the cargo compart-
ment floor
X
To open: open the tailgate.
X
Press handle : on ribbing ; down.
Handle : folds up.
X
Pull handle : and fold the cargo compart-
ment floor forward.
X
Fold out hook ? on the underside of the
cargo compartment floor and attach it to head
restraint guide A.
Stowage areas
287
Stowage and features
Z
background
X
To close: unclip the hook ? from the head
restraint guide A.
X
Hold tab = and fold the cargo compartment
floor back.
X
Press the cargo compartment floor down until
it engages.
Locking/unlocking the cargo compart-
ment floor
1
Cargo compartment floor unlocked
2
Cargo compartment floor locked
The cargo compartment floor can be locked and
unlocked using the mechanical key.
Roof carrier
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
When you load the roof, the center of gravity
of the vehicle rises and the usual driving char-
acteristics, as well as steering and braking,
change. The vehicle tilts more severely when
cornering and may react more sluggishly to
steering input.
If you exceed the maximum roof load, the
driving characteristics, as well as the steering
and braking, will be greatly impaired. There is
a risk of an accident.
Adjust your driving style and never exceed the
maximum roof load.
You will find information on the maximum roof
load in the "Technical data" section
(Y page 363).
!
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only
use roof carriers that have been tested and
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. This
helps to avoid damage to the vehicle.
Position the load on the roof carrier in such a
way that the vehicle will not sustain damage
even when it is in motion.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure
that when the roof carrier is installed you can:
R
raise the sliding sunroof fully
R
open the tailgate fully
An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof load
may become detached from the vehicle. You
must therefore ensure that you observe the roof
carrier manufacturer's installation instructions.
Vehicles with panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel (Canada only): if a roof car-
rier is installed, the panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel cannot be opened. The pano-
rama roof with power tilt/sliding panel can still
be raised to allow ventilation of the vehicle inte-
rior. If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel makes contact with a roof carrier
approved by Mercedes-Benz, the sunroof will
lower slightly but remain raised at the rear.
Attaching the roof carrier
288
Stowage areas
Stowage and features
background
X
Carefully open covers : in the direction of
the arrow and fold upwards.
X
Only secure the roof carrier to the anchorage
points under covers :.
X
Observe the manufacturer's installation
instructions.
Features
Cup holder
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you transport objects in the vehicle interior
and these are not adequately secured, they
could slip or be flung around and thereby
strike vehicle occupants. In addition, cup
holders, open stowage spaces and mobile
phone brackets may not always be able to
hold the objects placed in them in the event of
an accident. There is a risk of injury, particu-
larly in the event of sharp braking or sudden
changes of direction.
R
Always stow objects in such a way that they
cannot be tossed about in these or similar
situations.
R
Always make sure that objects do not pro-
trude out of the stowage spaces, luggage
nets or stowage nets.
R
Ensure that closable stowage spaces are
shut before beginning your journey.
R
Always stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-
ted, sharp-edged, fragile or large objects in
the cargo compartment.
!
Only use the cup holders for containers of
the right size and which have lids. The drinks
could otherwise spill.
!
Do not expose drinks bottles in the cup
holder in the center console to continuous,
strong and direct sunlight. The passenger
compartment in the area of the center con-
sole can otherwise be damaged by the con-
centrated and reflected sunlight.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 278).
Cup holder in the front center console
X
To open: open the stowage compartment
(Y page 279).
X
To remove: slide catch = forward and pull
out cup holder ;.
X
To insert: insert cup holder ; and slide back
catch =.
X
To close: push cover : of the stowage com-
partment closed.
If you remove the cup holder insert, you can use
the resulting compartment for stowage.
You can remove the cup holder's rubber mat for
cleaning. Clean with clear, lukewarm water only.
Cup holder in the rear seat armrest
!
Do not sit on or support your body weight on
the rear seat armrest when it is folded down,
as you could otherwise damage it.
!
Close the cup holder before folding the rear
seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup holder
could be damaged.
X
Fold down the rear seat armrest.
X
To open: press the front of cup holder :
or ;.
Cup holder : or ; extends automatically.
Features
289
Stowage and features
Z
background
X
To fold out: place a container in the cup
holder.
The cup holder : or ; folds down automat-
ically.
X
To fold in: remove the container.
The cup holder : or ; folds in automati-
cally.
X
To close: slide cup holder : or ; back until
it engages.
Sun visors
Overview
G
WARNING
If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded
up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be
blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an
accident.
Always keep the mirror cover folded down
while driving.
:
Mirror light
;
Retainer
=
Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket
?
Vanity mirror
A
Mirror cover
Vanity mirror in the sun visor
Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor is
clipped into bracket ; and mirror cover A has
been folded up.
Glare from the side
X
Fold down the sun visor.
X
Pull sun visor : out of retainer ;.
X
Swing sun visor : to the side.
X
Slide sun visor : horizontally as required.
Rear side window roller sunblinds
!
Always guide the roller sunblind by hand. Do
not let it snap back suddenly as this would
damage the automatic roller mechanism.
!
Do not drive the vehicle with the roller sun-
blind hooked in and the side windows opened
simultaneously. The roller sunblind can jump
out of the retainers and spring back suddenly
when driving at high speeds, e.g. when driving
on the freeway. This could damage the inertia
reel. Therefore, either close the side window
or retract the roller sunblind before driving at
high speeds.
X
To extend: pull the roller sunblind out by
tab : and hook it onto retainers ; at the top
of the window.
290
Features
Stowage and features
background
Ashtray
Front ashtray
!
The stowage space under the ashtray is not
heat resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in
the ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is
properly engaged. Otherwise, the stowage
space could be damaged.
X
To open: open the stowage compartment
(Y page 279).
X
Push the cover of the ashtray upwards at its
right side =.
X
To remove the insert: hold the sides of
insert ?, push it forward and lift it up ; and
out.
X
To install the insert: press insert ? into the
holder until it engages.
X
To close: close the cover of the ashtray.
X
Push cover : of the stowage compartment
closed.
i
You can remove the ashtray insert and use
the resulting compartment for stowage.
Rear compartment ashtray
X
To open: pull cover ; out by its top edge.
X
To remove the insert: push ribbing = from
the left side and pull insert : upwards.
X
To install the insert: install insert : from
above into the holder and press down into the
holder until it engages.
Cigarette lighter
G
WARNING
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot
heating element or the socket of the cigarette
lighter.
In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:
R
the hot cigarette lighter falls
R
a child holds the hot cigarette lighter to
objects, for example
There is a risk of fire and injury.
Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.
Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is
out of reach of children. Never leave children
unsupervised in the vehicle.
Your attention must always be focused on the
traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighter
when road and traffic conditions permit.
Cigarette lighter (example)
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 131).
X
To open: open the stowage compartment
(Y page 279).
X
Press in cigarette lighter ;.
Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically
when the heating element is red-hot.
X
To close: push cover : of the stowage com-
partment closed.
Features
291
Stowage and features
Z
background
12 V sockets
General notes
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 131).
The sockets can be used for accessories with a
maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accessories
include such items as chargers for mobile
phones.
If you use the sockets for long periods when the
engine is switched off, the battery may dis-
charge.
An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-
board voltage does not drop too low. If the on-
board voltage is too low, the power to the sock-
ets is automatically cut. This ensures that there
is sufficient power to start the engine.
If you have connected a device to the 12 V
socket, leave the cover of the stowage com-
partment open. This prevents the cover from
being blocked.
Socket in the front center console
12 V socket (example)
X
To open: open the stowage compartment
(Y page 279).
X
Lift up the cover of socket ;.
X
To close: push cover : of the stowage com-
partment closed.
Socket in the rear compartment center
console
X
Pull cover ; out by its top edge.
X
Lift up the cover of socket :.
Socket in the cargo compartment
X
Lift up the cover of socket :.
115 V socket
Important safety notes
G
DANGER
When a suitable device is connected, the
115 V power socket will be carrying a high
voltage. You could receive an electric shock if
the connector cable or the 115 V power
socket is pulled out of the trim or is damaged
or wet. There is a risk of fatal injury.
R
Use only connector cables that are dry and
free of damage.
R
When the ignition is off, make sure that the
115 V power socket is dry.
292
Features
Stowage and features
background
R
Have the 115 V power socket checked or
replaced immediately at a qualified speci-
alized workshop if it is damaged or has been
pulled out of the trim.
R
Never plug the connector cable into a 115 V
power socket that is damaged or has been
pulled out of the trim.
G
DANGER
If you reach into the power socket or plug
inappropriate devices into the power socket,
you could receive an electric shock. There is a
risk of fatal injury.
Only connect appropriate devices to the
power socket.
!
Note that work and repairs on the 115 V
power socket should only be carried out by
qualified specialist personnel.
General notes
The 115 V power socket provides an alternating
voltage of 115 V so that small electronic devices
can be connected. These devices, such as
games consoles, chargers and laptops, must not
consume more than a maximum of 150 watts
altogether.
Requirements for operation of these devices:
R
the electronic device that you connect has a
suitable connector and conforms to stand-
ards specific to the country you are in.
R
the plug of the electronic device is plugged
correctly into 115 V power socket.
R
the maximum wattage of the device to be
connected must not exceed 150 watts.
R
the on-board power supply is within a permis-
sible voltage range.
R
the 12 V sockets in the rear compartment and
the cargo compartment are operational.
Using the 115 V power socket
X
To switch on: switch the ignition on.
X
Open flap =.
X
Insert the plug of the electronic device into
115 V power socket :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
X
To switch off: disconnect the plug from
115 V power socket :.
Ensure that you do not pull on the cord.
Features
293
Stowage and features
Z
background
Problems with the 115 V power socket
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The warning lamp on the
115 V power socket is
not lit.
The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak.
X
Start the engine.
or
X
Charge the battery (Y page 321).
If the indicator lamp still does not light up:
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The temperature of the DC/AC converter is temporarily too high.
X
Remove the electronic device connector from the 115 V socket.
X
Let the DC/AC converter cool down.
If the indicator lamp still does not light up after cooling down the
converter:
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
You have connected an electronic device that has a constant nominal
power of less than 150 watts, but has a very high switch-on current.
This device will not work. If you connect such a device, the 115 V
power socket will not supply it with power.
X
Connect a suitable electronic device.
Mercedes-Benz emergency call sys-
tem
Information on these requirements can be found
in the Digital Operator's Manual.
X
To open: press cover :.
X
To make an emergency call: press SOS but-
ton ; briefly.
The indicator lamp in SOS button ; flashes
until the emergency call is concluded.
X
Wait for a voice connection to the Mercedes-
Benz emergency call center.
X
After the emergency call, close cover :.
You will see a message if:
R
a connection to the Mercedes-Benz emer-
gency call center cannot be established
R
a call has not been automatically forwarded
to the public emergency call center
In this case, dial the emergency number on
your mobile phone.
Further information on the Mercedes-Benz
emergency call system can be found in the Dig-
ital Operator's Manual.
Mercedes me connect
General notes
The display of the multimedia system indicates
that a call is active. During the call, you can call
up the navigation menu by pressing the Ø
button on the multimedia system, for example.
Voice output is not available in this case.
Further information on Mercedes me connect
(see the Digital Operator's Manual).
294
Features
Stowage and features
background
Roadside Assistance button
X
To call: press button : for Roadside Assis-
tance.
The call is initiated.
The Connecting Call
Connecting Call message appears on
the multifunction display. The audio output is
muted.
For certain countries only: a message on the
multifunction display prompts you to confirm
the data transmission. After confirmation, the
required vehicle data is transmitted. During
data transmission, you will see a correspond-
ing symbol in the display. This may take a few
seconds. You are then connected to an
employee.
X
To end a call: press the ~ button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
or
X
Press the corresponding multimedia system
button for ending a phone call.
Info call button
This function is not available in all countries.
X
To call: press Info call button :.
The call is initiated.
The Connecting Call
Connecting Call message appears on
the multifunction display. The audio output is
muted.
For certain countries only: a message on the
multifunction display prompts you to confirm
the data transmission. After confirmation, the
required vehicle data is transmitted. During
data transmission, you will see a correspond-
ing symbol in the display. This may take a few
seconds. You are then connected to an
employee.
X
To end a call: press the ~ button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
or
X
Press the corresponding multimedia system
button for ending a phone call.
Garage door opener
General notes
The HomeLink
®
garage door opener integrated
in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate up
to three different door and gate systems.
Use the integrated garage door opener only on
garage doors that:
R
have safety stop and reverse features and
R
meet current U.S. federal safety standards
Once programed, the integrated garage door
opener in the rear-view mirror will assume the
function of the garage door system's remote
control. Please also read the operating instruc-
tions for the garage door system.
When programming a garage door opener, park
the vehicle outside the garage. Do not run the
engine while programming.
Certain garage door drives are incompatible
with the integrated garage door opener. If you
have difficulty programing the integrated garage
door opener, contact an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
Alternatively, you can call the following tele-
phone assistance services:
R
USA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
R
Canada: Customer Service at
1-800-387-0100
R
HomeLink
®
hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free of
charge)
Features
295
Stowage and features
Z
background
More information on HomeLink
®
and/or com-
patible products is also available online at
http://www.homelink.com.
Notes on the declaration of conformity
(Y page 278).
USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4
Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
When you operate or program the door with
the integrated garage door opener, persons in
the range of movement of the door may
become trapped or be struck by the door.
There is a risk of injury.
When using the integrated garage door
opener, always make sure that nobody is
within the range of movement of the door.
G
DANGER
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases is hazardous to health
and can result in poisoning. There is a risk of
fatal injury. Therefore, never leave the engine
running an enclosed space without adequate
ventilation.
Programming
Programming buttons
Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"
(Y page 296).
Garage door remote control A is not included
with the integrated garage door opener.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 131).
X
Select one of buttons ; to ? to use to con-
trol the garage door drive.
X
To start programming mode: press and
hold one of buttons ; to ? on the integrated
garage door opener.
The garage door opener is in programming
mode. After a short time, indicator lamp :
lights up yellow.
Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon as
button ;, = or ? is stored for the first time.
If the selected button has already been pro-
grammed, indicator lamp : will only light up
yellow after ten seconds have elapsed.
X
Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator
lamp : flashes yellow.
X
To program the remote control: point
garage door remote control A towards but-
tons ; to ? on the rear-view mirror at a dis-
tance of 2 to 8 in (5 to 20 cm).
X
Press and hold button B on remote control
A until indicator lamp : lights up green.
When indicator lamp : lights up green: pro-
gramming is finished.
When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro-
gramming was successful. The rolling code
must be synchronized (Y page 296).
X
Release button B on remote control A for
the garage door drive system.
If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the
programing procedure for the corresponding
button on the rear-view mirror. When doing
so, vary the distance between remote control
A and the rear-view mirror.
The required distance between remote con-
trol A and the integrated garage door opener
depends on the garage door drive system.
Several attempts might be necessary. You
should test every position for at least
25 seconds before trying another position.
Synchronizing the rolling code
Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"
(Y page 296).
If the garage door system uses a rolling code,
you will also have to synchronize the garage
door system with the integrated garage door
opener in the rear-view mirror. To do this you will
need to use the programming button on the door
drive control panel. The programming button
may be located in different places depending on
296
Features
Stowage and features
background
the manufacturer. It is usually located on the
door drive unit on the garage ceiling.
Familiarize yourself with the garage door drive
operating instructions, for example under "Pro-
gramming additional remote controls", before
carrying out the following steps.
Your vehicle must be within reach of the garage
door or gate opener drive. Make sure that nei-
ther your vehicle nor any persons/objects are
present within the sweep of the door or gate.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 131).
X
Get out of the vehicle.
X
Press the programming button on the door
drive unit.
Usually, you now have 30 seconds to initiate
the next step.
X
Get into the vehicle.
X
Press previously programmed button ;, =
or ? on the integrated garage door opener
repeatedly and in quick succession until the
door closes.
The rolling code synchronization is then com-
plete.
Notes on programming the remote con-
trol
Canadian radio frequency laws require a "break"
(or interruption) of the transmission signals
after broadcasting for a few seconds. Therefore,
these signals may not last long enough for the
integrated garage door opener. The signal is not
recognized during programming. Comparable
with Canadian law, some U.S. garage door open-
ers also feature a "break".
Proceed as follows:
R
if you live in Canada.
R
if you have difficulties programming the
garage door opener (regardless of where you
live) when using the programming steps.
X
Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on the
integrated garage door opener.
After a short time, indicator lamp : lights up
yellow.
X
Release the button.
Indicator lamp : flashes yellow.
X
Press button B of garage door remote con-
trol A for two seconds, then release it for two
seconds.
X
Press button B of the remote control A
again and hold for two seconds.
X
Repeat this sequence on button B of remote
control A until indicator lamp : lights up
green.
When indicator lamp : lights up green: pro-
gramming is finished.
When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro-
gramming was successful. The next step is to
synchronize the rolling code.
X
Release button B of remote control A of the
garage door drive.
If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the
programming process for the corresponding
button on the rear-view mirror. When doing
so, vary the distance between remote control
A and the rear-view mirror.
The required distance between remote con-
trol A and the integrated garage door opener
depends on the garage door drive system.
Several attempts might be necessary. You
should test every position for at least
25 seconds before trying another position.
Problems when programming
If you are experiencing problems programing
the integrated garage door opener on the rear-
view mirror, take note of the following instruc-
tions:
R
Check the transmitter frequency used by
garage door drive remote control A and
whether it is supported. The transmitter fre-
quency can usually be found on the back of
remote control A for the garage door drive.
The garage door opener is compatible with
devices which operate in the frequency range
of 280 to 433 MHz.
R
Replace the batteries in garage door remote
control A. This increases the likelihood that
garage door remote control A will transmit a
strong and precise signal to the integrated
garage door opener.
R
When programming, hold remote control A
at varying distances and angles and from but-
tons ; to ? which you are programming. Try
various angles at a distance between 2and
8 inches (5to 20 cm) or at the same angle but
at varying distances.
R
If another remote control A is available for
the same garage door drive, repeat the same
programming steps with this remote control
A. Before performing these steps, make sure
that new batteries have been installed in
garage door drive remote control A.
Features
297
Stowage and features
Z
background
R
Note that some remote controls only transmit
for a limited amount of time (the indicator
lamp on the remote control goes out). Press
button B on remote control A again before
transmission ends.
R
Align the antenna cable of the garage door
opener unit. This can improve signal recep-
tion/transmission.
Opening/closing the garage door
After it has been programmed, the integrated
garage door opener performs the function of the
garage door system remote control. Please also
read the operating instructions for the garage
door system.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 131).
X
Press button ;, = or ? which you pro-
grammed to operate the garage door.
Garage door system with a fixed code: indi-
cator lamp : lights up green.
Garage door system with a rolling code: indi-
cator lamp : flashes green.
The transmitter will transmit a signal as long
as the button is pressed. The transmission is
halted after a maximum of ten seconds and
indicator lamp : lights up yellow.
X
Press button ;, = or ? again if necessary.
Clearing the memory
Make sure that you clear the memory of the
integrated garage door opener before selling the
vehicle.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 131).
X
Press and hold buttons ; and ?.
The indicator lamp initially lights up yellow
and then green.
X
Release buttons ; and ?.
The memory of the integrated garage door
opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.
Floormats
G
WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
loose floormats and do not place floormats on
top of one another.
X
Slide the relevant seat back.
X
To install: place the floormat in the footwell.
X
Press studs : onto retainers ;.
X
To remove: pull the floormat off retainers ;.
X
Remove the floormat.
298
Features
Stowage and features
background
Engine compartment
Hood
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when
the vehicle is in motion and block your view.
There is a risk of an accident.
Never unlatch the hood while driving. Before
every trip, ensure that the hood is locked.
G
WARNING
When opening and closing the hood, it may
suddenly fall into the closed position. There is
a risk of injury to persons within range of
movement of the hood.
Open and close the hood only when no one is
within its range of movement.
G
WARNING
Opening the hood when the engine is over-
heated or when there is a fire in the engine
compartment could expose you to hot gases
or other service products. There is a risk of
injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
and contact the fire department.
G
WARNING
The engine compartment contains moving
components. Certain components, such as
the radiator fan, may continue to run or start
again suddenly when the ignition is off. There
is a risk of injury.
If you need to do any work inside the engine
compartment:
R
switch off the ignition
R
never reach into the area where there is a
risk of danger from moving components,
such as the fan rotation area
R
remove jewelry and watches
R
keep items of clothing and hair, for exam-
ple, away from moving parts
To ensure the flow of fresh air through the air
vents into the vehicle interior, please observe
the following notes (Y page 128):
Opening the hood
G
WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Working in the engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
following.
G
WARNING
When the hood is open and the windshield
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by
the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before opening the hood.
!
Make sure that the windshield wipers are
not folded away from the windshield. You
could otherwise damage the windshield wip-
ers or the hood.
X
Make sure that the windshield wipers are
turned off.
X
Pull release lever : on the hood.
The hood is released.
Engine compartment
299
Maintenance and care
Z
background
X
Reach into the gap, pull hood catch handle ;
up and lift the hood.
If you lift the hood by approximately 15 in
(40 cm), the hood is opened and held open
automatically by the gas-filled strut.
Closing the hood
X
Lower the hood and let it fall from a height of
approximately 8 in (20 cm).
X
Check that the hood has engaged properly.
If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not
properly engaged. Open it again and close it
with a little more force.
Radiator
Do not cover up the radiator, such as with a
thermal mat or insect protection cover. Other-
wise, the values of the European on-board diag-
nostics may be affected. Some of these read-
ings are required by law and must be accurate at
all times.
Engine oil
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Working in the engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
following.
G
WARNING
The engine compartment contains moving
components. Certain components, such as
the radiator fan, may continue to run or start
again suddenly when the ignition is off. There
is a risk of injury.
If you need to do any work inside the engine
compartment:
R
switch off the ignition
R
never reach into the area where there is a
risk of danger from moving components,
such as the fan rotation area
R
remove jewelry and watches
R
keep items of clothing and hair, for exam-
ple, away from moving parts
G
WARNING
If engine oil comes into contact with hot com-
ponents in the engine compartment, it may
ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to
the filler neck. Let the engine cool down and
thoroughly clean the engine oil off the com-
ponents before starting the engine.
G
WARNING
Opening the hood when the engine is over-
heated or when there is a fire in the engine
compartment could expose you to hot gases
or other service products. There is a risk of
injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
and contact the fire department.
General notes
Depending on your driving style, the vehicle
consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 l) of oil per
600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption may
be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if
you frequently drive at high engine speeds.
Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be
in a different location.
300
Engine compartment
Maintenance and care
background
To check the engine oil level:
R
park the vehicle on a level surface
R
the engine should be switched off for approx-
imately five minutes if the engine is at normal
operating temperature
Checking the oil level using the oil dip-
stick
Example: checking the engine oil level using
the oil dipstick
X
Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide
tube.
X
Wipe off oil dipstick :.
X
Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide tube
to the stop and take it out again after approx-
imately three seconds.
If the level is between MIN mark = and MAX
mark ;, the oil level is correct.
X
If the engine oil level has dropped to MIN mark
= or below, top up with 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) of
engine oil.
Checking the oil level using the on-
board computer
Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 4MATIC+/GLC 63 S
4MATIC+: the oil level can only be checked
using the on-board computer.
X
Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2
in the ignition lock.
X
Press 9 or : on the steering wheel to
select the following message:MeasuringMeasuring
EngineEngine OilOil LevelLevel AccurateAccurate OnlyOnly WhenWhen
Vehicle Is LevelVehicle Is Level
The measurement takes a few seconds. You will
see one of the following messages in the multi-
function display:
R
Engine Oil Level OK
Engine Oil Level OK.
R
Add 1.1 Liter Engine Oil at NextAdd 1.1 Liter Engine Oil at Next
RefuelingRefueling.
X
Add oil if necessary.
If the engine is at normal operating temperature
and the Reduce Engine Oil LevelReduce Engine Oil Level message
appears, too much oil has been added.
X
Have excess oil siphoned off.
If the For Engine Oil Level IgnitionFor Engine Oil Level Ignition
Must Be OnMust Be On message appears:
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (Y page 131).
If the Need More Time to Check EngineNeed More Time to Check Engine
Oil LevelOil Level message appears:
X
If the engine is at normal operating tem-
perature: repeat the measurement after
approximately five minutes.
X
If the engine is not at normal operating
temperature: e.g. if the engine was only star-
ted briefly, repeat the measurement after
approximately 30 minutes.
If the Engine Oil Level Not Measurable
Engine Oil Level Not Measurable
with Engine Runningwith Engine Running message appears:
X
Switch off the engine.
X
If the engine is at normal operating tem-
perature: wait about five minutes before car-
rying out the measurement.
X
If the engine is not at normal operating
temperature: e.g. if the engine was only star-
ted briefly, wait approximately 30 minutes
before carrying out the measurement.
If you wish to cancel the measurement, press
the 9 or : button on the multifunction
steering wheel.
Adding engine oil
H
Environmental note
When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If
oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to
the environment.
!
Use only engine oils and oil filters that are
approved for vehicles with a service system. A
list of the engine oils and oil filters that have
been tested and approved in accordance with
Engine compartment
301
Maintenance and care
Z
background
Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service
Products is available at any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
The following cause engine failure or damage
to the exhaust system:
R
Use of engine oils and oil filters that have
not been expressly approved for the service
system
R
Replacement of engine oil and oil filter after
the replacement interval specified by the
service system has expired
R
Use of engine oil additives
!
Do not add too much oil. adding too much
engine oil can result in damage to the engine
or to the catalytic converter. Have excess
engine oil siphoned off.
Add engine oil (example)
X
Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove it.
X
Add engine oil.
If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on
the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) of engine
oil.
X
Replace cap : on the filler neck and tighten
clockwise.
Ensure that the cap locks into place securely.
X
Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick
(Y page 301).
Further information on engine oil (Y page 360).
Additional service products
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Working in the engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
following.
G
WARNING
The engine compartment contains moving
components. Certain components, such as
the radiator fan, may continue to run or start
again suddenly when the ignition is off. There
is a risk of injury.
If you need to do any work inside the engine
compartment:
R
switch off the ignition
R
never reach into the area where there is a
risk of danger from moving components,
such as the fan rotation area
R
remove jewelry and watches
R
keep items of clothing and hair, for exam-
ple, away from moving parts
G
WARNING
The cooling system is pressurized, particularly
when the motor is warm. If you open the cap,
you could be scalded if hot coolant sprays out.
There is a risk of injury.
Let the engine cool down before you open the
cap. Wear protective gloves and protective
eyewear when opening. Open the cap slowly
to release pressure.
G
WARNING
Opening the hood when the engine is over-
heated or when there is a fire in the engine
compartment could expose you to hot gases
or other service products. There is a risk of
injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
and contact the fire department.
302
Engine compartment
Maintenance and care
background
Checking coolant level
Checking the coolant level (example)
X
Park the vehicle on a level surface.
Only check the coolant level when the vehicle
is on a level surface and the engine has cooled
down.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 131).
or
X
Press the Start/Stop button twice on vehicles
with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-GO start
function (Y page 132).
X
Check the coolant temperature display in the
instrument cluster (Y page 36).
The coolant temperature must be below
158 ‡ (70 †).
X
Turn the SmartKey to position g in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 131).
or
X
Press the Start/Stop button once on vehicles
with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-GO start
function (Y page 132).
X
Slowly turn cap : half a turn counter-clock-
wise and allow excess pressure to escape.
X
Turn cap : further counter-clockwise and
remove it.
If the coolant is at the level of marker bar =
in the filler neck when cold, there is enough
coolant in coolant expansion tank ;.
If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in
(1.5 cm) above marker bar = in the filler neck
when warm, there is enough coolant in expan-
sion tank ;.
X
If necessary, add coolant that has been tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X
Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far as
it will go.
For further information on coolant, see
(Y page 361).
Adding washer fluid to the windshield
washer system
G
WARNING
Windshield washer concentrate is highly flam-
mable. If windshield washer concentrate gets
onto hot components of the engine or the
exhaust system, it can ignite. There is a risk of
fire and injury.
Make sure that windshield washer concen-
trate is not spilled in the vicinity of the filler
neck.
Example: adding liquid to the windshield
washer system
X
To open: pull cap : up by the tab and open.
X
Add the premixed washer fluid.
X
To close: press cap : onto the filler neck
until it engages.
If the washer fluid level drops below the recom-
mended minimum fluid level of 1.1 US qt (1.0 l),
a message appears in the multifunction display
prompting you to add washer fluid (Y page 255).
Further information on washer fluid
(Y page 362).
ASSYST PLUS
Service message
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
informs you of the next service due date.
Information on the type of service and service
intervals (see the separate Maintenance Book-
let).
Further information can be obtained at a quali-
fied specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized
ASSYST PLUS
303
Maintenance and care
Z
background
Mercedes-Benz Center, or at
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
i
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
does not show any information on the engine
oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil
level (Y page 300).
The multifunction display shows a service mes-
sage for several seconds, e.g.:
R
Service A in XX DaysService A in XX Days
R
Service A DueService A Due
R
Service A Overdue by XX DaysService A Overdue by XX Days
Depending on the operating conditions of the
vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the
next service due date is displayed.
The letter AA or BB, possibly in conjunction with a
number or another letter, indicates the type of
service. AA stands for a minor service and BB for a
major service.
You can obtain further information from an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does
not take into account any periods of time during
which the battery is disconnected.
Maintaining the time-dependent service sched-
ule:
X
Note down the service due date displayed in
the multifunction display before disconnect-
ing the battery.
or
X
After reconnecting the battery, subtract the
battery disconnection periods from the ser-
vice date shown on the display.
Hiding a service message
X
Press the a or % button on the steering
wheel.
Displaying service messages
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the
list of menus.
X
Press 9 or : on the steering wheel to
select the Service
Service menu and confirm with
a.
X
Press 9 or : on the steering wheel to
select the ASSYST PLUSASSYST PLUS submenu and con-
firm with a.
The service due date appears in the multi-
function display.
Information about Service
Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service
interval display
!
If the ASSYST PLUS service interval display
has been inadvertently reset, this setting can
be corrected at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Have service work carried out as described in
the Maintenance Booklet. This may otherwise
lead to increased wear and damage to the
major assemblies or the vehicle.
A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an author-
ized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset the
ASSYST PLUS service interval display after the
service work has been carried out. You can also
obtain further information on maintenance
work, for example.
Special service requirements
The specified maintenance interval takes only
the normal operation of the vehicle into
account. Under arduous operating conditions or
increased load on the vehicle, maintenance
work must be carried out more frequently, for
example:
R
Regular city driving with frequent intermedi-
ate stops
R
If the vehicle is primarily used to travel short
distances
R
Use in mountainous terrain or on poor road
surfaces
R
If the engine is often left idling for long periods
Under these or similar conditions, have, for
example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter
replaced or changed more frequently. Under
arduous operating conditions, the tires must be
checked more often. Further information can be
obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g.
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
304
ASSYST PLUS
Maintenance and care
background
Driving abroad
An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is
also available in other countries. You can obtain
further information from any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Care
General notes
!
When cleaning your car, do not use:
R
dry, coarse or hard cloths
R
abrasive cleaning agents
R
solvents
R
cleaning agents containing solvents
Do not scrub.
Do not touch the surfaces and films with hard
objects, e.g. rings or ice scrapers. Otherwise,
you may scratch or damage the surfaces and
films.
!
Do not park your vehicle for a long period of
time directly after cleaning, particularly after
cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner.
Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased cor-
rosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore,
drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By
heating up the brakes, the brake discs and
pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for a
long period of time.
H
Environmental note
Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning
cloths in an environmentally responsible man-
ner.
Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for
retaining the quality in the long term.
Use care products and cleaning agents recom-
mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Washing the vehicle and cleaning the
paintwork
Automatic car wash
G
WARNING
Braking efficiency is reduced after washing
the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
After the vehicle has been washed, brake
carefully while paying attention to the traffic
conditions until full braking power is restored.
!
When Active Brake Assist, Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC or the HOLD function is
activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in
certain situations.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
these systems in the following or similar sit-
uations:
R
when towing the vehicle
R
in the car wash
!
Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless
Automatic Car Wash as these use special
cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can
damage the paintwork or plastic parts.
!
Make sure that:
R
the side windows and sliding sunroof are
closed completely
R
the blower is switched off
R
the windshield wiper switch is in position
u
R
the 360° camera or the rear view camera is
deactivated
The vehicle may otherwise be damaged.
!
If the SmartKey is within the rear detection
range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situa-
tions, for example, could lead to the uninten-
tional opening of the tailgate:
R
when using an automatic car wash
R
when using a power washer
Make sure that the SmartKey is at least 3 m
away from the vehicle.
!
If the SmartKey is within the rear detection
range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situa-
tions, for example, could lead to the uninten-
tional opening of the tailgate:
R
when using an automatic car wash
R
when using a power washer
Make sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft
(3 m) away from the vehicle.
!
Make sure that the automatic transmission
is in neutral position i when washing your
vehicle in a tow-through car wash. The vehicle
may otherwise be damaged.
R
Operating with the SmartKey:
Care
305
Maintenance and care
Z
background
Do not remove the SmartKey from the igni-
tion lock. Do not open the driver's door
when the engine is switched off or at very
low speeds. Otherwise, when in transmis-
sion position h or k, the automatic
transmission will automatically switch to
park position j and block the wheels.
R
Operating with the Start/Stop button:
Do not open the driver's door when the
engine is switched off or at very low
speeds. Otherwise, when in transmission
position h or k, the automatic transmis-
sion will automatically switch to park posi-
tion j and block the wheels.
Observe the following to make sure that the
automatic transmission stays in neutral i:
Operating with the SmartKey and Start/Stop
button:
X
Make sure that the ignition is switched on.
X
Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.
X
Depress and hold the brake pedal.
Operating with the Start/Stop button only:
X
Engage park position j.
X
Release the brake pedal.
X
Remove the Start/Stop button from ignition
lock (Y page 132).
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Depress and hold the brake pedal.
Operating with the SmartKey and Start/Stop
button:
X
Shift to neutral i.
X
Release the brake pedal.
X
Release the electric parking brake, if neces-
sary.
X
Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey
in the ignition lock.
You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car
wash from the very start.
If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before
cleaning it in an automatic car wash.
After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax
from the windshield and the wiper blades. This
will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises
caused by residue on the windshield.
Washing by hand
In some countries, washing by hand is only
allowed at specially equipped washing bays.
Observe the legal requirements in each country.
X
Do not use hot water and do not wash the
vehicle in direct sunlight.
X
Use a soft sponge to clean.
X
Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car
shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X
Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gen-
tle jet of water.
X
Do not point the water jet directly towards the
air inlet.
X
Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge
frequently.
X
Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry
thoroughly with a chamois.
X
Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paint-
work.
Carefully remove all deposits of road salt as
soon as possible when driving in winter.
Power washers
G
WARNING
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt
blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
to the tires or chassis components. Compo-
nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-
edly. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not use power washers with circular jet
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
tires or chassis components replaced imme-
diately.
!
Always maintain a distance of at least 12 in
(30 cm) between the vehicle and the power
washer nozzle. Information about the correct
distance is available from the equipment
manufacturer.
Move the power washer nozzle around when
cleaning your vehicle.
Do not aim directly at any of the following:
R
Tires
R
Door gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.
R
Electrical components
R
Battery
R
Plug-type couplings
306
Care
Maintenance and care
background
R
Light bulbs
R
Seals
R
Trim elements
R
Ventilation slots
Damaged seals or electrical components can
lead to leaks or failures.
!
Vehicles with decorative film: parts of your
vehicle are covered with decorative film.
Maintain a distance of at least 27.5 in (70 cm)
between the film-covered parts of the vehicle
and the nozzle of the power washer.
Information about the correct distance is
available from the equipment manufacturer.
Move the power washer nozzle around when
cleaning your vehicle.
The water temperature of the power washer
must not exceed 140 ‡ (60 †).
!
If the SmartKey is within the rear detection
range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situa-
tions, for example, could lead to the uninten-
tional opening of the tailgate:
R
when using an automatic car wash
R
when using a power washer
Make sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft
(3 m) away from the vehicle.
Cleaning the paintwork
!
Do not affix:
R
stickers
R
films
R
magnetic plates or similar items
to painted surfaces. You could otherwise
damage the paintwork.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by
corrosion and damage caused by inadequate
care cannot always be completely repaired. In
such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop.
X
Remove dirt immediately, where possible,
while avoiding rubbing too hard.
X
Soak insect remains with insect remover and
rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
X
Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off
the treated areas afterwards.
X
Remove tree resin, oils, fuels and greases by
rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petro-
leum ether or lighter fluid
X
Remove coolant and brake fluid with a moist
cloth and clear water.
X
Use tar remover to remove tar stains.
X
Use silicone remover to remove wax.
When water no longer forms beads on the paint
surface, use the care product Paint Care, which
has been approved for Mercedes-Benz. This is
the case approximately every three to five
months, depending on the climate conditions
and the care product used.
The cleaning product Paint Cleaner, which has
been recommended and approved for
Mercedes-Benz, should be used when dirt has
penetrated the paint surface.
Also use Paint Cleaner on paint that has become
dull.
Do not use these care products in the sun or on
the hood while the hood is hot.
X
Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB Touch-
Up Stick, to repair slight damage to the paint-
work quickly and provisionally.
Matte finish care
!
Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy
wheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine.
!
The following can give the paint a glossy
appearance and thus reduce the matt effect:
R
Rubbing hard with unsuitable agents
R
Washing the vehicle in direct sunlight
!
Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishing
products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax, for the
purpose of paintwork care. These products
are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their
use on vehicles with matte paintwork leads to
considerable surface damage or, more spe-
cifically, to shiny, spotted areas.
Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.
!
Only use automatic car washes which cor-
respond to the latest technological stand-
ards. Never use wash programs which finish
by treating the vehicle with hot wax.
Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clear
matte finish. This will help you to avoid damage
to the paintwork due to incorrect treatment.
These notes also apply to light alloy wheels with
a clear matte finish.
Use only insect remover and car shampoo from
the range of approved Mercedes-Benz care
products.
Care
307
Maintenance and care
Z
background
Cleaning the vehicle parts
Cleaning the wheels
G
WARNING
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt
blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
to the tires or chassis components. Compo-
nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-
edly. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not use power washers with circular jet
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
tires or chassis components replaced imme-
diately.
!
Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products
to remove brake dust. This could damage
wheel bolts and brake components.
!
Do not park your vehicle for a long period of
time directly after cleaning, particularly after
cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner.
Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased cor-
rosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore,
drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By
heating up the brakes, the brake discs and
pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for a
long period of time.
Cleaning the windows
G
WARNING
You could become trapped by the windshield
wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of
injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
wiper blades.
!
Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,
solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-
vents to clean the inside of the windows. Do
not touch the insides of the windows with
hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There
is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows.
!
Clean the water drainage channels of the
windshield and the rear window at regular
intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and
pollen may under certain circumstances pre-
vent water from draining away. This can lead
to corrosion damage and damage to elec-
tronic components.
X
Clean the inside and outside of the windows
with a damp cloth and a cleaning product that
is recommended and approved by Mercedes-
Benz.
Cleaning wiper blades
G
WARNING
You could become trapped by the windshield
wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of
injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
wiper blades.
!
Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, the
wiper blade could be damaged.
!
Do not clean wiper blades too often and do
not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graph-
ite coating could be damaged. This could
cause wiper noise.
!
Hold the wiper arm securely when folding
back. The windshield could be damaged if the
wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.
X
Move the wiper arms to a vertical position
(Y page 116) and fold away from the wind-
shield.
X
Carefully clean the wiper blades with a damp
cloth.
X
Fold the windshield wiper arms back again
before switching on the ignition.
Cleaning the exterior lighting
!
Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
which are suitable for plastic light lenses.
Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
could scratch or damage the plastic light len-
ses.
X
Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior light-
ing using a wet sponge and a mild cleaning
agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or
cleaning cloths.
308
Care
Maintenance and care
background
Cleaning the mirror turn signals
!
Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable
cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could
scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the
mirror turn signals.
X
Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn sig-
nals in the exterior mirror housing using a wet
sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.
Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning
cloths.
Cleaning the side running board
!
Do not clean the aluminum insert of the side
running board with alkaline or acid-based
cleaning agents, such as wheel cleaner. Do
not use acidic wheel cleaners to remove
brake dust. The aluminum inserts could oth-
erwise be damaged.
Cleaning the sensors
!
If you clean the sensors with a power
washer, make sure that you keep a distance
of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle
and the power washer nozzle. Information
about the correct distance is available from
the equipment manufacturer.
X
Clean sensors : of the driving systems with
water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.
Cleaning the rear view camera and
360° Camera
!
Do not clean the camera lens and the area
around the rear view camera or 360° camera
with a power washer.
X
Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 131).
or
X
Press the Start/Stop button once or twice on
vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-
GO start function (Y page 132).
X
Open the camera cover for cleaning via the
multimedia system (see Digital Operator's
Manual).
X
To clean the camera: use clean water and a
soft cloth to clean camera lens :.
When you switch off the ignition, the camera
cover closes automatically.
Cleaning the exhaust pipes
G
WARNING
The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can
become very hot. If you come into contact
with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn
yourself. There is a risk of injury.
Always be particularly careful around the
exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow
these components to cool down before touch-
ing them.
!
Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-
based cleaning agents, such as bathroom
cleaner or wheel cleaner.
!
Mercedes‑AMG GLC 63 and Mercedes‑AMG
GLC 63 S with black exhaust pipes: black
Care
309
Maintenance and care
Z
background
chrome trims must not be polished with a
chrome polish as this will cause them to lose
their black shine. For optimal care, the face-
plates should be rubbed with a lightly oiled
cloth after every car wash. Commercially
available engine and care oils are suitable for
this.
For heavier soiling, you can apply a fine paint-
work polish with a microfiber cloth. Remove
the excess polish residue after polishing.
Impurities combined with the effects of road grit
and corrosive environmental factors may cause
flash rust to form on the surface. You can
restore the original shine of the exhaust pipe by
cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and
after washing.
X
Clean the exhaust pipe with a care product
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning the trailer tow hitch
H
Environmental note
Dispose of rags soaked in oil and grease in an
environmentally responsible manner.
!
Please note the care instructions in the
trailer coupling manufacturer's operating
instructions.
The ball coupling must be cleaned if it becomes
dirty or corroded.
X
Remove rust on the ball, e.g. with a wire
brush.
X
Remove dirt with a clean, lint-free cloth or a
brush.
X
After cleaning, lightly oil or grease the ball
coupling.
X
Check that the vehicle's trailer tow hitch is
working properly.
You can also have the maintenance work on the
ball coupling and the trailer tow hitch carried out
by a qualified specialist workshop.
Interior care
Cleaning the display
!
For cleaning, do not use any of the following:
R
alcohol-based thinner or gasoline
R
abrasive cleaning agents
R
commercially-available household cleaning
agents
These may damage the display surface. Do
not put pressure on the display surface when
cleaning. This could lead to irreparable dam-
age to the display.
X
Before cleaning the display, make sure that it
is switched off and has cooled down.
X
Clean the display surface using a commer-
cially available microfiber cloth and TFT/LCD
display cleaner.
X
Dry the display surface using a dry microfiber
cloth.
Cleaning the plastic trim
G
WARNING
Care products and cleaning agents containing
solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to
become porous. As a result, plastic parts may
come loose in the event of air bag deploy-
ment. There is a risk of injury.
Do not use any care products and cleaning
agents to clean the cockpit.
!
Never attach the following to plastic surfa-
ces:
R
stickers
R
films
R
perfume oil container or similar
You could otherwise damage the plastic.
!
Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or
sunscreen to come into contact with the plas-
tic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of
the surfaces.
X
Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free
cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
X
Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-
ucts recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
The surface may change color temporarily.
Wait until the surface is dry again.
310
Care
Maintenance and care
background
Cleaning the steering wheel and selec-
tor lever
X
Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use
leather care agents that have been recom-
mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning genuine wood and trim ele-
ments
!
Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents
such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes
or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damag-
ing the surface.
!
Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.
The trim pieces have a chrome look but are
mostly made of anodized aluminum and can
lose their shine if chrome polish is used. Use
a damp, lint-free cloth instead when cleaning
the trim pieces.
If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very
dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you are
unsure as to whether the trim pieces are
chrome-plated or not, consult an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
X
Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with a
damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
X
Trim elements with piano black finish:
wipe with a soft, damp cotton cloth. Use clean
water.
X
Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-
ucts recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning the seat covers
General notes
!
Do not use a microfiber cloth to clean covers
made out of real leather, artificial leather or
DINAMICA. If used often, these can damage
the cover.
Note that regular care is essential to ensure that
the appearance and comfort of the covers is
retained over time.
Genuine leather seat covers
!
To retain the natural appearance of the
leather, observe the following cleaning
instructions:
R
Clean genuine leather covers carefully with
a damp cloth and then wipe the covers
down with a dry cloth.
R
Make sure that the leather does not
become soaked. It may otherwise become
rough and cracked.
R
Only use leather care agents that have
been tested and approved by Mercedes-
Benz. You can obtain these from a qualified
specialist workshop.
Leather is a natural product.
It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for
example:
R
differences in the texture
R
marks caused by growth and injury
R
slight nuances of color
These are characteristics of leather and not
material defects.
Seat covers of other materials
!
Observe the following when cleaning:
R
clean artificial leather covers with a cloth
moistened with a solution containing 1%
detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).
R
clean cloth covers with a microfiber cloth
moistened with a solution containing 1%
detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rub
carefully and always wipe entire seat sec-
tions to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave
the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results
depend on the type of dirt and how long it
has been there.
R
clean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth.
Make sure that you wipe entire seat sec-
tions to avoid leaving visible lines.
Cleaning the seat belts
G
WARNING
Seat belts can become severely weakened if
bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat
belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of
an accident. This poses an increased risk of
injury or fatal injury.
Never bleach or dye the seat belts.
Care
311
Maintenance and care
Z
background
!
Do not clean the seat belts using chemical
cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts by
heating at temperatures above 176 ‡(80 †)
or in direct sunlight.
X
Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution.
Cleaning the headliner and carpets
X
Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush or
dry shampoo.
X
Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaning
agents recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
312
Care
Maintenance and care
background
Where will I find...?
Reflective safety jacket
Removing/replacing the reflective
safety jacket
The reflective safety jackets are located in the
safety jacket compartments in the stowage
compartments of the front doors. There are also
safety jacket compartments in the stowage
compartments of the rear doors, in which reflec-
tive safety jackets can be stowed.
X
To remove: pull out safety jacket bag : with
the reflective safety jacket by loop ;.
X
Open safety jacket bag : and pull out the
reflective safety jacket.
X
To stow: fold the reflective safety jacket, roll
it up and stow it in safety jacket bag :.
X
Slide safety jacket bag : along the lower
edge of the armrest into the safety jacket
compartment. Meanwhile, ensure that
loop ; hangs out well within reach.
X
Observe the legal requirements in each indi-
vidual country for the use of safety jackets.
i
Remove a new reflective safety jacket from
its packaging material before sliding it into
the safety jacket compartment. The packag-
ing material may otherwise cause it to slip out
or make removing it difficult.
Information on reflective safety jackets
:
Maximum number of washes
;
Maximum wash temperature
=
Do not bleach
?
Do not iron
A
Do not use a laundry dryer
B
Do not dry-clean
C
This is a class 2 jacket
R
The safety jackets only meet the require-
ments defined by the legal standard:
-
if the correct size is used
-
if the reflective safety jackets are correctly
fastened
R
Before use, ensure that the reflective safety
jackets are clean and intact. The special prop-
erties may otherwise be compromised.
R
The reflective safety jackets should be stored
in their original packaging in a dry place away
from sources of heat and light.
R
The maximum number of washes specified is
not the only factor influencing the life span of
the reflective safety jackets. Their life span
also depends on use, care, storage, etc.
R
The reflective safety jackets should be dis-
posed of and replaced with new ones:
-
after 15 washes, and/or
-
if the reflective strips have become
scratched, and/or
-
if the backing material and/or reflective
strips have become soiled and cannot be
cleaned off, and/or
-
if the fluorescence has faded, for example
due to the effects of sunlight
R
Dispose of reflective safety jackets in an envi-
ronmentally responsible manner. To do so,
contact your local waste disposal company.
Where will I find...?
313
Breakdown assistance
background
Towing eye
Towing eye : is located in the left-hand stow-
age well under the cargo compartment floor.
X
To remove: open the tailgate.
X
Open the cargo compartment floor
(Y page 287).
X
Remove towing eye :.
Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit
Removing the TIREFIT kit
The TIREFIT kit is located in the left-hand stow-
age compartment.
X
To remove: open the tailgate.
X
Open the cargo compartment floor
(Y page 287).
X
Push retaining clamps : on the cover down
so as to release them.
X
Fold up cover in the direction of arrow ;.
X
Remove tire inflation compressor = and tire
sealant bottle ?.
X
Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 316).
Vehicles with a tire-change tool kit
General notes
Apart from certain country-specific variations,
the vehicles are not equipped with a tire-change
tool kit.
Some tools for changing a wheel are specific to
the vehicle. For more information on which tire
changing tools are required and approved to
perform a wheel change on your vehicle, consult
a qualified specialist workshop.
Necessary tire-changing tools can include, for
example:
R
Jack
R
Wheel chock
R
Lug wrench
R
Alignment bolt
Removing the tire-change tool kit
Example
:
Ratchet for jack
;
Lug wrench
=
Jack
?
Alignment bolt
A
Socket wrench for ratchet
B
Folding wheel chock
The tire-change tool kit is located in the left-
hand stowage well, under the cargo compart-
ment floor.
X
To remove: open the tailgate.
X
Open the cargo compartment floor
(Y page 287).
314
Where will I find...?
Breakdown assistance
background
Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle
Your vehicle may be equipped with:
R
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat proper-
ties) (Y page 315)
Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehi-
cles with MOExtended tires.
R
a TIREFIT kit (Y page 314)
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It
is therefore recommended that you additionally
equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount
tires that do not feature run-flat characteristics,
e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained
from a qualified specialist workshop.
Vehicles with a Mercedes-Benz emergency call
system which are not equipped with a TIREFIT
kit: in the event of a flat tire, contact the Cus-
tomer Assistance Center for the Mercedes-Benz
emergency call system (Y page 294).
Information on changing and mounting wheels
(Y page 351).
X
Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
level ground, as far away as possible from
traffic.
X
Switch on the hazard warning lamps.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 152).
X
If possible, bring the front wheels into the
straight-ahead position.
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function
or KEYLESS‑GO
X
Open the driver's door.
The vehicle electronics are now in position
u. which is the same as the SmartKey having
been removed.
X
Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni-
tion lock (Y page 132).
X
Make sure that the engine cannot be started
via your smartphone (Y page 134).
X
Make sure that the passengers are not endan-
gered as they do so. Make sure that no one is
near the danger area while a wheel is being
changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting
in the wheel change should, for example,
stand behind the barrier.
X
Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic
conditions when doing so.
X
Close the driver's door.
Vehicles with MOExtended tires (tires
with run-flat characteristics)
General notes
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat char-
acteristics), you can continue to drive your vehi-
cle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one
or more tires. The affected tire must not show
any clearly visible damage.
You can recognize a MOExtended tire by the
MOExtended marking which appears on the
sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking
next to the tire size designation, the load-bear-
ing capacity and the speed index (Y page 345).
MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunc-
tion with an active tire pressure loss warning
system or with an active tire pressure monitor.
If a pressure loss warning message appears
in the multifunction display:
R
observe the instructions in the display mes-
sages (Y page 250)
R
check the tire for damage
R
if driving on, observe the following notes
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is
approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehi-
cle is partially laden. When the vehicle is fully
laden it is approximately 19 miles (30 km).
In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis-
tance possible depends upon:
R
vehicle speed
R
road condition
R
outside temperature
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode
may be reduced by extreme driving conditions
or maneuvers, or it can be increased through a
moderate style of driving.
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is
counted from the moment the tire pressure loss
warning appears in the multifunction display.
You must not exceed a maximum permissible
speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
Flat tire
315
Breakdown assistance
background
When replacing one or all tires, please observe
the following specifications for your vehicle's
tires:
R
size
R
the type and
R
the "MOExtended" marking
If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced
with a MOExtended tire, a standard tire may be
used as a temporary measure. Make sure that
you use the proper size and type (summer or
winter tires).
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It
is therefore recommended that you additionally
equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount
tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.
winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from
a qualified specialist workshop.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
When driving in emergency mode, the driving
characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner-
ing, accelerating quickly and when braking.
There is a risk of an accident.
Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.
Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,
and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes,
off-road). This applies in particular to a laden
vehicle.
Stop driving in emergency mode if:
R
you hear banging noises.
R
the vehicle starts to shake.
R
you see smoke and smell rubber.
R
ESP
®
is intervening constantly.
R
there are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.
After driving in emergency mode, have the
wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist
workshop with regard to their further use. The
defective tire must be replaced in every case.
TIREFIT kit
Important safety notes
TIREFIT is a tire sealant.
You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to
0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire
tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside tempera-
tures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †).
G
WARNING
In the following situations, the tire sealant is
unable to provide sufficient breakdown assis-
tance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly:
R
there are cuts or punctures in the tire larger
than those mentioned above.
R
the wheel rim is damaged.
R
you have driven at very low tire pressures or
on a flat tire.
There is a risk of an accident.
Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
The tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita-
tion. It must not come into contact with your
skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not
inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant away
from children. There is a risk of injury.
If you come into contact with the tire sealant,
observe the following:
R
Rinse off the tire sealant from your skin
immediately with water.
R
If the tire sealant comes into contact with
your eyes, immediately rinse them thor-
oughly with clean water.
R
If tire sealant is swallowed, immediately
rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink
plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,
and seek medical attention immediately.
R
Immediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with tire sealant.
R
If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
attention immediately.
!
After use, excess tire sealant may run out of
the filler hose. This could cause stains.
316
Flat tire
Breakdown assistance
background
Therefore, place the tire sealant bottle with
filler hose in the plastic bag which is con-
tained in the TIREFIT kit.
H
Environmental note
Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of
professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist
workshop.
!
Do not operate the tire inflation compressor
for longer than ten minutes at a time without
a break. It may otherwise overheat.
The tire inflation compressor can be operated
again once it has cooled down.
Comply with the manufacturer’s safety instruc-
tions on the sticker on the tire inflation com-
pressor.
Using the TIREFIT kit
X
Do not remove any foreign objects which have
penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or nails.
X
Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accompa-
nying TIREFIT sticker and the tire inflation
compressor from the stowage well under-
neath the cargo compartment floor
(Y page 314).
X
Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker to the
instrument cluster within the driver's field of
vision.
X
Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the
valve on the wheel with the defective tire.
X
Pull connector ? with cable and hose A out
of the tire inflation compressor housing.
X
Push connector on hose A into flange B on
tire sealant bottle : until the connector
engages.
X
Place tire sealant bottle : head down into
recess ; of the tire inflation compressor.
X
Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty
tire.
X
Screw filler hose D onto valve C.
X
Insert plug ? into cigarette lighter socket
(Y page 291) or into another 12 V socket in
your vehicle (Y page 292).
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 131).
X
Press on/off switch = on the tire inflation
compressor.
The tire inflation compressor is switched on.
The tire is inflated.
First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. The
pressure may briefly rise to approximately
500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).
Do not switch off the tire inflation com-
pressor during this phase.
X
Let the tire inflation compressor run for a
maximum of ten minutes. The tire should then
Flat tire
317
Breakdown assistance
Z
background
have attained a pressure of at least 200 kPa
(2.0 bar/29 psi).
If a pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has
been attained after five minutes, see "Tire pres-
sure reached" (Y page 318).
If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has
not been attained after five minutes, see "Tire
pressure not reached" (Y page 318).
If tire sealant has escaped, clean it off affected
areas as quickly as possible. It is preferable to
use clean water.
If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, have
them cleaned with perchloroethylene at a dry
cleaner as soon as possible.
Tire pressure not reached
If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has
not been attained after ten minutes:
X
Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
X
Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the
faulty tire.
Tire sealant may escape when the filler hose is
unscrewed.
X
Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approx-
imately 30 ft (10 m).
X
Pump up the tire again.
After a maximum of ten minutes, the tire pres-
sure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/
29 psi).
G
WARNING
If the required tire pressure is not reached
after the specified time, the tire is too badly
damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the
tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire
pressure that is too low can significantly
impair the vehicle's braking and driving char-
acteristics. There is a risk of accident.
Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
Tire pressure reached
G
WARNING
A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant
impairs the driving characteristics and is not
suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of
accident.
You should therefore adapt your driving style
accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed
the specified maximum speed with a tire that
has been repaired using tire sealant.
The maximum permissible speed for a tire
sealed with tire sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h).
The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker must be
affixed to the instrument cluster in the driver's
field of vision.
If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has
been attained after ten minutes:
X
Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
X
Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the
faulty tire.
Tire sealant may escape when the filler hose is
unscrewed.
X
Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire infla-
tion compressor.
X
Pull away immediately.
X
Stop after driving for approximately ten
minutes and check the tire pressure with the
tire inflation compressor.
The tire pressure must now be at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
G
WARNING
If the required tire pressure is not reached
after driving for a short period, the tire is too
badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair
the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a
tire pressure that is too low can significantly
impair the vehicle's braking and driving char-
acteristics. There is a risk of accident.
Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
In cases such as the one mentioned above, con-
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or
call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
X
Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on
the driver's side or the tire pressure table in
the fuel filler flap for values.
X
To increase the tire pressure: switch on the
tire inflation compressor.
318
Flat tire
Breakdown assistance
background
X
To reduce the tire pressure: depress pres-
sure release button : next to pressure
gauge ;.
X
When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the
filler hose from the valve of the sealed tire.
Tire sealant may escape when the filler hose is
unscrewed.
X
Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of the
sealed tire.
X
Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire infla-
tion compressor.
The filler hose remains attached to the tire
sealant bottle.
X
Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work-
shop and have the tire changed there.
X
Have the tire sealant bottle replaced as soon
as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.
X
Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every
four years at a qualified specialist workshop.
Battery (vehicle)
12 V battery – important safety notes
Special tools and expert knowledge are required
when working on the battery, e.g. removal and
installation. You should therefore have all work
involving the battery carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery
can lead, for example, to a short circuit and
thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can
lead to function restrictions applying to
safety-relevant systems, e.g. the lighting sys-
tem, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or the
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program). The oper-
ating safety of your vehicle may be restricted.
You could lose control of the vehicle, for
example:
R
when braking
R
in the event of abrupt steering maneuvers
and/or when the vehicle's speed is not
adapted to the road conditions
There is a risk of an accident.
In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci-
dent, contact a qualified specialist workshop
immediately. Do not drive any further. You
should have all work involving the battery car-
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
For further information about ABS and ESP
®
,
see (Y page 65) and (Y page 68).
All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium-
ion battery:
G
WARNING
Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation
of sparks, which could ignite the highly explo-
sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an
explosion.
Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle
body to remove any existing electrostatic
build-up.
The highly flammable gas mixture forms when
charging the battery as well as when jump-start-
ing.
Always make sure that neither you nor the bat-
tery is electrostatically charged. A build-up of
electrostatic charge can be caused, for exam-
ple:
R
by wearing clothing made from synthetic
fibers
R
due to friction between clothing and seats
R
if you push or pull the battery across the car-
pet or other synthetic materials
R
if you rub the battery with a cloth
G
WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produ-
ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or
sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can
ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
Battery (vehicle)
319
Breakdown assistance
Z
background
R
Make sure that the positive terminal of a
connected battery does not come into con-
tact with vehicle parts.
R
Never place metal objects or tools on a bat-
tery.
R
It is important that you observe the descri-
bed order of the battery terminals when
connecting and disconnecting a battery.
R
When jump-starting, make sure that the
battery poles with identical polarity are
connected.
R
It is particularly important to observe the
described order when connecting and dis-
connecting the jumper cables.
R
Never connect or disconnect the battery
terminals while the engine is running.
G
WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do
not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over
the battery. Keep children away from batter-
ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with
plenty of clean water and seek medical atten-
tion.
All vehicles:
H
Environmental note
Batteries contain dangerous
substances. It is against the
law to dispose of them with
the household rubbish. They
must be collected separately
and recycled to protect the
environment.
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally friendly
manner. Take discharged
batteries to a qualified spe-
cialist workshop or a special
collection point for used bat-
teries.
!
Have the battery regularly checked at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Comply with the service intervals in the Main-
tenance Booklet, or contact a qualified spe-
cialist workshop for more information.
!
Always have work on batteries carried out at
a qualified specialist workshop.
Should it, in exceptional circumstances, be
absolutely necessary to disconnect the 12-
volt battery yourself, please observe the fol-
lowing:
R
Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling
away.
R
Switch off the ignition.
R
Disconnect the negative terminal first and
then the positive terminal.
The transmission is locked in position j
after disconnecting the battery.
After the work has been done, install the bat-
tery and replace the cover of the positive ter-
minal clamp firmly.
Comply with safety precautions and take pro-
tective measures when handling batteries.
Risk of explosion.
Fire, open flames and smoking are
prohibited when handling the bat-
tery. Avoid creating sparks.
Electrolyte or battery acid is corro-
sive. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Wear suitable protective
clothing, especially gloves, apron
and faceguard. Immediately rinse
electrolyte or acid splashes off with
clean water. Contact a physician if
necessary.
Wear eye protection.
Keep children away.
Observe this Operator's Manual.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only use batteries which have
been tested and approved for your vehicle by
320
Battery (vehicle)
Breakdown assistance
background
Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide
increased impact protection to prevent vehicle
occupants from suffering acid burns should the
battery be damaged in the event of an accident.
In order for the battery to achieve the maximum
possible service life, it must always be suffi-
ciently charged.
Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may
discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle.
In this case, have the battery disconnected at a
qualified specialist workshop. You can also
charge the battery with a charger recommended
by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified special-
ist workshop for further information.
Have the battery charge state checked more
frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for short
trips or if you leave it standing idle for a lengthy
period. Consult a qualified specialist workshop
if you wish to leave your vehicle parked for a long
period of time.
Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicle
and do not require any electrical consumers.
The vehicle will then use very little energy, thus
conserving battery power.
Charging the 12 V battery
Vehicles with a lithium-ion battery:
!
Only use battery chargers with a maximum
charging voltage of 14.4 V.
All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium-
ion battery:
!
Only use battery chargers with a maximum
charging voltage of 14.8 V.
G
WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive
gases can escape from the battery. There is a
risk of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient
ventilation while charging and jump-starting.
Do not lean over a battery.
G
WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do
not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over
the battery. Keep children away from batter-
ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with
plenty of clean water and seek medical atten-
tion.
G
WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at tempera-
tures below freezing point. When jump-start-
ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gases
can escape from the battery. There is a risk of
an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before
charging it or jump-starting.
All vehicles:
!
Only charge the battery using the jump-
starting connection point.
The jump-starting connection point is in the
engine compartment (Y page 322).
X
Open the hood.
X
Connect the battery charger to the positive
terminal and ground point in the same order
as when connecting the donor battery in the
jump-starting procedure (Y page 322).
Keep away from fire and open flames. Do not
lean over a battery. Never charge the battery if it
is still installed in the vehicle, unless you use a
battery charger which has been tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz. A battery charger
unit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehi-
cles and tested and approved by Mercedes-
Benz is available as an accessory. It permits the
charging of the battery in its installed position.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for further information and availability. Read the
battery charger's operating instructions before
charging the battery.
All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium-
ion battery: if the warning and indicator lamps
on the instrument cluster do not light up at low
temperatures, it is very likely that the dis-
charged battery has frozen. In this case you may
neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the
battery. The service life of a thawed-out battery
may be shorter. The starting characteristics can
be impaired, particularly at low temperatures.
Have the thawed-out battery checked at a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
Vehicles with a lithium-ion battery: at low
temperatures, do not charge a battery which has
been removed using a battery charger. Allow the
Battery (vehicle)
321
Breakdown assistance
Z
background
battery to warm up gently first, if necessary.
Otherwise, the service life can be shortened and
the starting characteristics impaired, especially
at low temperatures.
Jump-starting
For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point in the engine com-
partment, consisting of a positive terminal and a ground point.
All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium-ion battery:
G
WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the
battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of
clean water and seek medical attention.
G
WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk
of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ven-
tilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.
G
WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks
are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
R
Make sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with
vehicle parts.
R
Never place metal objects or tools on a battery.
R
It is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting
and disconnecting a battery.
R
When jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.
R
It is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting
the jumper cables.
R
Never connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.
G
WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the
vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.
If the warning and indicator lamps do not light up on the instrument cluster when temperatures are
low, it is probably because the discharged battery has frozen. In this case, you may neither charge
the battery nor jump-start the vehicle. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The
starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed battery
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
All vehicles:
322
Jump-starting
Breakdown assistance
background
!
Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be
damaged by the non-combusted fuel.
Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the
engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a donor battery using jumper cables.
Observe the following points:
R
The battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-
start the vehicle using a donor battery or a jump-starting device.
R
you may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.
R
All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium-ion battery: do not start the engine if the battery
is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.
R
Jump-starting may be performed only using batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.
R
Only use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
R
If the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for
a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.
R
Make sure that the two vehicles do not touch.
Make sure that:
R
The jumper cables are not damaged.
R
Bare parts of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal parts while the jumper
cables are connected to the battery.
R
The jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts that can move when the engine is running,
such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.
X
Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.
X
Shift the transmission to position j.
X
Make sure that the ignition is switched off. All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be
off. When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey to position g in the ignition lock and remove it
(Y page 131).
X
Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.
X
Open the hood.
i
Right-hand-drive vehicle: the jump-starting connection points may be located on the other
side of the vehicle.
Position number C identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting
device.
Jump-starting
323
Breakdown assistance
Z
background
X
Lift up panel B.
X
Slide cover A of positive terminal : in the direction of the arrow.
X
Connect positive terminal : on your vehicle to positive terminal ; of donor battery C using the
jumper cable, Always begin with positive terminal : on your own vehicle first.
X
Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
X
Connect negative terminal = of donor battery C to ground point ? of your vehicle using the
jumper cable. beginning with donor battery C first.
X
Start the engine.
X
Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.
X
First, remove the jumper cables from ground point ? and negative terminal =, then from pos-
itive clamp : and positive terminal ;. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle first.
X
Close cover A of positive terminal : after removing jumper cables.
X
Fold panel B shut.
X
Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.
i
Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualified
specialist workshop.
Towing and tow-starting
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Functions relevant to safety are restricted or
no longer available if:
R
the engine is not running.
R
the brake system or the power steering is
malfunctioning.
R
there is a malfunction in the voltage supply
or the vehicle's electrical system.
If your vehicle is being towed, much more
force may be necessary to steer or brake.
There is a risk of an accident.
In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing,
make sure that the steering moves freely.
G
WARNING
You can no longer steer the vehicle if the
steering wheel lock has been engaged. There
is a risk of an accident.
Always switch off the ignition when towing the
vehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar.
G
WARNING
When towing or tow-starting another vehicle
and its weight is greater than the permissible
gross weight of your vehicle, the:
R
the towing eye could detach itself
R
the vehicle/trailer combination could roll-
over.
There is a risk of an accident.
When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,
its weight should not be greater than the per-
missible gross weight of your vehicle.
Details on the permissible gross vehicle weight
of your vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden-
tification plate (Y page 357).
!
When Active Brake Assist, Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC or the HOLD function is
activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in
certain situations.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
these systems in the following or similar sit-
uations:
R
when towing the vehicle
R
in the car wash
!
Make sure that the electric parking brake is
released. If the electric parking brake is faulty,
visit a qualified specialist workshop.
324
Towing and tow-starting
Breakdown assistance
background
!
Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the
towing eyes, or the trailer tow hitch, if availa-
ble. You could otherwise damage the vehicle.
!
Do not use the trailer tow hitch for recovery
or towing. Do not use the towing eye for
recovery. this could damage the vehicle. If in
doubt, have the vehicle recovered using a
crane.
!
When towing, pull away slowly and
smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, the
vehicles could be damaged.
!
Shift the automatic transmission to position
i and do not open the driver's or front pas-
senger's door during towing. The automatic
transmission may otherwise shift to position
j, which could damage the transmission.
!
Do not tow with sling-type equipment. This
could damage the vehicle.
!
You may tow the vehicle for a maximum dis-
tance of 30 miles (50 kilometers). A towing
speed of 30 mph (50 km/h) must not be
exceeded.
For towing distances over 30 miles
(50 kilometers), the entire vehicle must be
raised and transported.
It is better to have the vehicle transported than
to have it towed away.
If the vehicle has suffered transmission damage,
have it transported on a transporter or trailer.
The automatic transmission must be in position
i when the vehicle is being towed. If the auto-
matic transmission cannot be shifted to position
i, have the vehicle transported on a trans-
porter or trailer.
The battery must be connected and charged.
Otherwise, you:
R
cannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in
the ignition lock
R
cannot release the electric parking brake.
R
cannot shift the automatic transmission to
position i
Disarm the automatic locking feature before the
vehicle is towed (Y page 84). You could other-
wise be locked out when pushing or towing the
vehicle.
Installing/removing the towing eye
Installing the towing eye
G
WARNING
The exhaust tail pipe may be very hot. There is
a risk of burns when removing the rear cover.
Do not touch the exhaust pipe. Take particular
care when removing the rear cover.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
All other vehicles
The brackets for the screw-in towing eye are
located in the bumpers. They are at the rear and
at the front, under covers :.
Towing and tow-starting
325
Breakdown assistance
Z
background
X
Remove the towing eye from the retainer
(Y page 314).
X
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: use a suitable
object, e.g. a screwdriver, to pry off cover :
on the front bumper from underneath. Take
the cover from the opening, but do not
remove it.
Press the mark on cover : on the rear
bumper inward and remove.
X
All other vehicles: press the mark on
cover : inward and remove.
X
Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it
will go and tighten it.
Vehicles with a trailer tow hitch do not have a
bracket for the screw-in towing eye at the back.
Connect the towbar to the trailer tow hitch
(Y page 204).
Removing the towing eye
X
Unscrew and remove the towing eye.
X
Attach cover : to the bumper and press until
it engages.
Towing a vehicle with both axles on
the ground
The automatic transmission automatically shifts
to position j when you open the driver's or
front-passenger door or when you remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock. It is essential to
observe the following steps to ensure that the
automatic transmission remains in position i
during towing.
X
Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock.
X
Depress and hold the brake pedal.
X
Shift the automatic transmission to position
i.
X
Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the igni-
tion lock.
X
Release the brake pedal.
X
Release the electric parking brake.
X
Switch on the hazard warning lamps
(Y page 111).
In order to signal a change of direction when
towing the vehicle with the hazard warning
lamps switched on, use the combination switch
as usual. In this case, only the indicator lamps
for the direction of travel flash. After resetting
the combination switch, the hazard warning
lamp starts flashing again.
Transporting the vehicle
General notes
!
When the vehicle is loaded for transport, the
front and rear axles must be stationary and on
the same transportation vehicle. Positioning
over the connection point of the transport
vehicle is not permitted. The drive train may
otherwise be damaged.
!
You may only secure the vehicle by the
wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as
axle or steering components. Otherwise, the
vehicle could be damaged.
The towing eye or trailer tow hitch can be used
to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or transporter if
you wish to transport it.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock.
X
Shift the automatic transmission to position
i.
As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:
X
Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by
applying the electric parking brake.
X
Shift the automatic transmission to position
j.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position g in the igni-
tion lock and remove it.
X
Secure the vehicle.
326
Towing and tow-starting
Breakdown assistance
background
Notes on 4MATIC vehicles
!
Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed
with either the front or the rear axle raised, as
doing so will damage the transmission.
Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towed away
with both axles on the ground or be loaded up
and transported.
If the vehicle's transmission, front, or rear axle is
damaged, have the vehicle transported on a
truck or trailer.
In the event of damage to the electrical sys-
tem: if the battery is defective, the automatic
transmission will be locked in position P. To shift
the automatic transmission to position N, you
must provide power to the vehicle's electrical
system in the same way as when jump-starting
(Y page 322).
Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or
trailer.
Tow-starting (emergency engine
starting)
!
Vehicles with automatic transmission must
not be tow-started. You could otherwise dam-
age the automatic transmission.
i
You can find information on "Jump-starting"
under (Y page 322).
Fuses
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if
you replace it with a fuse with a higher amper-
age, the electric cables could be overloaded.
This could result in a fire. There is a risk of an
accident and injury.
Always replace faulty fuses with the specified
new fuses having the correct amperage.
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the
same rating, which you can recognize by the
color and value. The fuse ratings are listed in the
fuse allocation chart.
The fuse allocation chart is on the fuse box in the
cargo compartment (Y page 328).
If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
cause traced and rectified at a qualified special-
ist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
!
Only use fuses that have been approved for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the
correct fuse rating for the system concerned.
Otherwise, components or systems could be
damaged.
!
Make sure that no moisture can enter the
fuse box when the cover is open.
!
When closing the cover, make sure that it is
lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seep-
ing in or dirt could otherwise impair the oper-
ation of the fuses.
The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down
faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-
nents on the circuit and their functions stop
operating.
Before changing a fuse
Observe the important safety notes
(Y page 327)
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Switch off all electrical consumers.
X
Make sure that the ignition is switched off
(Y page 132).
or
X
When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey
to position u in the ignition lock and remove
it (Y page 131).
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 152).
All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
must be off.
The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:
R
Fuse box on the driver's side of the dashboard
R
Fuse box in the front-passenger footwell
R
Fuse box in the engine compartment on the
driver's side
R
Fuse box under the cargo compartment floor
on the right-hand side of the vehicle, when
viewed in the direction of travel
Fuses
327
Breakdown assistance
Z
background
Dashboard fuse box
The fuse box is under a cover on the side of the
dashboard. You can obtain further information
from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Fuse box in the front passenger foot-
well
X
Open the front-passenger door.
X
To open: fold cover : out towards the rear
and remove it.
X
To close: clip in cover : at the rear.
X
Fold cover : forwards until it engages.
Fuse box in the engine compartment
G
WARNING
When the hood is open and the windshield
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by
the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before opening the hood.
X
Open the hood (Y page 299).
X
To open: turn fasteners ; on cover : coun-
ter-clockwise as far as they will go.
X
Remove fuse box cover : up.
X
Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture from
the fuse box.
X
Loosen screws =, fold up fuse box lid ? and
remove it.
X
To close: check whether the seal is posi-
tioned correctly in lid ?.
X
Insert lid ? into the bracket at the rear of the
fuse box.
X
Fold down lid ? of the fuse box and tighten
screws =.
X
Insert cover : and turn fasteners ; clock-
wise as far as they will go.
X
Close the hood.
Fuse box in the cargo compartment
328
Fuses
Breakdown assistance
background
Opening
X
Open the tailgate.
X
Lift the cargo compartment floor upwards
(Y page 287).
X
Release the Velcro fastener and lift up
cover : in the cavity trim of the cargo com-
partment in the direction of the arrow.
Closing
X
Fold back cover : in the opposite direction
to the arrow and close the Velcro fastener.
Make sure that cover : is in the recess of the
cavity trim provided for it.
i
The fuse allocation chart is located in a
recess at the side of the fuse box. You can find
the corresponding fuse rating and fuse type
on the fuse allocation chart.
Fuses
329
Breakdown assistance
Z
background
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,
the wheel brakes or suspension components
may be damaged. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
Always replace wheels and tires with those
that fulfill the specifications of the original
part.
When replacing wheels, make sure to use the
correct:
R
designation
R
model
When replacing tires, make sure to use the
correct:
R
designation
R
manufacturer
R
model
G
WARNING
A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer-
ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle.
There is a risk of accident.
Tires without run-flat characteristics:
R
do not drive with a flat tire.
R
immediately replace the flat tire with your
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or
consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Tires with run-flat characteristics:
R
pay attention to the information and warn-
ing notices on MOExtended tires (tires with
run-flat characteristics).
Accessories that are not approved for your vehi-
cle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used cor-
rectly can impair the operating safety.
Before purchasing and using non-approved
accessories, visit a qualified specialist work-
shop and inquire about:
R
suitability
R
legal stipulations
R
factory recommendations
Further information regarding wheels and tires
can be found under "Wheel/tire combinations"
(Y page 354).
You can ask for information regarding permitted
wheel-tire combinations at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Information on tire pressure can be found:
R
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the B-pillar on the driver's side
(Y page 340)
R
in the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap
(Y page 333)
R
under "Tire pressure" (Y page 333)
Operation
Information on driving
Check the tire pressure when the vehicle is
heavily laden and adjust prior to a trip.
While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises
and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pull-
ing to one side. This may indicate that the
wheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect that
a tire is defective, reduce your speed immedi-
ately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to
check the wheels and tires for damage. Hidden
tire damage could also be causing the unusual
handling characteristics. If you find no signs of
damage, have the tires and wheels checked at a
qualified specialist workshop.
When parking your vehicle, make sure that the
tires do not get deformed by the curb or other
obstacles. If they cannot be avoided, drive over
obstacles such as curbs slowly and at an obtuse
angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels
or tires.
Regular checking of wheels and tires
G
WARNING
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-
sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of
your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
Check the tires regularly for signs of damage
and replace any damaged tires immediately.
Check wheels and tires for damage at least once
a month. Check wheels and tires after driving
330
Operation
Wheels and tires
background
off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels
can cause a loss of tire pressure.
Pay particular attention to damage such as:
R
Cuts in the tires
R
Punctures in the tires
R
Tears in the tires
R
Bulges on tires
R
Deformation or severe corrosion on wheels
Regularly check the tire tread depth and the
condition of the tread across the whole width of
the tire (Y page 331). If necessary, turn the
front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the
inner side of the tire surface.
All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the
valve against dirt and moisture. Do not mount
anything onto the valve other than the standard
valve cap or other valve caps approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not use any
other valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressure
monitoring systems.
Regularly check the pressure of all the tires par-
ticularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire pres-
sure as necessary (Y page 333).
The service life of tires depends, among other
things, on the following factors:
R
Driving style
R
Tire pressure
R
Distance covered
Notes on tire tread
G
WARNING
Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.
The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.
This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk
of hydroplaning increases, in particular where
speed is not adapted to suit the driving con-
ditions. There is a risk of accident.
If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires
may exhibit different levels of wear at differ-
ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, you
should regularly check the tread depth and
the condition of the tread across the entire
width of all tires.
Minimum tire tread depth for:
R
Summer tires: â in (3 mm)
R
M+S tires: ã in (4 mm)
For safety reasons, replace the tires before
the legally prescribed limit for the minimum
tire tread depth is reached.
Marking : shows where the bar indicator
(arrow) for tread wear is integrated into the tire
tread.
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law.
Six indicators are positioned on the tire tread.
They are visible once a tread depth of approx-
imately á in (1.6 mm) has been reached. If this
is the case, the tire is so worn that it must be
replaced.
Selecting, mounting and replacing
tires
R
Only mount tires and wheels of the same type
and make.
Exception: it is permissible to install a differ-
ent type or make in the event of a flat tire.
Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with
run-flat characteristics" section (Y page 315).
R
Only mount tires of the correct size onto the
wheels.
R
Break in new tires at moderate speeds for the
first 60 miles (100 km). The new tires only
reach their full performance after this dis-
tance.
R
Do not drive with tires which have too little
tread depth, as this significantly reduces the
traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).
R
Replace the tires after six years at the latest,
regardless of wear.
Operation
331
Wheels and tires
Z
background
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat
properties)
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat char-
acteristics), you can continue to drive your vehi-
cle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one
or more tires.
MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunc-
tion with an active tire pressure loss warning
system or with an active tire pressure monitor
and on wheels specifically tested by Mercedes-
Benz.
Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with a
flat tire (Y page 315).
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It
is therefore recommended that you additionally
equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount
tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.
winter tires. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from
a qualified specialist workshop.
Winter operation
General notes
Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified
specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"
section (Y page 350).
Driving with summer tires
At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summer
tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and
braking power. Change the tires on your vehicle
to M+S tires. Using summer tires at very cold
temperatures could cause cracks to form,
thereby damaging the tires permanently.
Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for
this type of damage.
G
WARNING
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-
sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of
your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
Check the tires regularly for signs of damage
and replace any damaged tires immediately.
M+S tires
G
WARNING
M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than
ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter
and do not provide sufficient traction. There is
a risk of an accident.
M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã in
(4 mm) must be replaced immediately.
At temperatures below 45 ‡(+7 †), use winter
tires or all-season tires. Both types of tire are
identified by the M+S marking.
Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake
symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide
the best possible grip in wintry road conditions.
Only these tires will allow driving safety systems
such as ABS and ESP
®
to function optimally in
winter. These tires have been developed specif-
ically for driving in snow.
Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on all
wheels to maintain safe handling characteris-
tics.
Always observe the maximum permissible
speed specified for the M+S tires you have
mounted.
When you have mounted the M+S tires:
X
Check the tire pressures (Y page 336).
X
Vehicles for Canada: restart the tire pres-
sure loss warning system (Y page 337).
X
Restart the tire pressure monitor
(Y page 339).
Snow chains
G
WARNING
If snow chains are installed to the front
wheels, they may drag against the vehicle
body or chassis components. This could
cause damage to the vehicle or the tires.
There is a risk of an accident.
To avoid hazardous situations:
R
never install snow chains to the front
wheels
R
always install snow chains in pairs to the
rear wheels.
332
Winter operation
Wheels and tires
background
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only use snow chains that have
been specially approved for your vehicle by
Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding
standard of quality. For more information,
please contact a qualified specialist workshop.
If you intend to mount snow chains, please bear
the following points in mind:
R
Snow chains may not be mounted on all
wheel/tire combinations. Observe the infor-
mation regarding permitted wheel/tire com-
binations (Y page 354).
R
Only use snow chains when driving on roads
completely covered by snow. Remove the
snow chains as soon as possible when you
come to a road that is not snow-covered.
R
Local regulations may restrict the use of snow
chains. Observe the appropriate regulations if
you wish to mount snow chains.
R
Do not exceed the maximum permissible
speed of 31 mph (50 km/h).
R
On vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL, you
must only drive at raised vehicle level if snow
chains have been installed (Y page 172).
R
When snow chains are installed, never use
Active Parking Assist (Y page 175).
You may wish to deactivate ESP
®
when pulling
away with snow chains installed:
R
All vehicles (except Mercedes‑AMG vehicles)
(Y page 69)
R
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles (Y page 70)
You can thereby allow the wheels to spin in a
controlled manner, achieving an increased driv-
ing force (cutting action).
Tire pressure
Tire pressure specifications
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the
following risks:
R
the tires may burst, especially as the load
and vehicle speed increase.
R
the tires may wear excessively and/or
unevenly, which may greatly impair tire
traction.
R
the driving characteristics, as well as steer-
ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures
and check the pressure of all the tires includ-
ing the spare wheel:
R
monthly, at least
R
if the load changes
R
before beginning a long journey
R
under different operating conditions, e.g.
off-road driving
If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
The data on the Tire and Loading Information
placard and tire pressure table shown here are
examples. Tire pressure specifications are vehi-
cle-specific and may deviate from the data
shown here. The tire pressure specifications
that are valid for your vehicle can be found on
the Tire and Loading Information placard and
tire pressure table on the vehicle.
General notes
The recommended tire pressures for the tires
mounted at the factory can be found on the
labels described here.
Operation with a trailer: the applicable value
for the rear axle is the maximum tire pressure
value stated in the table inside the fuel filler flap.
Further information on tire pressures can be
obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
Tire pressure
333
Wheels and tires
Z
background
Tire and Loading Information placard
:
Recommended tire pressures
The Tire and Loading Information placard is on
the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 340).
The Tire and Loading Information placard con-
tains the recommended tire pressures for cold
tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid
for the maximum permissible load and up to the
maximum permissible vehicle speed.
Tire pressure table
The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel
filler flap. It shows the tire pressure for all tires
permitted at the factory for this vehicle; see
illustration (example).
The tire pressure table contains the recommen-
ded pressures for cold tires for various operat-
ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con-
ditions.
If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tire
pressure information following is only valid for
that tire size. If a speed range precedes the tire
pressure, the following tire pressure data
applies to only this speed range.
The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully
laden" are defined in the table for different num-
bers of occupants and amounts of luggage. The
actual number of seats may differ.
Some tire pressure tables show only the rim
diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. R18.
Rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be
found on the tire sidewall (Y page 345).
If the tire pressures have been set to the lower
values for lighter loads and/or lower road
speeds, the pressures should be reset to the
higher values:
R
if you want to drive with an increased load
and/or
R
if you want to drive at higher road speeds
The tire pressures for increased loads and/or
higher road speeds, shown in the tire pressure
table, may have a negative effect on driving
comfort.
If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this can
lead to an excessive build up of heat and a sud-
den loss of pressure.
For more information, contact a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Important notes on tire pressure
G
WARNING
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the
wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire
pressure that is too low may result in a tire
blow-out. There is a risk of an accident.
R
Check the tire for foreign objects.
R
Check whether the wheel is losing air or the
valve is leaking.
If you are unable to rectify the damage, con-
tact a qualified specialist workshop.
334
Tire pressure
Wheels and tires
background
G
WARNING
If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire
valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and
malfunction, which can cause tire pressure
loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pres-
sure monitors keep the tire valve open. This
can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a
risk of an accident.
Only screw the standard valve cap or other
valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for
your vehicle onto the tire valve.
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire
pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does
not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire
pressure. On vehicles equipped with the elec-
tronic tire pressure monitor, the tire pressure
can be checked in the on-board computer.
The tire temperature and pressure increase
when the vehicle is in motion. This is dependent
on the driving speed and the load.
Therefore, you should only correct tire pres-
sures when the tires are cold.
The tires are cold:
R
if the vehicle has been parked with the tires
out of direct sunlight for at least three hours
and
R
if the vehicle has not been driven further than
1 mile (1.6 km)
The tire temperature changes depending on the
outside temperature, the vehicle speed and the
tire load. If the tire temperature changes by
18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure changes by
approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take
this into account when checking the pressure of
warm tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it is
too low for the current operating conditions. If
you check the tire pressure when the tires are
warm, the resulting value will be higher than if
the tires were cold. This is normal. Do not
reduce the tire pressure to the value specified
for cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwise
be too low.
Observe the recommended tire pressures for
cold tires:
R
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the B-pillar on the driver's side
R
in the tire pressure table on the fuel filler flap
(Y page 333)
Underinflated or overinflated tires
Underinflated tires
G
WARNING
Tires with pressure that is too low can over-
heat and burst as a consequence. In addition,
they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg-
ular wear, which can severely impair the brak-
ing properties and the driving characteristics.
There is a risk of an accident.
Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the
tires, including the spare wheel.
Underinflated tires may:
R
overheat, leading to tire defects
R
adversely affect handling
R
wear excessively and/or unevenly
R
have an adverse effect on fuel consumption
Overinflated tires
G
WARNING
Tires with excessively high pressure can burst
because they are damaged more easily by
road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they
also suffer from irregular wear, which can
severely impair the braking properties and the
driving characteristics. There is a risk of an
accident.
Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the
tires, including the spare wheel.
Overinflated tires may:
R
increase the braking distance
R
adversely affect handling
R
wear excessively and/or unevenly
R
have an adverse effect on ride comfort
R
be more susceptible to damage
Tire pressure
335
Wheels and tires
Z
background
Maximum tire pressures
:
Example: maximum permissible tire pres-
sure
Never exceed the maximum permissible tire
inflation pressure. Always observe the recom-
mended tire pressure for your vehicle when
adjusting the tire pressure (Y page 333).
i
The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-
cific and may deviate from the values in the
illustration.
Checking the tire pressures
Important safety notes
Observe the notes on tire pressure
(Y page 333).
Information on air pressure for the tires on your
vehicle can be found:
R
on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information
placard on the B-pillar
R
in the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap
(Y page 333)
R
in the "Tire pressure" section
Checking tire pressures manually
To determine and set the correct tire pressure,
proceed as follows:
X
Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to be
checked.
X
Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto
the valve.
X
Read the tire pressure and compare it to the
recommended value on the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the tire pressure table
(Y page 333).
X
If the tire pressure is too low, increase the tire
pressure to the recommended value.
X
If the tire pressure is too high, release air. To
do so, press down the metal pin in the valve,
using the tip of a pen for example. Then check
the tire pressure again using the tire pressure
checker.
X
Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
X
Repeat these steps for the other tires.
Tire pressure loss warning system
General notes
While the vehicle is in motion, the tire pressure
loss warning system monitors the set tire pres-
sure using the rotational speed of the wheels.
This enables the system to detect significant
pressure loss in a tire. If the speed of rotation of
a wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure,
a corresponding warning message will appear in
the multifunction display.
You can recognize the tire pressure loss warning
by the Run Flat Indicator ActiveRun Flat Indicator Active PressPress
'OK' to Restart'OK' to Restart message which appears in
the ServiceService menu of the multifunction display.
Information on the message display can be
found in the "Restarting the tire pressure loss
warning system" section (Y page 337).
Important safety notes
The tire pressure warning system does not warn
you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe
the notes on the recommended tire pressure
(Y page 333).
The tire pressure loss warning does not replace
the need to regularly check the tire pressure. An
even loss of pressure on several tires at the
same time cannot be detected by the tire pres-
sure loss warning system.
The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you
of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is
penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a
sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a
halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering
movements.
The function of the tire pressure loss warning
system is limited or delayed if:
R
snow chains are mounted on your vehicle's
tires.
R
road conditions are wintry.
336
Tire pressure
Wheels and tires
background
R
you are driving on sand or gravel.
R
you adopt a very sporty driving style (corner-
ing at high speeds or driving with high rates of
acceleration).
R
you are towing a very heavy or large trailer.
R
you are driving with a heavy load (in the vehi-
cle or on the roof).
Restarting the tire pressure loss warn-
ing system
Restart the tire pressure loss warning system if
you have:
R
changed the tire pressure
R
changed the wheels or tires
R
mounted new wheels or tires
X
Before restarting, make sure that the tire
pressures are set properly on all four tires for
the respective operating conditions.
The recommended tire pressure can be found
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the B-pillar. Additionally, a tire pressure
table is attached to the fuel filler flap. The tire
pressure loss warning system can only give
reliable warnings if you have set the correct
tire pressure. If an incorrect tire pressure is
set, these incorrect values will be monitored.
X
Also observe the notes in the section on tire
pressures (Y page 333).
X
Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2
in the ignition lock (Y page 131).
X
Press ò on the steering wheel to call up
the menu list.
X
Press 9 or : on the steering wheel to
select the Service
Service menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Press 9 or : to select Tire Pres‐Tire Pres‐
suresure.
X
Press a to confirm.
The Run Flat Indicator ActiveRun Flat Indicator Active PressPress
'OK' to Restart'OK' to Restart message is shown in the
multifunction display.
If you wish to confirm the restart:
X
Press the a button.
The Tire Pressure Now OK?
Tire Pressure Now OK? message is
shown on the multifunction display.
X
Press 9 or : to select YesYes.
X
Press a to confirm.
The Run Flat Indicator RestartedRun Flat Indicator Restarted mes-
sage is shown on the multifunction display.
After a teach-in period, the tire pressure loss
warning system will monitor the set tire pres-
sures of all four tires.
If you wish to cancel the restart:
X
Press the % button.
or
X
If the Tire Pressure Now OK?Tire Pressure Now OK? message
appears, press 9 or : to select Can‐Can‐
celcel.
X
Press a to confirm.
The tire pressure values stored at the last
restart will continue to be monitored.
Tire pressure monitor
General notes
If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehi-
cle's wheels have sensors that monitor the tire
pressures in all four tires. The tire pressure mon-
itor warns you if the pressure drops in one or
more of the tires. The tire pressure monitor only
functions if the corresponding sensors are
installed in all wheels.
Information on tire pressures is displayed in the
multifunction display. After a few minutes of
driving, the current tire pressure of each tire is
shown in the ServiceService menu of the multifunction
display; see illustration (example).
Tire pressure
337
Wheels and tires
Z
background
Information on the message display can be
found in the "Checking the tire pressure elec-
tronically" section (Y page 339).
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked at least once every two
weeks when cold and inflated to the pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pres-
sure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If
your vehicle has tires of a different size than
the size indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information placard or, if available, the tire
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-
sure telltale when one or more of your tires
are significantly underinflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale lights up,
you should stop and check your tires as soon
as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly underin-
flated tire causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's
handling and stopping ability. Please note that
the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver's responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if
underinflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres-
sure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys-
tem detects a malfunction, the warning lamp
will flash for approximately a minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will be repeated every time the vehi-
cle is started as long as the malfunction
exists. When the malfunction indicator is illu-
minated, the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of incom-
patible replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one
or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate Tires
and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire
pressure to that recommended for cold tires
which is suitable for the operating situation
(Y page 333). Note that the correct tire pressure
for the current operating situation must first be
taught-in to the tire pressure monitor. If a sub-
stantial loss of pressure occurs, the warning
threshold for the warning message is aligned to
the taught-in reference values. Restart the tire
pressure monitor after adjusting the pressure of
the cold tires (Y page 339). The current pres-
sures are saved as new reference values. As a
result, a warning message will appear if the tire
pressure drops significantly.
The tire pressure monitor does not warn you of
an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the
notes on the recommended tire pressure
(Y page 333).
The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you
of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is
penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a
sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a
halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering
movements.
The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warning
lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating
pressure loss or a malfunction. Whether the
warning lamp flashes or lights up indicates
whether a tire pressure is too low or the tire
pressure monitor is malfunctioning:
R
if the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tire
pressure on one or more tires is significantly
338
Tire pressure
Wheels and tires
background
too low. The tire pressure monitor is not mal-
functioning.
R
if the warning lamp flashes for around a
minute and then remains lit constantly, the
tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.
In addition to the warning lamp, a message
appears in the multifunction display. Observe
the information on display messages
(Y page 250).
It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunction
of the tire pressure monitor to be indicated. A
malfunction will be indicated by the tire pres-
sure warning lamp flashing for approximately
one minute and then remaining lit. When the
malfunction has been rectified, the tire pressure
warning lamp goes out after a few minutes of
driving.
The tire pressure values indicated by the on-
board computer may differ from those meas-
ured at a gas station with a pressure gauge. The
tire pressures shown by the on-board computer
refer to those measured at sea level. At high
altitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by a
pressure gauge are higher than those shown by
the on-board computer. In this case, do not
reduce the tire pressures.
The operation of the tire pressure monitor can
be affected by interference from radio transmit-
ting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way
radios) that may be being operated in or near the
vehicle.
Checking the tire pressure electroni-
cally
X
Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2
(Y page 131) in the ignition lock.
X
Press ò on the steering wheel to call up
the menu list.
X
Press 9 or : on the steering wheel to
select the ServiceService menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Press 9 or : to select Tire Pres‐Tire Pres‐
suresure.
X
Press a to confirm.
The multifunction display shows the current
tire pressure of each wheel.
If the vehicle was parked for longer than
20 minutes, the following message appears:
TireTire pressurepressure willwill bebe displayeddisplayed afterafter
driving a few minutesdriving a few minutes.
After a teach-in process, the tire pressure mon-
itor automatically detects new wheels or new
sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tire
pressure value to the individual wheels is not
possible, the Tire
Tire PressurePressure MonitorMonitor ActiveActive
message is shown instead of the tire pressure
display. The tire pressures are already being
monitored.
Tire pressure monitor warning mes-
sages
If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure
loss in one or more tires, a warning message is
shown in the multifunction display. The yellow
tire pressure warning lamp then lights up.
R
If the Please Correct Tire PressurePlease Correct Tire Pressure
message appears in the multifunction display,
the tire pressure in at least one tire is too low.
The tire pressure must be corrected when the
opportunity arises.
R
If the Check TiresCheck Tires message appears in the
multifunction display, the tire pressure in one
or more tires has dropped significantly. The
tires must be checked.
R
If the WarningWarning TireTire MalfunctionMalfunction message
appears in the multifunction display, the tire
pressure in one or more tires has dropped
suddenly. The tires must be checked.
Be sure to observe the instructions and safety
notes in the display messages in the "Tires" sec-
tion (Y page 250).
If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rotated,
the tire pressures may be displayed for the
wrong positions for a short time. This is rectified
after a few minutes of driving, and the tire pres-
sures are displayed for the correct positions.
Restarting the tire pressure monitor
When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all
existing warning messages are deleted and the
warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the cur-
rently set tire pressures as the reference values
for monitoring. In most cases, the tire pressure
monitor will automatically detect the new refer-
ence values after you have changed the tire
pressure. However, you can also set reference
values manually as described here. The tire
pressure monitor then monitors the new tire
pressure values.
X
Set the tire pressure to the value recommen-
ded for the corresponding driving situation on
Tire pressure
339
Wheels and tires
Z
background
the Tire and Loading Information placard on
the B-pillar on the driver's side.
You can find more tire pressures for various
operating conditions in the tire pressure table
inside the filler flap.
Observe the information on tire pressure
when doing so (Y page 333).
X
Make sure that the tire pressure is correct on
all four wheels.
X
Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2
in the ignition lock (Y page 131).
X
Press ò on the steering wheel to call up
the menu list.
X
Press 9 or : on the steering wheel to
select the ServiceService menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Press 9 or : to select Tire Pres‐Tire Pres‐
suresure.
X
Press a to confirm.
The multifunction display shows the current
tire pressure of each wheel or the TireTire
pressure will be displayed afterpressure will be displayed after
driving a few minutesdriving a few minutes message.
X
Press the : button.
The UseUse CurrentCurrent PressuresPressures asas NewNew Ref‐Ref‐
erence Valueserence Values message is shown on the
multifunction display.
If you wish to confirm the restart:
X
Press the a button.
The Tire
Tire Press.Press. MonitorMonitor RestartedRestarted mes-
sage is shown on the multifunction display.
After driving for a few minutes, the system
checks whether the current tire pressures are
within the specified range. The new tire pres-
sures are then accepted as reference values
and monitored.
If you wish to cancel the restart:
X
Press the % button.
The tire pressure values stored at the last
restart will continue to be monitored.
Radio type approval for the tire pres-
sure monitor
Country Radio type approval number
USA FCC ID: MRXGG4
FCC ID: MRXMC34MA4
Canada IC: 2546A-GG4
Loading the vehicle
Instruction labels for tires and loads
G
WARNING
Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a
blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the
steering and driving characteristics and lead
to brake failure. There is a risk of accident.
Observe the load rating of the tires. The load
rating must be at least half of the GAWR of
your vehicle. Never overload the tires by
exceeding the maximum load.
Two instruction labels on your vehicle show the
maximum possible load.
(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard is
on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tire
and Loading Information placard shows the
maximum permissible number of occu-
pants and the maximum permissible vehicle
load. It also contains details of the tire sizes
and corresponding pressures for tires
mounted at the factory.
(2) The vehicle identification plate is on the B-
pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle iden-
tification plate informs you of the gross
vehicle weight rating. It is made up of the
vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the
fuel and the cargo. You can also find infor-
mation about the maximum gross axle
weight rating on the front and rear axle.
The maximum gross axle weight rating is
the maximum weight that can be carried by
one axle (front or rear axle). Never exceed
the maximum load or the maximum gross
axle weight rating for the front or rear axle.
340
Loading the vehicle
Wheels and tires
background
:
B-pillar, driver's side
Maximum permissible gross vehicle
weight rating
X
Specification for maximum gross vehicle
weight : is listed in the Tire and Loading
Information placard: "The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs."
The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load
and luggage must not exceed the specified
value.
i
The specifications shown on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in the illustration
are examples. The maximum permissible
gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specific
and may differ from that in the illustration.
You can find the valid maximum permissible
gross vehicle weight rating for your vehicle on
the Tire and Loading Information placard.
Number of seats
Maximum number of seats : indicates the
maximum number of occupants allowed to
travel in the vehicle. This information can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information plac-
ard.
i
The specifications shown on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in the illustration
are examples. The number of seats is vehicle-
specific and can differ from the details shown.
The number of seats in your vehicle can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information
placard.
Determining the correct load limit
Step-by-step instructions
The following steps have been developed as
required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pur-
suant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle
Safety Act of 1966".
X
Step 1: Locate the statement "The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's
Tire and Loading Information placard.
X
Step 2: Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
X
Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or
XXX lbs.
X
Step 4: The resulting figure equals the avail-
able amount of cargo and luggage load capa-
city. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150-lb pas-
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
Loading the vehicle
341
Wheels and tires
Z
background
able cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
X
Step 5: Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehi-
cle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity cal-
culated in step 4.
Example: steps 1 to 3
The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying
seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit of
1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load
limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (Y page 340).
The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.
Step 1
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
Combined maximum
weight of occupants
and load (data from the
Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard)
1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)
Step 2
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
Number of people in
the vehicle (driver and
occupants)
5 3 1
Distribution of the
occupants
Front: 2
Rear: 3
Front: 1
Rear: 2
Front: 1
Weight of the occu-
pants
Occupant 1: 150 lbs
(68 kg)
Occupant 2: 180 lbs
(82 kg)
Occupant 3: 160 lbs
(73 kg)
Occupant 4: 140 lbs
(63 kg)
Occupant 5: 120 lbs
(54 kg)
Occupant 1: 200 lbs
(91 kg)
Occupant 2: 190 lbs
(86 kg)
Occupant 3: 150 lbs
(68 kg)
Occupant 1: 150 lbs
(68 kg)
Gross weight of all
occupants
750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
342
Loading the vehicle
Wheels and tires
background
Step 3
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
Permissible load (maxi-
mum gross vehicle
weight rating from the
Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard minus
the gross weight of all
occupants)
1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò
750 lbs (340 kg) =
750 lbs (340 kg)
1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò
540 lbs (245 kg)
=960 lbs (435 kg)
1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò
150 lbs (68 kg) =
1350 lbs (612 kg)
Vehicle identification plate
Even if you have calculated the total cargo care-
fully, you should still make sure that the gross
vehicle weight rating and the gross axle weight
rating are not exceeded. Details can be found on
the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on
the driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 340).
Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR): the gross weight of the vehicle, all pas-
sengers, load and trailer load/noseweight (if
applicable) must not exceed the permissible
gross vehicle weight.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the maxi-
mum permissible load that can be carried by one
axle (front or rear axle).
To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed the
maximum permissible values (gross vehicle
weight and maximum gross axle weight rating),
have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occu-
pants, cargo, and full trailer load if applicable)
weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge.
All about wheels and tires
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand-
ards
Overview of Tire Quality Grading Stand-
ards
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S.
government specifications. Their purpose is to
provide drivers with uniform reliable information
on tire performance data. Tire manufacturers
have to grade tires using three performance fac-
tors: : tread wear grade, ; traction grade and
= temperature grade. These regulations do not
apply to Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold in
North America are provided with the corre-
sponding quality grading markings on the side-
wall of the tire.
Quality grades can be found, where applicable,
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width.
Example:
R
Treadwear grade: 200
R
Traction grade: AA
R
Temperature grade: A
All passenger car tires must conform to the stat-
utory safety requirements in addition to these
grades.
All about wheels and tires
343
Wheels and tires
Z
background
i
The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-
cific and may deviate from the values in the
illustration.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified U.S.
government course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half times as well
on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon
the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices
and differences in road characteristics and cli-
mate.
Traction
G
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor-
nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char-
acteristics.
!
Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage to
the drive train.
The traction grades – from highest to lowest –
are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as meas-
ured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and con-
crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy
road is always lower than on dry road surfaces.
You should pay special attention to road condi-
tions when temperatures are around freezing
point.
Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum tread
depth of ã in (4 mm) on all four winter tires.
Observe the legally required minimum tire tread
depth (Y page 331). Winter tires can reduce the
braking distance on snow-covered surfaces in
comparison with summer tires. The braking dis-
tance is still much further than on surfaces that
are not icy or covered with snow. Take appro-
priate care when driving.
Further information on winter tires (M+S tires)
(Y page 332).
Temperature
G
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause excessive heat
build-up and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus-
tained high temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by law.
344
All about wheels and tires
Wheels and tires
background
Tire labeling
Overview
:
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard
(Y page 348)
;
DOT, Tire Identification Number
(Y page 347)
=
Maximum tire load (Y page 347)
?
Manufacturer
A
Maximum tire pressure (Y page 336)
B
Tire material (Y page 348)
C
Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity
and speed rating (Y page 345)
D
Load index (Y page 347)
E
Tire name
The markings described above are on the tire in
addition to the tire name (sales designation) and
the manufacturer's name.
i
Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
from the data in the example.
Tire size designation, load-bearing
capacity and speed rating
G
WARNING
Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-
city and the approved maximum speed could
lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There
is a risk of accident.
Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model. Observe the
tire load rating and speed rating required for
your vehicle.
:
Tire width
;
Nominal aspect ratio in %
=
Tire code
?
Rim diameter
A
Load bearing index
B
Speed rating
General: depending on the manufacturer's
standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall may
not contain any letters or may contain one letter
that precedes the size description.
If there is no letter preceding the size descrip-
tion (as shown above): these are passenger
vehicle tires according to European manufac-
turing standards.
If "P" precedes the size description: these are
passenger vehicle tires according to U.S. man-
ufacturing standards.
If "LT" precedes the size description: these are
light truck tires according to U.S. manufacturing
standards.
If "T" precedes the size description: compact
emergency wheels with high tire pressure that
are only designed for temporary use in an emer-
gency.
Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal tire
width in millimeters.
Height-width ratio: aspect ratio ; is the size
ratio between the tire height and tire width and
is shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calcula-
ted by dividing the tire width by the tire height.
Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type.
"R" represents radial tires; "D" represents diag-
onal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires.
Optionally, tires with a maximum permissible
speed of over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have
All about wheels and tires
345
Wheels and tires
Z
background
"ZR" in the size description, depending on the
manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).
Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the diameter
of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim
flange. The rim diameter is specified in
inches (in).
Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A is a
numerical code that specifies the maximum
load-bearing capacity of a tire.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit. The maximum permissible
load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on
the driver's side (Y page 340).
Example:
Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum
load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can bear.
For further information on the maximum tire
load in kilograms and lbs, see (Y page 347).
For further information on the load bearing
index, see "Load index" (Y page 347).
Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the
maximum permissible speed of the tire.
i
Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
from the data in the example.
Regardless of the speed rating, always observe
the speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt your
driving style to the traffic conditions.
Summer tires
Index Speed rating
Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)
R
Optionally, tires with a maximum permissible
speed of over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have
"ZR" in the size description, depending on the
manufacturer, e.g. 245/40 ZR18.
The service specification is made up of load-
bearing index A and speed rating B.
R
If the size description of your tire includes
"ZR" and there are no service specifications,
ask the tire manufacturer in order to find out
the maximum permissible speed.
If a service specification is available, the max-
imum permissible speed is limited according
to the speed rating in the service specifica-
tion. Example: 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this
example, "97 Y" is the service specification.
The letter "Y" represents the speed rating. The
maximum permissible speed of the tire is limi-
ted to 186 mph (300 km/h).
R
The size description for all tires with maxi-
mum permissible speeds of over 186 mph
(300 km/h) must include "ZR", and the ser-
vice specification must be given in parenthe-
ses. Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed
rating "(Y)" indicates that the maximum per-
missible speed of the tire is over 186 mph
(300 km/h). To find out the maximum per-
missible speed, ask the tire manufacturer.
All-weather tires and winter tires
Index Speed rating
Q M+S
1
up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
T M+S
1
up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H M+S
1
up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V M+S
1
up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
i
Not all tires with the M+S marking provide
the driving characteristics of winter tires. In
addition to the M+S marking, winter tires also
have the i snowflake symbol on the tire
wall. Tires with this marking fulfill the require-
ments of the Rubber Manufacturers Associa-
tion (RMA) and the Rubber Association of
Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on
snow. They have been especially developed
for driving on snow.
An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehi-
cle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph
(210 km/h).
1
Or M+S i for winter tires.
346
All about wheels and tires
Wheels and tires
background
The speed rating of tires mounted at the factory
may be higher than the maximum permissible
speed permitted by the electronic speed limiter.
Make sure that your tires have the required
speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. You
can find information on this under "Tires"
(Y page 354).
Further information about reading tire data can
be obtained from any qualified specialist work-
shop.
Load index
In addition to the load-bearing index, load
index : may also be imprinted on the sidewall
of the tire. You will find this after the letter that
identifies the speed rating (Y page 345).
R
If no specification is given: no text (as in the
example above), represents a standard load
(SL) tire
R
XL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tire
R
Light Load: represents a light load tire
R
C, D, E: represents a load range that depends
on the maximum load that the tire can carry at
a certain pressure
i
Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
from the data in the example.
Maximum load rating
Maximum tire load : is the maximum permis-
sible weight for which the tire is approved.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit. The maximum permissible
load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on
the driver's side (Y page 340).
i
The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-
cific and may deviate from the values in the
illustration.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
US tire regulations stipulate that every tire man-
ufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on
the sidewall of each tire produced.
The TIN is a unique identification number. The
TIN enables the tire manufacturers or retreaders
to inform purchasers of recalls and other safety-
relevant matters. It makes it possible for the
purchaser to easily identify the affected tires.
The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifica-
tion code ;, tire size =, tire type code ? and
manufacturing date A.
DOT (Department of Transportation): tire
symbol : marks that the tire complies with the
All about wheels and tires
347
Wheels and tires
Z
background
requirements of the U.S. Department of Trans-
portation.
Manufacturer identification code: manufac-
turer identification code ; provides details on
the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code
with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code
with four symbols.
For further information about retreaded tires,
see (Y page 354).
Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size.
Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used by
the manufacturer as a code to describe specific
characteristics of the tire.
Date of manufacture: date of manufacture A
provides information about the age of a tire. The
first and second positions represent the week of
manufacture, starting with "01" for the first cal-
endar week. Positions three and four represent
the year of manufacture. For example, a tire that
is marked "3214" was manufactured in week 32
in 2014.
i
Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
from the data in the example.
Tire characteristics
This information describes the type of tire cord
and the number of layers in sidewall : and
under tire tread ;.
i
Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
from the data in the example.
Definition of terms for tires and loading
Tire ply composition and material used
Describes the number of plies or the number of
layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread
and sidewall. These are made of steel, nylon,
polyester and other materials.
Bar
Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds
per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa)
are the equivalent of 1 bar.
DOT (Department of Transportation)
DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of the
U S Department of Transportation.
Normal occupant weight
The number of occupants for which the vehicle
is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs).
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
A uniform standard to grade the quality of tires
with regards to tread quality, tire traction and
temperature characteristics. The quality grad-
ing assessment is made by the manufacturer
following specifications from the U.S. govern-
ment. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of
the tire.
Recommended tire pressures
The recommended tire pressure applies to the
tires mounted at the factory.
The Tire and Loading Information placard con-
tains the recommended tire pressures for cold
tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maxi-
mum permissible vehicle speed.
The tire pressure table contains the recommen-
ded pressures for cold tires for various operat-
ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con-
ditions.
Increased vehicle weight due to optional
equipment
The combined weight of all standard and
optional equipment available for the vehicle,
regardless of whether it is actually installed on
the vehicle or not.
Rim
This is the part of the wheel on which the tire is
mounted.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight
rating. The actual load on an axle must never
exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross
axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle
identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's
side.
348
All about wheels and tires
Wheels and tires
background
Speed rating
The speed rating is part of the tire identification.
It specifies the speed range for which the tire is
approved.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
The gross vehicle weight includes the weight of
the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel,
accessories installed, occupants, luggage and
the drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross
vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehi-
cle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehi-
cle identification plate on the B-pillar on the
driver's side.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross
weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of the
vehicle including all accessories, occupants,
fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if
applicable). The gross vehicle weight rating is
specified on the vehicle identification plate on
the B-pillar on the driver's side.
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The maximum weight is the sum of:
R
the curb weight of the vehicle
R
the weight of the accessories
R
the load limit
R
the weight of the factory installed optional
equipment
Kilopascal (kPa)
Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre-
sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is
bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of
1 bar.
Load index
In addition to the load-bearing index, the load
index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of
the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacity
more precisely.
Curb weight
The weight of a vehicle with standard equipment
including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant. It also includes the air-conditioning sys-
tem and optional equipment if these are instal-
led in the vehicle, but does not include passen-
gers or luggage.
Maximum load rating
The maximum tire load is the maximum permis-
sible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is
approved.
Maximum permissible tire pressure
Maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire.
Maximum load on one tire
Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by
dividing the maximum axle load of one axle by
two.
PSI (pounds per square inch)
A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.
Aspect ratio
Relationship between tire height and tire width
in percent.
Tire pressure
This is pressure inside the tire applying an out-
ward force to each square inch of the tire's sur-
face. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per
square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar.
The tire pressure should only be corrected when
the tires are cold.
Cold tire pressure
The tires are cold:
R
if the vehicle has been parked with the tires
out of direct sunlight for at least three hours
and
R
if the vehicle has not been driven further than
1 mile (1.6 km)
Tread
The part of the tire that comes into contact with
the road.
Bead
The tire bead ensures that the tire sits securely
on the wheel. There are several steel wires in the
bead to prevent the tire from coming loose from
the wheel rim.
Sidewall
The part of the tire between the tread and the
bead.
All about wheels and tires
349
Wheels and tires
Z
background
Weight of optional extras
The combined weight of those optional extras
that weigh more than the replaced standard
parts and more than 5 lbs (2.3 kg). These
optional extras, such as high-performance
brakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-per-
formance battery, are not included in the curb
weight and the weight of the accessories.
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
This is a unique identifier which can be used by
a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example
for a product recall, and thus identify the pur-
chasers. The TIN is made up of the manufactur-
er's identity code, tire size, tire type code and
the manufacturing date.
Load bearing index
The load bearing index (also load index) is a code
that contains the maximum load bearing capa-
city of a tire.
Traction
Traction is the result of friction between the tires
and the road surface.
Treadwear indicators
Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distrib-
uted over the tire tread. If the tire tread is level
with the bars, the wear limit of á in (1.6 mm)
has been reached.
Occupant distribution
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their
designated seating positions.
Total load limit
Nominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg
(150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats in
the vehicle.
Changing a wheel
Flat tire
The "Breakdown assistance" section
(Y page 315) contains information and notes on
how to deal with a flat tire. Information on driv-
ing with MOExtended tires in the event of a flat
tire can be found under "MOExtended tires (tires
with run-flat characteristics" (Y page 315).
Rotating the wheels
G
WARNING
Interchanging the front and rear wheels may
severely impair the driving characteristics if
the wheels or tires have different dimensions.
The wheel brakes or suspension components
may also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-
dent.
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels
and tires are of the same dimensions.
!
On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure
monitor, electronic components are located
in the wheel.
Tire-mounting tools should not be used near
the valve. This could damage the electronic
components.
Only have tires changed at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Always observe the instructions and safety
notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section
(Y page 351).
The wear patterns on the front and rear tires
differ, depending on the operating conditions.
Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern
has formed on the tires. Front tires typically
wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires in
the center.
On vehicles that have the same size front and
rear wheels, you can rotate the wheels accord-
ing to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's
warranty book in your vehicle documents. If no
warranty book is available, the tires should be
rotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to
10,000 km). Depending on tire wear, this may
be required earlier. Do not change the direction
of wheel rotation.
Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the
brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is rota-
ted. Check the tire pressure and, if necessary,
restart the tire pressure loss warning system
(Y page 337) or the tire pressure monitor
(Y page 339).
Direction of rotation
Tires with a specified direction of rotation have
additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydro-
planing. These advantages can only be gained if
350
Changing a wheel
Wheels and tires
background
the tires are installed corresponding to the
direction of rotation.
An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates its
correct direction of rotation.
Storing wheels
Store wheels that are not being used in a cool,
dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tires
from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.
Mounting a wheel
Preparing the vehicle
X
Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
level ground.
X
Apply the electric parking brake manually.
X
Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead
position.
X
Shift the transmission to position j.
X
Make sure that the vehicle level is set to "Nor-
mal" on vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL
(Y page 173).
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function
or KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door.
The vehicle electronics are now in position
u. This is the same as "Key removed".
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function
or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop but-
ton from the ignition lock (Y page 132).
X
Make sure that the engine cannot be started
via your smartphone (Y page 134).
X
If included in the vehicle equipment, remove
the tire-change tool kit from the vehicle.
X
Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away.
Securing the vehicle to prevent it from
rolling away
If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, it
can be found in the tire-change tool kit
(Y page 314).
The folding wheel chock is an additional safety
measure to prevent the vehicle from rolling
away, for example when changing a wheel.
X
Fold both plates upwards :.
X
Fold out lower plate ;.
X
Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the
openings in base plate =.
X
Place chocks or other suitable items under
the front and rear of the wheel that is diago-
nally opposite the wheel you wish to change.
Raising the vehicle
G
WARNING
If you do not position the jack correctly at the
appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the
jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.
There is a risk of injury.
Only position the jack at the appropriate jack-
ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jack
Changing a wheel
351
Wheels and tires
Z
background
must be positioned vertically, directly under
the jacking point of the vehicle.
!
Only position the jack at the appropriate
jacking point of the vehicle. Otherwise, you
could damage the vehicle.
Observe the following when raising the vehi-
cle:
R
To raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-spe-
cific jack that has been tested and approved
by Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, the
jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.
R
The jack is designed only to raise and hold the
vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being
changed. It must not be used for performing
maintenance work under the vehicle.
R
Avoid changing the wheel on uphill and down-
hill slopes.
R
Before raising the vehicle, secure it from roll-
ing away by applying the parking brake and
inserting wheel chocks. Do not disengage the
parking brake while the vehicle is raised.
R
The jack must be placed on a firm, flat and
non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large,
flat, load-bearing underlay must be used. On a
slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be
used, e.g. rubber mats.
R
Do not use wooden blocks or similar objects
as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not
be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity
due to the restricted height.
R
Make sure that the distance between the
underside of the tires and the ground does not
exceed 1.2 in (3 cm).
R
Do not place your hands or feet under the
raised vehicle.
R
Do not lie under the vehicle.
R
Do not start the engine when the vehicle is
raised.
R
Never open or close a door or the tailgate
when the vehicle is raised.
R
Make sure that no persons are present in the
vehicle when the vehicle is raised.
X
Using lug wrench :, loosen the bolts on the
wheel you wish to change by about one full
turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely.
The jacking points are located just behind the
front wheel housings and just in front of the rear
wheel housings (arrows).
X
Take the ratchet wrench out of the tire-chang-
ing tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of
the jack so that the letters AUF are visible.
X
Position jack = at jacking point ;.
352
Changing a wheel
Wheels and tires
background
X
Make sure the foot of the jack is directly
beneath the jacking point.
X
Turn ratchet wrench ? until jack = sits
completely on jacking point ; and the base
of the jack lies evenly on the ground.
X
Turn ratchet wrench ? until the tire is raised
a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) off the ground.
Removing a wheel
!
Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty
surface. The bolt and wheel hub threads could
otherwise be damaged when you screw them
in.
X
Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com-
pletely.
X
Screw alignment bolt : into the thread
instead of the wheel bolt.
X
Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.
X
Remove the wheel.
Mounting a new wheel
G
WARNING
Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged
wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel
bolts to come loose. As a result, you could
lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of
accident.
Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of
damage to the threads, contact a qualified
specialist workshop immediately. Have the
damaged wheel bolts or hub threads
replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.
G
WARNING
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip
over. There is a risk of injury.
Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is on the ground.
Always pay attention to the instructions and
safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section
(Y page 350).
Only use wheel bolts that have been designed
for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-
sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
only use wheel bolts which have been approved
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective
wheel.
!
To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold
the wheel securely against the wheel hub
while screwing in the first wheel bolt.
X
Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact sur-
faces.
X
Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the align-
ment bolt and push it on.
X
Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-
tight.
X
Unscrew the alignment bolt.
X
Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-
tight.
Changing a wheel
353
Wheels and tires
Z
background
Lowering the vehicle
G
WARNING
The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts
and bolts are not tightened to the specified
tightening torque. There is a risk of accident.
Have the tightening torque immediately
checked at a qualified specialist workshop
after a wheel is changed.
X
Place the ratchet wrench onto the hexagon
nut of the jack so that the letters AB are visi-
ble.
X
Turn the ratchet wrench until the vehicle is
once again standing firmly on the ground.
X
Place the jack to one side.
X
Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise
pattern in the sequence indicated (: to A).
The tightening torque must be 111 lb-ft
(150 Nm).
X
Turn the jack back to its initial position.
X
Stow the jack and the rest of the tire-change
tool kit in the cargo compartment again.
X
Check the tire pressure of the newly mounted
wheel and adjust it if necessary.
Observe the recommended tire pressure
(Y page 333).
When you are driving with the collapsible spare
wheel mounted, the tire pressure loss warning
system or the tire pressure monitor cannot func-
tion reliably. Only restart the tire pressure loss
warning system or tire pressure monitor when
the defective wheel has been replaced with a
new wheel.
Vehicles with a tire pressure control sys-
tem: all installed wheels must be equipped with
functioning sensors.
Wheel/tire combination
You can ask for information regarding permitted
wheel/tire combinations at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
!
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only use tires and wheels
which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz
specifically for your vehicle.
These tires have been specially adapted for
use with the control systems, such as ABS or
ESP
®
, and are marked as follows:
R
MO = Mercedes-Benz Original
R
MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)
R
MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-
tain AMG tires)
Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires may
only be used on wheels that have been spe-
cifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Only use tires, wheels or accessories tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain
characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise
emissions or fuel consumption, may other-
wise be adversely affected. In addition, when
driving with a load, tire dimension variations
could cause the tires to come into contact
with the bodywork and axle components. This
could result in damage to the tires or the vehi-
cle.
Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for dam-
age resulting from the use of tires, wheels or
accessories other than those tested and
approved.
Information on tires, wheels and approved
combinations can be obtained from any quali-
fied specialist workshop.
!
Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec-
ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previ-
ous damage cannot always be detected on
retreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes-Benz
cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded
tires are mounted. Do not mount used tires if
you have no information about their previous
usage.
The recommended pressures for various oper-
ating conditions can be found:
R
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the B-pillar on the driver's side
R
in the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap
354
Wheel/tire combination
Wheels and tires
background
Observe the notes on recommended tire pres-
sures under various operating conditions
(Y page 333).
Check tire pressures regularly, and only when
the tires are cold. Comply with the maintenance
recommendations of the tire manufacturer in
the vehicle document wallet.
Notes on the vehicle equipment – always equip
the vehicle:
R
with tires of the same size on a given axle (left
and right)
R
with the same type of tires at a given time
(summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended
tires)
Exception: it is permissible to install a differ-
ent type or make in the event of a flat tire.
Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with
run-flat characteristics" section (Y page 315).
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It
is therefore recommended that you additionally
equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount
tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.
winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from
a qualified specialist workshop.
Wheel/tire combination
355
Wheels and tires
Z
background
Information regarding technical data
i
The data stated here specifically refers to a
vehicle with standard equipment. Consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the
data for all vehicle variants and trim levels.
Vehicle electronics
Installing wireless devices and mobile
phones
G
WARNING
The electromagnetic radiation from two-way
radios can interfere with the vehicle electron-
ics if two-way radios are manipulated or ret-
rofitted incorrectly. This could jeopardize the
operating safety of the vehicle. There is a risk
of an accident.
You should have all work on electrical and
electronic components carried out at a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
If you incorrectly operate two-way radios in
the vehicle, the electromagnetic radiation
may interfere with the vehicle electronics, for
example if:
R
the two-way radio is not connected to an
exterior antenna
R
the exterior antenna is not correctly moun-
ted or is not low-reflection
This could jeopardize the operating safety of
the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Have the low-reflection exterior antenna
installed at a qualified specialist workshop.
Always connect two-way radios to the low-
reflection exterior antenna when operating in
the vehicle.
!
The operating permit may be invalidated if
the instructions for installation and use of
two-way radios are not observed.
In particular, the following conditions must be
complied with:
R
only approved wavebands may be used.
R
observe the maximum permissible output
in these wavebands.
R
only approved antenna positions may be
used.
Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation
may cause damage to your health and the health
of others. Using an exterior antenna takes into
account current scientific discussions relating
to the possible health hazards that may result
from electromagnetic fields.
Approved antenna positions
:
Front roof area
;
Rear roof area
=
Rear fender
On the rear fenders, it is recommended to posi-
tion the antenna on the side of the vehicle clos-
est to the center of the road.
Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609
(Road Vehicles – "EMC guidelines for installa-
tion of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting
equipment") when retrofitting two-way radios.
Observe the legal requirements for accessory
parts.
If your vehicle has installations for two-way radio
equipment, use the power supply or antenna
connections intended for use with the basic wir-
ing. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's Sup-
plement when installing.
Deviations with respect to frequency bands,
maximum transmission outputs or antenna
positions must be approved by Mercedes-Benz.
356
Vehicle electronics
Technical data
background
The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the
base of the antenna must not exceed the fol-
lowing values:
Frequency band Maximum
transmission
output
Short wave
3 - 54 MHz
100 W
4 m waveband
74 - 88 MHz
30 W
2 m waveband
144 - 174 MHz
50 W
Trunked radio system/
Tetra
380 - 460 MHz
10 W
70 cm waveband
400 - 460 MHz
35 W
Mobile communications
(2G/3G/4G)
10 W
The following can be used in the vehicle without
restrictions:
R
Two-way radios with a maximum transmission
output of up to 100 mW
R
Two-way radios with transmitter frequencies
in the 380 - 410 MHz waveband and a maxi-
mum transmission output of up to 2 W
(trunked radio/Tetra)
R
Mobile phones (2G/3G/4G)
There is no restriction for antenna positions on
the outside of the vehicle for the following fre-
quency bands:
R
Trunked radio system/Tetra
R
70 cm waveband
R
2G/3G/4G
Identification plates
Vehicle identification plate with vehi-
cle identification number (VIN)
X
Open the driver's door.
You will see vehicle identification plate :.
Example: vehicle identification plate (USA
only)
:
Paint code
;
VIN
Example: vehicle identification plate (Can-
ada only)
:
Paint code
;
VIN
Identification plates
357
Technical data
Z
background
i
The data shown on the vehicle identification
plate is used only as an example. This data is
different for every vehicle and can deviate
from the data shown here. You can find the
data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle
identification plate.
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
X
Slide the right-hand front seat to its rearmost
position.
X
Fold floor covering ; upwards.
Imprinted VIN : can be seen.
The VIN can also be found on the vehicle iden-
tification plate (Y page 357).
The VIN can also be found as a label on the lower
edge of the windshield (Y page 358).
Engine number
:
Engine number (stamped into the crank-
case)
;
Emission control information plate, includ-
ing the certification of both federal and Cali-
fornian emissions standards
=
VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)
Service products and filling capaci-
ties
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Service products may be poisonous and haz-
ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.
Comply with instructions on the use, storage
and disposal of service products on the labels
of the respective original containers. Always
store service products sealed in their original
containers. Always keep service products out
of the reach of children.
H
Environmental note
Dispose of service products in an environ-
mentally responsible manner.
Service products include the following:
R
Fuels
R
Lubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)
R
Coolant
R
Brake fluid
R
Windshield washer fluid
R
Climate control system refrigerant
Components and service products must match.
Only use products recommended by Mercedes-
Benz. Damage which is caused by the use of
products which have not been recommended is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or
goodwill gestures. Products approved by
Mercedes-Benz are listed in this Operator's
Manual in the appropriate section.
Information on products that have been tested
and approved can be obtained in the following
places:
R
from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
R
in the Mercedes-Benz Specification for Ser-
vice Products by entering the designation
-
on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com
-
on the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app
You can recognize service products approved by
Mercedes-Benz by the following inscription on
the containers:
R
MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
R
MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)
358
Service products and filling capacities
Technical data
background
Other designations or recommendations indi-
cate a level of quality or a specification in
accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB
229.5). They have not necessarily been
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Other identifications, for example:
R
0W-30
R
5W-30
R
5W-40
Fuel
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. Risk of fire and
explosion by improper handling of fuel.
You must avoid fire, open flames, smoking
and creating sparks. Switch off the ignition
before refueling and, if present, switch off the
auxiliary heating.
G
WARNING
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
There is a risk of injury.
You must make sure that fuel does not come
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel
vapors. Keep fuel away from children.
If you or others come into contact with fuel,
observe the following:
R
Wash away fuel from skin immediately
using soap and water.
R
If fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
clean water. Seek medical assistance with-
out delay.
R
If fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-
tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-
ing.
R
Immediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with fuel.
Tank capacity
Model Total capacity
All models
17.4 US gal
(66.0 l)
Model Of which
reserve
Mercedes-AMG GLC 63
4MATIC+ Coupe
Mercedes-AMG GLC 63
S 4MATIC+ Coupe
Approx.
2.6 US gal
(10.0 l)
All other models
Approx.
1.8 US gal (7.0 l)
Gasoline
Fuel grade
!
Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition
if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.
Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
result in damage to the fuel system and the
engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop
and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained
completely.
!
Only refuel using low-sulfur premium-grade
fuel with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI/
95 RON.
i
E10 fuel contains up to 10% ethanol by vol-
ume. Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You can
refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel.
!
Only use the fuel recommended. Operating
the vehicle with other fuels can lead to dam-
age to the fuel system, engine and exhaust
system.
!
Never refuel using:
R
Diesel
R
Gasoline with more than 10% ethanol by
volume, e.g. E15, E20, E85, E100
R
Gasoline with more than 3% methanol by
volume, e.g. M15, M30, M85, M100
R
Gasoline with metalliferous additives
Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recom-
mended for your vehicle.
Service products and filling capacities
359
Technical data
Z
background
!
To ensure the longevity and full perform-
ance of the engine, only premium-grade
unleaded gasoline may be used.
If premium-grade unleaded gasoline is
unavailable and you have to refuel with regu-
lar unleaded gasoline, observe the following
precautions:
R
Only fill the fuel tank to half full with regular
unleaded gasoline and add the rest as soon
as possible with premium-grade unleaded
gasoline.
R
Do not drive at the maximum design speed.
R
Avoid sudden acceleration and engine
speeds over 3000 rpm.
You will usually find information about the fuel
grade on the fuel pump. If you cannot find the
label on the fuel pump, ask the gas station staff.
i
For further information, consult a qualified
specialist workshop or visit
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
As a temporary measure, if the recommended
fuel is not available, you may also use regular
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of
87 AKI/91 RON. This may reduce engine per-
formance and increase fuel consumption. Avoid
driving at full throttle and sudden acceleration.
Never refuel using gasoline with a lower AKI.
Information on refueling (Y page 151).
Additives
!
Operating the engine with fuel additives
added later can lead to engine failure. Do not
mix fuel additives with fuel. This does not
include additives for the removal and preven-
tion of residue buildup. gasoline must only be
mixed with additives recommended by
Mercedes-Benz. Comply with the instructions
for use on the product label. More information
about recommended additives can be
obtained from any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use bran-
ded fuels that have additives.
The fuel quality available in some countries may
not be sufficient. Residue could build up in the
fuel injection system as a result. In such cases,
and in consultation with an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, the fuel may be mixed
with the cleaning additive recommended by
Mercedes-Benz. You must observe the notes
and mixing ratios specified on the container.
Engine oil
General notes
!
Do not use engine oil or an oil filter with
specifications deviating from those expressly
required for the prescribed service intervals.
Do not change the engine oil or oil filter in
order to set replacement intervals longer than
those prescribed. This could otherwise cause
damage to the engine or exhaust gas after-
treatment.
Follow the instructions on the service interval
display for changing the engine oil. This could
otherwise cause damage to the engine or
exhaust gas aftertreatment.
When handling engine oil, observe the important
safety notes on service products (Y page 358).
The engine oils are matched to the performance
of Mercedes-Benz engines and service intervals.
You should therefore only use engine oils and oil
filters that are approved for vehicles with main-
tenance systems.
Information on approved engine oils and oil fil-
ters can be obtained at the following places:
R
from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
R
in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Ser-
vice Products by entering the designation
-
on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com
-
on the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app
The table shows which engine oils have been
approved for your vehicle.
Model MB-Freigabe or
MB-Approval
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
229.5
All other models
229.5, 229.6
360
Service products and filling capacities
Technical data
background
Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils
for Mercedes-AMG vehicles.
i
MB approval is indicated on the oil contain-
ers.
Filling capacities
The following values refer to an oil change
including the oil filter.
Model Capacity
Mercedes-AMG
GLC 63 4MATIC+
Coupe
Mercedes-AMG
GLC 63 S 4MATIC+
Coupe
9.5 US qt (9.0 l)
All other models
6.9 US qt (6.5 l)
Additives
!
Do not use any additives in the engine oil.
This could damage the engine.
Brake fluid
G
WARNING
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture
from the air. This lowers the boiling point of
the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake
fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the
brake system when the brakes are applied
hard. This would impair braking efficiency.
There is a risk of an accident.
You should have the brake fluid renewed at
the specified intervals.
When handling brake fluid, observe the impor-
tant safety notes on service products
(Y page 358).
The brake fluid change intervals can be found in
the Maintenance Booklet.
Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-
Benz in accordance with MB-Freigabe or MB-
Approval 331.0.
Information on approved brake fluid can be
obtained in the following places:
R
from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
R
in the Mercedes-Benz Specification for Ser-
vice Products by entering the designation
-
on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com
-
on the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app
i
Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a
qualified specialist workshop in accordance
with the replacement intervals and the
replacement confirmed in the Maintenance
Booklet.
Coolant
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-
ponents in the engine compartment, it may
ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Let the engine cool down before you add anti-
freeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled
next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the
antifreeze from components before starting
the engine.
!
Only add coolant that has been premixed
with the desired antifreeze protection. You
could otherwise damage the engine.
You can find additional notes on the coolant in
the following places:
R
in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
Service Products, MB BeVo 310.1
-
on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com
-
on the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app
R
a qualified specialized workshop
!
Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even
in countries where high temperatures prevail.
Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not
sufficiently protected from corrosion and
overheating.
i
Have the coolant regularly replaced at a
qualified specialist workshop and the replace-
ment confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.
Service products and filling capacities
361
Technical data
Z
background
Comply with the important safety notes for ser-
vice products when handling coolant
(Y page 358).
The coolant is a mixture of water and anti-
freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the fol-
lowing tasks:
R
anti-corrosion protection
R
antifreeze protection
R
raising the boiling point
If the coolant has antifreeze protection down to
-35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the coolant
during operation is approximately 266 ‡
(130 †).
The antifreeze concentrate/corrosion inhibitor
concentration in the engine cooling system
should:
R
be at least 50%. This will protect the engine
cooling system against freezing down to
approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).
R
not exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down
to -49 ‡[-45 †]). Otherwise, heat will not be
dissipated as effectively
Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/
corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordance
with MB Specifications for Service Products
310.1.
i
When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled
with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate
antifreeze and anti-corrosion protection.
i
The coolant is checked with every mainte-
nance interval at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Filling capacities
Model Capacity
Mercedes-AMG
GLC 43 4MATIC
Coupe
12.2 US qt (11.5 l)
Mercedes-AMG
GLC 63 4MATIC+
Coupe
Mercedes-AMG
GLC 63 S 4MATIC+
Coupe
11.7 US qt (11.1 l)
All other models
12.7 US qt (12.0 l)
Windshield washer system
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Windshield washer concentrate is highly flam-
mable. If windshield washer concentrate gets
onto hot components of the engine or the
exhaust system, it can ignite. There is a risk of
fire and injury.
Make sure that windshield washer concen-
trate is not spilled in the vicinity of the filler
neck.
!
Only use washer fluid which is suitable for
lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB Win-
terFit. Unsuitable washer fluid may damage
the lamp lenses of the headlamps.
!
Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit
washer fluid should be mixed together. The
spray nozzles may otherwise become
blocked.
Do not use distilled or de-ionized water. Other-
wise, the level sensor may give a false reading.
When handling washer fluid, observe the impor-
tant safety notes on service products
(Y page 358).
At temperatures above freezing:
X
Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of
water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB
SummerFit.
Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.
At temperatures below freezing:
X
Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of
water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit.
For the correct mixing ratio refer to the infor-
mation on the antifreeze reservoir.
i
Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB Sum-
merFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all
year round.
Climate control system refrigerant
Important safety notes
The climate control system of your vehicle is fil-
led with refrigerant R‑134a.
362
Service products and filling capacities
Technical data
background
The instruction label regarding the refrigerant
type used can be found on the radiator cross
member.
!
Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAG oil
approved by Mercedes-Benz may be used.
The approved PAG oil may not be mixed with
any other PAG oil that is not approved for
R-134a refrigerant. Otherwise, the climate
control system may be damaged.
Service work, such as refilling with refrigerant or
replacing component parts, may only be carried
out by a qualified specialist workshop. All appli-
cable regulations, as well as SAE standard J639,
must be adhered to.
Always have work on the climate control system
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Refrigerant instruction label
Example: refrigerant instruction label
:
Symbols for hazard and service information
;
Refrigerant filling capacity
=
Applicable standards
?
PAG oil part number
A
GWP (Global Warming Potential) of the
refrigerant used
B
Type of refrigerant
Symbols : advise you about:
R
Possible dangers
R
Having service work carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop
Filling capacities
All models
Refrigerant
22.2 ± 0.4 oz
(630 ± 10 g)
PAG oil
2.8 oz
(80 g)
Vehicle data
General notes
Please note that for the specified vehicle data:
R
The heights specified may vary as a result of:
-
Tires
-
Load
-
Condition of the suspension
-
Optional equipment
R
Optional equipment reduces the maximum
payload
Observe the information relating to level con-
trol:
R
AIR BODY CONTROL (Y page 173)
Dimensions and weights
Vehicle data
363
Technical data
Z
background
Model
::
Height
when
opened
;;
Maximum
headroom
Mercedes-
AMG GLC 43
4MATIC Coupe
86.9 in
(2208 mm)
81.5 in
(2069 mm)
Mercedes-
AMG GLC 63
4MATIC+
Coupe
87.6 in
(2226 mm)
74.8 in
(1900 mm)
Mercedes-
AMG GLC 63 S
4MATIC+
Coupe
87.8 in
(2231 mm)
75.0 in
(1905 mm)
All other mod-
els
87.9 in
(2232 mm)
77.0 in
(1956 mm)
Mercedes-AMG
GLC 43 4MATIC
Coupe
Vehicle length
186.1 in (4727 mm)
Vehicle width
including outside
mirrors
82.5 in (2096 mm)
Vehicle height
62.5 in (1588 mm)
Wheelbase
113.1 in (2873 mm)
Turning radius
39.7 ft (12.10 m)
Maximum roof load
165 lb (75 kg)
Mercedes-AMG
GLC 63 4MATIC+
Coupe
Vehicle length
186.8 in (4745 mm)
Vehicle width
including outside
mirrors
82.5 in (2096 mm)
Vehicle height
62.2 in (1579 mm)
Wheelbase
113.1 in (2873 mm)
Turning radius
39.7 ft (12.10 m)
Maximum roof load
165 lb (75 kg)
Mercedes-AMG
GLC 63 S 4MATIC+
Coupe
Vehicle length
186.8 in (4745 mm)
Vehicle width
including outside
mirrors
82.5 in (2096 mm)
Vehicle height
62.4 in (1584 mm)
Wheelbase
113.1 in (2873 mm)
Turning radius
39.7 ft (12.10 m)
Maximum roof load
165 lb (75 kg)
All other models
Vehicle length
186.3 in (4732 mm)
Vehicle width
including outside
mirrors
82.5 in (2096 mm)
Vehicle height
63.9 in (1622 mm)
Wheelbase
113.1 in (2873 mm)
Turning radius
38.7 ft (11.80 m)
Maximum roof load
165 lb (75 kg)
Trailer tow hitch
Trailer loads
Permissible trailer load, braked (at a
minimum gradient-climbing capability
of 12% from a standstill)
Model
All models
3500 lb (1588 kg)
Maximum drawbar noseweight
!
Use a drawbar noseweight as close as pos-
sible to the maximum permissible nose-
weight. Do not use a noseweight of less than
50 kg, otherwise the trailer may come loose.
Note that the payload and the rear axle load
are reduced by the actual payload.
364
Trailer tow hitch
Technical data
background
The drawbar load reduces the permissible over-
all load and rear axle load.
The drawbar load acts from above onto the ball
head on the trailer tow hitch.
The drawbar noseweight is not included in the
trailer load.
Model Permissible nose-
weight
All models
280 lbs (127 kg)
The actual noseweight may not be higher than
the value which is given. The value can be found
on the trailer tow hitch or trailer identification
plates. The lowest weight applies.
The maximum permissible trailer drawbar nose-
weight is the maximum weight with which the
trailer drawbar can be loaded. The permissible
trailer drawbar noseweight is the limit for
Mercedes-Benz-approved trailer couplings.
Permissible rear axle load when tow-
ing a trailer
Model Permissible axle
load
GLC 300 4MATIC
2844 lbs (1290 kg)
Mercedes-AMG
GLC 43 4MATIC
Coupe
2822 lbs (1280 kg)
Mercedes-AMG
GLC 63 4MATIC+
Coupe/GLC 63 S
4MATIC+ Coupe
2932 lbs (1330 kg)
Ball position of the ball coupling
When the ball coupling is selected, the following
dimensions must not be exceeded:
:
7.0 in
;
0.625 in
=
1.25 in
Trailer tow hitch
365
Technical data
Z
background
366
background
367
background
368

Specifications

Mercedes-Benz 2019 AMG GLC 63 S Coupe Questions and Answers

Find answers or ask new question.
Questions and Answers

Related Products

Product Matco Tools MPT10044P image
Matco Tools MPT10044P COOLING SYSTEM ADAPTER - MERCEDES-BENZ, CHRYSLER
2025-11-23 2 docs
Product INFANS TQ10055BK image
INFANS TQ10055BK 12V Electric Kids Ride On Car, Licensed Mercedes Benz GLA45 Toy Car
2024-09-20 1 docs
Product COSTWAY TQ10010 image
COSTWAY TQ10010 6V Mercedes Benz Kids Ride on Car
2024-09-15 1 docs
Product COSTWAY TY328021 image
COSTWAY TY328021 12V Licensed Mercedes-Benz Kids Ride-On Car
2024-09-10 1 docs
Product KONNWEI KW460 image
KONNWEI KW460 Full System Diagnostic Scanner+ Obdii Eobd Scanner for Mercedes Benz
2023-09-30 1 docs
Product KONNWEI KW360 image
KONNWEI KW360 Mercedes Benz Full System Diagnostic Scanner+ Obdii Eobd Scanner For Most Of 12v Cars
2023-09-30 1 docs